A Handbook and Grammar of the Tagalog Language

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http: //books .google .com/I

PROPERTY OP THB

Midflm

AftT€S SCIENTIA VHRJTAS

A HANDBOOK AND GRAMMAR

OF THE

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

BY

First Lieut* W. K W. MacKINLAY,

First Casualty, U» S, Army,
Member American Oriental Society,

^

WASHINGTON:

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE.
1 one

\y.\n I>Ki'AKTMKNT,

I>(»(Mum'nt No. 2(10.

OFPMCK liK CHIEF OF ST.^FF

[Extnirt.]

ERRATA.

Page 29, ninth line from bottom. For ''(Sp.)'' road *'(Sp.;
Aztec.)"

Page 45, twenty-seventh line from bottom. For '"Lo?7gos

Page 62, eleventh line from bottom. For ""paiiaing ■ ' read ^^pa\

t r '.tu»i i»i<j«.v»f»j ■M-' •

[Extract.]

War Department,
Office of the Chief of Staff,

Wnfthingtorif August SO, 1906.

Sir: I have the honor to transmit herewith the manuscript of a work
entitled ''A Handbook and Grammar of the Tagalog Language,'' consist-
ing of 399 pages of typewriting, which I estimate will make about 200 pages
in print I would suggest that the work be bound in a substantial water-

Sroof cover, similar to that used for the latest edition of the "Soldier's
[andbook," and that the size be 8 by SJ inches, or approximately so.
I would also invite attention to the folders accompanying. ♦ ♦ * It
would be best to have the left-hand edge of the folders begin at the outside
margin of the printed page, so that when extended the student could read
the corresponiiing text tW the svnopsis at the same time and not be obliged
to turn the pages back and fortK.

« « * « « * *

Very respectfully,

W1LLIA.M E. W. MacKinlav,
FirAt Lieutenant^ First Cavalry.
Maj. William D. Beach,

Chief f Second {Military Information) Division^

Washington^ D. C.

3

163235

^h^^l^^Ari

PREFACE.

Shortly after the arrival of the author in tlio Philippines he, in common
with many others, felt the need of a work unon the Tagalog language in
English, and began to prepare this compendium, working upon it from
time to time as other military duties permitted, and, upon being ordered to
duty in Washington for the purpose of having better facilities for the com-
pletion of the work, has been enabled to bring it to such completion, under
the direction of Maj. W. D. Beach, Fifteenth Cavalry, chief of the Second
Division, General Staff.

As the Tagalog, belonging to a very different family of languages from
those with which Americans are familiar, has extremely dissimilar char-
acteristics from English or any Aryan tongue, the writer has devised a
type scheme, presented in the folder herewith, by which the salient points
of difference may be seen at a glance aii<l vividly retained in the memory,
thus enabling the student to use correct and intelligible Tagalog.

Supplemented by that constant practice necessary for the ear, it is believed
that the copious index to this work, together with the type scheme, selected
vocabularies, and plain nontechnical (as far as possible) explanations of
the grammatical structure of Tagalog, will prove to be of value to those
whose duty or inclination may lead them to consult this book. Such, at
least, is the hope of the writer.

The Tagalog language is easily pronounced, regular in its forms, and
although its structure is complex, yet when once grasped it is so plain that
it is not only clearly comprehended, but is a key to all the Malayan tongues,
especially to those of the Philippines. It is an idiom which builds up its
sentences and parts of speech from root.s by means of particles which
are prefixed, intixed, or suttixed to the roots. Several oi these parti(!lea
mav be combined with the same root, each having its share in the modifi-
cation of the inherent idea of the root.

Attention is also invited to the great use of the ''definite" in Tagalog,
the so-called "passive" of the Spanish writers upon this subject.

The index, which has been made very full and copious, should be con-
sulted, as every probable combination of particles has been noted, as well
as Tagalog roots and English words occurring in the work. For example,
every word preceded by the compound particle ip'ninfj has l)een listed, thus
enabling the root to be found at once, and so on in like manner.

The writer desires to express his appreciation for assistance received
from the military authorities both in the Philippine Islands and the United
States, from many of his brother officers, and from Profs. Friedrich Ilirth,
of Columbia; E. W. Hopkins, of Yale (secretary of the American Oriental
S<^>ciety) ; Paul Haupt and F. W. Blake, of Johns Hopkins; Otis T. Mason,
of the Smithsonian Institution, and the late John W. Huett, of Luther
College, Illinois. Valuable suggestions were also received from Messrs.
Pedro Serrano Laktaw, author of a Tagaloix-Spanish dictionary; Luis
Torres, and Vicente Albert, ail of Manila.

A HANDBOOK AND GRAMMAR OF THE TAGALOG

LANGUAGE.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF TAGALOG.
BOORS CONSULTED IN THE PBKPARATION OP THIS WORK.

It is scarcely necessary to mention that authorities ui>on Tagalo^ have
not been very plentiful, even with the great revival of interest m the
Malayo-Polynesian languages which has taken place within the last few
years. The number of works, old and new, large and small, upon this
subject, or bearing upon it, is very close U) forty, and many of these are
of little value or are obsolete. The number of reprints, however, brings
the aggregate up to about one hundred, but this has no bearing upon the
material available for study.

The isolation of the Philippine Islands under the Spanish n^gime also
contributed to- the neglect of the Philippine languages, and it seems almost
as if Spanish and foreign workers in this field studiounly avoided consulting
one another's researches, or else were ii^norant of them. In the review
of books WTitten upon Tagalosr, or containing notices of it, works written
to teach Spanish to the Tagalojre, novels — generally romances of the type
current in the middle ages in Europe — lives of saints, and miscellaneous
work.s, which make up what may be called the Tagalog literature, have
been omitted. The total numl)er of works in Tagalog mav be estimated
at from four to five hundred, and very few can be said to have a liteiiary
value.

The energy of those who are able to write Tagalog well has mainly been
absorbed in newspaper work, and no great work has an yet appeared in the
langnage.

It can scarcely be doubted that if some of the great works of the world
were translated into Tagalog and place<l where they would be accessible to
the common j)eople, who do not speak or read Spanish, and are almost too
old to learn English well, that the results would be of great and immediate
importance in the mental development of the race.

The honor of the first written treatise upon the Tagalog language prob-
ably belongs to the Friar Agustfn de Albunjueniue, who arrived at Manila
from Nueva Espafia (Mexico) in 1571, and after three years' residence in
Taal, Balayan, and other parts of Batangas, became Prior of Tondoin 1575,
holding the position until his death in 1580. This treatise has never been
publishetl, and the as.«ertion is opjwsed by the Franciscan order, which
claims the credit for the first work upon this subject. (See Vol. II, p.
563, ** Estadismo de las Islas Filipinas, de Zuiliga," edited by W. E. Retana,
Madrid, 1893; " La PoHticade Espafia en Filipinas,*' aflo VI, num. 134; and
the "Catiilogo Bio-Bibliognifico de los Religiosos Agustinos," P^tcz,
Manila, 1901.)

To the Franciscan friar Juan de Plasencia, or Portocarrero, who came
to the Philippines with the first mission of his order in 1577, is attributed
an ** Arte y Diccionario " of Tagalog in 1581, which has remained in manu-
script. (See ** Catalogo Biogrdfico de los Religiosos Franciscanos," Moya,
Manila, 1880.)

8 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

However, the most important point \b when the first printed work upon
the languai;^ was published, ana this was undoubtecily in the year 1610,
when an "Arte y ReglaA tie la Lenjfua Taj^ala," by Friar Francisco de San
Jose of the Dominican order, and who arriveil in the Philippines in 1595,
was printed in the **Partido de Batadn,'' probably by Tomds Pinpfn, a
Tagaloj?. The book is a quarto of 327 pieces of nee paper. One copy
exists in the Museo-Biblioteca de Ultramar at Madrid. Other editions of
this book were printed at Manila in 1752 and 1832. (See Retana' sedition
of Zilfliga, pp. 101-ia5. )

This work was followed in 1612 by the ** Vocabulario de la Lengua
Tagala,'' by Friar Pedro de San Buenaventura of the Francii»can order,
who was in chai^ of parishes in the present province of La I^ajruna, and
whose work was printed in Pila by Tomjis Pinpfn and Domingo Loag,
Tagalogs. The book is descritoi by Me<lina in his **La Imprenta en
Manila, '^ Santiago de Chile, 1896, and'a fai^simile of the title-i)age is given.

The Franciscan friar Juan de Oliver, who died in the Camarines in
1597, is said to have written a treatise upon the Tagalog, but his work
seems to have been limited to correcting and adding to the ** Arte y Dict'io-
nario" of Plasencia. Another of the same order, Francisco de San Anto-
nio, who was in charge of Baler from 1611 to 1616, and from that time
until his death in lo24 resided in the present Ijel Laguna, wrote an
•* Arte " and a Tagalog-Spanish vocabulary, which works existed in manu-
script in 1745, the author being known also as "Orejita." (Set^ Cat.
Biog. Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880; and the preface to the "Arte** of Totan^.)

The Augustinian friar Juan de Quiflones, who dieil in Manila in 1587,
also left a work upon the Tagalog, which is said by Beristafn to have been

grinted in Manila in 1581. (See Beristafn, Biblioteca 1 1 ispano- Americana
etentrional, Amecameca, Mexico, 1883-1887, 2d e<l.) The first edition
was printed in Mexico City in 1816. (See Vol. II, p. 464.) The matter
seems to be doubtful.

The Franciscan friar Ger6nimo Monte y Escamilla, who died in 1614,
is said to have left in manuscript an "Arte" and "Diccionario" in Taga-
log, but the work, if extant, is in the archives of his order. (See Cat.
Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880, p. 60. ) A similar manuiwript is said to have
been written by Francisc^o de San Antonio, of the same order, who came
to the Philippines in 1606 and died at Pila, La Laguna, in 1624. (See Id.,
p. 139. )

The third printed work upon Tagalog was the "Arte de Idioma Tagil-
log," by the Franciscan Agustfn de la Magdalena, who arrived in the
islands m 1665 and liveii in Tayabas and I^una for some years. Return-
ing to Mexico he there gave his manu8<Tipts to the press in 1679, and in
1684 returned to Manila, dying in Santa Cruz de La Laguna in 1689. (See
La Imprenta en Mi^xico, Medina, Sevilla, 1893, No. 1784; and Cat. Rel.
Fran., Manila, 1880, p. 292.)

The Dominican friar Teoaoro (Quiros) de la Madre de Dfos, who came
to the islands in 1627 and died in 1662, has been credited with an "Arte**
of Tagalog by some bibliographers of Philippine literature, but Medina
marks such a work as doubtful, as far as the printing is concerned.

The eighteenth century witnesseil a revival of interest in the language,
and in 1703 two works, both of which have been reprinted, were printed.

The first was the ^'Compendio de la Arte de la lengua Tagala,** printed
in Manila. This excellent treatise was reprinted at Sampaloc in 1787, and
in Manila proper in 1879. Both the early editions are now rare. The
author was the Augustinian friar Caspar de San Agustfn, who came to the
Philippines in 1668, and died in Manila in 1724. He is better known as
the author of the work "Conquistas de las Islap Filipinas,** Part I, Mad-
rid, 1698; Part II, Valladolid, 1890. The third edition, however, retains
many obsolete words.

The second work was a "Vocabulario,** or dictionary of the Tagalog,
written by the Franciscan friar Domingo de los Santos, who came to the
Philippines in 1665, and after administering parishes mainly in La laguna.

TAG A LOG LANGUAGE. 9

died in Maiavjay in 1695. His work was printed in the town of Tayabas
in 1703, and out two copies seem to be known. One is from the Marsden
collection, and is in the librarjr of Kine's College, London, and the other
in the archives of the Franciscan order. Some leaves of a manuscript
*^Arte" by the same author are also preserved in the archives. This dic-
tionarv was reprinted in Sampdloc m 1794 and in Manila in 1835. It is
now obsolete. (See Cat. Kel. Fran., Manila, 1880, p. 294; Biblioteca Fili-
pina, Retana, Madrid, 1898 [referred to hereafter as R.]; Nos. 77 and 148;
Id., Nos. 26 note, 66 note, 66 and 594; and Cat. Bio.-Bib. Rel. Agustinos,
Manila, 1901, pp. 13^-134.)

The next work upon this subject was the ''Arte y Reglas de la lengua
Tagala,'' by the Augustinian friar Tom^ Ortfz, printed at the convento
of Sampilloc in 1740. The author came to the Philippines in 1690, was a
missionary in China until about 1712, and died in Manila in 1742. (See
Medina, £a Imprenta en Manila and Cat. Rel. Agustinos, p. 169. )

In 1742 the Franciscan friar Melchor Oyanguren de Santa In^, who
had lived in the Philippines, mainly at Los Baflos and Sariaya, from 1717
to 1736, gave a work to the press in Mexico entitled "Tagalysmo." This
interesting book, which has never been reprinted, compares with Tagalog
the Mandarin dialect of Chinese, Hebrew, and Greek, the Tagalog being
reduced as far as possible to a Latin basis. (R., 39. )

In 1745 the work of the Franciscan Sebastidn de Totan^s was printed
at Sampdloc. This valuable treatise, entitled ''Arte de la lengua Tagala v
Manual Tagalog," was reprinted at Sampdloc in 1796, at Manila in 1850,
and in Binondo ( Manila) in 1865. (R., 42, 79, 202, and 329. ) The author
came to the Philippines in 1717 and remained twenty-nine years in the
islands. During his residence at Lilio and Pagsanhan, La Laguna, from
1732 to 1738, he wrote the foregoing book. He died in Madrid in 1748,
having left the Philippines in 1746. (Cat. Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880, pp.
390-391.)

In 1754 the great " Vocabulario," or dictionary, of the Ta^og, explained
in Spanish, was printed at Manila by the Jesuits. The mam authors were
Juan de Noceda, 8. J., and Pedro de San Lucar, S. J. A second edition,
with a Spanish-TagalcH^ appendix, was printed in Valladolid in 1832, which
is now very rare, nearly all copies having been lost by shipwreck en route
to the islands. There is a copy in the Library of Congress. Another
edition, ^ith additions, was pnnted by the Augustinian order at Manila
in 1860. This work, although many words are obsolete, is the standard
on Tagalog as yet It is also becoming rare. (R., 48, 136, and 268. )

The next work containing a notice of Tagalog is in English. In Johann
Reinhold Forster's "Observations made during a Voyage round the
World'* (London, 1778; German translation by his son, Georg Forster,
Berlin, 1783) a list of 47 English words is given, with their equivalents in
Tagalog, Pampango, Malay, and several Polynesian dialects. From some
rare words the Tagalog would appear to have been taken from Noceda
and San Lucar. Forster was born in Germany in 1729, a descendant of
the Forester family of Scotland, and accompanied Captain Cook in his
second voyage to tHe South Sea (1772-1775). After his return he became
professor at Halle, Grermany, where he died in 1798. His book is espe-
cially valuable concerning the Polynesian races and islands.

A few years later the German naturalist Peter Simon Pallas (born 1741,
died 1811), who had become professor of natural history in the Imperial
Academy of Sciences at St. Petersbui^ in 1768, published there in 1787-
1789 the work known as the " Vocabularium Catharinse," from its patron-
ess, Catharine II. Written in Russian, it gives the corresponding word
for nearly 200 terms in 200 languages. In this list Pampango is No. 186
and TagaW No. 187. The source is not given, but that for the Tagalog is
evidently the same as that of Forster. The Latin equivalent for the Rus-
sian words is given in the preface. The full title of the work is " Linguarum
totius Orbis Vocabularia comparativa.'' It is in two quarto volumes.

10 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

At the same time the Spanish author Lorenzo Her\'a8 y Panduro (bom
1736, died 1809), of the Society of Jesus, published two works bearing
upon Tagalog to a slight extent, out of im]>ortance as inspiring? other work
upon the same line. The first was his "Aritm^tica," published in Cesena,
Itoly, in 1785, and the second, his ** Vocabolario Poliglotto," publisheii at
the same place in 1787, l)oth in Italian. In the latter he gives specimens
of the language of 1593, of 1604, and his own time. The S{)anish edition,
printed at Madrid in two volumes in 1801, has his observations upon
Taffalog in the second volume.

In 1803 Prof. Franz Carl Alter, librarian of the Imperial and Royal
University of Vienna, published a work of 60 i)ages ui)on the Tacalog,
with the title **Ueber die tagalische Sprache." This work seems T)a«ed
upon a manuscript vocabulary from the library of Count Wrbna at Vienna,
supplemented by wonls from Pallas and the Workw of the Abb^ Hervas.
The latter seems to have corresponded with Alter, who H|)eaks of Hervas
in the preface to his book, and also of Miss Knight, of England, probably
a sister of Thomas Payne Knight, the numismatist, as l)eing intereste^l in
his researches.

A work which is yet of value to the student is that of Johann Christoph
Adelung (bom in Germany in 1731, died in Dresden, Saxony, 1806),
entitled "Mithridates, oder Allgemeine Sprachenkimde." In the first
volume, which appeared at Berlin in 1806, on pages 127 and 128, two ver-
sions of the Lonl s Prayer are given — one of 1593 and the other of current
form — with an explanation of the granmiatic^l forms as deduced from the
words. The author, who gives specimens from over 500 languages, is best
rememl)ered for his great work in Geraian philology, and at the time of
his death was principal librarian of the Elector of Saxony, at Dresden

Adriano Balln (born in Venice in 1782, dieil there 1848) published an
"Atlas Ethnographique du (llobe" at Paris in 1826. (See Table No. 364
an<l pp. 246 to 249, for remarks upon Tagalog. )

The catalogue of William Marsden, the eminent orientalist (born in
England in 1754, die<l there 1836), published at London in 1827, contains
mention of some manuscript "Artes'* of Tagalog not known to have V)een
printetl. One is an "Arte" bv a Dominican friar, dated 1736, and the
other a ** Vocrabulario'* by the Dominican Miguel Kuiz, dated 1580. This,
however, must be an error, as the Dominicans did not arrive in the Phil-
ippines until 1587. Miguel Ruiz was one of their early friars, but little
seems to have been recorded about him. In Marsden's Miscellaneous
Works (London, 1834), page 94, are also some observations upon Tagalog.

To the genius of the German author Wilhelm von Humboldt the world
is indel)tecl for his magnificent work upon the Malayo- Polynesian languages,
which was published by the Royal Acadeniv of Sciences at Berlin, in three
volumes, in 1838, under the title "Ueber die Kawi-Sprache auf der Insel
Java." His dissertation upon the Tagalog verbal system and formations
in Volume II, pages 347 to 396, clearly establishes the fact that the Tagalog
and allie<l tongues of the Philippines have preserved the verbal modifying
particles to a greater extent than any other members of this great linguistic
mmily,and on page 288 of the same volume he goes so far a« to say that at
first view the student of Tagalog seems to have come into a wholly new
system. This noted philolc^st, who was born in 1767 and died in 1835,
has evidently taken the grea&r part of his material upon the Tagalog from
the s€»cond (1796) edition of Totan^, and hence lacked the advantage of
having been upon the ground.

The Aupustinian friar Manuel Buzeta, better known as the author of the
"Geographical Dictionary*' or Gazetteer of the Philippines (in cooj)eration
with Bravo), pul>lished a Tagalog grammar at Madrid in 1850. (R., 199.)
The author, whose name is spelled *'Buceta" in the (.'at. Rel. Agustinos,
came to the Philippines in 1827, where he was in charge of the church at
Guiguinto in 1832 and of Malate in 1848. He returned to Spain in 1849,
and resided at Madrid until 1854, in which year he left the order and
returned to secular life.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 11

The work of Sinibaldo <le Mas upon the iplands, published at Madrid in
two volumes in 1843, contains a short comparative vocabulary of Tagalog,
Visayan, Ilocano, Ibana^ (Cagayan), and Malay. (K., 180.)

In 1854 the **Tagalog-8pani8h Dictionary" of Rosalio Serrano, a Tagalog
of Bulacan Province, was printed at Manila, and f*ecoud and third editions
have appeared, the third being printed in liinondo (Manila) in 18()9. A
8panish-Tagalog dictionary by the same author was printed in Manila in
1872. (R., 227,376,426.)

In 1855 Carlos Cuarteron, a priest who had also l>een a pilot in the
Southern Islands, published a work at Rome entitled " Sp^gazione e tra-
duzione," at the end of which there is a vocabulary of Italian, Malay,
Tagalog, and Joloano. ( R. , 229. )

fn 1872 the grammar of Joaquin de Coria ((lil y Montes de Santo
Domingo) was published at Madrid, where the author had accepted tlie
position of professor of Tagalog in the Central University. The work
shows the careful study of the author, who came to the islands in 1831
and resided in the Taj^alog regiim until his return to Spain in 1866. On
account of his accepting the chair of Tagalog against the wish of the prel-
ate of his order, he wa»> dropped from its rolls; but, unfortunately, the plan
of Minister Moret did not succeed, and the position to which he was
electe<l never became active. The author was b )rn in 1815 and entered
the Franciscan Order in 1830. (R., 411; also Cat. Hiog. Rel. Fran., p. 656. )

The same year, 1872, appeared the popular Spanish-Tagalog "Lessons
upon the Grammar" of Bishop Jose Hevia Camponianes, bishop of Niieva
Segovia (Vigan). A second edition ap|)eared in 1877, the third in 1S83,
the fourth in 1888, and the sixth in 1901. All the editions were printed
at Manila and are alike, no corrections or additions having been made.
(R., 1133.)

Here should be mentioned the interesting work of V. M. de Abel la, the
"Vade-mecum Filipino," a manual of Spanish-Tajralog dialogues. It con-
tains a vo(!abularv of ^lanila local words and phrases. The first edition
was published in*1868 (T. II. Pardo de Tavera, Bib. Fil., No. 9), and other
editions were published in 1869 and 1871, and the ninth had l)een readied
in 1873. (R., 2524.) All editions were printed in Manila.

The most practiciil of all Tagalog-Spanish grammars ap])eared in ^lanila
in 1878, the work of the Recoleto friar Toribio Minguella. Interlinear
translations, simplicity of arrangement, and clearness of explanation make
this little book of great value, an<l many of its sugu:estions and ideas have
been very useful in the preparation of this present work.

In 1880 Prof. II. Kern, a Javan-born Mnllander, made a valuable con-
tribution to philology by his list of words in Tagalog which are derived
from the Sanskrit. This article, which appeared in the "Bijdragen tot
deTaal-, Land- en Volkenkunde van Nedcrland-lndif" at The Hague, volg.
(series) 4, deel (volume) 4, pages 5.'15 to 564, shows the large numl)er of
such words and their importance in expressing some most necessary ideas
of civilization. This field was further explored by T. II. I*ardo de Tavera,
who published a pamphlet of 55 pagts at Paris in 1SS7, in which the San-
skrit words which have passed into Painpango are also not(?d. (R., 1066. )
Kern remarks in his article that the scarcity of Sanskrit words in the dia-
lects of northern Celebes indicates tliat the Tagalcg received this element
directly from Cambodia and Sumatra, and not })y way of Celebes. This is
an interesting suggestion, which might lead to something if studied ufmn.
Dr. F. R. Blake, teacher of Tagalog and Visayan at Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore, Md., also read an article on ''Sanskrit loan-words in
Tagalog" at the April, 190.S, meeting of the American Oriental Society, at
Baltimore, Md. Doctor Blake has al.<o written articles upon "Analogies
between Semitic and Tagalog" and the "Differences between Tagalog and
Bisayan."

In 1882 appeared the second edition of a Spanish-Tairal«»g and Pampango
vocabulary oy E. Fernandez, i)rinte<l at Manila. This was followed in

12 TAQALOO LANGUAGE.

1883 by his Tagaloff-Spanish vocabulary, both of which are very usefal
books. (P. T., 1061, and R., 756. )

The valuable "rapport" of Dr. Joseph Montano, Paris, 1886, to the
French minister of puolie instruction, contains several Philippine vocabu-
laries, some of them of little known languages, and also quite an analysis
of the Tagalog. (R. , 885. )

Under the pseudonym of Julius Miles, an unknown author published a
small Tagalog-Spanish grammar and phrase book at Barcelona, Spain, in
1887. (R., 1054J

In 1889 Friar Toribio Minguella, Recoleto, published a work in Madrid
upon the unity of the human race as proved oy philology. In this w^ork
he makes some comparisons between Semitic and Tagalog.

The same year Dr. Pardo de Tavera published his pamphlet upon the
origin of the names of the Tagalog numerals, at Manila. W. G. Seiple, of
Johns Hopkins University, also published an article upon the Tagalog
numerals m the Johns Hopkins University Circular, No. 163, June, 19(^,
Baltimore, Md.

In 1889 also appeared the "Spanish-Tagalog Dictionary " of Pedro Serrano
Laktaw, son of Kosalio Serrano, and in 1903 director of the Spanish paper,
£1 Pueblo, of Manila. It is understood that the author is now working
upon a Tagalog- English dictionary. (R., 1260. j

In 18^0 a most valuable little work was published in Manila, under the
title *'Colecci6n de Refranes, Frases y Modismos Ta^alos,'' translated and
explained in Spanish by the Franciscan Friars Gregono Martfn and Mariano
Martfnez Cuaarado, and edited by the Friar Miguel Lucio y Bustamente.
The first came to the Philippines in 1874, the second in 1875, and the
editor in 1860. All administered parishes mainly in i^ Laguna Province,
Friar Martfnez also serving for many years at Binaiigonan de Lampon, on
the Pacific. This collection comprises 879 proverbs, phrases, and idiomatic
expressions as used in the vicinity of Tanay and Pililla, where the authors
resided, and embraces but a part of the wealth of the language in this
regard. Many of these expressions, marked '*T. P." (Tagalog proverbs)
have been ouoted in the explanation of the language. (R., 1318. )

In 1893 Dr. Ferd. Blumentritt, of Leitmeritz, Bohemia, published a
translation of a sketch of Tagalog orthography by Doctor Rizal, at The
Hs^e, under the title **Die Transcription des Tagalog," von Dr. Jos^ Rizal.

The advent of the United States forces at Manila and the occupation of
the Tagalog region led to several small uamphlets being issued with the
English, Spanish, and Tagalog in parallel columns. One of these was
written by Capt. John Bordman, jr.. Twenty-sixth U. S. Volunteer
Infantry.

In 1902 Constantino Lendoyro, a Spanish gentleman of more than
twenty years' residence in the Philippines, published his work, entitled
**The Tagalog Language," at Manila. It is a very good book, but is full
of typographical errors, and in many places the English is not idiomatic.
The author deserves much credit for his labor, and a corrected edition
would be of great value. At any rate, he is entitled to commendation for
having written, in a foreign language, a work upon the Tagalog which
shows his thorough knowledge of the Philippine tongue.

In 1902 R. Brandstetter issued a work upon the Tagalog and Malagasy
languages at Lucerne, which is of interest as showing the resemblance
between these two languages spoken at such distant points.

In 1903 the "English-Tagalcjg Pocket Dictionary," of P. D. Neilson, was
published at Manila, and, while merely giving the Tagalog equivalent for
the English word, is of considerable value. The Tagalog- English part has
also been published.

Mention should also be made of ** Crawfurd's Grammar of the Malay Lan-
guage," which has also a dictionary attached, London, 1852. Many valu-
able comparisons are made between Tagalog and other Malayan languages.

For a grammatical discussion of authority upon the Malayan languages

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 18

the student is referred to the •*Grundris8 der Sprachwissenschaft," of F.
Miiller, II. Band, II. Abtheilung, pages 87-1 eO (Vienna, 1887).

THE TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

The Tagalog is the most important of the many tongues and dialects of
the Philippines, which seem to number well over threescore, ^ on account
of its bemg the most widely understood, the most euphonious, and the
most developed by contact with foreign idioms. It thus occupies a similar
position to tnat held by Malay farther to the south, and to English in the
world at \&Tf^. Spoken hy over a million and a half of the most energetic
race in the islands, occupying the city of Manila, eight provinces surround-
ing the metropolis, and a number of outlying islands and districts beyond
these limits, it is also genendly understood by many far beyond its own
territory, especially in seaport towns throughout the archipelago.

The language seems to be divided into a northern and a southern dia-
lect, the former being spoken in Bulacan, Bataan, Nueva Ecija, Rizal, and
Tarlac, and the latter occupying La Laguna, Batangas, Cavite, Tayabas,
Marinduque, the coast of Mmdoro, and part of Ambos Camarines. Each
of these dialects is more or less split up, each town almost havins: local
mannerisms by which the people of one neighborhood easily dintinffuish
a stranger. Yet the region above described is clearly the territory of one
and the same language, which is different and distmguishable from the
Pampangan language on the north and the Bicol on the south by the test
of intelligibility.

Philologically, Tagalog belong to the Malayan branch of the great
Malay o-Polynesian lingmstic family, which extends from Hawaii to Mada-
rascar and from Formosa to Easter Island west of Chile, including New
Zealand, Tonga, and Samoa, as well as Borneo, Celebes, Java, Sumatra,
the Malay Peninsula, and the Philippines, from east to west, a distance of
180°, or half the circumference of the earth.

Considering the rudimentary state of culture existing up to compara-
tively recent times of the majority of the peoples speakmg the languages
of this family, its unity is remarkable, and a thorough knowledge of one
tongue is found to be of great utility in the acquirement of any other of the
great group, especially in the same branch.

Tagalog, together with other civilized tongues of the Philippines, such
as Visayan, Pampangan, Ilocano and Bicol, has preserved the verbal system
better than any other, and the basis for the comparative study of the
family must be taken from the Philippine tongues and not from the more
cultivated Malay, Kawi, or modem Javanese, all three of which have been
profoundly affected by Sanskrit and to a lesser degree by Arabic, some-
thing as English has been affected by Latin and French elements.

The number of roots or primitive-idea words in Tagalog seems to be
about 17,000, there being 16,842 words in the Noceda and Sanlucar dic-
tionary of 1832, according to Crawfurd, the distinguished Malay scholar.
(** Malay Grammar," p. cxiv.) Of these some 284 are derived from the
Sanskrit, and are evidently borrowed through the Malay. Many of these
are names for things unknown to the primitive Malayan peoples, but
others are abstracts and various words, some of which would seem to have
supplanted a primitive Malayan word. Thus in many cases American and
Tagalog use words in their own languages which are from the same remote
source in India, and coming around the earth east and west meet again
in the Philippines. Such a word is ood, **foot," from the Sanskrit jj^a^
which has descended into English * * foot * * and Spanish * * pie. ' ' The origin
of these words is marked after each in the handbook. The names of me
chief workers in this field have been given in the list of books consulted.

dThc Philippine Bureau of EthDology, however, has Riven out an a re(>nlt of it« re-
searches, that the number of distinct tonguas is not over 15 or 16, the larger number being
made up by counting very similar dialects.

The Japanese language seems to have furnished no words to the Taga-
log, although many Japanese came to the islands during the seventeenth
century, owing to the exjmlsion of Japanese converts to Catholicism, who
found a refuge in Manila and the adjoining j)rovinces, njainly in Pani-
panga, where it is said many of them settled around Macid)el^. It is
thought that some Japanese expressions still exist in the Macabebe dialect
of the Pami)angan language.

Notwithstanding a comparatively close contact with the Chinese for
several centuries, and certainly antedating tlje Spanish con(|uest by many
hundred years, very few words seem to have come into Tagalog from any
of the numerous dialects of that Empire. The Chinese element in Tagalog
seems limited to a few commercial terms, some household im])iemcnts,
and a few miscellaneous terms, some of which are confined in their use to
Sangley or Chinese-Mestizo families. These words are noted wherever
they occur in the handbook. Professor liirth, the Chinese scholar, thinks
that the first notices of the IMiilippines are to be found in the work of
Chao Ju-kua, collector of custcuns of Cinian-ch<»u. a city in Fo-Kien Prov-
ince, between 1210 and 1240. in this work he speaks of the islands of
Po-ni (Borneo), Ma-i (Mindoro? or Panay?), and of the Pi-Sho-y6 of
Taiwan (Formosa). This latter name sounds something like " Bisaya,"
the native name for Visa\a. The book speaks also of the San-sii, or
" Three Islands." Book ;S25 of the '* History of the Ming Dynasty (1368-
1()43) of Cliina," asabstracted by(iroeneveldt, s[)eaksof the Kings (Sultans)
of Sulu as attacking Puni ( l>orneo) in 18<iS. and of the King of Sulu, I^aduka
(Javanese " Lord '') I'ahala as dying while on a visit to the Fmperorat Te
Chou on tlu; (irand Canal (Shantung Province). The Kmi)eror then
recognized his eldest sou, Tumohan, as Sultan of Sulu, in 1417. The
brother of l*ahala, who was named Suli, made a visit to China in 1421,
but a few years after this no more was heard from this Kingikjm. Fnun
this and other extracts it would seem tliat tlu; Chinese knew of tlie Moham-
mcilan settlements at Manila and Tondo j»rioi" to the arrival of the S]>an-
iards, and must have carried on a lucrative trade with them, otherwise the
pirate Li-Ma-hong would not have made such a desperate attempt to take
the city s(> soon after its foundation in loTl.

The Arabic words in Tagalog, which are hardly more than a dozen in
number, evidently came in with the Mohamme<lan religion, an<l upon the
extinction of that faith around the mouth of the 1 Vig, all but a few words
fell into disuse. ^Mohammedanism could have hardly become established
in tln^ Tagalog region before 14o() to 151)0, as it came very slowly from India
or Arabia to Java, and thence bv wav of Borne(» and Sulu to the Bay of
Manila and the Pasig Valley. It had ajtparently not extended to the
inland jirovinces, its farthest northern jioint api»caring to have been Hago-
noy. Arabic W(»rds which were adopted by the Spanish an<l thus brought
into Tagalog are not inchuled in the above remarks.

Spanish, as a matter of course, has contributed a great nund)er of words
to Tagalog. many of which have In^en thoroughly naturalized. They are
mainly religious, governmental, social, legal, and abstract terms, including
also terms for foreign articles and luxuries. Some names for Mexican
articles are not Spanish but Nahuatl or Aztec, owing to the intimate con-
nection between Mexico and the Philippines for more than two centuries,
and there are even some Arawak words from the tongue of Cuba, Haiti,
an<l Puerto Kico among thoe.

English has as yet given but few words to Tagalog. Of these the news-
pai)ers use four, which seem to have no exact native or Spanish equiva-
lents, viz: "Self-govermnent," "high life," "sport," and *M)eslH)l," or
basel)all. The latter has been verbalized and taken into the language
bodily, while the <»thers are still (piotcd.

The construction of Tagalog does not seem to have l>een influenced by
any of the foregoing, but to have retained its Malayan structure.

TAOALOG LANGUAGE. 15

THE PRONUNCIATION OF TAGALOG.

The most succinct statement upon the above subject is that given by
Rev. VV. A. Goodell, of the Methociist mission in the Philippines, as printed
in 8tuntz*s **The Philippines and the Far East," page 483:

** II. The pronunciation of Tagalog is very simple, and there are no sounds
to which the American vocal organs are not accustomed. The letter (sound)
most difficult to get is *rig,* which has exactly the sound which it has in
the middle of the word 'ringing,' but which becomes difficult when at the
beginning of a word, as in the word(s) 'n^uni't,' one of the words (terms)
translating the conjunction * but,' and which often occurs at the beginning
of a sentence.

"But although so simple in word pronunciation, Tagalog is extremely
difficult in utterance, for one reason because of the great number of long
words (compounds) it contains, and for another and more important still,
because of the rhythmic movement of the language, a quality that can not
be described and a characteristic for which no rules whatever can be given,
but which is entirely as much a part of the Tagalog language as are its
words themselves."

The "rhythmic movement" spoken of by the Rev. Mr. Goodell, who is
an excellent speaker of Tagalog, is what may ]>e called the "national
accent," and, like the tones of Chinese and other allied tongues, can only
be acquired by long practice.

The vowels are really but three in number, although a, e, i, o, and u,
with their Sj^anish values, are printed (ah, a, e, o, oo). Of thehe "e" and
"i" are habitually confused, and "e" can hardly be said to exist in pure
Tagalog. "O" and "u" are also confUv«ed, the tt'ndency being t<) drop
*' o " and substitute "u" in manv word.s, a process which hasalready taken
effect in Pampangan. The diphthongj^ are ao (ow), au (aw), less nasal
than ao, and ua (wa); but there are no triphthongs, as each vowel in such
combinations preserves its own somid.

The native consonants, pronounced (except lig) as in English, are B, C
(K ), D, G (hard), H, L, M, N, N(i, P, R, S, and T. The sound of F does not
exist in Tagalog, and is replaced by P. V is also a foreijzn sound merging
with B to the Tagalog ear. Z is pronounced like 8, and is found only in
Spanish words. The same is true of X, which is pronounced at the begin-
ning of a word as H. W is beginning to be used in native papers as a semi-
vowel in place of initial ua (wa) and in ao (aw). K is also used by many
in place of hard C and Q. Y is used as a part of the diphthong ay (ai),
ana also as an initial consonant.

The pronunciation and construction of the language will be more clearly
understood by carefully studying the two versions of the Dominical Oration,
or Lord's Prayer, given below with interlinear pronunciation and trans-
lation.

[From the Vulgate.]

Tag. Amd namin sungmasalaiigit ka; sambahfn

Pro. Ah-mdh tidhmeen soovg-mah-i^ah-UULng'eet kah ; sahrH-hah-hehi
Eng. Father our(of us) art in heaven thou; adored (worshiped)

Tag. ang ngalan mo; mapasaamin ang kaharian

Pro. ahng f^6[h-lahn moh; mah-pali-mh-Ah-mevn (ihrig kah-hah-rel-ahn

Eng. the name of thee; come to us the kingdom

Tag. mo; Bundin ang loob mo; dito ea lupa para
Pro. moh; Bodndeen ahng l6h-ohe moh; dee-toh mh lo6-pah pdh-rah
Eng. of thee; (be) done the will of thee; here upon earth according

Tag. naDg sa laiigit; bigyan mo kamf ligayon nang
Pro. nahng tdh lAhng-eet; heeg-t/dhn moh kah-met ngeye-dhn nahrig
Eng. to (that) in heaven; (be) given of thee we (us) now of the

16 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Tag. aming kanin sa arao-arao at patawiirin mo

Pro. dh-mteng kah-neen mh dh-rov-dh-row nht pah-tou-dh-reen moh
Eng. our food upon every day and (be) pardoned of thee

Tag. kamf nang aming maiigii litang, para nang

Pro. kah-mee nahng dh-meetuj mahiTg-dh od-tahng, pdh-rali nnhng

Eng. we (uh) of the our (sign of plurality) debts, according as

Tag. pagpatawad nainin sa niaiigagkakautang sa aniin;

Pro. pahg-pa-tou'-dd ndh-meen mh mahioj-nhg-hih-kah-od-tahngsafi dh-meen;
p]ng. (are) forgiven of us to those indebted to us;

Tag. at houag mo kaming ipahinti'ilot sa tuks6,

Pro. aid hoO'dhg moh kdh-mirug ee-imft-heeu-too-htlit suh took-soh^
Eng. and do not of thee (let) us (be) j>erniitted into temptation,

Tag. at iadya mo kamf sa dilang ma.samd.

Pro. nht ee-dydh moh kah-mee saJi dtHahng mah-sah-mdh.

Eng. but (be) delivered of thee we (us) from all evil.

The version from the translation of the American Bible Society, follow-
ing the authorized, or King James, version, is as follows:

Tag. Ama namin nanasalan^rit ka; sambahfn

Pro. Ah-mdh itdh-metni nah-mdi-sdh-ldhiTij-eet kah; aohm-buh-heln

Eng. Father our( of us) (art) in heaven thou; hallowed (worshiped)

Tag. ang paiigalan mo: dumating ang kaharian

Pro. nhiig pahiTg-dhl-ahn moh: doo-mdh-teeng ohiig kah-hnh-ret-ahn

Eng. the name of thee: to arrive the kingdom

Tag. mo. (iawfn ang iyong kalooban, kung paano sa

Pro. moh. (iout'rn nhng (cydng ktdi-loh-6-hnhn, koong jxth-dh-no }<ah

Eng. of thee. (Be) done the thy will if as in

Tag. liin^git, ay gayon din naman sa lui>a. Ibigity mo

Pro. hihi?f/-t'et, eye. guy-on dfot nnh-mdhn soh lod-p<ih. Eehig-hje woh
Eng. heaven, l)e thus truly also in earth. (J^e) given of thee

Tag. sa am in ligayon ang aming kanin sa arao-arao.

Pro. s<di dh-meen wjrip'-oJm aJnig dft-meaig kdh-tieai suh dfi-rotr-dJi-rotv.

Eng. to us now (this day) the our food on everyday.

Tag. At ipatawad mo sa amin ang aming maiiga

Pro. Aht ee-p<(h-ton'-dhd moh sah dh-meen (dmg dh-meeng utahiTg-dh
Eng. And (be) pardoned of thee to us the our (sign of plur. )

Tag. I'ltang, gaya naman namin na nagpatauad sa

Pro. od-tttftng, gngnh mtli-mdJot ndh-meen mdi nahg-imh-toir-dhd soh
Eng. debt(s), as also by us now (are) forgiven (to)

Tag. maiiga may I'ltang sa amin. At houag

Pro. m(ihiT'/-dh mg ot't-t<tfing sah dfi-meen. Aht hoo-dhg

Eng. (s. nf plur.) those-having debts against us. And do not

Tag. mo kaming <lalhiri sa tukso, kungdi

JVo. imdi k(i}t-mehig (hihl-hern s«ih took-i<dh, koong-dee

Eng. of thee (let) us (l>e) brought into temptation, but

Tag. iligtas mo kamf sa masama: Sapagka't

Pro. ce-lig-tdss inoh kah-mee salt mdJi-mh-mdh: Sah-pdhg-kahH

Eng. (be) delivered ))y thee us from evil: For (because)

Tag. iyo ang kaharian at ang kapangyarihan at

Pro. eegdii nhng knh-h(direr-ahn aht nhng kah-paJmg-yahre&hahn aht
Eng. thine the kingdom and the power and

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 17

Tag. ang kaloualhatian, magpakailan man.

Pro. ahng kah-lofHihl-hah-teS-ahnf mcuig-pahcdh-eeUilm malm.
Eng. the glory, ever (for ever) also

Tag. SiyA nana.
Pro. Seeyah ndw-ah.
Eng. Amen.

The same prayer may be taken to show the changes in the language
since it wa^n first reduced to Roman letters by the missi(marie8.

From the Doctrina Cristiana of 1593, reprinted bv Hervas in "Saggio
Prattico," p. 12t). Also found in Adelung's '' Mithridates," Vol. I, p. 609.

"vlmd namin iiusalafigH riij ipammixt mo ting iigula mo; moui (return) na
amin (tug fMigiahan rtup, ipasonor (be obeyed) mo nng loob mo, dito sa hipa
paran sa IdugH. liig-ian mo caml ligaion miug mm in cacanin jtara uang sa
i'lrao; at pncaaalin mo ang amin rnsalnmni (sins), yagong (as) ninanalan
fmhala (equally) namin sa l6oh ang rasa man (evils) nang macasasit (of exist-
ence) sa amin; honag mo earning {anan nang (Ji cayni) matalo nang tocs6;
datapouaU (but) yadia (be delivered) mo rami sa dilan masannl.^^

It may \ye said that this last version sliows a comparative want of familiar-
ity with the language, except as niight be spoken by servants, etc., and it
has doubtless suffered by reprinting, the proof having to be read by those
ignorant of the language, and hence unable to detect errors except by copy.

An example of the folklore stories is given in the "Tale of the Unlucky
Rat" from the examples of Malayan languages, jmblished atBatavia, Java,
in 1868, by J. (I. F. Riedel, the Dutch philologist. It is as follows:

Tag. Ngay6n din isang dag:\ nagwika sa kaniyil

Pro. Ngeye.'6n deen eesdhng dahgd itahgwetka salt kahncei^d

Eng. Now indeed (one time) a (one) rat said to himself

Tag. din, nasakit
Pro. deenj nahsahkett
Eng. (self), (being) pained

»

Tag. matird dito, sa

Pro. mahteha dettoh^ stdi

Eng. (to) remain here, in town my; 1 willgo(an<l) ascend

Tag. sa ano sa bundok, titiiigin nang ibang bayan,

Pro. sah andh sah lioondokey ttetehTijeen nahng rehahng huyanj

Eng. somewhere into (the) mountains, looking for another town,

Tag. edan ako makakitA nang kaibigan ko, nang pagkain
Pro. sdhahn ahkomahkakeeta nahug kah-cfheigan koh, nafmg pahgkdheen
Eng. where I can see some of fri(*nd(s) my, sonic food

Tag. masarap sa dagil, at nang ])akabuhay na maV)uti.'*
Pro. mahsahrdhp sah dahgdhj aht naJntg pahl^ahhoohiglt mdi mahhootee.^^
Eng. agreeable for rat(s), and some living (of) good."

Tag. Pumart)on ang daga, lunnikad arao-arao, hangang

Pro. Poomahrdhon ahng dahgdh, loomdliknhfl dlnunt-dhrtnr^ hdhngahng
Eng. Went there the rat, traveling daily, until

Tag. dumdting sa bay bay, nakita isang tiiklo])o

Pro. domndhteeng sah huyhnif, mihkctta cisdhng taltk/ohhoh

Eng. arriving at (the) l)each, (it) saw a (one) giant clam

Tag. nakaii^riga nang kaunti. Nagwika ang daga: ''.Ano

Pro. nahkangdhnga nahng kounftr. Nahgnrrka ahng dahgdh: "Aitoh

Eng. opening-the-mouth (of) a little. Said the rat: "What

Tag. it6? Totoong walA pa akong nakikita na

Pro. eetdhf Tohidh-ohng nahldk pah ahkohng nahhrkerta nah

Eng. this? Truly not yet 1 am seeing (have seen) now

6855—06 2

ang atav niv:1:
ahng ah tic neeydh:
the liver his:

'' .Ay do
'' Eqeyoiv
"Not wish

na akcj'y
nah ahkdy
now 1

bayan ko; ako'y
// u y-a n koh ; / / // k6y

pa})ar('>on
pnparo-on

aakvat
ahahkydht

18 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Taj;, ganiyan." Ngayon pumd^ok ang ilaga sa bfbig nang
Pro. gahnehfahn. iTi/uifdhn poomdhsoke alnuj dahgdh mh betbceq nohtg
Eng. tlie like. Then entered the rat into mouth of the

Tag. tftklolK), tinignan ang laman nit6, liguni't nasfpit
Pro. tahklohboj teeneegnahn nhng kihmdhn neetdh, iTgodnee^t nahseepii
Eng. giant clam, looking at the meat of thin, but was caught

Tag. siyd hangang nasiril ang kaniyang ulu, at

Pro. seegdh hdhn-gang uahHeha ahng kalineeydhng ooloOy old

Eng. he until was destroyed the his head, and

Tag. napiitol ang kaniyang liig.
Pro. nuhpodiole ahng kahneegdhtg lereeg.
Eng. was cut off the his nock.

FREE TRANSLATION.

Once upon a time there was a rat who said to himself, because his liver
was out of order: "I do not wish to remain here in this town of mine; I
will go and ascend the mountains, looking for another town, where I can
see some of my friends, some agreeable food for rats, and some good liv-
ing." The rat went out, traveling daily, until arriving at the .seashore it
saw a giant clam (Tridacna), with sligiitly o|>ened mouth. Quoth the
rat: ** VVhat is this? Truly, 1 have not seen anything like this yet." Then
the rat went into the mouth of the giant clam [taklofto) to look at the
meat, but was caught (by it) until his head was cracked, and it was cut
off at the neck.

ACCENTS.

From the foregoing examples it will be seen that there are tliree accents
used in Tasralog, the acute ('), the grave (\), and the circumflex ( ^).

The acute accent may fall ujion any syllable, but in Tagalog is generally
to be found upon the last (ultinja) or the next to the last syllable (j)enul-
tima). The acute accent upon a word ending in a vowel indicates that
tlie final vowel hiis an open, broad sound, an<l that the sutlixed particles
"a»" and "<>/" i»refix an "/<" when joined to such words. Example:
M(ig<mdd, "elegant;" higinidnltan^ "elegance;" bd\, "trade, barter;"
nng hi/hui, "what bought." Words ending in a consonant take "a>/" or
" /w" only, even it bearing the acute accent, which is only written in such
words when occurring upon the j)enultima or antepenultima. Example:
Cmutang, "to borrow;" inagntang^ "to lend;" magpaiUfnig, " to lend freely
(or with goo<l will);" kaidatTgan, "debt;" jtanfang, "credit." In many
cases the sultixing of "A^///" or *'hin^' draws the accent one syllable
farther towanl tlie end of the word. This also a})i)lies to "<//«" or "iV?."
Example: Pntdn, "idea of killing or death;" kfunatdgiin, "death" (ab-
stract noun); nng bunntmidti, "the place of death." The acute accent is
not written with words ending in a vowel, unless the accent is upon the
tinal vowel. It may be taken as a rule that words unmarked with an
accent, if ending with a consonant, tiike the accent ui>on the ultima,
words ending with // and i< being exce}»te<l. Words ending with an unac-
cented vowel or "//" or "x" generally taketheaccent upon the penultima.
This is also the rule in Spanish.

The grave accent in Tagalog merely marks those words ending in a
vowel, which take "<o/" or "'z^" instead of "Ar/x" or "/<//i." Thestress
is not laid U|M)n the syllable marked with tlie grave accent, but upon the
one preceding. Kxaniple: Bntn, "child" (in <reneral), pronounced
"bahta," the linal vowel having an obscure sound: knlmtnnn^ "childish-
ness" (pro. k<th-h'if(-taJi-nn). The grave accent is not used with words
ending in a consonant.

The circumflex accent i« only used upon the linal vowel of those words
ending with an abru|)t, obscure vowel sound, upon which the stress of the
voice is placed. It a<lmits only " <o< " or " /// " as a sutfix. Example:
Ihiuud'dd, "to suffer, to endure;" kddjdihnn), "suffering, endurance;"

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 19

tumurS, ** to signal;" katuroan^ "signaling;" ang tinuroany " person or sta-
tion signaled to."

Practice is the essential requirement to become familiar with the accent,
which is most important in Tagalog, as many words are only distinguished
by the accent, although differing totally m meaning. Example: Aady
**'8moke;" d$o, **dog; gdtaSy '*milk;" gaids^ "path, trail;" mmUang^
**to rise" (as the sun); sumilang (ultima), "to pass between;" humasa,
"to read;" bumcUlhy "to moisten."

As has been already mentioned there are some 17,000 "roota" in the
Tagalog language, many of which are nouns, pronouns, adverbs, and prep-
ositions, etc., in themselves. Verbs are generally formed l)y the use of
certain particles, of which there are some 17, of which all except one
(urn) have a definite and indefinite form. Together with the noun and
adjective forming particles, of which there are several, the possible num-
ber of intelligible Tagalog words can not be far from 50,000 to 60,000, quite
sufficient to express any nontechnical ideas of any language whatsoever.
Yet with all this there are some curious facte about the language and its
vocabulary. Many general terms can not be expressed in one word, but the
modifications of a general act have many words to express them, some-
times far more than exist in English or Spanish. A similar parallel is
offered by the lack of a verb in early English to express the idea of motion
in general, although Anglo-Saxon had many words for different kinds of
motion, which are used daily by all English-speaking people. Upon this
point Brian H. Hodgson, the noted oriental scholar, says, in his work
upon the aborigines of India, published at Calcutta in 1847, page iii:
*t» ♦ ♦ Home-bred words are all very particular, and proportionably
numerous; while general terms, if more conveniently few, are less charac-
teristic and very apt to be of exotic (foreign) origin; take the English gen-
eral term *to move;* it is Latin and one; but of the numerous sorfi of
8pe<*ial motion (to hop, to skip, to jump, to tumble down, to get up, to
walk, to fly, to creep, to run, to gallop, to trot), all are 'genuine Saxon, by
the soul of Hengist.'" This idea will be more fully explaine<l under
"The verb." In addition to such particularizing words, there are also
many synonyms or words meaning the same thing in Tagalog, many of
which are local or provincial and are not heard in the same locality. For
this reason Crawfurd's remarks upon Tagalog and Visayan, as expressed
in his "Malay Grammar," London, 1852, page cxix, are still pertinent.
He says:

"The languages of the Philippine Islands may l)e descril^ed, not as copi-
ous, but wordy. In the state of society in which the natives of the Philip-
pines were formed, ideas are considered more in concrete than in abstract,
and by an importance being attached to trivial matters a profusion springs
up which, in a more advanced state of society, are considered unworthy
of retention, or which, if retained, would only he productive of perplexity
and distraction. * * * In Tajplog there are 12 names for the cocoa-
nut, including its different varieties and conditions as to maturity and
preparation for use. * * * In the same language there are 11 words to
exprefls the verb *to boil' (with variations), and 75 (reallv about 50) for
theverb *togo.'"

It may be aiided that the verb " to carry" with its variations has some
eighty words to express all combinations in Tagalog, and there are many
other verbs which nave been particularized in this manner, which will be
more fully set forth in the appropriate place.

The main object of this work is to facilitate the acquinilion of an ele-
mentary knowledge of the Tagalog language. It should be borne in mind
that Tagalog is not constructed on English or Spanish lines, either in gram-
mar or syntax. The universal tendency upon using a new language is to
translate one's own language word for word, or phrase for phrase, into the
foreign one. The native may understand, but the result is not elegant.
No language can be learned entirely from books, and to supplement the
special needs of each person constant practice in speaking witn educated or

20

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

intelligent Tagalog:8 is nece^san*. Even with a considerable vocabulary,
the American will find difficulty in conveying ju^t what he wants to say
in Tagalog, unless he masters the idioms and peculiarities of the language.
This will not be a very easy task, but, once mastered, the key is held to
all the Philippine languages, and it might )>e said to all the Malayan lan-
guages of the East Indies.

To those who have had to depend ujwn ignorant or untrustworthy inter-
preters, a knowledge of the local tongue will In* felt to l>e indispensable,
and this knowledge will also be a protection to the ]x^ople ignorant of
Spanish or P^nglish who in many cases have l:)een so unmercifully fleeced
by unscrupulous interpreters.

This work has been divided into sections, and the use of technical terms
has been avoidtni to as great an extent as iH>ssible. Where cases, etc., have
been used, it has not been because such exist in the Tagalog lan^age, but
as an aid t*) the memorv of those who are more or less familiar with
Latin, French, Spanish, German, and other European tongues.

The essential neculiarities of Tagalog are its **r<x)t8," which mav be
made into nouns oy the use of the article, into adjectives by other prefixed
particles, into adverlw in other cases, and finally into verbs by the use of
a large number of particles; and the great use of the definite, whi<'h is
grammatically a *' passive," and is so treate<l by all grammarians who
have been consulted, although many times this " passive*' must be trans-
late<l into English by an ''active** verb. For this reason the tenns
*' definite" and "indefinite" have been used in the present work. This
point is more fully explained under the verb.

Examples have been given wherever jx>ssible, and the vocabulary given
has largelv been founde<l on actual exj>erience. It is impossible to invent
a series of phrases which will serve lor any two people. The questions
may l>e given according to the book, but the annwer, coining from a speaker
of the language, will lie constructed out of that vastly more extensive
vocabulary existing in his brain, and the whole scheme be thrown out of
joint. For this reason a careful study of the examples of the language and
the manner of building up the sentenc^es will in the end prove of more
solid benefit than the memorizing of a large numljer of set phrases, which
may or may not l)e appropriate.

Some phrases suitable to certain situations have been inserted, such as
matters relating to the procuring of something to eat, directions to the
house boys, distances to places, the weather, and other shnilar matters,
the careful perusal of which will enal)le more complex sentences to be
uttereil with success and a mastery of the idiom act|uiretl.

SOME ORDINARY PHRASE.S IN TAGALOO.

What do you call that (this) in the Auu muj paiujnhm niydn (nit^) m

Tagalog language? mhimj Tiujalfujf

That (This) is calle<J in our lyan [ko) mj iinat&vag «i

language. aminfj irib).

GREETINViS.

How are vou?

Well; and you, sir?

Not as well as you seem to be.

G(X)d morning, sir.

Good morning, sir, to you.

Good morning, everyone.

Good afternoon (evening), sir (iLsed

from noon to dark).
Goo<l evening (night) (used either

on mcH'ting or retiring after dark ) .

Konmsta ( Cowo fsta) p6 kai/6f

Mahiifi; at kayo jiOf

Hindi Inhhajif/ mahitti na para fiinyd.

Magaiuhmff arao, p6.

Magandaiuj drao p6 uamdn.

Bajnan jm fdlang lahat nang magan-

drmg araa.
Magaiulaiaj hapon p/j. {p/j used as

word of resi>ect to l)oth sexes.)
}f(tg(ntdan(j gain p6.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

21

How is your father? (mother?)
Well, by the grace of God.

Not verv well.

Is that po? I regret to hear (lit.,

'•feel'') it
How is the sick one?

Getting better now.

Is there anything I can do for you?

(lit., Have you any orders forme?)
No, thank vou.
Sit down, sir.
Thank you.
I am in a hurrv. I wish onlv to

speak to Pedro.
I will regard it as a great favor if you

will tell Pedro that I was Kere

to-day.
Don't worry about it, sir; I will tell

him.
Pedro just left this minute.
Where dirl he go?
1 think (It seems) he went to buy

some cloth.
I am going away now.
Are you going?
Until later.
Until to-morrow.
Until day after to-morrow.
Until we meet again (lit., '* Until we

see each other").
Well, I'm going (lit., "you there").
Where are you going?
I am going home.
When are you going back to Manila?

On Sunday.

When are you going (down) to

Manila?
When are you going up to La

Laguna?
Come up! Come down!
Come in! Get out of here!
Move on! Clear out!
Don't move! Come near.
Move awav, all of you.
Wait a little way back.
Come htre! Accompany me.
Wait a moment. Go back (return)

now.
Come back here. Go quickly.

Alto ni)(/ Ingaij naufj nmd (ind) mof
(nintfo/)

Mahnfi, na aud Dang Poong (Dion).
( Bat-haia, used by some, is of San-
skrit origin, derived from aiatdra^
''descent," throujih Malay 6aMrrty
*'a god." There is no connection
witii the Arabic word Allah, used
by the Moros for "God," the lat-
ter being derived from a/, "the,"
and Ildh, "God," allied to the He-
brew Eloah; Kl6hh„.)

Dt po Inhhang iiuugi.

Paidf Kun ganiydn ay d madam dam
ko.

Maand ang may sakilf or At(6 ang
lagay nang may sakitf

(tumlginhdna na.

Mayroitn kayong anomang ipaguutos
sa dkinf

Jlindi ;>o, saldmat.

Uiii Hpu p6 kayo.

Saldmat.

Ako'y )iagnif(mad(tlt. Ibig ko Idmang
kausapiii si Pedro.

Malaking xitang na looh kikilalanit)
ko sa inyo ktni ma.'taln it hi yd kay
P('<h'o )\a akd' y naparito iTijaydn.

Magtra/d pokayo hahalaH sasablh'm ko
sa hiniyd.

Si Pt'dro^y kaaalin Idmang.

Swtn pamaroonf

Tila namili naug kaniyang babaroiti.

Yaydo na ako.

Yaydo kayo na.*
Ilangang mamayd.
Hfingang bukaa.
J fan gang makalaird.
J fan gang layo magkiUt.

fhydn ka na.

Saan ka paroroonf

A koy jKipaMabdhay.

Kailan kayo nuai (magbabalik) sa

Mai/nild f
Sa Li ft go (Domingo).
Kailan kayo Inlnd.^ na Maynildf

Kai/an kayo .<unnba sa fM Lag ana f

f*unnn\hik ka ! Manaog ka!

f*nmdyok kayo! LnmaUift ka dito!

fADndkad! Sdlong.

flonag kang gagalaof Lumdpit ka.

f Alt nay o kayo.

Umnnmg ko nang ka\n\ti mi likurdn.

PumarHo ka f Sannihan mo akii.

yfagantay ka sandal i. Muui ka na.

Hnmalik ka din't. }fagmadait ka.

22

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Get out of there! Don't mn! Umalis ka diifdn ! Houag tumakbd!

They do not wish to. NanAyao nla.

I did not wish to. He wishes to. Ndyao akd. Siyd ibig,

I don't know. I can not understand Auan ko. Di ak6 naoLaman ang
what you said. sijiabi ninyd.

GOING ABOUT.

Driver, take me to the Walled City.

Go by Palacio street (Calle Palacio).
Straight ahead. Look out!
Go to the side. Stop!
To the right. To the left.
Slowly. Whoa!

Let ufl fi[o by this road.

Which IS the shorter of the two?

This is shorter than that

Are we far away yet?

We are near now.

What is the distance from here to

the river?
Three hours riding, seven walking.

What are you doing there?

I am getting water, sir.

Is this good water? Yes, sir.

What is your occupation?

Housebuilder, sir.

Where do ^-ou live?

My house is here, sir.

Wnere are you from?

I live in the country.

I am from the mountains, sir.

Where is the town (pueblo)?

I can not tell you.

Show me the road leading to the

pueblo.
I want you to go with us to show us

the road (trail).
Don't be afraid and don't try to run

away.
If vou guide us well, you will be paid

for your trouble.

Ask that person there where there is
a spring or well.

What are you looking toff

I am looking for . ,

Go across the river as far as the

crossroads.
I want a blacksmith (horseshoer).

J want a saddler (leather worker).

I need a banca (canoe) with outrig-
gers.

One large enough to hold twenty-
five people.

Cochero, ihatid mo akd m loob nang

}faynUd.
Tumuloy ka ml daan nang Palacio.
Maiuid'(derecho). Tabi! (Quedao/)
Tumabi ka. Humintd ka (para).
Sa kanan (mano). Sa kalUiii ($iUa),
Hinayhinay (despacio). Luayluay.

(This latter to horse, etc)
Magtuloy tayo sa daang it6.
Alin ang latong maikst sa dalawdf
ltd ang Udong maikst sa ro6n.
Malayo pa Itn tayof
Malapit na tayo.
And ang layo muld dito hangang sa

ihgf
Tadong oras kung cabayohinypitd hang

lakarin.
And ang ginagawd mo diydnf
Akd' y naigib^ p6.
Mabuti ba itong tiibigf Opd.
Alin kayd ang iyong kaiungkulanf
Anloame^ j>6.
Saan ia namamayanf
Ang bdhay ito, pd^ dito,
Taga saan kaf
Akd'y mimamahay sn biikid,
Taga bundok akd^ pd.
Saan narodn ang bayant
Hindi ko naalamang sabihin sa inyd.
Iturd mo sa dkin ang daang pahingo

sa bay an.
Ibig kong sumama ka sa amin para

iturd ang daan (gatds),
Houag kang matAkot at houag hang

tumakbd.
Kung iturd mong maigi, ay magka-

kamtam ka nang kaupah&n sa iyong

pagod.
Itanong mo dodn sa tduong (mamd.)

iydn kun saan mayroon iaang bfikal

d baldn.
And ang hinahdnap mof

Humahdnap akd nang .

Tawirln mo ang Uog at lumdkad ka

hangang sa sangd-daan,
Ibig ko nang ieang panday {tagapag-

lagay nang lAkal sa caoayo).
Ibig ko nana isang mananctht nang

baUit {tnlahartno) .
Kailauijan ko isang bangkd na may

kdtig.
Isang malaki na makakadald nang

isang dalawang poud^t limang ka-

tduo.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

23

Steer straight for the ship.

Land there at that point.

Do not land where it is ver>' muddy.

Don't make a noise at the landing

nlace
Port! Starboard! Stop!
Go ahead! Astern!
See that everything of mine is taken

down to the l)oat.
Put everything into the cart.
Wrap something around that bundle

so it will not get wet.
Set that basket down here; I want

to get something out of it.
Unfasten this cord.
From here to Manila, how many

hours by road (walking)?

Ituid mo ang sasakydn.
Isatsat mo dooii sa ddkong iydn.
Ifmiag kang tfumatsat sa kaputikan.
Ilouag kang magiiigay sa jxtgmtsat.

Sfi kaUwd! Sa kaimu! Ilintd ua!

Sulong na! Vroiuj!

liigatan mo na lahat ang dking kasan-

kapan may padald sa sasakydn.
Jlagay mo lahat sa carretdn.
Sapindn mo iydng balutan at bakd

hasd.
Ilagay mo dito u/dng tampipi; may-

rooii akd kukunin.
TaMami mo itong luhid.
Buhat dIto hangang sa MaynUd, Hang

oras lakarin nang daanf

THE WEATHER (ANG PANAHOn).

How is the weather?

The weather is fine.

The weather is bad.

We are in the dry season now.

W^e are having the wet season now.

The sun is becoming obscured.

There is much fog.

Is it going to rain?

It looks like it.

It has been raining fearfully all day.

The rain is coming down now.
Give him the umbrella.
It is thundering and lightening.
A bolt struck that tree.

The wind is increasing.

It is possible that this may turn into

a typhoon ( hurricane ) .
Come in under the shelter of this

house.
The moon is rising now.
The stars are coming out.
Look and see if it \s raining, liecause

I must go now.
Come back here at sunset (lit., At

setting of the sun, return here).
It is growing dark.
It is growing light.

Maano ang pamihonf

Mahidi ang panahdn.

Masantd a)uj panahdn,

Na Ka tagdrao tayo rTgaymi.

Na sa iaguldn tayo iTgaydn.

Nagdid'dim ang drao. (Arao also

means "day.")
^f(ty inardm'mg uUip.
VnUhi bagdf
Tila pC).
Katakottdkot navldn sa maghdpong

itd.
Bnmahitgsu na ang iddn.
Jhigay mo na kaiiiyd ang ])dyong.
Kutnuknlog at kunnkidlat.
Isang iudik ay nahulog sa iyang kdhoy

iydn.
Lnmafakds ang ha)T(jin.
Mardhil it 6 ay manui sa bagyd.

Pnmdsok kayo sa s'dong nitong bdhay.

Sumis'dnng na ang buan.
Snynisilang na ang maiTlid bitnrn.
Tigndn tno knn lununlan, at aall^ na

ako.
PagJnbog nang draOj ay magballk ka

din I.
Dumidilini na.
Lumiliiidnaq na.

FOR TAKING LEAVE (HA I'AOPAPAALAM).

I must say good-by to you now.
Why must you go? Sit down first.

I can not sit down, Ijecause I am in

a hurry.
And where are you going?
I am ^oing to see a friend who is

leaving for Manila to-morrow.
I will come back later.

PadUim na jto ako sa inyd.

Bdkit ka nagpapadbunf Maupd ka

niuna.
Hindi akd niahtmipo sa pagka't akd^y

nag)namada!i.
At saan ka paroroonf
Makikipagkitd akd sa isa kong kaibigan

aalh ]fasaj<a Mayni/d bdkas.
Magfxibalik akd mamayd.

24 TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

We will eee each other in the after- Magkikitd tayo sa hapon,

noon.
Good-by. ^-it/io* (Sp. )•

PIOUS EXPRESSIONS OF GOOD WILL.

May God guard you. Dio» muj umingat m inuu.

May God help you. l>io8 any tumuloug m iiufo.

God be with you. Dios ung sumama mi inyo.

FOR EATING AND DRINKING (8A PAGKAIN AT PAtilNl'M).

Get me something to eat; I am hun- Bigyan mo akd nang haunting makn-

gry. kitin; nngugutmn akd.

Get me a drink; I am thirsty. Painumin mo aku; naunhao akd.

What do you wish to eat? Ano ang ihlg niiiyong kaninf

Whatever you have. Kun ano mayroon diydn.

Would you like roant chicken? Ihig ninyo any inihao na sisiuf

Yes, an(l a little wine. (Jo, ^ kauntiug dlak.

W^hat else would you like? And jxi ang ihig ninydf

Give me some eggs, if there are any. liigydn mo akd lumg itlogkun mayroon.

Note.— See list for things to eat. pp. 28-29 and 39-4U.

The meal is nice. Masarap ang pagkain.

Wash (wipe) this plate. Ilugasan (kmtknsin) mo Uong mankok

(pingdn) itd.
I have eaten enough. Marami akong kinain.

Eat some more, sir. Knmain pa kayd pd.

Just a bit more. Kapiraso pa.

Only a bite more. Isa na Idmang mhy.

1 am satiated now. Busog na akd.

Don*t give me anything more. llouagna pd ninyd akong bigydn nang

anoman.
Bring some water to wash the hands. Magdald ka nang tubig paghdgas nang

kamtty. (Idiomatic ex pr. is: Imng

taf/ong (cocoanut shell) tdbig.)

FOR the toilet (sa pagbibihir).

Shall I get the clean clothes now? Jbig ninyong ikuha ko kayd nangdatnit

na malinisf
No, bring me a towel and soap first, Ilouag^ dalhdn mo muna akd nang

I am going to take a bath. uiaiig jKimdhid at sabdn at akd ay

maliligd.
Get some water and put it in the Kumuha ka nang tubig at Uagay mo

bath tub. sa jmlignan.

The bath is ready, sir. Ang jtaliguan pd ay handd na.

Benigno, put some water in the Benigno, lagydn mo nang tubig ang

wash l>asin. , hilamo^an.

Lay out a shirt, a pair of trousers, Ikuha mo akd nang imng 6ard, i»ang

and a coat. salawal at v*ang americana.

Khaki, sir? No, white clothes. Kaki pd.'' Ilonag, damit na mapuii.

Bring me my shoes. Lkdhin mo sa dkin ang sapin.

Hand me that cap. Idbui. mo sa dkin iyang gorra iydn.

Get a handkerchief out of the trunk Maglabds ka nang isang panyo 9a

(chest). kalKin.

Open that door. Shut the window. Buksdn mo iyang pintd iydn. Pind&n

(iS^lrf^dn) mo ang durungauan (bin-
tana).
Take care of the house; I am going Inijatan mo ang bdhay; at akd ay

for a walk. magUUakadldkad.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

25

If anyone calls, say that I will be
back soon.

What time is it?

It is five o'clock, sir.

Wake ine up later, at six; don't for-
get what I tell you i^lit, *'my or-

lers").

Please get up, sir; it is six now.
Do you know of a good barber?

There is one, sir, I know well.
Then call on him and tell him to
bring a good razor.

Do you know how to shave well?

Yes, sir. All right, shave me.

Does it hurt you, sir?

No, it is all right.

Cut my hair.

Do vou wish it verv short, sir?

Xo, leave it a little long.

How much do I owe vou?

What you like, sir; what you wish.

How much a month, shaving me
every other day?

Three |>esus, sir. Then come, begin-
ning with to-morrow.

There is a man downstairs who
wishes to work for vou as a serv-
ant.

Tell him to come up.

Have you any recommendations?

I have, sir.

Where are you from?

From Malolos, sir.

How old are you?

Are you married? Yes, sir.

Have you father and mother yet?

No, sir. I have not.

Stay here and I (we) will pay you
if you care for it five pesos a month,
and if this does not suit you, look
for another place.

You are falling into bad habits.

Look for a sul^titute right now.

Don't be impertinent.

Keep still! or Shut up!

Where is your employer?

He is not here, sir.

Don't you know where he went to?

No, sir.

About what time will he l)e back?

Later, after eight o'clock.

Tell hira, when he comes, that I have

been here.
Are you the tailor?
This suit does not fit well.

Kun may sinomatig pumarito, sahthin

mo}ig )ia ako ij madalhig bahalik.
j\noinj oras imf
A las rinco no }m.
(JixiiTijin )no (tko inamayamj u lai< mux;

fiuuay monfj kalilimutan aiKf bllhi

ko.
G limiting p6 kayo; d las ,sfis no.
May nahikilala kang niahuting mang-

a ngah It ( ba rbero ) f
May im ]>6akong tiakikilalaiig mabnti.
Kun gay an ay tanagin lua at sabihin

luong iitagdald nang mabuting labasa

{pamjdhif).
Manuiang kang iimaliit na mabulif
Ojto. Kan gay (hi, nhitin mo ako.
^axaffaktdn />/5 kayof
Illndly ganiydn iTija ang mabuti
(j'upidn nnt ang buhok ko.
Ibig po ninyong sagad na sagadf
Ilouag, pabayaan mong mahabd-habd.
Magkauo (gaano) ang ibabayad ko sa

uidf

Kayo pd ang bahala; ang loobin p6

ninyo.
Magkanong ibig mo hiunnuiy sa tuing

ikaburang drao ay aahitan naj akof
Tatbtng j)iso, pd. Kan gaydn ay

pmnarito ka midd bdkas.
M(ty isa)ig tdno sa ibabd na ibig mag-

paalila xa in yd.

Sabihin mong jnimanJtik.

May tnglay ka katanayanf

Mayroon akd ])d.

Taga saan kaf

7aga Malobjs, pd.

Mayroon ka nang Hang tadnf

May asdna kaf (/jjd.

May annVt ind paf

Hindi })d. Wald pd.

Tumird ka at nnpaltdn kitd kun ibig

mo nang Umang piso isa)tg buan,

at kun hiitdl hnmdnap ka nang ibang

patTijinoon.
Masann'i ang pimtgkavatihan mo.
Ilunn'tnap ka nang kahali/i jno dgaydn

din.
Ilouag kang tnagpayamot.
Jlonag kang maiiTtjay!
Na.'<aan ang panginotm mof
Wald pi) I'ito.

LH mo naabunan knn saaii naparoonf
Hindi p6.

Anong ora^ si yd btdudikf
Manntyang niakd d las ocho.
Sid/iliin mo knn dumdting na akiV y

najKtrito dito.
Ikdo ba ang matuinaht f
Itong damd ua itd ay hindt maigi ang

paqkaaaqawd.

26

TAQALOG LANGUAGE.

That is too <lear.

I must have it this week.

ToUtong uapakamahal iydn.
KaUangan ko sa loob nang lingong
its.

MISCBLLANEOrs PHRABBH.

Are you teaching English?

What did you teach this morning?

I taught arithmetic.

When did they write any English?

They have written some within a few

days.
I wisti to rent a house.

I shall be here some time — several

months at least.
I wish to rent f n)m month to month.
I will jMiy you in advance.
A long time. A short time.

I will go there.

What do these men want?

They winh to s()eak to you.

What do you (thou) want?

What is your name?

Is tliat work tinisheii yet that I tol<i

you to do?
Not yet, nir. Then, when?
To-morn)w, sir.
How much is this (all)?
How much for eggs?
Then* is no answer.
Wait, I am going to write a letter to

your employer.
I am un<ler great obligations to you.

l>on*t mention it (lit., It is nothing).

You are mintaken.

It in the truth.

It is a lie.

This woman, sir, is asking that her

huHlvand 1h' rt^leased.
Tell her to state lier reason for ask-

iug.
Who, among you, know this woman?

Tell me what you <li<l to Petiro.

Tell n\e the truth, for if you do not I
shall wnd you to the guardhouse
(prison).

Why tlid you leave the l)arnu'ks

without jH»rmissi»>n?
Tell TiMlro that he is wanti^l bv the

captain.
What you did was far frvmi the dutv

(onlers) of a sohlier.

Vngma&ral (nagtuturb) kay6 bagA

nang ingUs {Ang wikang nang

maiTgd americano)
And k'nyaug inidral (Uinurd) ninyd

9ti ayrif
Ang inidral (Uinurd) ho'y arilmetica.
Kaildn sungmulat aild'y nang ingle*,
Sungmulat sild^y nang kamakailang

drao.
Ibig ko iMing bdhay paupahdn.

Ako^y matitird dint mardhil mangd

Hang buan.
Ppig ko umujid buang-buan.
Maiigxiuna ang ftatfod.
Mahabung panah&n. Maiksing pana-

hon.
Paroroon akd do6n.
Ano ang ibig nitong mangd iduof
Ibig nil A makipagusap 9a inyd.
Ano ang ibig mof
And ang panl^an mof
Yari na bagii ang gawang ipinagbiKn

ko sa iydf
Hindi pa, p6. At kaildnf
Bukas }i6.
Magkano itdf
Magkakano ang itlog f
Walang mgod,
Maghintay ka, nudlat akd nang uang

nUai Ha iyong paiiginoon.
Akd p6 at/ malaki ang pagpapasaldmai

sa inyo.
Waht fni anoman.
Kayd ]fd malt,
ltd ang katotoohanan.
Itd'tf kabitlaan.
Itnng fpaftaye itd p6 ay namamanhik

nofMuctilan ang kaniyang agdua.
JpoMiw^ay mo m kaniyd ang katuirtm

na hinihin^t niyd.
Sino Ihi m myd ang nakakikilala m

hiifniue itdf
MagiKiymy ka »a dkin nang mangd

giwmti mo kay Pedro.
Sahihin mo ang katoioohanan, at kun

hinds, ipapadald kUd 9a bilangoan.

And't ikao iumabd9 9a cwtrtd nang

iralang 9abi.
Sahihin mo kay Pedro -o 9iyd'y ioK-

laill/iin nang capiidn,
lyaug ginaud mo ijfdn ay laban M

maiJgd uios nang %9ttng wundah.

TAOALOO LANOUAOE.

27

You should always inspect the men's

quarters.
The rifles (carbines) must be cleaned

daily.
I especially warn you not to be off

guard (or relax vigilance) for a

moment.
The obligation of a soldier on duty

is to know the orders.
Those who disobey orders will re-
ceive severe punishment.
Tell the people here that what we

are going to do is for the benefit

of ail.

Dadalaoin ninyd tui'tuing ang manad
kinalalagydn nang mangd sundcuo.

Ddpat linmn dra(hdrao ang mangd
Itaril.

P'nifighilAling ko sa iy6 mahigpU na
houag ka malibang isang mandcdU

Naudkol sa gundalo taga-pagtdnod

usmiin ang mangd utoa.
Ang lumaban sa utos ko ay kakamldn

nanp viahigpit na parusa.
Sabilun mo sa taga dito na ang dting

gayawln ay kagalingan nang lahcU.

Section One.

VOCABULARY.

Thomas. ToTnds.
Mary. Maria.
John. Juan,
Joseph. Joai.

Father. Amd.

Mother. Ind.

Brother. Kapatid na lalaki,<^

Sister. Kapatid na habaye,^

THE ARTICLE OF PROPER NOUNS (si).

In Tagalog a definite article, Si, is generally prefixed to the names of
persons related to or well known to the speaker or writer, as well as with
names of relationship and terms of affection. It may also be used with the
proper name of an animal belonging to the speaker. In some of the prov-
inces diminutives are much useti, especially within the family. There are
also some terms of this nature largely used in Sangley, or Chmese-Tagalog
families, which are taken from Chinese and will be discussed later.

Older brother (first bom).

Elder brother.
Elder sister.
My father.
My mother.

Koya; si koya, my elder brother. The pro-
noun is understood.
Manung (Manila and southern dialect).
Kakd; si kakd, my elder sister.
<Vi amd.
Si ind.

This article is declined as follows:

.}

Si Juan.

Ni Juan; kay Juan.

'du Juan.

Nom. John.

Gen. John's; of John.

Dat. To, for John.

Ace. John.

Abl. From, with, John

When a name is to be used in the plural, the article of common nouns,
ang, is used, as: The Johns, ang mangd Juan; or better, ang mangd Una-
tduHig na Juan (those who are called John).

The article of names has a special plural when coupled with certain
words, as of the parents, relatives, companions, or the home.

Nom. John and his .

Gen. The field of John and his family.

Dat. To, for, Pedro and his .

Ace. The field of Pedro and his family.
Abl. From, by, Pedro and his .

Sind Juan.

Ang bukid nind Juan.

Ang kand Pedrong bukid.

a These two words are derived from " patid" and " ka," meaning " tied with the same
cord." " Lalald " is male and " babaye '^ is Jiemale. In Tagalog. however, separate worda
are used to express "elder brother," " elder sister," " younger brother or sister," etc.

28 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Si is not used alone l)efore naim*8 of persons unrelate<l to the sneaker
except in a jokinpwav; in other cases the ^Spanish word «sV/lor, Sir., in
inserted as: »SV Seflor hhnco, Mr. Blanco, ^'////m/ is the Taj^lop e(|uiva-
lent for *'8enor'* and Gat for **Don." Diujnntj is "Dofia." These terms
are useti by purists.

THE ARTICLE OF COMMON NOUNS.

The article ang (the) is used with all couinioii nouns, and also those
proper nouns not applyingto i>ers«)n8 — i. e., the Pasiyr, muj Pd^ig; the I*hili]»-

Fines, (tntj FHipinna. Sometimes this article is [>rerixed to names of cities,
t is deciinetl both in the singular and plural, the word maiTfjd (sign of
plurality) being added in the latter case.

DECLENSION OF *'.VN(.;."

Nom. sing. The. -1/*^^.

Gen. sing. Of the. AVnif/; w.

Dat. sing. To, for, the. Sa.

A(T. sing. The. -V""//; sa.

Ahl. sing. From, by, the. AVt/«//; sa.

Nom. plur. The. Ang mawja.

Gen. plur. Of the. Xang matTija; sti mniVjd.

Dat. plur. To, for, the. tki mawjd.

Ace. plur. The. Naug manga; nn mmTija.

Abl. plur. From, with, the. Sa mam/d; nang maiTfjt'i.

The forms ni and nind of the article of names and the form nang of the
article of common nouns are useil when a word in the gt^iitive follows a
nominative in the sentence. Examples: The mother of John, angina ni
Juan; the house of Thomas and his family, ang hdhay nind Tonldit; the
darkness of the night, ang kaililimdn nang gnh-l.

The forms kay^ hand, and m are used with the genitive when inserted
between the nominative article and its noun. Examples: The mother of
John, ang kay Juan ind; the house of Thomas and his family, ang hand
Tomds Mhay; the darkness of the night, ang sa gab-i na kaddimdn. Ancient
Greek has almost this same construction.

THE COMMON NOUN.

Nouns in the Tagalog language are of various classes; some are root
words, whose <lerivationcan not be traced; others are built up from nx»t4«,
and many are fon^gn words, mainly from Spanish, although some Arabic
and Sanskrit wonis are to be found, as well as a few fnun Chinese and
other sour(H*s. They are indeclinable, and the sign « »f plurality is generally
indicated by the word manga placed l>efore the noun pluralized.

VCK'ABULAKV.

Banana (in general). Sdging.

Be<l. Pa f tag.

Bedquilt. Kihnot.

Beer. Serbesa (from Sp., cerreza).

Blanket. Afanta (Sp.).

Bread. Tindpay ( from tdmnf, idea of knead-

ing, i. e., kneadetl).

Bread f mi t tree. Anti/iolo; tipolo. Anti{X)lo is also a

town in Rizal Province.

Butter- lard piantira (Sp., mantem).

' ' ySfantitjuiUa (Sp., mantetfuiUa).

Caral)af> (buffalo). KdUifjao; damulag; anuang. First is

general.

Cat, domestic. # Pusa. J/«w«7is Malay for the palm-

cat ( i'aradoxurus). '

»

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

29

Cheese.

Chicken; fowl.
Child.

Chocolate.

Cocoannt.

Coc'oaiiut oil.

Coffee.

Corkscrew.

Com (maize).

Cow.

Cup.

Dog.

Drinking vessel.

Fish, dried salt.

Fish, fresh.

Flour (in general).

Food.

Fork.

Goat.

Gra{>e fruit.

Hog; swine, domestic.

Honey.

Horse.

House.

I^imp; light.

Man (person).

Mango.

Mat.

Meat (pulp).

Milk.

Native spoon.

Orange.

Pepper.

Plate.

Rat.

Rice (cooked).

Rice (hulled).

Rice (unhulled).

Salt.

Sheep.

Soap.

Spoon.

Sucking pig.

Sugar.

Sweet j)otato; vam.

Table.

Table knife.

Tea.

Tumbler.

Vinegar.

Water.

Wine; liquor.

Woman.

Quiso (8p., queno),

Maunk.

BatiX, Also applied to house boy,

servant (niuchacho).
Sicidate (Mex. Sp., cliocohtit: from

Aztec).
Nio(j. Also applied to cocoa palm.
LfiiTj/U.

(V/;>t'(Sp., c<//<7 from Arabic, y'//i </;«).
Tirdhtiaon (Sp., tirahuzon).
Mais (Sp., inaiz).
B'lra ( Sp., raca).
Tarn (Sp.).

Aso; nffdin (rare), Bicol word.
Luniho: inumnn (from inum, idea of

drinking).

Ihiiug.

h(U\.

(hiiajumg.

PiKjkn'in.

Pandnro (Sp., tenetJor).

K(iinbni(j,

Bahuj/.

IhiJni.

('ahaijo (Sj>., cfih(tllo).

Jinhdf/.

Ildiuhi (from ilaOy light).

Tano.

Mnnqa.

Hfiuifj (Sp., peinte,),

Ijimi'iH.

(intna.

Sitiithtk.

Snha : /ukhari.

L(tnf ; ^Huaintd. ( Possibly from Sp.,

pi lu if Ufa.)
Pinf/nn.

k'ani)(.

PiifUS.

Pt'ihuf. Also applied to the grain.

.1.*^/'//.

Tiipa (from ^i).,topnr, "to butt").

Sithon ( Sp. , jnhou ) .

Cnrlinrn ( Sp. ).

Biik{ Man ilii ) ; Kuini ( Laguna ) : Ihildo

( Marinduipie).
Asurnl (Sp., tizt'irar). Oh\ name

tnho, now " snirar-caiu'."
Oimute (Sp. ). Kargc yam, nhi.

Kampit {^p.^rnrhillo).
S*t (t'hincse, cha).
V((s<> (Sp. ).

Ti'ihii/.

Abtk (from Arabic, artiq).

P'ih<h/r.

The definite and indefinite idea runs throughout the Tagalog language*
and the words '* to have," *' not to have," ** there is," ''there is not," et<,'.,
bring this out plainly.

VOCABULARY.

Have (all persons; indef. ).

Have (def. ).

Have you (some, any)?

Have vou (that, this)?

I.

Indeed; trulv.

Monev.

My.

No.

Perchance.

Perhai)s; some; any.

There is not.

\yhat?

Yes.

Yes, sir.

You (thou).

Akin re<iuires the article and

IS

Maqroon (lit., "there is;" from dOo^rij
'■'there.")

iMuijroonf ^M(iyr6ou kit baga? ^Mayf

/AV( Ha iff of (lit., Is with you?)

Ako (form with nominative; indef. ).

A(fa.

SdlapL Also means half peso.

Akin; ko (latter postfixed to def-

inites).
Hindi.
Knya,
liaqa.
Wnhi.

^Atio; tmo hngaf
0-0.

Ko (form with nominative; indef.).
prefixed or else is preceded by a

preposition.

Ex.: 1. Have you any rice? {/)fayroon kong bir/o.'*/) Have you that rice?
(/A« ^a ii/o iyang bigosf) 2. Yes, sir, 1 have some ( 0/>(!5, mdyrOon ako).
Yes, sir, I have it ( 0/>(5, na ko dkin).

Mayroon is used when askine: in a general way, as in the market or in a
shoj) or store; na .^<i is used when a certain object is meant. Maghnio means
"how much;" aydo is "I do not wish to," and aim is "which." With
the foregoing vocabulary all ordinarv comforts and supplies, exce[)t cloth-
ing, can be asked tor throughout the provinces where Tagalog is under-
stood, and these words are generally understood throughout the island of
Luzon on account of their general similarity to the correspon<ling words
in other dialects. The most conspicuous exception is tnbiy (water), which
is daniun in Pampango, Ilocano, and other northern dialects of Luzon.

VOCAItll.AKV

Afternoon.
American.

B(»ttle.

Custom; habit.
l)ay; sun.
Dress; clothes.
Kvery day; daily
(ianla (8 liters).'

<ilass; crvstal.
(k)ld.

Inkstand.
La r^'c jar.
Mirror.

Ifopnn.

Amfricann (Sp. ); Taga America.

Uhten (Sp., bott/bf),'

\ Pnntgo.

I'gali.

A rao.

Ihunit.

Ai'On-droo.

Snb>{> { Kuj^dish e(piivalent, 3 quarts
i:^ j.ints— :;.1701 ).

Jynbnt/.

(fiotn (sai«l to Ive from dialectical
Cliinese, kin, "^m)1<1," and tuhj
"of," i. e.. "-olden;" Malay,
o/inis; luitive gold, balitok).

Ttntt I'd ( Sj». ).

To})t'iyo)t.

Snbiiiiin (Malay, rhdrniiii).

TAQALOO LANGUAGE.

31

Priest.

Ring.

Silver.

Son or daughter (child).

Spaniard.

Pare (Sp., vadre).

Singling (Malay, chinchin).

Pt/aA*( Malay, perakj also place name ) .

Anak.

Esjxiflol (Sjp. ); Toga CaMila (from

CaMiUa^ Castile).
Batd.
Tagdlog.
Bay an.
Bal'&n.

Stone.

Tagalog.

Town.

Well (noun).

Sex is distinguished by the addition of the words lalahij * * male, ' ' or babdye^
"female," with the appropriate *• tie*' (g, ng, or na). Ex. : My sister (Ang
aking kapatid na babdye — lit., The my female brother); my son (ang aking
anak na lalaki).

A few words indicate sex in themselves, but they are very limited in
number compared with those in Aryan languages.

VOCABULARY.

Aunt

Father.

Girl, unmarried woman.

Male; man.

Female; woman.

Miss; young lady.

Mother,

Uncle.

Young man; bachelor; youth.
Young man, unmarried.

All.
Am a.
Dalaga.

Bal/t 'g f ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^ a<ljective8.

Binibin i.

Ind.

{Amain.
Momii. Principally heard in Ma-
nila.
B'nuUa (from batd^ boy, child).
Bagongt6.no (lit., "new man").

THE "TIE.S."

The Tagalog ear dislikes the sequence of certain sounds, and for this
reason three ties, **<;," ' «^," and **/m," are much used, more especially
when an adjective is prefixed to a noun or a noun in the genitive modifies
another in the nominative.

The tie **^" is added to such an adjective or nominative if ending in
**n,'* the genitive following the nominative modified. The adjective may
precede the noun, as in I^nglish, or follow it, as is generally the case in
Spanish. The tie is added to the noun in the latter ca^ie, if it ends
in**n." Ex.: (1) Wisdom {karunuiujmi) \ great {dakUa); great wisdom
(karunuiTgangdakild). (2) Silver (/)[/«/:); nnrror {so lam in); silver mirror
liolaminp pUak ) .

The tie **na** is adde<l to words ending in a vowel not prece<ied by
another vowel, f/, as in Muo, is considered a.s a consonant, a.«< it sounds
nearly like the English *'w," and is written with this letter by many natives.
Ex.: A dutiful child (Batang vialjaU); a bottle of wine ( isdng boteng dlnk)\
a beautiful woman {babdyeng magaudd) , a Manila man (isang tduong
Maynild).

The tie " na " is used when the first word ends in any con.'^onant (except
**n") or in a diphthong. Ex.: A dutiful child {Mafxut nn batd), a large
house (bdhay na malaki); clear water [tuhig na maUnao, or malmao na
tubig).

NO INDEFINITK ARTICLE.

There is no special indefinite article (a or an) in Tagaloe, although the
numeral tsd (one) may be used.

32 TAG A LOG LANGUAGE.

THE VERB "to BE.'*

The English verb **to be" may be eometimes represented in Tagalog by
the particle «?/» changing to 'y for euphony after a preceding vowel. S)x.:
Is your horse whitef UAng cahayo mo'y maputif) The bird is singing
(Ang ibon «// hungmuhuni). Generally in Questions the verb *'to be*' is
understood, as: ^Avd ang sabi mof (What did you sav? — lit., What the said
your?). The verb is understood also when a predicate adjective is used;
as, My father is good (Mahuti ang Aking ama ) . A // also connects two clauses
of equal force; as, If John comes, go away (Kan damdting ffi Juan^ ay
timalis ka).

FUTURE AND PAST OP **AV."

The particle ay is invariable as to tense, the idea of past or future being
expressed by the answer or an adverb of time. Ex. : Beautiful then, she is
is ugly now' {Magamid siyd iiodn, iTgaydn ay pdiTgii), You will be sick
to-morrow {Biikasikdo ay mamkit).

Some Tagalog writers use ai in place of ay, especially in newspaper work.

THE CONJUNCTION *'aNI)."

Atj changing to '<, under the same circumstances in which ay changes
to '?/, represents the conjunction '*an<l." It may also stand for "because"
in compound sentences when a cause is expressed; as, I can not read,
l)ecause I have no spectacles {Ilindt ak6 makahahasa tta pagka H waM akong
falamln).

When ay and at are followe<l by a monosyllable, as 8a, the vowel is not
dropped.

Section Two.

The principal interrogative pronouns and a<lverl)s are as follows:

W^hat? ^'An6f AVhen? ^KnUdvf

Wlio? /Sinof How? ^Papa-anof

Which? ^Aliuf How much (value)? ^Magkano.^

W^here? iSadn? How many? ilUmf

Andy "what," is decline<l as follows:

8INGULAB. PLURAL.

Xom. What? ^And? No change.

Gen. Of what? ^Sa and/ ^Xnng andf No change.

Dat. To, for what? iSa and? No change.

Ace. AVhat? ^Sa andf /'Xnng and? No change.

Abl. (Loc. ) In, at what? iSaandf No change.

Abl. (Ins.) By, with what? ^Nang and? No change.

This pronoun is used only in speaking of things, never of persons. The
expression iAnd kaf means "What do you want?"
iSinofj "who," is declined as follows:

SIMiULAR. PLIRAL

Nom. Who? jSinof /Shio-sinof

Gen. Whose, of whom. ^Kaninof /Nhio?f^ ^Kanikaninof *

Other cases. ^Sa kaninof ^Sa kamkaninof

a Used only when the question is not heard or uiiderst«.)od.

bNot kaiimo-knnino, as the first form Is a trisyllable, and in Tagalop repetitions stop at
at the second syllable (or letter, as the case may be). Kaninontj maiTgn and «a kanimmg
are also used.

TAGALOQ LANGUAGE. 33

Example: ^Kaninong hiikid iydnf (\Vliot<e field is that?); Sa rapitan
(Of the mayor or presidente) ; iSinof (Who.»?e?); Sa cnpiian »a hatjan (Of
the mayor of the town) .

From early times the title of the mayor of a town or "pueblo" was
•*gobernadorcillo*' (little governor). This name was changed in 1893 to
**capitiin municipal," and in 1898 to *' presidente," a name retained under
American administration. Natives ignorant of Spanish generally speak of
the *'c«pitan."

While and is used for things and aino for persons, the pronoun alin,
** which," is used for both. It is declined:

SINGULAR.

PLURAL.

Nom.

Which?

sAlbif

/AUn-alinf

Gen.

Of which?

/S(i olinf iNang almf

^Sa alin-alinf

Dat.

To, for what?

ilSa alinf

^Sa alin-alinf

Ace.

What?

iSd nUnf iNayig almf

^'Sa alin-alinf

Lor*.

In, at which?

iSa alinf

^Sa alin-alinf

Ins.

By, with, etc..

which?

/Nang alinf

^Nang alin-alinf

Sti with the genitive is preferable in answering a question. f'AUng matu/af
may also be use<l for the plural. The form ^Mangd alinf is rather inele-
gant. Thus the Knglish "Which men?" maybe expressed by ''^Alin-
aling tduof^' "/.l/m maiTgd tduof^^ or '^ ^ Manga aling tduof**

THE INTERROGATIVE ADVERBS.

These adverbs present no peculiarities and are used as in English.
fllanf ( How many?) obviates the use of the pluralizing particle manijd\ as,
jllang tduof (How many men?) In inquiring the price of an article in the
market the restrictive form magkakano is generally used; as, '';Maqka-
kano ang matigd itlogf" (How much for eggs?) But in speaking of purclias-
ing the entire quantity magkano is right.

THE DEMONSTRATIVE PUONOrNS.

These are four in Tagalog, two being translated by "this," another l)y
"that," and the fourth by the poetic form "yon."

The first is yan, and means "this." Strictly speaking, it should be used
only to indicate an object nearer to the sj>eaker than to the i>erson
addressed, but practically this pronoun is dropping out of use. For exam-
ple, Yaring dking piUo (This heart of mine), while more exact, is little
heard, the following word ito (this) being used: itong dking puso. Yeri is
a dialectical form.

YaH is declined as follows:

SINGULAR. PLIRAL.

Nom. This. Yari. These. Yaring mangd.

Gen. Of this. Niri; dinisa. Of these. Siring ntamjd.

Dat. To, for this. iHni m. T(^, for these. Ditti sa inatu/d.

Ace. This. Niri; dinii<a. These. Xiring niaiHjd.eU'.

Loc. At, in this. Ihni f^a. At, in these. Diiii aa mawjd.

Ins. By, with this. Niri. By, with these. Siring maiTgd.

The ordinary word meaning "this" is ito, and strictly denotes objects or
persons equidistant from both speaker and the person spoken to. It is
declined aa follows:

SINGULAR. PT.IKAL.

Nom. This. ltd. These. ftong nutwjd.

Gen. Of this. Nitd; ditd sa. Of these. yUong mawjd, etc,

Dat, To, for this. LHto sa. To, for these. Dito sa manga.

6855—06 3

34

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Arc. This. Dito m.

Jjoc. At, in this. Dito m.

Ine. By, with this. yUo.

Thest*. Dito sn mangd.

At, in these. Dito m maiTijA.
By, with thejse. Nitong marTgA.

**That** is expressed in Tagalog by the wonl iyim, esi>eoiaIly when
applied to persons or (ibjects nearer to the i)eri»<)n npoken to than to the
speaker. It is dei^lined as follows:

HI.VCri.AR.

PLURAL

Norn. That.
Gen. Of that.
Dat. To, for that.
Ace. That.
Loc. At, in that.

Ins. By, with that. XiyAu.

Iy6n.

jfijfdn; diynn m.
Diydn wi.
Xiydn; diydnm.
Niyan sa.

Those.

Of tliose.

To, for those.

Thone.

At, in thoH?.

By, with those.

lyong matTgd.
Xiyaiig matijjd, etc.
IHmn »it mntTgd,
Xiyang maiTipi, etc.
Xiydn m ynatTj/d.
Xii/ttng maiTga.

The fourth demonstnitive pronoun, ytu'm, means **yon," although at
present generally translated "that." Yoon is a dialectical form. It is
declined:

HIMil'lJlK.

FLCRAL.

Nom. Yon (that). Yndn.

Gen. Of yon. Xiifadii; dinm mi,

Dat. To, for yon. I)(ton «?.

Ace. Yon. Xiynon; ddon m.

Ijoc. At, in yon. Doonsn.

Ins. By, witn yon. Xiyaon.

Yon (thomO
Of yon.
To, for von.

m

Yon.

At, in yon.

Yanng, vintuja.

Xiyaong mniTgd^ etc.

D/ton Kfi jiKnTgd.

Xiifao ttg in a tTgn .

D6on sa inaiTqa.
»• _ -J f

By, with yon. Xhjnoug inmTgd.

The particle «i follows the pronoun in eAch (^ase as jrivcn, ]»ut it, a«< well
as the pluralizin^ ]>article mmfTgdy belonjr^ to the person or object iK)inte<l
out, and not to the pronoun.

These four demonstratives have a peculiar idiomatic use in that they are
repeatCKl in the nominative after the iHjrsoii or object modiHe<l as well as
preceding the same, in the latter case ajrreeing in number and cast*.
Examples: This man {Itong tawmg it6), both nominative singular. That
boy's clothes {Aiig damit niyang hntavg iynn); first, genitive singular;
8i»cond, nominative singular. That man (has) nuich mon(»y {Maraming
mlnjfl viyavg ( viynong) tduoug yntm ) ; ht. , '* much money of that man that."
(<.ienerally with nominative.) Itomj fmOikial: na i1(Vy diydn m batmig iydn
(This flower is for that child). In the second clause, the first pronoun is
in dative and second in nominative.

ADVERBH OF PLACE.

From the four demonstrative pronouns the following adverbs of pla(*e
are derived :

Here (close to the sjx'aker). Dinl.

Here. Dito.

There (near add ressee ) . Diyd u .

Y^onder (there). Ddon.

With the particle iia prefixed to this class of adverbs, the idea of '*am,"
**i8," **are is expressed. It will be note<l that the initial letter d is soft-
ened to r where the jmrticle na is used alone.

Am, is or are here (close). Xarini; nayrri; iittndini.

Am, is or are here (more distant). Xarito; unito; nandito.
Am, is or are there. Nariydn; naiydn; ncmdiydn.

Am, is or are yonder. Naroi'm; nayadu; nandodn.

The particle dt with the same class of adverbs ex]>re88es the past tense.
For euphony the particle changes to do with dodu.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 35

Was or were here (close). Dirini.

Wa« or were here (more distant). Dirito.

Was or were there. />/ iff an.

Wari or were yonder. Dorotm.

The particle />« with the same adverbp expresses the future.

Will be here (close). Pnrini.

Will be here (more distant). Panto.

Will be there. Pariyan.

Will be vonder. Pardon.

Ex. Is the man there? {Nariffdn hafja ang tduof) He is not here, he is
yonder ( Widd r»7o, nordon). Where is Captain Tino (Faustino)? dSaAn
iiardon [or naandodn'} Si Capitdn Tinof) In Manila {Xasn .Uaynild).
When will he couie back? {^Kalian bahalikf) Possibly within a week
( Mnnihil sa muty lingo). Who is his agent? {^'Sino ang kaniyang katiwala?)
The Chinaman Ong i^icoon Callc Real (Ang insik Ong Laico sa Calle Real).
Thank you {Suldmat).

THK I'KRSOXAI. PHONOlNS.

The jx^rsonal pronouns in Tajralog should receive careful study, as they
exhibit several peculiarities of form and use not found in English.

All personal pronouns have.two genitives, the first form being prefixed
to the accompanying noun or verb, and the second form sufHxed. The
two forms are not used in the same clause, the second form l)eing preferred
with the definite form of the verb. However, if the sentence commences
with an adverb or negative particle, or is a (juestion, the suffixed forms are
placed Ijefore the verb.

The first j)erson plural, like nearly all Malayan and Melancsian lan-
guages, has two forms, the first corresponding to "we" in a general sense,
and including those Hj)oken to, while the second form, like the editorial
** we," ex<;lu<les the person or person^ addressed. There are also two
dual forms, which may be translated "thou and I." These dual forms
have the same meaning, the first form, ///<(, being more general and used
in Manila, Riziil, I^iiguna, Hatangas, and Tayabas, wlnle the second form,
katd, is found in Bulacan, Nueva E<'ija, and the Tagal(»g-s[)eaking parts of
Pampanga ami Tarlac. Bataan ])robably follows Bulacan in style, while
in Cavite the usage is like that of Manila, etc.

In the use of the personal pronouns together, a very different order is
ol)6erved from lOnglish. The fagalog order is "I (we), thou (you), and
he, she (they)," ignoring the European custom of mentioning the listener
first, the absent or third person next, and the si)eaker last. The Tagalog
says **1 and you, "I and John," and with the further peculiarity that
he literally pfuralizes the first pronoun and gives the pronoun or noun
following its genitive form in the lorrect nund)er. The examples will
explain the matter more clearly.

The use of the word "it" is avoide<l by speakers of Tagalog. It is only
used when objects are personified, as in stories, etc. See example.

FIRST l'KR**nN HlN(ilLAK.

Nom. I. Akn.

Gen. Of me; my. /I /ri?* (prefix) ; A<* (suffix).

Othercases. To, for, with, by me. *SV/ akin.

1SCLC8IVK FIKST I'ERXON IM-IRAl..

Nom. We (and you). Tayo.

Gen. Of us; our (and your). Adn (prefix); mttin (suffix).

Othercases. To, for, etc., us (and Sa at in.

36

TAGALOG LANQUAOE.

£XCLUUVB FIB8T PERSON PLURAL.

Nom. We (not you).

Gen. Of us; our.

Other cases. To, for, etc., us.

Kami.

Amln (prefix); namin (suffix).

Sa amin.

riBST PERSON DUAL.

Southern form. Northern form.

Nom . We ( thou and I ) . KUd, Katd.

Gen. Of us (we two ) ; our. Kariiid ( p. ) ; ^i (s. ) . Atd ( p. ) ; to (s. ).

Other cases. To, for, etc., us ( we two). Sa kanita. Sa aid.

SECOND PERSON SINUULAR.

Nom. Thou (you).

Gen. Of thee, thy (your).

Other cases. To, for, etc., thee.

Ikdo (prefix); ka (suffix).
Iy6 (prefix); mo (suffix).
Sa iy6.

The singular forms are still used in Tagalog, and when respect is intended,
instead ofusing the plural, as in English, or the third person singular, as
in Spanish, the particle p6 is suffixed. The plural, also with pd, is used
in >lanila in many cases, but may be said to be an imitation of the Spanish
vosotros (ye).

SECOND PERSON PLURAL.

Nom. You.

Gen. Of you; your.

Other cases. To, for, etc. , you.

Kayd.

Inyo (prefix); ninyd (suffix).

Sa inyd.

THIRD PERSON SINGULAR.

Nom. He, she. Si yd.

Gen. Of him; of her; his; her. Kaniyd (prefix); niyd (suffix).

Other cases. To, for, etc., him, her. Sa kaniyd.

THIRD PERSON PLURAL.

Nom. They.

Gen. Of them; their.

Other cases. Them (to, for, etc.).

Slid.

Kan ild (prefix ) ; nild ( suffi x ) .

Sa kanild.

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

These are the same as the genitives of the personal pronouns and are
generally preceded by the article ang. The following examples will show
the variations:

My child.

Thy child.

His (or her) child.

Our (of we two) child.

Our children ^ all of us).

Our child (excluding person spoken

to).

Your child.
Their child.

{Ang dking anak.
\Ang anak ko.

{Ang iyong anak.
Ang anak mo.
Ang kaniyang anak.
[A tig anak niyd.

Ang kaniianganak. Ang atang anak.
lAjig anak ta. Ang anak ta.

[Ang ating mangd anak.
Ang mangd anak natin.
\Ang aming anak.
Ang anak namin.
Ang inyong anak.
[Ang anak ninyd.
\A ng kaniiang anak.
^Ang anak nild.

^

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 3l

The genitive forms of the personal pronouns used without a following?
noun are expressed with the article prefixed to the tirst genitive:

Mine. Aug akin.

Thine (yours). Amj iy6.

His; hers. Avg kanh/d.

Ours. Aug otin {'\nc\.)] ang ambi (exc\).

Yours. Aug inyo.

Theirs. Ang kanilA.

The oblique cases with sa and the article also express this idea in Taga-
log; as, Mine, Ang sa dhin.

Examples of two pronouns, or a pronoun with a noun:

He and I (lit. *'we of him"). Kami nh/d.

He and his father (they and his ^ild nnyuj kaniyang amd.

father).
John and I (we of John). Kami ni Juan,

You and they (you of them). Kayd nild.

You and we (we of you). Kami ninyd.

In Manila and large towns these forms are dying out of use, the Spanish
style being used; as, John and 1 {Si Juan at ako).

To avoid the use of »iyd^ "it," to indicate an inanimate object, the word ^
itself is repeated, or in answering a question a particle like iTlja (certainlv)
is used. Ex.: ^Malmti bagd ang lakatdn [a species of banana]? (Is the
lakatan goo<l?) Mabuti nga (Certainly [it is] good).

The third person i;>lural is used to indicate great respect for a person,
coupled with pd^ ana for still greater resju'ct the word kamahalan (ex-
cellency) is used. Your excellency {Any inyong kamahalan),

THK AFFIRMATIVE PARTICLES.

This name is applied to several adverbs, and also to some words which
by themselves have no signification, which, added to pronouns, give them
an intensive or indefinite meaning. The following are the ones most gen-
erally used. None begin a sentence except kayd.

Self; selves. Din. (A'm after preceding vowel.)

Perhaps. Bagd. (Generally with in<lcf. verb.)

Perhaps; for that. Kayd, (May begin sentence. )

Also. Man.

Also. Man din, (Southern Tagalog only.)

Now. Sa. (No meaning alone. )

Certainly. ^gu-

Certainly. I^gani. (Southern Tagalog; Hicol,

gnani, )

Yet. Pa.

Actually! Is that so! Paid, i Idea of wonder inherent. )

At; in; to; for, etc. Sft. ((Jrtatly used word.)

Own. Sarin.

Enough now; plenty. Si yd ua.

Ex.: Ak6 rin; akd man (I myself). .SV//rt 7JT/a( he, certainly). Ikdo man
(you also). Ang sarili kong cabayo (my own horse). 06 fuj't (yes, cer-
tainly), i/mrfrnj^a (no, indeed).

The particle man attached to an interrogative pronoun convert.'^ the lat-
ter into an indefinite pronoun. Ex.: Anoman (anything; somethin^r).
Alinman (whichever; whatever). Sinoman (whoever). Sinomong (duo
(anyone whomsoever).

These particles follow the monosyllaV)ic pronouns, but precede the pro-
nouns of more than one syllable, unless the latter begin the sentence, in
which caae the particle follows, as with a monosyllabic pronoun.

88 TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

Besides anomanf cJinmaiiy and nnomariy there are several words which
may l>e used at times as indefinite pronouns, and at other times with
adverbial force. One of these is hdlang^ which can l)e used for **some, any,
and each." Ex.: IWang drao (some day). Ang balang tduo (any man).
Sa Mlang iM (for each one).

The numeral iad (one), prefixed to wortis like Arao (day), and fduo
(man) gives the idea of '*one dav; a certain man,'' etc. It is also used
with demonstrative pronouns as follows: Jtong im (this one); diydn m isd
(to that other); doon m isd (to that other yonder). Ind may be said to
mean "other" among a few persons or objects, and the wonl IfHt to desig-
nate "other" among many. Ihang tduo (another man completely) ; ihang
6d^n^ (another thing entirely).

Tanan, dilan, and jtaua mean everyone, "all" (i)er8onH). "All" (the
adjective) is lahat.

RELATIVE PRONOrNH.

These pronouns, which in English are ex nresse«l by "which," "that,"
** who," etc. , are expressed very obsc'urely in Tagalog by means of the article
angj and the ties g, ng, and va. The Tagalog al^«) has a negative relative
pronoun dt^ translated by "who not," "which not," "that not." Ex.:

He who is wein)ehave<l is t»steemed by all. Atig mabuting dual ny minnma'

hid nang lahaf.

The book which you are reading in mine. Ang lihroitg hhiahasa mo*g dkiu.

I did not receive the letter that you sent Di h) tinmigap ang sulat na ipi-

to me. vadald mo m dkiu.

The man who does not disolwy the laws Ang tduong dl mmamUuimng

will be protected in his rights. ifnigtatangol nnng katniran.

The phrase "each other" is expressed by tlie j)article nagka or inagka^
together with the appropriate noun or pronoun. Ex.: Do they under-
stand each other? ^Ntfgkaka^iam gild (from alam)f.

The princi|>al difficultv the student of Tagalog will ex])erience here will
be in tne use of the exclusive and inclusive forms of the first i>ersoii plu-
ral. The dual forms are little use<l in the nominative, but are (juite fn»-
quentlj heani in the oblique and accuj^ative ca-^H*.**. .Vs has l)een reinarke<l.
tnese exclusive an<i inclusive forms are to be fomxl in nearly all the
Malayan languages, while in some of the allied Mdaiiesian tongues, such
as that of Fiji, the second and third ]>i'n4oiiH havi; not only a dual, but a
triple form, in addition to the ordinary plural. The Fijian first jx^rson has
also the dual and triple forms, each of which are divide<l into an inclusive
and exclusive form.

Section Three.

Ah has l>een previously explained, Tagalog nx)t words may l)e use<l as
nouns, verl)s, adjectives, and adverbs in many cases, either by'the context
or particles affixe<l or suffixed. Naturally the noun is giMierally the sim-
plest form, esiK?cially the concrete noun, but secondarv or derivative
nouns may Ik» (|uite complicated in their construction. The noun is inva-
riable in form, number l)eing expresse<l by the word maiujd, or such wonls
as "all," ** many," eU;., for the plural. Ca.ses are expressed by the article
or prepositions, and no gender is known. A great many common nouns
in Tagalog are <lerived from the Spanish, a few from Chinese, and some
from Arabic and Sanskrit sources. All Tagalog nouns may l>e used with
the article.

The words for meals an<l some articles of foo<l, cooking utensils, etc.,
vegetables, and fruits not previously mentioneil are:

TAOALOa LANGUAGE.

Breakfast.
Middny meal.
A(t«mboii lunch.

Meat or fish.

Broth.

Salted luh esuce.

Salty or sour sauce

Aug aIniiiMl (Sp., almutrzi)).

Aiigt'iiiijh'ilinii [litnghall, midday).

Aug iiiiiiiii'lal (Sp., miTiriiih).

Aug h'limniiii {hiiixiii, aflemoon).

Aug ••/•i>„ (Sji., r.<m,l<i).

Aiigm'uio.

A„g,.,lh. . ^

Picklee ibamboo Bprouti', etc.).

Koaste'l or luiked meat ur IihIj (whiil

l>aked or roaated).
Fnw»' Ippf-
Sucking i>ig.
Veniuon.
Wild pork.

The jungle fowl.

The duilc.

The tre^ duck (Dftidmciiipm).

The (tonpe.

The peacock.
The turkey.
The pig(>on.

The dove.
The gizzard.

The liver.
The heart.
Themudlish; walking li^li.

w..r<l
hear.1,
"pi^rei:

Am, iniii
roaul n

Am, ,<<.<..;

■"chovi-chow.'" «i often

ii- ('HiiliinfiHi or Hongkong

.11 Ki.Kli«h " f<.r f«i«l. 1

nt (Sp., ,whm. from IJin-

i, .»7,»r,i>ickl<«).

™. [tmihiw means "to

rl«ike".)

tji'i hiln nang piiUiki'i.

■nuj u>/t.

Ai'gM;o
A,.., -.lik.

iiig fuihiiy it'ii'i'i: lamiiii

i n.,ng

An-iiii<iis\
,\«.J,mn<

■i (Siinsk,, l,ar„ya. not

from

Ami biUt
t«u'.. /'

„l..f,..li).

,' old

w.-il; .tl.i

,»/«</l»l,/;,'(froitl h.lli

■", a

1 {tMfoi'hili

Ttieliza.

The l^oca-dulce.

The shell of a claw, etc.

The lohrter.
The crab.
The Btnall crab.
The shrimp.

Alt; h'Irl... I M.,r(,l.,-U' i^ wiid I
UR-aii -Whcr,, then- are claiiis,
PHinparigan dialed.)

\;-lhifOH. ( llihir-iuy-l.i,,mi. village,
tiorllu'iist r>f .\lanila, "shrimp
dryiiiiipiaci'.")

40

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

The gabe root
The peanut.

The lorn boy (fmit).

The guayava.

The lime.

The apple.

The watermelon.

The t^ook.

The kitchen (cooking place).

Crumbe; scraps.

The dining room.

The fireplace.

Earthen cooking pot (mediom size).

Small earthen pot.

Large earthen i)ot.

The frying i>an.

The gridiron (broiler).

The pitcher.

Earthen pitcher.

The bowl.

The jug.

The naltcellar.

The pot cover.
The sieve.
The Immboo tray.
The basket.
The fire.
The smoke.

The firewood.

Ang gabi.

Any mani, Arawak (West Indian)
word.

Ang duhai.

Aug Iniyalms.

Ang ddyiip.

Ang manfonas (Sp., manzana),

Ang pakudn.

A Jig taga p<nTgosina.

Ang pinaglulutoan (from /tUo, cook-
ing).

Mumo.

An/f silid na kakandn,

Ang kaldn; ang dapoj,

Ang ptdoyok.

A ng anglit,

Ang kating-an.

Ang kauHdi.

Ang ihaoan (from umiltaOf to roast).

Ang harTgd; ang galong.

Ang fiUm.

Ang mankok.

Ang Haro (Sp., jarro).

{Ang jKdaasinan (from asln, salt).
Ang Hoxiik (without cover).
Ang tuntong.
Ang frit hay.
Ang bUdo.
Ang Mkof.
Ang npny.

Ang ajfo (accent distinguishes from
a-f(o, dog).

Ang kdhoy nang jKnTijatong.

The names for parts of a house, household furniture an<l articles, and
ordinary tools, are given in the following list. Many of these names are
borrowed from the Spanish language:

The house.

The room.
The bathroom.
The water-closet
The door.
The doorway.
The window.

The ladder (stairway).

The step (round of ladder).

The balcony.

The post or pillar.

The kitchen platform.

The roof.

The gable.

The gutter pipe.

The corner.

The window sill.

The balustrade.

Ang Uihay (ix)88ibly Sansk., valayay
an inclosure, through Malay, Mleiy
hall, court; but the Hawaiian is
hnfe, and there are similar wonis
in other Polynesian dialects).

Ang sdid.

Ang paii yuan ( lit, "Iwthing place").

Ang cumnii (8p. word).

AngplntCt.

Ang jtiiitodn.

Ang itnib; ang dtiruiujauan (from
dutujftOj to appear at the window);
any hintann (Sp.).

Ang hnyddn.

Ang bait any.

Any taniiaan (lit., "watchtower").

Any ha/iyi.

Any fmtnbhn.

Any haUmy.

Any bnHM/innn.

Any (do/od.

Any sulok.

Any p(daftaftahdn.

Ang gnyabndn.

TA.GALOG LANGUAGE.

41

The prop (against wind^).
The partition (wall).
The hoQHehold furniture.
The chair.

The table.

The clothes press (or cupboard).

The l>ed.

The quilt.

The pillow.

The head (of a bed).

The mosquito net.

The wash basin.

The water.

The soap.

The towel.

The tooth brush (foreign).

The tooth brush (native).

The clothes brush.

The pail or bucket.

The night vessel.

The trunk.

The valise.

The key.

The padlock.

The lock.

Thread.

The needle.

The pin.

Silk thread.

The scissors.

The thimble.

The eyeglasses or spectacleH.

The picture; image.

The household shrine.

Wick for cocoanut-oil lamp.

Cocoanut-oil lamp.

The lamp (old name).

Matches.
Fire-making sticks.

The flint

The steel.

The tinder.

Rice mill (hand).

The rice mortar.

The rice pestle.
The small mortar.
The small pestle.

The broom.

The mop (cloths).
The razor.

The sadiron (fiatiron).

sit

Any snhay.

Aug dingding.

Aug kasuukapiin m hdhay.

Any uupdn (from nmupdy to

down).
A ng lamena ( 8p. , ma<a ) .
Aug slmpaium.
Aug pdpag; ang cama (Sp. ).
Aug komoi.
Ang I'lnan.

Ang ofohdn; ang olondn.
Ang kuiiunhd.
Ang liiianiiisdn.
Ang tuhig.

A ng sahdn ( Sp. , jabdn ) .
Ang ballndang.
Ang cepillo nang iTgipin {cepillOy Sp.

fur "brush").
Ang si pan.

Ang vepillo nang damit.
Ang timbd.

Ang ihidn; ang orinola (Sp. ).
Ang rabdn.

Ang titinpipi; ang taklxi.
Ang fa({<i (Chinese, tajsi).
Ang ran dado {i>\). word).
Ang rtrrad lira (Sp. word).
Sinulid (npun, from aulid, 8[>in).
Ang kardgam.
Ang aHjtiler { Sp. , al filer ) .
Sindlid na sutld (Sansk., sCitra) .
Ang gunting.
Ang dedal (Sp. word).
A)ig salannn sa niatd.
Ang larauan.
Ang altar sa bdhag.
Ang (lnf<im (from (-hinese (ienUim).
Ang iinghity (from Chinese).
Ang sonibo; ang simbo [Iinodn now

used ) .
Apuga n ; posporofi { Sp. , j'tUforos) .
Ang puj/osait (similar to those of

North Amerioari Judians).
Ang pingkian; ang pantiiTgan (local).
Ang binalon.
Ang Idhtg.

Ang giliiuidn (from giling, to grind).
Ang Insong (said to he origin of

"Luzon," but improbable).
Ang halo.

A ng lusonglusomft m.
An(f kamay (lit., "the hand" or

"arm").'
A))a irid'is ( verl) //v///'.s' means "to re-

move'" )

Ang patTifoskos.

^[ng paiTgdltii (from dliit, to shave:

also called (lug labasa, from Sp.

narajd, razor).
A)tg jtrinna (Sp., la prenm, the

Tile balance.

Tlie hook.
The clothes-line.

The Uiblecloth.

The *fj^iii( (^^ied in cock fiirhting ).

The l)ird vvhit^tle.

The rope.

The twine.

('hinc^^e twine.

The wire.

The cliain (iron or iroM, etc.).

Yard (of houj^e).

Garden.

Plant (any .<own ]»lant e.\ce])t rU'e).

The hoe.

The sickle.

The shovel.

Tlie H|)a<l(\

The i)incers (small ).

The vise.

Tlie wrench.

Tfie saw.
The hammer.

The hatchet.
The ax.
Tlie plane.
The chisel.
The an^er.
'J' lie ijimlet.
The lilc.

The wood turner.
The anvil.
The stake.
The pulley.
The lever.
The a<lze.
The rule.

The pirk.

The painter's or carpenter's scaffold.

Tlie plow.

The In am.

The i»lo\\share.
The uuidini: cord.

Jii(j tiniitamjaii (from ihnhangy a
weit^ht); also ang ialard (local
word ).

Aiujs(nnpfifia)) (from sampatfj to hang

out clothes).
Aug mantel (Sp. word).
Aug tdri.
Ang paiTgatl (used to lure or decoy

hinls).
Ang liibkl.
Ang plsi.
Lttf'ng.

Ang Ldvad; ang kanar (rare).
Ang tanlka/d (old word, talikald).
liahagan (lit., " house place " ) .
Hidamanan (lit., " i)lant place ").
Ilalannin.
Ang axnrnl.
Ang kdi'd.

Ang panahdc (from iialok, to stir up).
Ang pnla (S|». word).
Ang liani (Chinese word).
Attg gato (Sp. word ).
J ng pani'ihd nang tomi/lo { lit., ' 'screw

turner" ).
Ang hignri.
Aug panidk/Kjk (from pokpok, to

strike) .
Ang ptithao.
Aug pnlidcoL
Aug kaUun.
Ang pad.
Am/ pangfnitaa.
Aug jiiisiid,
Ang kikd.
Ang hdlkdn.
Aug p(dUuni.
Ana hdos.
Ana kald.
Aug }>anf/fiiku(i(.
Ang dards.
Aug ]uiunk(d (from sdkat, to iiieas-

nre ).
Aug jdkit (S|)., jdro).
Au<i /ud(ff»n/a.
jAug ararn (Sp., arado).

(.1/^7 SU(t>:Uf(.

Aug uijif.

Aug sugul (also means "tine

coml) ) .
Ang painitik{{roni pdik, to snap with

a line).
Ang pand.
Aug pahufdn.

Practically all names connected with horses ;ire Sjninish, as that animal
was introduced l)y tin* >paiiiarils, and the Sjninisli terms are untlerstood
throughout the Tagalo'j region. The following words, however, are useful

The yoke.
The rice tield

:»i.

.1

.1...

TAOALOO LANOUAUK.

48

^; grass,
ind rit*e straw.
»?e8 {&\9o honey),
shelter.

Sacate; damo (^yt., zacate).

Palaif.

Pulot (much fed to native ponies).

Tayakad.

Barongharoug.

I with peaked roof.

irly all names of edifices are also Spanish, but a few are native, or
been invented from other words. Among them are:

hurch.

ownhall.

chool house.

k'arehouse.
rice mill (water
rer).

ugar mill,
listillery.
imekilii.
mt.

emeterv.

ockpit.

treet.

oad.

rail or path.

(of animal).

vke.

»lantation.

ted land.

►ridge.

tamboo bridge.

ugar-cane field.

ieid; the country.

itch.

ul or prison.

uardhouse or sentry box.

sylum.

tocks.

re (conflagration).

park.

onfire (signal iire).

ocoanut grove.

orral or inclosure.

langer.

loor.

or steam

Ang simbahan (from »*m?/rt, to bear
mass; «am6a, to adore or worship).
Ang tribunal (Sp. word).
Ana encuela (Sp. wonl).
Bdhaif nang araidn (from draly to

teach; to Icam).
Ang biindfig
Angbigumn (from bigd^^ hulled rice).

Ang aiilwm.

Ang (tlakdn (from alak, wine).
Ang avngan (from dpug, lime).
Ang aampa; ang kubu; ang sauong

(mountain term).
Ang camfxj aanto (Sp. ); ang libingan

(Tagalog wort! also means

**grave").
Angmbnngan (from sabung^ to fight

with gamecocks.)
A ng langsarujan.
Ang ddan.

Ang ladnds; agtds (narrow trail).
Bolaos; onog; bagnos,
A ng pUdpil.

Ana bukirdn; ang hacienda (Sp. ).
Tubigan (from tuhig^ water).
Ang tulay.

Ang talay na kauuyan.
Ang tnUfhdn (from /u6<5, sugar cane).
Ang bukid.
Ang padaluyan,
Ang hdangxian, ( /^i7i6uiistheManihi

prison only.)
Ang Itantayan (from bantay^ guard) .
Ang tatagudn.
Ang paiTgdo.
Ang mnog.
Ang alifHtto.
Ang sigd.
Ang nidgan,
Ang karurukan.
Ang laftaiTgdn.
A ng mhig.

rds pertaining to the office are generally Spanish, although a few
ed of native origin. The most useful are:

(writing).

T-

Opisina (Sp., q/fcina).

Suhitdn; e»crUor\o (Sp. ).

Libra (Sp. ).

BiUioteca (Sp.).

Sulai (from Arabic s^urat^ a chapter

of the Koran).
Panulat; pluma (Sp.).

TAUALOO LANQUAOE.

l-encil.

/.«,«>; M,H2(f=p.).

Ink.

Tinlai&i,.).

lte.1 Ink.

TWonypiiM.

M«il.

(PudnlnhanHTomdiilii, to carrv).
ta«T«(Sp.).

P<t-offlce.

AdminittT<i6&n ih eiirrtot (Sp. ).

TVIeKraph uffiw.

ElaeiAn dt iHfgmfo* { Sp. ) .

Teletirai...

7Wfj7ram(i(S(>.).

iSilgo; Ordeniifia (Sp.).
Mi<iai>ia df rxrihir [Sp.).

Typewriter.

Paper (in general).

Papfl (Spanish lieavy \A\yeT, i-apd
iT.,rff<iha (l^'p., eommon wnd U iu-

Blotting sanrl (flne).

li-ii^/iii. Tuft. ).

BloUinit p«per.

/•a,W--,^„», (Sp,).

The rIoIw (world).

The earth (ground).

Aiigtiiiia.

Aitff biiodot.

M<iuiit&iii (M)untry.

Amj kuh<mituk»n.

Th« pre<.ipi«..
Tlie hill.

Ang UiiTyla.

Aug bitrol; g<ilo>(.

The crack jcrevioe.

Anij hilnk.

The tave.

AtigliingA; ang j/uHptb.

Aug ilung.

The hole.

Ang biila».

The iirairii'; pactiire, meadow.

A»5 1-Arang.

Thetoreet; thnlnir.

All.) ./u/«J.

ThehuHh: thebnish.

Ang''!.,muba».

The bamboo tliicket

Ang tiiimiinndti.

The reedy uriiund.

The hK-ky niaif (ijuarry).

The thorn fiush.

All., bilmiknn.

The niwlily country.

A>.gt>i,,iilit>in(IromiiiilUi,mvd).

The cpriiig.

Am/ b'd-'il iKiiig liibig.

Theotrc-amihrook.

Ann '"''"■

The river.

Aug ilfig.

Soun« of river.

Avgl..J,:.

The twnk.

Axg i^'ingpaiig.

Bank of river or aeashoK.

Aug iliiltiiiiii^mg.

The poiil.

Ang ihimo {itiiniim, water in Pam-

l«njni, llocano, etc.).

The l>oiid.

Ami nil'ig {ndloq, nrer in Bicol).

The swamp; elougti.

Aiui Lit',: ii',in /iWn (MalaUn,

fwampy place).

The ravine or ipilch.

Ai>-i il.il.

Tidewater cn-ek.

fiip., (Sp., frim.).

IWp (unlonlable) river.

Hog ii-t iiKiimm.

The depth.

Aug hil'Umuin.

TheshHllownem (of river)

AiigiiKil-iltwnaU'ig (also "ford").

The ferrv.

Am, liiii-inin.

The ferrvlwat or raft.

.\ng UiIh'iii.

The iH-ml (of river).

An.,lik6{t.\'m "curve").

Hole (ill river).

7,r.n^i (aim "cave").

The waterfall. "

Ang t'lli'm naiig ti'ihig.

The whirl|«ol.

Angtiliiili; iiii'g'iiiiijiii; angalimpuyd.

The lKittom(n( river).

Ang iliilim Ufijii; itiig.

Ang iliilim niirig Hog na putikan.

» Tagnlog rvBloii »

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

45

Gravelly or rocky bottom.
Sandy lx)ttomed.
Steep bank.
lx)w bank.
The landing place.
The current.
Strong current.
Weak current.
Very weak current.
Place where there is a strong cur-
rent.
The mouth (of a river).

Aug Ualiiii luiiuj ilog nn batohdi).

Ang ildlini luing Hog lui buhniTi/ina)}.

J*angpang ikl luntdrik.

J*angjntng lui iiuih<ihd.

A)ig dahimpasigoii.

Ang agon.

MnngoH,

Mdhiudug ngon.

Matining ngoif.

AguHon.

Aug

iraira

(also

means *' mouth'

"bar."
also

Bicol

Silking

,^1 it »..

9a-

bang'').
Tagalog is rich in nautical terms, the j>rin(ipiil ones being as follows:

The high sea; ocean.
The sea (in general).
Lake (large).
Lakelet.

Everything in the sea.
The seas themselves.

Warm water.

Salt water.

Fresh water.

The coast (sea or lake).

The reef.

The sunken rock.

The port; anchorage; landing place.

The bar.

The channel.

The light-house.

The rape; jKjint.

The island.
The gulf.
The bay.
The wave.
The tide.

High tide.
Kbb tide.
The strait.

Ang Idot (Malay, laut).

A ng (Id gat.

Dagutan.

Dagatdagalan.

Sandagalan.

Karagativn (singular in Tagalog).

I), to K.
Malaragal. D. to U.
Tdbig na dial.
Tubig )ta tabang.
A ng baybay.
Ang I tan kola.
Ang bat 6 sa ddgat.
Ang do6)7ijan (also dabnnpa^igan).
Ang -nana (also "mouth of a river" ).
Ang canal (Sp. word).
Ang parol (from Sp., /(^iro).
Ang LtnTj/os; xing Tanguay is Cavite

Point only).
Ang pulo.
A ng y-ald.
Ang btok.
Ang alon.
Ang alagonak {rsLre)\ angmarea (Sp.

word).
Ang laki.
Ang kati.
Ang kit id.

The principal terms for the lieavenly lK»dies, divisions of time, j)oints <»f
the compass, and meteorological phenomena are as follows:

The sun; the day.

The moon; the month.

The year.

One year.

Every year.

E^ch year.

Monthly.

New moon.

Full moon.
Old moon.

A tag drao. ( Hayan is a rare word for
"day." Ex.: nntldiun ang bayan,
midday or a great day.)

Ang badn.

Ang tadn.

Sangtadn.

Taontadn.

Manaon; mainanadn.

Ihiangbndn.

Jiagintg bndn.

{Kabilngan nang badn.
Palabang bndn (rare).
{Kamatayan rnmg budn,
Bagtong ( rare ) .

46

TAOALOO LANGUAGE.

Time.

The star.

Venus; the evening star.

The Pleiailes; the seven stars.

The niorninf? star.

The Hh<x>tinf( star.

Tlie I'oniet.

The sky.

The l>reak of day.

The dawn.

The morning.

Midday.

Afternorm (evening).

Night.

The daylight; sunliglit.

McM»nUght.

To-morn>w.

Yestenlay.

I>av l>efore yesterday.

A few <layH ago.

After a while.

(Thn.»e) <lays ago.

(Ten) days ago.

One week.

Every wei^k, weekly (adv.).

Antj dr(io.

Ami hituin.

TwTijUw (ingAt (lit. "light of the

sea").
Map'Aon.
Aug tala.
Ang hulalakao,
Ang hituin may biiulot.
Ang UirTgit.
Ang liimyway,
Ang madaling 6rao.
Ang umam; agn.

Ang UnTijiiitli (Malay, tdnguh-^tri).
Ang Kapon.
Ang gnhi.

Ang sinag nang drao,
Ang Himig nang Intdn,
Jiukaf.
Kahapim.
KamakaUtna.
KnnmknllAn.
Mninaijii-indya.
KatiKikatatio.
Knmaknpouo. (Kamaka expresses

"days ago."
Imntf 'lingo (corruption of Sp., Do-

wlngo, Sunday).
Lingnlingo.

The names of the <lay8 are Spanish, Sunday 1>eing called Lingo, comipte<l
fnnn Doming^. Lingo is also used for "week." The word "minute" is
al8f» taken from Spanish, and the word for hour is a corruption of the
S[>aniHh word futra. The names of the iiu^nthn, days, and other divisions
of time from Spanish are given below for convenience of the student.

Enero.
Fehrer(K

January.

February.

March.

April.

May.

June.

July.

August.

September.

Octobi»r.

November.

DecH.Mul)er.

The month of January.

Sunday.

Monday.

Tuesday.

Wednesday.

Thursday.

Friday.

Saturday.

The l>eginning.

The middle.

The end.

The hour.

Watch; clock.

Half hour.

Minute.

Mnrzo.

Ahril.

Mayo.

Junio.

Jviio.

Agoxto.

St'fptiemhre.

Octuhre.

Notiemhre.

Diciemhre.

Ang hnnng enero.

Lingo (from Sp., domingo).

Lnne*.

Martefi.

Mih'cttles.

Jueven.

VirrneA.

Sithado.

Ang ntufd.

Ang jHigitnn.

Ang katn/mmn; ang haw^&n,

Ang oras (from Sp., hora).

Oramn.

Kalahniing oran.

Minuto. (Sp. won!).

TAGALOO LANGCAGE.

47

Se<'ond.

The (iry season.
The wet season.
The dayHght.

The darkness.

The north.
The eai*t.

The south.

The west.«

The northeast wind.

Wind or air.

The weather.

Reasonableness.

The heat.
The cold.

The earthquake.

The dew.

The earth smell.

The mist or fog.
The cloud.

The rain.
The drizzle.

A hard shower.

The inundation (floo^l).

The rainbow.

The lightning flash.

The thunderbolt.

The thunder.

The storm.

The hurricane; typhoon.

The cyclone; tornado.

The tempest.

The M'hirlwind.

The ice.

The hail.

Heavy rain cloud.
The snow.

(Smell of earth after

Segumlo (8p. word).

Ang tayarao (from drao^ sun).

Aug tagtildn (from tUdu, rain).

An^ kalivanagau (from liuanag,
light; Ilocano, iMoag, capital of
I locos Norte), noun.
Ang kadUUndn (from difhu^ dark),

noun.
Ang binlinidn. (D. to R. )

Ang h'duga (also "the north wind " ).

Ang silaiTga nail (lit., '* rising place,"
sun, etc.).

Anglt(d)dgat {aho "the south wind" ).

Ang Lalunurun (from lunod, druwn).

Ang (imihan.

Ang hcnTghi.

Ang jHinahdn.

K<ipanah(nnin; also mus'tn. {Kajnt-
n(dionnn also means "opportu-
nity," in some cases.)

Ang hiit. Heat (a))stract), Kainitan.

Ang laniig. Cold (abstract), hdami-
gan.

Aug hndol.

Am; hainog.

Ang idiniooni.
min.)

Ang I'dap.

Ang alapadp.

f Ilare words are launngn,
a little rain; btwa-
M//a,adrizzle; anidn,
moderate steady rain ;
tikaiil:, gentle, contin-
uous rain, and lonntk,
a rain with great
drops.

Imng fnigno muig uldn.

Ang hdhd.

Ang bafuigJiari (lit., "the king's
sash").

Ang kidluL

Ang linlik.

Ang kn/og.

A)ig on<h.

Ang hnggd.

Ang hohaui.

Ang si gad.

Ang ipoipo.

Ang h'nio (Sp. word. Also tidtig
na hafo nndamig or "cold-stone
water." )

Ang g rani zo{^\K word; rare in Philip-
pines).

Ang goot (rare).

Ang niece (.S|>. word; known from
books only).

Ang uldn.
A)ig andjdn.

«A8 the TagalogB were originally sea rovers, tljc luavenly InKJies nunk in the kmi to
them, so they say,* the "drowning place" for the west.

48

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

Navigation was considerably developed by the Tagaloes prior to the
arrival of the Spaniards, and a considerable maritime vocabulary developed.
The words in ordinary use are:

"oarsman,"

The vessel.

The sail.

The art of sailing; navigation.

Anyone aboard.

Sailor; mariner.

Pilot.

The rud<ler.

The compass.

The mast.

The vard.
The outrigger.
The bow.
The stem.
The boat pole.
The i)addle.
The paddler.

The oar.

The oarsman; mwer.

Paddling.

Rowing.

SmiUing.

The cover (of boat or canoe).

The canoe.

The prau.

Political and natural subdivisions are as follows, in so far as they pertain
to social relations:

.4 11^ 9a9akt/dn,

Ang layag.

Ang piiglcddyag,

Ang mkau (formerly

**paddler").
Tagfiragat (lit., ** sea dweller").
Malim (Arabic) ; prdctico (Sp.) .
Aug ugit,

Ang hrujula (Sp. ).
Ang palo ( Sp. word ) ; ang sundong

(rare).
Ang batangan (Batangas Province).
Ang katig,
Ang do/mg.

Ang hull nang sntakydn.
A7ig tikln.
Ang ^agwdu.
Ang inananagivdn (S. to N.); (Fil.

Sp., banquero),
Ang gdod.
Ang maiTgagdod,
Ang pagsagu'dn.
Ang piuj-gaod.

Aug paglinliu (Chinese word, liu),
Angkarang,
Ang bangkd,
Ang par ao.

The Philippine Islands.
The Visayan Archipelago.
The Tagalog country.
The Visavan region.
The province.

The jurisdiction (of a municipality,

township).
The court

The town.

The town proper.

The fellow-townsman.

The house.

The neigh lK)r.

The settlement; hamlet.

The barrio (wanl).

The head man of a barrio.

The mayor; alcalde.
The secretary.

The treasurer.

Ang kapuluan FHIpirtas.

Ang kapuluan Bisayd.

Ang katagalngan.

Ang kabimydan.

Ang hlairigan (formerly this word

meant " anchorage,'* **port'*).
Ang sdkop.

Ang hokoman (from hokoint a judge;
Arabic hakhn^ doctor, philoiFO-
pher, judjje).

An<i baifan (including the rural bar-
rios).

Ang kabayanan (excluding rural bar-
rios).

An^ kababayan.

Ang bdhay.

Ang kapidbdhay.

Ang nayon (Sp., sitio),

Ang Uirangay (old word for vessel).
Atig pulo nnng barangay.
Ang cabeza nang barangay (Sp.
tenn).

Ang prendenie; ang cupitdn (Sp.).

Ang nt'cretario sa bayan; ang kalihim.
{Li him means "a f?ecret." )

Aug tettorero; ang taga iiigat yaman
(lit, the "wealth guarder*').

I

TAQALOG LANOUAOE.

The chid of the town.

The Hp|>er jmrt (nf town, ri-

i-er, AiiifHiiiii

The tiTiiis for ruelalu, ininera
foreign origin. They are;

1., ar.. -.al.ly ,

OolJ.

';i>iM.

('o|.per.

Gold and copper (alloy).

•i lfr<i[i

>xW\

whil^ieml-).
A:o,i<'e (fi[i.).

T"m'«iifi (from h.ig<i, iiHylliiliK ml-
liot;Vonu' Siiv from Sancik, I'Iiiith).
Ai..,j.
il'iriii'j IJJjilay, g'ld'ing: ong.

liol,

..}.

Sulphur.

,NV,

The oniinary lerniH ii>'e<l by tishermei:

Fishing.

.|J

Ca^ualtish.T.

■ If

The tisliemian (rra-le).

,ll

Theti^liimte.

A>

The fi«h line nr line.

A>

The hook.

Ai

The l«it.

A>

The net (small).

A:

The wine; lanw ni'I.

The (ihIi tru]>.

A,

Wieker Itasket for catching 1

i»h. -Ii

The arrow.

.1)

The bow.

.1.

The prindpal parlrt of tli.

,.hui.l:llL I.O

uin.alb.Klie», ure named u!

1 follows:

The head.

.Ii

The ly«iy, the person.

.1.

The bone.

Ai

The flesh.

The blood.

\-h

The pulse.

Ai

The Bkin.

A>

The pore.

Theekull.

The brain.

Ai

The nen-e.

The vein.

A,

The membrane.

A:

Tbehair (of thehead).

A,

6855—06 1

TAGALOG LA NO CAGE.

Hair (pubk).

BiUM. (Boiiv hair or featlien,

i<ilahiljo). '

The rrown of the head.

Ang bumbuuan.

The temple.
The foreliewl.

Ang iiHivitan.
Aug nod.

The eyehrow.

Ang kVa<i.

The eyelid.

Aug liubong iiang maiA (lit., the rouf

of the eye).

The eyelaah.

AngpiliimaiA.

The eye.

Ang mnlA.

The pupil of the eye.

The white of the eye.

Aug Mig nang malA.

The tear ttuL-t.
The nose.
The lip.

Any datttgan nang luka.

Ang iltitiff.

Anil ''"'" (probably from Sp., labia.

The niuuth.

Angbibig (Malay, bibir, lip).

The <;hin.

Aug Uilxi (Sp., barha, chin).

The cheek.

Ang uitiuji.

Angbigiile (Sp.; old worii, muay).

The lieard.

Ang bnrban (Sp.; old wordB, garni.

hiniiy. i/amjol).

The tongue.

AngdUa.

The ear

Aug liiiiiifn.

The tooth.

Ang ,7gipin.

The iLolar.

Ang Imgiing.

The Eum.

The hard palate.

Aug -fitiigid.

Ang iTgataiqjaiA.

The soft {lalate.

The throat.

Aug lalamvnnn.

The larynx.

/(inj, awheel).

The lower jaw.

Aug giliimg.

The Ptomach.

Aug Kikmuni.

Aug bilitta.

The aiiuH.

Aug (timlxing.

The neck.

A,.g liig.

The nii)>e of the neck.

Aug Mot.

The thoiikler.

Aug '"dibit.

The shoulder hiade.

AngMdgiil.

The arm.

Ang Uirato (from Sp., hrato).

The hnn.l.

Aug kuiiiaii (aim "arm").

The jialiii.

Ann iu'dail nana tamav-

The llnuer.

A,.„ d'dir).

The thumb.

Aug bi.JalfiH.

The index finder.

Ang liintHturU (from tutur6, to point-
to).
Aug dull, (the chief, diitto: MalttJ'-

rfnto/j smiiLltBllR-r).

The middle Hiiger.

The ring fiii)Eer.

Ang fimu^iiiig Kingning (fmui nimiofr

to put on).
Aug kidingtiiTi/iin.

The little (in(i«r.

The wrirt.

jeWelry). "

The elbow.

AngtHo.

Tlie nail.

Angtid-fi.

The knuckle.

Anil biitd nang datiri.

The armpit.

Ang kilUm.

The breHHt

Aiig diMib.

The b<ieoiii.

Aiig»"fi:

The rib.

Ang ladiiing.

TAQALOa I.ANOUAGR.

Thelurig. An.il.m/&.

Tlielwck. Aug lil^od.

The Bpiiie. Atnj i/nliigoJ.

The thorax. Arg'lkin.

The lap.

The liver.

Thf- pill hlHdder.

The kkliiey.

The lilailder.

The wonib (iitenia).

The iilikeenta.

The vulva.

The I* nig.

The ledticle.

The trroin.

The hip.

The Imttock.

The lbi(!h.

The leK.

The knee.

The calf.

The ^hin.

Tln^ fwt.

The heot.

TheHiihle.

The I'hidbJine; Ihe til

The sole of ihefii"!.

A.,gUU.,yb.M

Some of the onliiiiiiy clifwasen knoivn lo the Tajialiifw a

The cholera. .I..y to;.™ {Sp. worii).

Thehul>oniv platrii.-. Ami i,efir huh.hiicit (S]..

The smallpox. Ami l.iditlimn.

Sii-kiiens (illiies-s); jiaiii. Anfifiikil.

Therelai^-. Ami LU-a.

The (ever. Aug Uignnl (Sp., (•ilmlii

Deafnets.
LamenesH.

ln.anlry.

The eouKh.
The a!<thmB.
The mump«.
The noeebleed.
Strantfury.
Flatuleacy.

TAOAl'OO LA.NOIIAOK.

TlieaiiKuloration; lividity.

A...jUu,„.

The cramp.

Aug i-lit<it.

The hiccough.

The crn.

An'illi,»t.

The wart.

Aixj t-Uigi.

Th«toot-»ore{(rin.ilHrt..(.hill>l«iiw).

All'/ iiIifuiii/&.

The wnunil or win-.

A.;.j -<<!y<i.

Tliu inflammation of tho lymphatir

Aug t«lani.

Kland..

The iHrtl.

Amjpi;,Mi.

The i»«-.

Amj iiiml.

The AI(!|ipo butl-m (»htri).

A III/ iiijiliup.

The i>ini]>l<'.

Aug liiffiihilmit.

The'Mhobcit.h."

Any ijali,. {H^.. ^,mn).

Artiilex n! clotliinn Imve nativo u

Bimti. m a wlu.lc. tnit nianv liave also

iH-rri taken (nmi other l;lngut^^. The leudiii); ttnnH an-.

ThetlolhinK; ■inwi.

All') ihmil.

The style <t( <ire»<ing.

The hat.

hat).

The native hehiiet

Aiiu iitntol.

Thewwt; nhirt.

Amttiiro.

The tr-juMen..

Aiiij mUiuAl (from ttlnnr (Arahii-),

tr<..i«T«).
Aniimii'in (lit., "underfoiit").

The shoe.

The .irswen..

AiHj mhuunlhii (S|i. wiml).

The (KN'llB.

AnijmU-riw,.> ,<3MM.r,t).

TheHtockings.

An;i vieilian (Sp, won! ),

The Klij.iH;r8.

Angfiurlnr (S|i„ rbinfli').

The Hkirt

Ani/M,\.,.\ S|.„*/r.7.i .

Thi' umien-ltirt.

Aiii/ niigiuiii (S|i,, fiingiiii).

The petticoat Ptrinjt.

Aug Jill iiiigli*.

Theapnin; ovewkirt.
The riiff; iiwkfrchief.

Aug ti'i'i'.
Aug uliiiiifinii.

The han(lkerrhii-f.

AiKji-myi (Mex, Span,, paffn, Imn-

The rilibon.

AiigliilAn{^V.\toti\).

The iiiantillH.

Aug liimhoug.

Th.-conik

Ai,g»«kh,,.

The liup TOinb.

Aug tihiixl (also "iilownliaif").

The t.Htton.

Aug I'lionm (Iroiii Sp., Im,i,;„, a liul-

The fan.
The pxrasol.
The cane; staff.
Tlie staff of office.

The pipi".

The native pi|>e (of leavea).

The coat of mail.

The breech-doth; sash.

Aug Kiitgiiiig (Malav, i-hinfhiii).

Aug hihin.

Aug rii'iilim (iroin Sp., eneiitn, a Imul

<if ther.>sarv),
Angnilmhiilrom Girmcn, ",\lt. C*r-

n.,.]-),
Aug jiiiiiiiity.

TAOALOO I-ANOUAOE.

Till.- [■riiid[«il |iarlB o£ tretf, ji

>lanls,

, ,-t.-., iire iiamo'l iii- Ik-Iow:

The Iree.

,l„;/(■,iV'/(»l«»'•^^ood").

The triitilt.

,l"i//.ll»0.

The rool.

.hi;/ ugiil.

The bull.

Aii'jl.-do (also Ilu' yomiu .iK'oa

The flower.

An:/ '"''''*'"*■-

Tlieph.M)l: fiprout.

Atiij •'■■'Uou'j: iitig Mhiiiij.

Th« l.raml..

Awi fi-Ti/ii.

IjiiiiImt: wooil; timber.

Ki'ihoy.

Thi> leaf.

Awiihihou.

Th« Imrk.

Anij"i>'d:

Till- pap.

Am/ 'jiittix. {(Iiilim is i]iu> "milk

The rruil.

Awi IriiiTiia (also used for friiil
arecuiwlm).

The lerms for rigar, I'izarelle,

an.l tobam. lire ol Spanis^h oriein, bul

prm'ti.-u of chewinj; l^tfl iiul, rolle.)

with the leaf of the U'lel iiu.i mi

with (.laked lime, ha>^ giveci si.1.

le native termr'.

The areia nut.

Afii ImiT'itt (fruit of Artro rulei-hu

The iH-tei kaf.

A-j ;/..,., (leaf of /V '-««')■

The lime (mineral).

.■[»;/ V:/-

The "bnyo" or iliew.

A<,; l.:i»0.

The nutcracker (lung).

A.,-/ l«nh>r.

The iime t<tiek.

.[if'/ 'ij-iiii'iu. (Same wonifur "lii
kibi."')

The foIlowinK list of clifmities, profei<sicuw. ami Iratlex, tt.'., «ive8

priiiciiwl lerms use.! l.y the Tagalog ]

raiv:

The I'resiOenl.

.1»7 IWy!da,lf «i Aui/rini.

The novernor-secieral.

The jinivincial governor.

A:.fJ ■ ■ ' ' '..■..,;/„„.

The judge.

The Pope.

a',,., /.„l.a y>^.. «<..,l'|."

.l„V.-r/-,/v../.'- (S[., wrinl).

The hiBhop.

.li.,/o'.iV' (^1'. H'.rd),

The iiriest.

At,;/ /.iitr (fr.im Sp., pwlre. a prie

Theueneral.

.•li../'/""'-"'(Sp.}."

Thec-olonel.

A-!/ nj,-<„„l [Hi..).

The lieutenant-colonel.

All'/ teiiiiiile roruiifl (Sp. ).

The major.

luunilini.'olli.'er).

Thec-aplaiii.

J»y™,.,(««(Sp.).

The lieutenant.

A<,.,l.mf..k()i],.).

.1,,;, <-//-,>,.-.

TheEer^eant. '

A,.,, ^.•rt,.;.lu {i^^,-U

The ior|M)ral.

'a,.\, •■■■'-"'''•' K^\:).

ThesoUiier.

A,nj muflnh..

The king.

A4l"'r:

The noble.

Aii'lg"! |i-i|ual toSp., A.ti) .

The noblewoman.

A<i'j ihi;mwi liinial to .-ip., /(..""t

Auij Vfi'i'i.-'-"! (i-i|iliil lo S|... SiT.;i

The lacty.

.^1-;/^;.,.;., (.-.lUiil toSp.,.S,»'<r.r|.

The lawyer.

Ak'I l':-ii'ii'i'iliiiiijiil (front (urijfli/,

The Joctor.

Ami ,„-mi,ul.,m-l {WoKi ;/..)»"(, ■>!

54

TAOALOO LANGUAGE.

The merchant.

Tlie seller.

The buyer.

The teacher.

The pupil.
The preacher.

The clerk.

The interpreter; translator.

The writer.

The reader (professional).

The reader (casual).

The student.

The printer.

The chief; head; lx>8s.

The partner.

The companion.

The carpenter (housebuilder).

The woo<i pawyer.

The tailor; dressmaker.
The shoemaker.

The butcher.

The field hand.
The sower.

The reaper (crop gatherer).

The day-laborer.
The metal founder.

The smith (any metal).

The maker of .

The potter.

The inventor.

The peddler.

The washerman or washer- woman.

The cook.

The salt maker.
The oil maker.
The weaver.
The dyer.
The house servant
The collector.

Aug mniTlfaiTgalakal (fnjm kithikal,
business).

Ang tagapagbili (from maghiii^ sell-
ing) .

Aug tngapumiil (from jtanilinlli,

buying).

Aug mamjadral (from (in//, teach-
ing, etc.).

Angardlan ( from draiy learning, etc. ).

Aug mauijaug&riil (from ami, teach-
ing, etc.).^

Ang maninmUit (from suUxt, letter).

Aug dnlubasa (from 6<W(i, reading).

Aug ffumiisuiat (from nulatf letter).

Aug tagalxim (from htsa^ reading).

Ang bumabaita (from basOf reading).

Ang uagoAral (from Aralj learning,
etc.).

Aug manHUmlmg (from limlKig^
printing).

Aug pluakaimno ( from pimo^ trunk).

Anghmuua ( from samUy a^jsoi^iation ).

A ug kasauui ( from mivia, association ) .

Ang uuloague

Aug maulalagarX (from lagarlt a
saw).

Aug 7uanaiiahi (from taht^ sewing).

A nggumagav^ nangmqnu ( from gawd,
to make).

Aug viaummatay uang buca (from
;><//(!//, to kill).

Aug magmmka (from aaka^ to till).

Aug viagtatan'nn (from tanim, t4)
sow ) .

Ang iuangogajHt» (from gapaa, to
cut, reap).

Aug magbububn (froi

«, pav, 1
11 onoo,

to ca.«t

Ang ujHihan (from «/>«, pay, salary).

ug magbi

metals).
Angpaudau ( Sansk., ;>amf((, science,

skill). ' *

Aug uiangagaivd uaug
gated, to make).

( from

Aug magpajHilai/nk (from jKiIayok, &
jar).

Ang majHighlang (from lalang, in-
vention).

Ang injglahko ( from lakOf to peddle).

Aug tagafmglaba (from 8p., lavar, to
wash).

(Aug tagapagluto (from lutd to cook) .

i Aug tagajKnigoinua ( from Sp. , cocina,

[ kitchen).

Ang uiagaanin (from asin, salt).

Aug maglaJaiujis (from langis, oil).

Ang mauhnhahi. ( from habi^ to weave.

Aug uiauiuina (from tinaf to dye).

Aug alila.

Aug tngapduliTgil (from gingily to
collect, dun).

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

55

The cashier; paymaster.

The hunter (professional).
The creilitor.

The debtor.
The bearer.
The predecessor.

Tlie successor.
The heir.

The grass cutter.

The nurse.

The wet nurse.
The n) id wife.
The i)awnbroker.

The beggar.
The thief.

The slave.

Aufj htgnpag^juyad (from hayad^ to

pay a debt ) .
AiKj nuuTijaiujuHo (from (lao, a dog).
Any pitmykaknataiTytDi (from uittny,

a debt).
Aug innyaiany ( from tUany, a debt ).
Any inuydald (from daldj to carry).
Any hlindlnhnn (from lialilij to fol-

1(»W).

A)iy kahulili (from halili, to follow).

Any nuiynmmana (from mamt^ heir-
ship).

Any inaydad(tm6 (from damd, gras.s,
herb).

Any t'fyapayidaya (from alaya, to
care for).

Any siidaa.

Any h'tlol.

Any indpaypcttnho (fnjm tuho, a
pledge).

Any puUihe.

Any nnttpiandk'do (from nakdOf to
steal).

Any td'ipin.

Section Fouk.

THE ADJECTIVE.

The adjective is a word used in a grammatical st^nse to qualify, limit, or
detine a noun, or a wonl or phrase which ba.s the value of a noun, and it
expresses quality or condition as belonging to something: Thus, "l)lack-
nese" is the name of a cjuality and is a noun; "black" means possessing
blackness an<l so is an adjective. The adjective is used ( 1) attributively,
(2) appositively, and (3) predicatively. Kxamples, (1) "A good man,"
(2) '*A man cood and great, (3) "The man is good."

Equally in Tagalog as in English, this i.s the meaning of the adjective,
and owing to the greater flexibility of the former the construction of such
words is much more clearly to V>e seen. Like Knglish, some root words
are adjectives by intrinsic signification and may be called "simple adjec-
tives." Amongthesimpleadjectivesare/>a^o( iiew), malud (dear, precious,
noble), hdmak (vile), hnnyhnn (foolish), tahunik ((juiet, trantjuil), and
totoo (true). But the greater number of adjectives in Tagalog, as in Eng-
lish, are compounds formed from roots, which may be sometimes nouns,
bv means of prefixes, infixes, and suffixes like the English sullixes "Iv,"
*Mike" "able," etc., as in "friendly," "childlike," " remarkable," etc.
The ordinary particle in Tagalog use<l in the formation nf adjectives is the
prefix mOf undoubtedly a contraction of mntf, to have or pos.^ess, as there
are nouns with which nniy is still retained with the nonn to form an adjec-
tive. Among such wm adjectives may be mentioned mnyundd (beautiful),
from ganddj the root expressing the idea of beauty or good appearance,
and maruTxony ( wis^e), from dunony, the root expres.^^inj; tfie idea of wis<lom.
It will 1)8 observed that nut, like some other particles softens d to r when
d commences a word.

When prefixed to nouns denoting things which may be had or possessed,
ma denotes an abundance of whatever may be signified by the noun.
Examples: Si Juan ay niayintd (John has uukIi gold); nuiifilid any hdliay
(the house has many rooms).

The particle wia has at least nine other functions, whicli will be explained
in the appropriate places.

56 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

}fay is used really as the verb "to have" in the phrase Ako^y may saint
(1 am sick [ill], literallv, "1 have sickness or pain" ). In asking if a person
is ill or in pain the verb is sometimes reduplicated; e. j;., May may m kit kaf
(Are you ill [or in pain]?).

3/a adjectives may be conjugated with the definite infix in to express
opinion; e. g., mlmimarummy ko Ho (1 think this is wise). Ma is redupli-
cated to exi)ress the f)resent tense; minarunong ko ltd would mean "I
thought this was wise."

Conjugated with the indetinite particle ukuj {nay in j)re8ent tense), the
adjective assumes a verbal form, with the imjdietl idea of boasting or pre-
tending what may be signified l)y the nu)t; as, uaymntnannKmy si Felipe
(Philip boasts of being wise); na()niam<ty(in<h't si Lolmiy (Dolores [Lola]
pretends to be beautiful). The idea may also be conveyed by ** believes
himself" (or "herself"), what may be <lenoted by the root; e. g., "Lola
believes herself to be beautiful."

The particle nn also forms some adjectives, in which the first syllable of
the root is generally rejieated. These n<i adjectives also have an indefi-
nite verbal meaning. Kx.: Xnnnfido (thirsty, to be thi?*sty), from ulido;
ndjf'iydl (tired, to be tireil); payalin (a tired person): namalay (dead, to
be dea<l, from pat'ty). J* is here chanjred to in for euphony.

Some adjectives are also forme<i from roots by the ])relix mapag^ as
iiiiifjaytniTijtiyno (almsive, insulting [words or acts imi)lied]).

Others are formed by the ]>re(ix niapti; as, )iKipnin<nis(iy (boastful, vain-
glori<^>us, ostentatious), from hansny, ostentation. />* is softened to in.

The indetinite particles inoy and nny, when prefixed to some roots, gen-
erally with reduj>lication of the lirst syllable of the same, form adjectives
in some cases. Kx.: Maythrni/a (fraiidulent, cheating), from daydf the
initial d being softened to r; and nnyiinA (sr^le unicpie, only), from w<», one.

The particle /ndka, in its signification of cause, forms adjectives similar in
meaning to those in Knglish ending in "able," "ing," etc., when prefixed
to roots ca|)a))leof such significations. The first syllable of the root is gen-
erally reduplicated, l»ut not always. Kx.: Makahttmut (jigreeable, pleasure
causing), from tniia; mak'ttniann (laughable, comic), from /(i?(rt, and maka-
mfia (disgusting), from mna^ etc.

A few adjectives are formed by the prefixed ]iarticles ntafa and pah, ap
m<tf<i}tiniiTi]n (lukewarm, apjdied to water), malukoh) (quite warm), and
paldouay ((juarrelsome ), from andii (quarrel, emnity ).

Some adjectivi's are formed by the reduplication of a root when the r(X)t
has no more than two syllables. If there are more than two syllables the
first two only are reduplicated. This rule is general in Tagalog. Ex.:
Ila/oln'iln (mixed), from hn/n, root of theidi'a "to mix;" aunnditnnod (con-
secutive), fnnii s'lhod, r«Mit expressing the idea of following, etc. The
restrictive particle k<> is sometinn's prefixed to these redui>licated roots,
inq)lying a leaser (h'lrree than with nvi or ukui: as, kannl:its(ikit (painful),
froMj s'lhit, root expressinix the idea of illness or pain. An example of how
far a polysyllable is leduplicated is furnishe<l by the wo?'d knyinhaginhdua
(wholesome, sahilirious) , from yiidtnun, idea of relief, betterment, rest.

There a?-e a very few a'ljectives formed by the union of two words of
opposite meaniriL', of which mninj-sti/any (n<'Utral, indecisive), from nrony
( to vro back ), and snlninj (lo go ahead), may be taken as the type.

The particle in {hm alter an acutelv a<'cented v<»wel) suffixed to nianv
adjectives give> the idea ol a jxmsmu or object having the quali'v denoted
by the root. Iv\.: }ftisiu(nhin (a loviriir i»erson), from sinit'i, love; tanK)?n}t
(a iiseliil [or available] article), from fanin, use, utility, and bahnsagin (a
brok^'U or liail thiiiLr i, from /msnf/, idea of breaking, fracturing, etc., any-
thing like L'iass. a plat(\ the hea<l. etc. The first syllable of the root is
here rc'luplicateil.

.1// i/inti), which is generally a i>lace suffix, is sometimes added to
adjectives in whi<'h the idea of ]»lace or locati(ui is inherent, and occa-
sionally with those which do not admit the suffix in for euphonic or other
reasons. I'.x.: JH )nadii<nitin (im{)a*isal)le or impenetral)le), from di (not).

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 57

and ddan Troad), and maliisan (patient j>erson), in denoting what may \)e
suffered when suffixed to maiiitf; a«, matimu (what suffered or endured).
This, however, l)elongs more proper! v under the particles, where the dif-
ference in the use of in and an is set forth at length.

In when inserted after the first consonant of some nouns gives the idea
of like, and one at least is sometimes used as an adjective, it is bivaia
(youth), from h^itd. (child), and is sometimes used to meiin "young,"
although bago (new) is sometimes used with the same idea, as in the words
bagong tduo (unmarried man or bachelor, literally "new person").

The English nouns and phrases which are used as adjectives are ex-
pressed in Tagalog by means of the ties g, I'g, or na^ the word which is
niodifie<l prec!eding the niodilier, the oi)p(;site to what is done in English.
The tie is attached to the modified word and answers somewhat to the
English '*of." Ex.: Scilaming ftilak (a mirror of silver, a silver looking-
glass) (g); tinterong bubog {an inkstand of glass, a glass inkstand) (ng);
singsingna gintd (a ring of gold, a gold ring) ; bahoy na batd (a stone house,
a house of stone), the last two examples showing the use of the tie na.
Sometimes the tie is omitted if the mo<lilied word ends in a consonant
other than n, but it is not considered elegant to do so.

Adjectives like the English "golden," ".•silvery," "wooden," etc., are
expresseil in different ways in Tagalog, generally by nieans of the ties
or by different particles indicating "likeness," which will be explained
hereafter.

Negative adjectives like those formed in English by the prefixes un
( Anglo-Saxon ) , in ( before b and p softening to m for euphony ), im ( I-atin ),
a, on (Greek), are formed in Tagalog by the particles dl (not), vatd
(without), and sometimes hindi {no). Ex.: Di malajntan ( unaijproach-
able), from lapit^ idea of approaching; dt nmbilang (innumerable), from
bUang (to number); di inadaanan (impassable or imi>enetrable), from
fl&an (road) ; walang bahaUi (apathetic, indifferent, careless) ; v^alnng hangdn
(without end, lasting, eternal, infinite), and Hindi no mnm uruja (unfruitful),
from bunga (fruit), with na and reduplicati'd first syllable of root (softened
to in from b) to indicate present tense (literally, "not fniit-l>earing").
The use of di and wald is illustrated by <li makabaj/od and mdang niagbayad^
the first meaning "notable to pay" and the second "without means of
payment," both being about equal to "insolvent."

As in English, there is no variation in the adjective for gender and cane, but
the adjective may l>e pluralized. For the i)lural ( the moditied word being
understood in some cases) the word moiTija is uned with simple adjet'tives —
as, ang mangd hunghang (the foolish [|)er8ons] ) — and the first syllable of the
root is repeated if it consists of one or two letters for compound adjectives.
If the first syllable of the root contains more than two letters, the first two
letters only are reduplicated. Mawjd is also used by many with the plural
comt>ouna adjective. Ex.: Ang marnnhtong, or ting inaiTija tnarnrnnong
(the wise [people] ).

The adjective may precede or follow the noun modified, and it would
seem that the latter form is to be preferred, as it agrees with Malay (as
with Spanish) construction. However, with tlu^ spread of English it is
not unlikely that the custom of using the adjective before the noun may
become the usual construction, as it is equally as correct as the other way.
Ex. : Ang mangd balniyeng inagandd; ang niaiu/d mngnndang bahaye; ang baba-
yeng magagandd; ang magagandang babayf; any nmiujd bahnycng inagagnndd,
and ang maiTgd magagandang bidtaye. All six of the foregoing phrases mean
eimply "the beautiful women," the first four being preferable.

The follow^ing list of adjectives will give the principal ones in ordinary
use. The plan has l>een followed of giving adjectives with certain mean-
ings, followed by those of opposite si<;nirt(ations, or at least in well-detined
groups. Words having suostantially the same meaning are called syno-
nyms; those of opposite meaning, antonyms. Wonlswith the sa?nesonn<l
but different meanings are called homonyms. Some Tagalog a<ljectives
require several different words in English to express their varying mean-

58

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

ing, just as occurs in translating English into Tagalo^ or any other lan-
guage. Practice alone will fully instruct the student, owing to the localisms

and provincialisms of the language,
space justifies.

Dear; noble; precioun; esteemed.

Cheap, ignoble, etc.
Useful, available (thing).
Useless; without benent.

Good.

Had.

Harmful; hurtful; slanderous.

Strong.

Weak.

Large, big, grand.

Small.

Bulky; massive.

Much; plenty.

Excessive; superfluous; remaining.

Little; some.

Spacious; ample; wide (as room,

road, etc.).
Broad; wide; level; flat.

Disproportionately wide (or broad).

Narrow (as street, door, opening).

Tall; high; noteil (metaph.).
Dt»ep.

Low; shallow; humble (metaph.).
Long; also gigantic.
Short; brief.

As many examples will be given as

Mahal. Aug minamahat, the es-
teemed, dear, etc., person or thing.

Mura.

Tamoh'm. TamOy use, utility, benefit

Walana kabolohdn. Ex.: Walang
kabmohdn ang gated mo^ your work
is without value; uselei^.

Mabuti, Mahviing tauo, a gooil per-
son.

Miutamd. Kammcuinf evil.

Makapaparujanydya. From anydya,
payiy and maka^ with pa, A gooci
example of the building up of
wonls in Tagalog. Panganyaffnng
tauOy a man who destroys the
property of another.

Malakdf. Mnlakds na t&uo, a strong
person . MalakAs na h angin^ a h igh
wind.

Mahind. Kahinaarij weakness.

Malnkl. Kalak-hdn^ grandeur; size.

Maliit.

Matamhdk.
Mnrami ( from dami. ) Karamihan,

plentv; abundance.
}f<idid. *

Luhhd (also means **very" before
another adjective. ) Lubhang saktt,
serious illness.

Kannti. ^Manmang kang Tagdlogi
/Do you understand Tagalog? Op6,
yes, sir. ^Inglht Kauntt^ p6, a
little, sir.

Afaluarig. Maluang 7ia silid^ a wide
(or spacious) room.

Maldfrtiff. ATo/aparan, breadth. Ma-
Idpnd na ij^lp, broad minded.

Maiuag. MaJnag na looby a magnan-
imous heart (metaph.).

' Mak'ipot. Makipot ang ddan, a nar-
row road. Makipot na tgip, nar-
row-minded. Kakipotanj narrow-
ness.
MakUid. Makitirany narrowness.

Matans. Kaiaamn^ tallness, height.

Mal/tlim. Kalalhnany depth. ^faU\'
Urn tia gdlity deep anger.

Mahnhd. Kababaany low ground;
also humility. Mababang looby a
submissive (humble) disposition.

Mahabd. Mahabang ttdayy a long
bridge. Mahabang tauoy a gigan-
tic man.

Maikli variation {maikst). Maikling
buhayy a short life.

TAGALOG LANQUAOE.

59

Close; short (aa hair, beard, etc.)
Square; equal on all sides.

Round; circular.

Thick (as a board, book, etc.).
Thick (as liquor, clothes, etc.).

Coarse; rough.

Rare; thin.
Slender; fine.

Heavv.

Light (not heavy); easy (nietaph.).

Strong; intense; heavy.

Solid.

Presseil; compact; packed; solid.
Hollow (as a tree, etc. ).

Clean; neat.

Pure; limpid; clear.

Turbid; muddy (as water); bleared
(as eyes); thick (a.M the speech).

Pure (and without mi.vture).

Light; fine (like chaff, paper, etc.).
Dirty; filthy; disgusting; nai^ty.

Dirty; disgusting, etc. (Southern),
Filth v; indecent.
Innumerable; numberless.
Full; complete.
Insufficient; not enough; less.

Empty; sometimes wide.

Sd<jad.

Parist'ikat (from snkat, to measure,

and /)</n>, equal, as).
Mnb'ilog. Kahiloinuiy or paffkahUo'j,

roimdness.
Malit7(jin ( rare) .

Makapal.

Mail mil. MaVnnit na ddmit, thick
clothes.

MagdspaiK}. M<i(jA»p<nnj mi kanin,
coarse food. (Synonym, mai/dpdnf/
konin. )

Mndiilnng.

M(Uiipiii. Kanlpisan, slenderness.
Mnnij/is na kataufin, slender
Ixwlied.

Mnbujat. MabUfut na looh, heavy
hearted.

Miujddn. Kufjaanaji, lightness. J/r/-
gadn itoiif/ knhoif, this wood is light.

MatUidi. Mdthul'nuj gamo^, strong
medicine. Katitidi, a counter-
weight or balance. Mntind'nuj looh,
heavy hearted.

Mniijt'nuj (this word is provincial and
not generally used to-day).

Ma>i'ni}<in.

Miujutnig. ( luawjaii itong haligi lt<\
this harigue (house pillar) is hol-
low.

MdUnia. A<////i<>//j, cleanliness, ^fn-
lin{f< U(i dnniit, clean clothes, ^fn'
llnis no /oo/>, clean hearted.

Molindo. Tnhig na imdindo, or tna-
liudit wt ti'ihlgj i>ure or limpid
water. Malindo na looh, j)ure
hearted.

Malahf/.

Tagiinas.
WiMia.

lahfis. Ddias na gintd, pure gold.
Kahn ( a local word is galhok or galho) .
Mddtnui. Kannnhan (c()ntr. ), dirti-
ness, iilthinesH, nastiness. Madn-
niihon, dirty, etc., object.
Madiri. Madirihin, dirty, et(;., per-

S(dauohi. Kosidanolaan, tilth, in<le-

<ency.
J>i niah'dong. { from di, not, an<l

h/hmg, idea ot cniintin;:, iiund>er. )
J^nnn. M<i(/pund ka ito, c<>nq)lete or

till thi>. ^
Knhtng. KaknhnTj/in, waste, lack.

Ku/ang na hnnta. a lacking idea.

J'id:nhn7i/iit nto sn opni/, dnnimsh

the lire.
PoiKing. Also nnUing Iniiuht, with-

^\^^f i>nl r» or »n«»5»f

60

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Ojntnu'tecl; cramped (as a room)
Mixed.

Consecutive; in order.

Entire; whole; unbroken, etc.
Broken; fractured, etc.

Cooked (as food) .

Raw; crude (as food, fruit).

Edible; esculent.

Poisonous (as toadstools, arsenic,

etc.)
Venomous (as the bite of the daJiong

jMilaijj or rice snake).
Fresh (as meat or fish, etc.).
Spoiled; putrid.
Impure; adulterated.

Sweet.

Sour; acid.

Bitter.
Salty; saline.

Peppery; pungent.

Rancid.

Nauseating; unkempt.

New.

Old; stable; permanent.

Stale; musty (as rice, tobacco, wine).

Drv.

Wet.

Thin; watery; fluid.

Thick; dense; curdy.

Sticky; adhesive.

Juicv.

Flesh v; pulpv; meaty.

lint. *

Burning; ardent.

Lukewarm.

Cold.
Chilly.

Hard; solid; stiff.
Soft; flexible; bland.

Mattikip.

Ildlo-hdlo. KahalOf mixture. Mcuf

kaluilo ilong dlakf this wine is

mixe<.i.
Sunofl-sundd (from gundd, idea of

following, obeying, etc.)
Boo.
Basag. Baba9agin, broken article,

from basagy idea of fracturing,

breaking, etc., as the head, a plate,

gla><s, etc.
Malutd.

H'dAo. Jfildo pa, green yet
Makaiu.
Gabon; viakamandag,

Malason.

Sar'nid,

Mabolok. Bolok wa, putrid already.

Hindi jmlos (from nindij not, arid
puioa^ alike; of one color.

maiamU. Katamimn, sweetness.
TinamUf, sap of the nipa when
freshly drawn. Matamis na vikd,
sweet Hpee(!h (synonym matamit
na maiTguwp),

Mnamim. Kaasiman, sourness; acid-
ity.

Mapait. Kapaitan, bitterness.

Madlat. Kaalalan, saltiness. Ala-
talaUin mo ang kanin, salt the food
a little more.

Malianghang,

(Aia.

\MaanUi.

ifasuklam.

Bago.

Malag\. Palagian mo ilong gawd,
make this work permanent.

Tmoh.

Matiuju,

Baid.

Malnbmio.

Maldpat.

Malaght.

MakaltU.

Malamdn.

Mainit. Aami7an, heat. Mainitang
drao, the hot sun (or day).

Madlnb. Houag mong pacUabalabin
ang ningaSy do not add fuel to the
fliUDes.

Malahiiiimja. (Malakoko expresses
a slightly greater degree of heat.)

Maiamig.

Mag'mdo. Maginauin, a chilly per-
son.

Matigdn. KatigoMiny hardness.

Maldmbot.

TAOALOG LANOUAGK.

61

Spongy; porous; soft.

Ductile; flexible.

Sharp.

Sharp-pointed.
Sharj^ened; ground.

Dull.

Hacked; notched.

RuMty (as iron, etc.).

Slippery; slimy.

Anything oily or smeared with oil.

Rockv; stony.

Mu.ldy.

Rough; rugged.

Sandy.

Swampy; boggy.
(iradual; little bv little.

Sudden; abrupt; hasty; eager.

Impa.s<al>le; impenetrable.
Diflicnilt; laboriou.*^.

Diificult; intricate; slow.
Inaccessible; not to l)e reache<l.

Unapproachable.

Unfathomable; abysmal.

Distant; far.
Near.

Hare; scarce.
Common; ordinary.

KatiilinKUi, .sharpness.
Kafn/isan, poiiitcdness.
TiiHtfjia, what ground, etc.

Bultofjhag. Jlhi'lt hahaghng, not
porous; imjxjrous.

MakiuKtl. .\ls(» a kind of taffy
candy.

Mntdlini.

Mill I 'Hit.

Mntrujis.
Mffjmrof.

MatoiiHil. }f((t<))nti/ na stDidcmg^ a
dull sword. This word is often
api>lic<l to business, trade, etc.

BitTijoo. Also noun with forward
accent. Mnlal'i ung h'nTijmi itilomj
HHiiiiniKj, this sw(>rd is very dull
(lit., ^:reat is the dullness of this
sworfl ).

X'ikahi/(initiTtjn)i or Krnak<d<ui.aiig
[ f roDi kdhfuaiuj, rust ) . \ I so name
of town in I.a Laizuna Province
with ('. (.'(ihnKuuj.

Mddnh'is ; mnmlan.

MithnTgi.mH or yahnlaiTj/isnt).

Mdhutn.

Mftii /n'dik: malusttk.

l*ns(tk(fl (rare). Mnloki ang f:ap}tit(i-
halmi nniuj hinxlifk, the ruggedness
of th(^ mountain! s) is very great.

MuhnhfiiTijlii. Kdhfthnin/hi, sandy
beach, or sandy ground.

Mfddhan. Also name of town in
Ri/al IVovim-e, Luzon.

I^nti-diifl. I'lifi \» ]>rol)al»ly a varia-
tion oinn'iiti; hfinntl^ means "lit-
tle," "small." et<'.

liiijhi. K<(hi(ji(U(u, eagerness, /V//-
//A, syn. Ili'ihtii'i «/(tim : ju'iltik nn
(jaini, (juiek work.

1)1 )iHtfhniii<m (from dthui, road, and
(lt\ not, with ]ilaee ending (///).

}f(f/itnip. Mahirnjt fjdirin, a <iithcult
or lalmrious task. Anfj mdiTiia
iiinji'n-iip, the working classes.

MalUKifj. Di uHi/'mnt/, easy. Walamj
I'lddf], w ithont difficulty.

I>i nmrat'ii7ii<t}i (from dntinf/, idea of
arrival, and di not, Avith place
(*nding an).

Di iitnlnpffdii (forme(l liketheabove
from the root /njfif, i«iea of near-
ness).

1)1 nmtdrok (formed like the fore-
going from (arnk, "to s<»imd the
water" ).

Mtddiio.

Mdldpit (also Ittfhdo).
aid I f'dfdil ad dt'in*
anywhere near us?

rtdiiid.

Karduinnn. Kdrttiiitiamj ddintin,
usual dress. Kdntuiddnfj trikd, an

lidhdo
Is the

hfHJd

Pasig

62

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Straight.
Crooked; bent.
Curve<i.

Fra|j;rant; odorous.
Fetid; Htinking.
DeliciouH; pleasant.

NoxiouH; inalifipiant.

Powdere<i; pulveriied.

Sonorous (as a liell).

flqual.

(Jneciual.

Transparent.

0|)aque.

Concave.

WholeK>nie; salubrious.

Horrible.

Fearful; dreadful.

Past.

Pr€»i*ent.
Future.

Kight ( hand) .

Left (hand).

In the middle.
To one wde.

Matauid,
Baluktot,
Maiiko. Likolikong ddan^ a road

with many turns. Min^an paug

lumiko, one turn (or bend) more.
MafHiHod.

Mabaho. KalxUiodn, fetidity.
Kalugod'lngod (from tugod^ idea of

pleasure, eto. ).
Makammmd (from tamdy idea of evil,

the particle makti and tense redu-
plication m for present).
Dorog (means putrefiea in H(»iiie

hx^lities).
Matnntpg ^from tuuog, sound).
Kapnrin.
Hindi jHiriif.
Maniunag.

A'oi/aa; koyap (both rare).
M(lluknng. Malnkong na p'mgan, a

deef) plate, like a soup plate.
Kaghihaginfuhta (from ginhdua, idea

of relief, rent).
KakHakildf*ot ^from kildbot, idea of

trembling with fear).
Kdtakottdkfpf {(rom tdkot^ idea of fear.

Knlakotmit fear, dread).
Xabirdan (from ddaiiy idea of pase-

J»g)-
^gntfdn.

Damting (from ddtiug, idea of ar-
riving).

Kan an. Kanankanaii, a little to the
right. Kaiiarikananin w*o, go a lit-
tle to the right Aug nakakanan,
what 1 ies to t he right. Pakanan ka^
go to what lies on the right.

Kaihid (same compounds as the
above).

t^i gitmi. Gitriang gab-t, midnight.

JSd tabi.

A few of the foregoing are not strictly adjwtives, either in Tagalog or
English, bnt are put here for convenience.

All; €»ntirely; wholly.

All.

All (kinds or classes).

Kach one.
Evervone.

Paua (generally used with adjec-
tives). Pnxuiug maga/htg, wholly
gocnl. Pawing magagcUvig tti/d,
they are all goo<.l. Pauang matitim
itila, they are all black. Hmiag
monq panaing tauagin^ do not call
all. '

lAihat { gtmerally applied to persons ).
Jjahathi mo ang paiTginTguttiu,
s|)eak to all of them.; syn., tanau
([)rovincial). Tandng ' tduo, all
men.

D'dan (provincial). Dilang ungingy
all kind.s of bananas.

Baking m'l. Bdlang firao, S(»nif day.

BduaU ifa.

TAOALOO LANGUAOE.

63

The following w a list of what colore are generally used by Tagalogs,
with some names also not now ordinarily heard.

White.

Black.
Red.

Yellow.

Maputt Kapuiian^ whiteness. Ang
haputian nang itlog^ the white of
an egg.

Mnilim. KaUimariy blackness.

Mapuld. Kaputahaiit redness, ^i-
muldf blush; redness of the face.

Madilao; marilao (from dUao^ a root
dyeing yellow ) . Marilao na damit,
yellow clothing. Also name of
town in Bulacdn Province, named
from same plant (curcuma delagen).
Also name of barrio of Manila (San
Fernando de Dilao).

Bughao ( Bataan Province ) . Buk-hao
(var. ).

Ginuiay (from gulay, vegetables,
herbs).

Halongtiang (rare).

Kayumavgi.

(Mamutld. Kaputlaan, pallor; pale-
ness.
Himutld, pale, discolored.
Mabanaa^.

Blue.

Bluish-green.

Green.

Brown; brunette.

Pale; discolored.

Bright; clear; light

Bright; shining (as the dawn, the Maningulng. Maningning parang li-

stare, gold, etc. ). uHiyv?ay, bright as the dawn.

Dark; obscure. Madilim. A'aSiVima?!, darkness, etc.

Houag rmmg ipandilim itong cabayo,

do not take this horse while it is

dark.
All of one color; unicolorous. Pidxm. Mtiitim na pulusy black all

over (as a horse).

The following list comprises the majority of Tagalog adjectives pertain-
ing to physical conditions of the body:

Old.

Young.

Tall (in stature); high.

Short (in stature).

Dwarfish; short

Fat.

Elegant; beautiful.

Pretty.

Ugly; deformed.
Stuttering; stammering.

Mute; dumb.
Blind.

Matandd. Katandaarif age.

Bago. Binatdf youth, is sometimes
used, as ang mnngd binatdy the
youths (from bnthy child).

Hagwiy; mahaguay. Haguay na
tduoj a tall jierson.

Lipoto (rare).

Panda k.

MaUibd. Katahaany fatness.

Maqa nda . Kagandahan, beauty;
elegance.

Marikit (from diklty idea of pretti-
ness). Korikiiany elegance, pret-
tiness. Kariktang v^ikdy a graceful
word.

Pdirgit.

Magaril. Gariliny a stutterer; stam-
merer. Utal'Utal is another word.

JHpi. Kapipihnny dumbness.

I^gaky variation Lapimk. Pisak ang
isang maM, blind in one eye.

64

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

Deaf. BiiTgl. Kabiugihanj deafnesB. Bing-

itu/Hngif totally deaf, but bitigi-
hirwi, somewhat or a little deaf.
( The higher desree is formed with
the "tie," the diminative without
it. This is a general rule. )

Nasal; snuffling (as in the speech). Humal.

Cross-eyed. Ihding.

Blinking. Kikirapkirap (from kirap).

Big-eared; long -eared; flap-eare<l; Malaki ang tahuja.
large-eared; inegalotine.

Thick-lipi)efl (person). J^gusoin (from ugwtOy lip).

Wry-ui()uthe<l. I^i^itrt.

Toothless. JSpo. Mnnipo^ lacking teeth.

Pockniarke<l. Gatol-gatol.

I-«ft-handiMl. Kaliu^te.

Jjameinhand; one-handed; unable Kimao.

to use hands, etc.

Handy-leggwl; bow-legged. Saknng.
Lame (on account of having legs of Hingkod.

unequal length).

Quick.

Slow; deliberate

speech).
Hairy; feathered.

Bearded.

Grav-haired; gray-headed (person).

Curled; crisp; curly (as hair).

Curly or waving (hair).

Bald (i^rson).

Hairv (on body).

Hairless (as some animals, etc.).

Horned (animal).

MadM; marali.
(in work or Mahinny, Possibly a variation of

mahina, weak.

Mufxilahibd. IH pa makitd ang bala-
hiho nang kamay, the hair of the
hand can not yet be seen; an ex-
pression used to express that it is
not yet day.

B^tiHjit.

Adjective, mauban.

rharnn.

Kulot.

Ikal

UfHJuin.

Boibol'm.

Walang huhok.

*Sui7Jf(iyin. StuTJ/ay, horn, also a
twining plant resembling the con-
volvulus or bindweed.

^fay knllffkix.

Mngntom'm. KagutomaUf hunger.

Naunhdo. KanhavaHf thirst.

Sahdfit.

Nnpdgal. Kapagnlan^ fatigue.

llimnnday.

May naht. Wahing sakit, without
illness, i. e., healthy; well.

Kamklt^aklt ( from .viX//, ideaof (min;
sickness; illness).

tSiigatin (irom mtgat^ wound).

3/mM. Mntain^ sore-eyed person, etc.

MahfUuiy.

Pntny. Patayiu^ dead i)erson, ani-
mal, etc. Samntay^ to be dead.

The list of mental or moral attributes given l)elow does not, of course,
en)brace all in the language, but the most usual are given:

Scaly.

Hungry (person).

Thirsty; to be thirsty.

Rejjlete; satiated.

Tire<l; to be tired.

Numb or ** asleep," as the hands,

feet, to l)ecome.
Sick; ill; to l>e ill.

Painful.

\Vounde<l (person); having sores.

Sore-eye<l.

Living; alive.

Dead.

Omnipotent; all powerful.

Maknjmmfyarihon (from yaW, idea
of finishing, etc., compounded
with pan, maka, and sufiix haa).

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

65

Brave; valiant.

Cowanlly.
Timid (person).
Abusive ([)erson or act).

lia.«hful; timid; shame- faced.

Bashful; modest (especially in char-
acter ) .
Mcxlest-eved.

Modest in s]>eech; mofleratein j)lay.
Modest; (piiet.

Modest; slow.

Modest (in carriage); slow; delib-
erate.
Pi'Bceable; quiet.
Tranquil; quiet.

(ientle; tame; quiet (as animals).

(.^uiet; pacific.

Quarrelsome.

Odious; rancorous.

Fierce; savajre; wild.
Quiet (in sleep, or in eating).
Abstemious; moderate.
Gluttonous; voracious.
Bold; gallant; elegant.
Bold; daring; insolent.

Vain; proud; haughty; arrogant.

Boastful; vainglorious.

Neutral; indecisive; undecided.

Influential.

Famous; celebrated; noted; noto-
rious.
Famous; celebrated; illustrious.
Famed; honored.

Matdpanfj (applied to wine,
"strong," iiuUapang na alak^
strring wine. Knlapawjan^ brav-
ery ) .

Dni'iij. Ka(lt(Oi/an^ cowardice.

}fnliiK'>tin (from 1'ikoi, kWn of fear).

Mfij)afjtiuT(j(n,'<io (from tuiTijaydo^ in-
sulting w<jrds).

M(ii7(/ila. An (J ihtiTiiUA, the cause or
reason of timidity, etc. Ainj
jKunjitTfjilnhait, of whom or what
afraid, etc.

MdhinJilff.

Mahiiii.

M((tiiu)i(j. Also means "high-
jiitched," (as a voi<'e).

yfdltinnhnii; )n<ib(ni(h/(i(i.

Mitrdliitn (from dofmu, idea of delib-
eration).

Mufmyd. Mn}>aii<ni(j l.'toh^ a tranquil
heart.

Miuunn. Kaainoan, tameness; gen-
tleness. Aiuj lutijkiimnoy the act of
taming, breaking, etc. M<t<niiomj
looh, a gentle disposition.

T'lhhnik. Kntahiinikim, quietness.
Itdh'nink nut diif/ hihi/j />/(>, keep
youruiouth (piiet (shut upl).

Palanmin. A''/(i«r/j/, an enemy. Antj
maiTiia kaauau, the enem v. MaiT(ja
kfiaunft, enemies.

Maptif/tttiiini ( from tanun, idea of ran-
cor, hate, etc., with infi/fOff pre-
fixed).

Miuhip. Kiiihi}n(u, lierceness.

MutKjU.

Mnfint/linfj.

Malakao.

Mdtikns.

MttptfiTijdhd:*.
sulcnce.

r(tldlo. KdjKildlodii, ])ride, vanity,
etc.

Md/nnn(tiii<a<j (from hdni-dtj, osten-
tation).

Viontj-sdhnxi (from drout/, to go
back, etc.; ai'ilomj, togoaliea«l; to
move on ).

Ddkild.

MdhdiitiKj. Kdhdiifdfjn)!, fame; n<>to-
riety.

Md I'll III/ 1 ( rare I.

MdrniT'idl I from ddinjdl, fame;

))> k* W If \

KtipdiTijalidlidm n, in-

66

TAG A LOO LANG CAGE.

Fame; noted; talked about

M(«n; vile; worthlera; anfortunate.
Mean; vile; worthieee.

I>>vin>;; amorous (person).
Affectionate.

Affectionate; loving.

Polite (i)ergon).

Polite; courteous; respectful.

("ourteous; respectful.

Rc^ppectful.

Ironical; sarcastic.

HoncM; riuht; straight.

True; reline<i; perfect; pure (in

iKxly).
Patient; firm; constant (person).
Impatient (i)erson).

Chanjreal)le; inconstant.

Treasonable; treacherous; ungrate-
ful.

Two-faced; double-fawnl; treacher-
ous.
Giddy; thoughtless; careless.
Blundering; wild.

BalUd. Kahaliinnp (duo, a noted
person. MaghabnlibalUang tduOy a
newsmonger. Ano ang baliid, m
biiifaut What news in touTi?

Hamak. IMmak na iduo, a worth-
less j>er9on.

Tunand (originally meant '*freed-
nianf' ** liberated slave." An-
other word is btilisik, variation
hulufiksik, literallv ** slave of a
slave. * ' Kabuliftkah , slaver}- ;
servitude).

MaMntuhin (from tintdf love, origin-
ally Sansk. rhinldj thought, care,
through Malay chinta, care, anxi-
etv, etc. ).

Ma'ihiq. kathiglbigy amiable. A'ai-
bigin, affection. Knihiaan^ friend;
belove<l. ( Notice the difference in
accent. )

MafHigiHtiauao (from jHilayao^ affec-
tion, anfi majxig^ prefixed). Irog
means ** great love."

MaMigapin. Ang wgajxin^ person to
wh<yn polite.

Mapagpitagan (from pitagan^ honor,
respect, and mapag). Ana pagpi-
pilnganan, the person honored
(from piiagariy prefixed by pag^
reduplicated first syllable pi for
present tense and suffix an, here
mdicating i)erson, but generally
indicating place).

Mania ngdlang. Ang kinaaaUtnga'
lawjanarty the person to whom
courteous (from alangalang, idea
of courtesy, compounded with ka
and in {kiiia) prefixed and an re-
duplicated as a suffix).

Magalang. Kagalangan, re»i>ect^ rev-
erence. Magalangin^ courteoiiSy
respectful person.

MaiKiuuyd.

Matuid. Katuiran, honesty.

Tunag.

AfaHisan.

MugayawxLtin (from yamot, idea of

annovance, etc.).
S(^lanafuin. Saiauahang l&obf a

changeable character.
Malito. riuaolililohan niyd ang tna-

arnpoHf he is ungrateful to his

l.>enefactor.
tSukab.

Matulig^ variation viatuling,
Mahil6. Partial synonym dulingaB,
which means "restless, unquiet''
more than **blundering" or
"wild."

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

67

Restless; turbulent; fidjjety.
Restless; mischievous.
Restless; uneasy; mischievous.

Intolerable; insufferable.
Unspeakable; unsayable; untellable.
Untouchable.

Joyful; contented (j:>erson).

Contente<l.

Happy; lucky.

Lrfiughter-cau'sing; laughable; comic.

Waggish; jesting; scoffing (person

8aa.

Just; fair; upright.

Barbarous; tyrannical; despotic.

Cruel; rigorous; severe.

Agreeable; pleasing; joyous.
Indulgent; generous; liberal.

Charitable.

Merciful; charitable; lil^eral.

Learned; wise; etc.

Discreet; able.

(1) Accomplished; (2) excellent.

Magaslao. Magasl&o na tduo, a rest-
less ]>erson.

Gam. Aug gasohariy person dis-
turbed.

MiKjalao. Probably variation of urn-
aashii). Magalao ang kaniag uhjdy
his hand is restless(sai(l of a thief).
Kdgnhntnn, mischief. Anggalaniriy
the mischief. Attg galanatij person
aiinoved.

Di ma(l(dit(1,{iron\ dalitii, idea of suf-
fering, and diy not).

1)1 indsahi (from mhiy idea of telling,
and (// not).,

I)i ina.<iil(ing (from salang, idea of
touching, with di, not). I^itin,
noli iu(' f'uigeri', taken by Uizal as
a title to one of his works. He
signed many articles " Dimas
Ahmg''.

Mdtddin, (from (ond, pleasure; con-
tent).

Kddgddt/a ( from ayd, variation Hguya.
K<i/igdi/ahdtf, contentment) .

Mdpdidd. Wdldug pdlady unlucky.

Makdfdtdud (from tavii^ laughter,
with hiakd, and reduplicated first
syllable ta to indicate j)re8ent
tense).

Mrt/Ktgffiro: p<ddhir6. Tauong hir6,
an inconsiderate person.

Mdiungkdt.

Mdrd/f(d (from dapdt). Karapdldu,
merit.

Mdhagi<ik. Also "power" in some
cases. Kdhdgxikan, power; tyr-
anny; etc. Aug pdgbdgsikaN, the
oj)pre.<^sed.

MdhdiTijiii, KdhdiTf/is(nt, cruelty;
severity.

Mds<ii/d.

MdfKigbigd]!. Also judpautigag. Both

words are from higag, idea of giv-
ing. The second is more properly

the adjective.
^fdd^^d. MttdHd'tn, a charital)le

person. Kddtdian, charity, com-

pa?Jsion.
Mdp(tgliigd>/<( (from higdga, idea of

mercy, cliarit y. Mdhlgdgdngtawi,

a merciful or liberal person).
Mdn'imntg (from dnu^mgy idea of

wisdouK KdrunoiH/du, wisdom).

Mdrt'iiKing katig Jiigltsf {C'dsd/d/).

Do y<»u understand English?

(Spanish?).
}fdsikdp. Kdsikdjta k , d iscret ion ;

ability.
( I ) J'diidut lid tdiut, an accomf)lished

innn- ( LM Mdualuni mi dhik. e\-

68

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Able; acrompliehed.
Fine (in bearing).

Prudent; judicious.

Discreet.
Thoughtful; grave.

Vigilant; awake; known.

Incompn^liensible; inimitable.
Simple; silly.

Stupid; foolish; beast-like; cracked
(as a plate).

FooHhIi; stupid.

Useless; stupid.

Stupid; foolish; malicious.

F(Kjlish; stupid; dull; gaping.

Childish; foolish.
Idiotic; simple.

Crazy; in.«ane.

Lal)ori()us: diligent; industrious,
l^zv; blow.

Slow; tanly; lasting.

Pantds. PantAs na tduo, an able
man. Kaitaniamny ability.

BuHabiis. BiiMbiiMifiug mi waginoOy
a very fine gentleman. Kahum-
htiM}iy excellence, etc.

Mnttnit. MaUilt ua UtuOf a prudent
person. Daiagimg mabaitf a pru-
dent girl.

Timtim (provincial wonl).

Mahigot. Keally *' heavy" (fn>m
bigot).

Mugmmj (fn»m gisiiuj^ idea of
awaking). Definite is in imu^ not
an. Sagi^nnn ko ang findol Lagaf*-!,
I was awakened by the earthquake
last night, (rinisnan ko va kafntg-
H(Hf}ia aiig asai vn ynon^ I have
alwavs known of that custom.

Tinkald.

Muang. Timdug, foolish; stupid.
Miwgmangy fool, dunce; al^^o lack
of memory, forget fulness. Mawjd^
variation maugaly silly, foolish.
MamatTgaiy to act foolishly. Xag-
in<miaiTgihuaiTgafia)if to feign stu-
pidity. This meaning of vmilljd
must' not l)e confused with the
homonvm indicating plurality,
w hich is made up of the |>articles
mn and nijd.

linngdo (rare). Pattgauiu, a stupi<l
jH'rson.
Tnksil. TaksU na tnuOy a stupid

])erson. Katakfiiuii^ stupidity.
Bnwlntf. Knbfmdajfoyij foolishness.
Aug pagkafHindatf, the error.
fiangakhtf one regarded as a fool
ordimce. Jfovag mo txkoiiginwgu-
kai\,i\o not try to fool me (make a
fool of nje). Also kaharTgalan,
foolishness, from haiigal, foolish.

TntTfjak, variation tungag.

JIunghang.

TaiTijA. MagtangdUniujahatiy to feign
stupiditv. A rare word for "fool-
ish" is lankas.

l.hTgd», variation oufjd.

Btilift. KnM'nnw, idiocy. Baliuith
a foolish or idiotic j^erson. (Vi/w/-
yong Mtaliiimy a foolish or nma-
way horse.

Ulfil, variation olol. Kaulvkw, in-
sanity.

Maifipag. Kasipagan, industry, etc.

Tamnd {Maftngtamad), Katamnrau,
la/iiicss.

Mnhfiitt. }f(douat na kdhoy, durable
wood. ( yfalonag is ' • slack, loose."
and mahigpit is '* tight.'*)

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

69

True.

T.yinj^.

Fraudulent; cheating.

Evil-lived; criminal.
Drunken.

l^esirous.

lm{)ortunate.

OV>e<lient (person).

T^i{*olx?dient; contradictory.
Hold; shanielesfi.
Forjfetf ul ( person ) .

Rich; prosperous.

Poor; miserable.
Miserable; stingy.

Mi.se rable.

Talkative (as a child).
Loquacious (as many persons).

CJarrulous (as an old person).
Silent; reserved; secretive.

Economical; stingy.
Economical; saving.

Destructive.

Tofoo. Tiruttotoo ko any irikn, I am
keeping my word. Tunan has
more ttie sen.'^e of real, perfect, n -
lined.

Bdl'Kin. Mdhubdhuinai) rtn himiii ."o-
lltd mo, you are lying in your ac-
count. SbiviTijalmy is a '"liar" or
** prevaricate r." /'iti'KjiiinuiTyali-
iTijitn ki), I told him you lie.

Mdgddram (from dnyd, fraud de-
ceit, with nmy and reduplicated
first Hvllable of root). Nndnmion
(tko iimuj h'lob ko, my heart de-
ceived me.

Masiuaf. ^f<lsiu(d i\a tduo, an evil
doer.

iMftiny. Another word is derived
from I(u7(j6. KnlatTjjohdn, drunk-
enness. A rare word is as/ak.
X<((iaslaka}i kd fi^ta, you act as if
you were drunk. Drunkenness is
a rare vice among Tagalogs.

M(tj)infn<ii<(i (from nasa and nutpafi).
Another word is derived from/nila,
desire, longing. Ar((o na kajnta-
)dtn, a longed-for day. Mar/pita
kd'/o i^ii akin ndiHj ihig nihyo, ask
mo wiiat vou desire.

MtijnttjIinTiit (from hiwjt,
litely, and nut pug).

Mosnnnrin (from snnod.
sccntive).

Mast nan/. Kasouatfan, <lisobedience.

Mai<aad.

Midhaadn (from I'unot, idea of forget-
fulne;'S).

Maildman. Kat/aNuinan, wealthi-
ness.

Dfikhd. Kadnkltaan, poverty,

Mara mot (from ddmot). Ikhnof ako
natiij aalapl, I am short «>f money.

Makiuf/kiag. Taaoiig makitnjking, a
miseral)le j>erson.

Mau-ikd (frrmi nikd, word).

Matahd (from f(ddl, idea of talking
nuich).

Masai ltd (from s(ditdy a story, news).

Matiaip. Matiiiip na looh, a secretive
character.

Matlpid. k'atitipdan, parsimony.

Maarimtdianaii [ Irom arimohan) . . I ri-
nutUaitin mo itong fdlak, save this
money. Two rart» words fnr the
same idea are maimpok and maagi-
mat.

Makas'isird ( from sird, idea of destruc-

tirm iiiiil nitthit with r<*rhirt1i«>at«->(1

to ask po-
See Con-

70

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

Traveling; peregrine.

Unbaptize^i; infidel; pagan.

Belon^ng to; ]>ertaining to.

Abandoneil.

Guilty; culpable; mnful.

Fruitful; to bear fruit.

Other; different; diverse; distinct.
Sole; unique; onlv.
La£(ting; eternal; infinite.

Perishable.

Immortal.

Hopeful.

Hoi»elefi8.

Public.

Reserved; set aside.

Secret; to l)e secret.
Occupied; to l>e occupied.

Idle; without work.
Passionate; quick-tern pereil

son).
Hasty; of a bad <lis])oeition.
Thankful; to be thankful.

Grateful.

(per-

Ungrateful.

NahTtjifxing bdyan (from bdyan, town;
town, iM, other, and the redupli-
cated jiarticle innn^ in the present
tense, hence changed to najTfj and
irVj, Literally, **from another
town").

JH binyagan ,(from binyag, to bap-
tize, and (//, not). Binyag is said
to have been a Bomeee (Arabic?)
word brought by Mohammedans
to the Philippines. Its original
meaning is said to have been ** to
]K)nr water from above."

Nnuukol (from tzibo/). Nauukol ta
Dios at nauukol m Ot-mr, l)elonging
to (iod and belonging to Caesar.

Pahtyd,

NagkftkfuuiitX (from mid). Walang
salt), innocent, not guilty.

NamumiiiTija (from bunga^ iniit, with
ina {na) and reduplicated first syl-
lable of root, which is here soft-
ene<l to m fn»m h). Hindi nnmu'
mutrtjn^ unfruitful. Buugahan^ a
fruitful tree or plant

Ntigiim (from isn, one).

]Val(wg h(ni(/dii{\it.f ** without end,"

**endle8H^*).
Nuiatapun (from Ufputt^ end, finish.

Topus mij finished now).
Wabtug kmmiUiifnn (lit., '* without

death").

Waltnu/ ittm.

Mnhayag. Kahayagan^ publicity.

Naykaknbnkod (from bukody idea of
reservation, setting aside, etc.
Jiiihlmi nut ak6 mwq daUiu^Af put
two aside for me. itabukorarij ree-
er vat ion, etc.).

Naiih im . Lihim na gawdj secret work
or decnl.

Nnnnhain (from ahala^ idea of occupa-
tion; the particle ?m ( present tense
of )iKi) and r;, re<iuplicated first
syllable of root for present tense).
Ahnliiliin or J/rta6<i//i/»m, a busy
man.

JVfifdiiff gawd.

Mnguhtim (ironi gnlit^ idea of anger).

Guham'i. Kagahaiutany hastiness.
Siiuwdi'imat (from sai6matf thanks;

derived from Arabic,* taldmai,

|)eace; safety).
Nfikniidugod (from Ingody gratitude,

nakuy and the reduplicated firet

syllabic of root).
Wdlang iugod; also malUo,

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

71

Lii-it; legal.

Iramaterial; useless.
Naked.

Uhidinous; sensual.
Asleep, to be; sleepy, to be.

Aged; venerable; mature.

Tired, to l)e.

Alone; unai'GOinpanied.

Companioned; chaperoned,

Ignorant.

Marrieil.

Unmarried.

Taxed.

Kxempt.

Present.

Absent.

Keadv, to be.

Unread V, to be.

Salable.*

Unsalable.

Valuable.

Clean; neat.

Dirty; unclean (as the clothes).

Doubtful.

Certain.

Luckv.

Original.

Copied (thing, etc.).

3lethodical (person).

Suitable.

Unsuitable.
Onlerly.

Disorderly.

Profitable (thing).

Unprofitable.

iJmamented.

Plain; clear (as a room).

Manufactured; made up.

Raw; crude (as material, etc.).

Woven.

Spun (also thread).

Plaited (as a mat).

.Va/y//(/,als() ''right," ''straight, "etc.

Himil nmtnld, illicit, illegal, etc.
Wal<th<j gamit.
HnUml.

Mdl'lhafJ.

MtituhKj. M'itutulo(f hn(/d kai/o.^ Are
you t^leepy? SntutuhHj IxKjd siifdf
Is he aslocp? Pfitnlotpuii mo aiya,
let liiin nleep (or tell him, or her,
to go to sleep).

}f(n;u/<()i(j. A lit) ina/T(}d magulangy
the aged; parents; ancestors.

Majn'igiKi.

Nagilsd; imlcmg kaiiaDid.

M(ig kdsttind.

Ilnnit nutdlam.

Mag (imud.

Waldiig (isdiut.

JhunahaytHl hang bouU.

Hindi Iniiiiuhoui^.

Xarifo.

]V(ild rita.

Malta n<ld.

Iliiifl! harafd.

Mag paghihili.

Hindi ]Highihili.

Mahalagd. Walang halagd, worth-
less. Magkann ang halagd niiof
What h tile value (price) of thi.«?
Xagkasii<inghalatfd, of the same
value, at tiie same jirice.

Maaagd.

Masano. Masauong damit, dirty
clothes.

AlinlatTijan.

Tanta.

}faj>d/<(d. Wahnaj pdlad, unlucky.

Xanana (troiii nna, first; not S]). ).

tSinahn (from sa/in, idea of transfer-
ring, transplanting, etc.).

Ma/taraanin. \V<dang }>araa)i, with-
out method.

Xaaa ii<)!^ [\T(m\ an(n*)\ nannkol (from
akal).

Hindi (igi»i. Hindi dapat, nnlit.

Miutgos. Walang gn/o, without con-
fusion.

Magn/it. Kagnlo/ian, <'onfusion, dis-
order.

M(ij>akinafta/n/in (from iHikindbang,
idea oi making a profit, etc.).

Wuhnnj jtakind/xing.

(f'agak.

Ali na/as.

(iinanui (from gaud and in).

Hindi gari.

Hinidti (from hahi, idea of weaving).

Sinf'did ( from aulidf idea of spinning).

Sidasala,

72 TAOALOO LANGUAGE.

Cultivated; plowed. yaaararo (from 8p., arorfo, plow).

IJimft naaararOf uiK^ultivated; un-
plowed.

Open. Bvbtfi. finkftdn mo itong pintOf open

thiH door.

Shut; closeil (tiling). P'mdan. Pm<fan mo cmg durunga-

nan, shut the window. Some na-
tives say mrhan moy undoubtedlv
a corruption of the »^panish verb
c<rrar, to close.

Spread; extended. iMtag, Xakakdlnt, stretched; taut.

Folded; doubled, etc. Tinikhp (from tiklop^ idea of dou-

bling).

COMPARISON OF ADJKCTIVES.

The Tagalog a<ljective, like arljectives of other languages, has the three
degrees of quality to be indicatwl — the simple form (\\'nich is generally
called the positive), the comparative, and the superlative. Of course, as
in Knglish, some adjei'tives are excluded from comparison by their mean-
ing, such as those for **dead,'* *'alive,'* "entire," and some others.

The |X)sitivc adjective is that fonn discussc<l in the prece(iing pages, and
the comparative will now be taken up. Of this there may be said to exist
three varieties, the comparative of equality, that of suj)eriority, and that
of inferiority. In English the first form is expressed by "as (adjective) as
(noun)," the second by **er" or "more," and the third l)y "er" or "less."

In Tagalog there are three ways by which the comparative of equality
may be expressed. The first is by using theadverl) jmra ( variationiwW/tj,
meaning "as," "so," etc. In some cases "like" ex pn^sses the Tagalog
idea best. With adjectives or common nouns jxira ( paris) takes the tie tH/,
but with names of persons, etc., and pronouns is followed by what is
compared, which takes the genitive cane. Kx.: Parang mahvti (how
good), majiiiti pnrang g<ftas (as white as milk), vtaitim jmrang tiling [jbls
black as charcoal), paraug pnta>f (like a dead person), parang hdyop (like
al)east); Akd'g jtara vntf (Am I like you?) ftig(Vtf par Is ko (he [she] is
like me), waliit parix ko (as small as I am [small like me]), siga mahait
para ni Juan (he is as prudent as Juan), avg ihg an Naga^y malonang
para namj Pasig (the river at Naga [Nueva Ciiceres] is as wide as the
Pasig). With the particle ka denoting likeness, />ara indicates equality,
the particle being prefixed to the adjective in such cases. Ex.: Para
nit/ong maiTija tatiOy kahvhuti (equally good as these peo]>le). This word
para^ whi(!h as a root denotes "equality," "close resemblance," etc.,
should not be confused with the Spanish word jtara, meaning "to," "for,"
etc., as the resemblance is purely accidental. The Tagalog word is Ma-
layan, the Javanese word pad' a having substantially the same signification.

The second way of expressing eoualitv with an adjective is by means of
the particle «/»7, which denotes this iHea precisely. Kx.: ltd y mnghafxi
niijan (this is as long as that), mf^'y ninglaki ko (he is as large as I am),
singlaki si Ptdro ui Jnan (Pe<lro is as large as Juan). It will be seen by
the examples that the object or person compared takes the genitive case
and the subject the nominative.

The thin! wav of indicating equality with the adjective is by means of
the consoli<late(l particles ka ancl sinrjj i. e., kasing, the syntax being the
same as with sing only. Ex.: 7(<5'// kasinahaM niydn (this is as long as
that), i<i Pedro' y kasingtaiUui Juan (Pedro is as tall as Juan).

When e<]uality is to be indicated for more than two objects it niay l»e
expressed in two ways. The first is by ]>refixing sing to the root, of wliich
the first syllable is reduplicated. Ex. : SinghahnfMt (equally long [things] ),
singhuhuii (equally good [persons or objects]), singtatam anq maginA ni
Bangoy (Maria) (Maria and her motlier are the same in height). Th^

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 73

second is by prefixing kasing to the root, the particle mag being prefixed
to knahiOt forming magkamng. Ex.: M(igkni<iiigduiwng (e(]ually wise
[learned]), magkasingtjainnn (equally wealthy [rich]), (iiig vniqina ni
Bangoy (Maria) ay magkatdngtads (Maria an<l her mother are the same in
height [equally tall]), ang marnjd cahayont ang mawjd kalfilxio ay vmg-
kaMjigdami sa hayan ltd (there are as many hon^es as there are carabao in
thiri U)wn ), mayroon kang bagd bigd» na ka.'^iugdnnn iiang judayf ( Have you
ad much hulleii rice aa vou have of the unhulled?).

E<|uality in quantity mav al(-o I )e expressed by mngkapara^ mcu/kapanjt,
or magkapantay, the two object** (compared taking the nominative, and the
ro<»t denoting cjuantity having ka prefixed \o it. Ex. : Aug higds ko at ang
higds iilyd maglapnris karaini {he and I have the name quantity of rice).
Literally ''my rice and his rice is the f^ame in quantity." Those influ-
ence<l by Spanish are liable to say "his rice and my rice," but the other
order is that of the Malayan languages generally.

The c()m|)arative by decrease is formed by the use of the adverb ki'ilang,
(le««), preferably with the negative particles <// or him/l, as Aw/Af//'/ aUme
has many times the force of "not," "without," "un-," etc., but, as in every
language, the context serves as the best guide. Ex.: Jtung hiy'is na it&y
kulang fta dkm binili (this rice is less than theamount I b »ugl)t), (Utg halugd
Hong caftayo Uo*y kulang sa halagd tiang dn't (the value of this horse is less
than the value of the other), ang maiTgd kfd<diao kulang nn)ig dnnti aa maiujd
cabayo sa bayan ito (there are fewer carabao than horses in this town), ang
inatTjfd Tagalog ay kulang na}ig tads na inatTi/d AmfrirajKt (Tagalo;rs are not
as tall [literally, "less in stature"] than Anu'ricans), ang knknUtiTijan (the
difference in price, the balance, the difference in amount, etc. ).

Alawjan (lacking, insufficient, etc.) is sometimes used in place of kulang.

Ex.: Ang kaytnnanan id Otpdan Tino^y alaiTijaa sa knyainanan ni ('apitan

Luis (the wealth of Captian Faustino is less than the wealth of Captain

'^uis), cdangan pa Hong bald itd (this child is not oM enr>ugh yet).

There are three wavs in which the comparative bv increase mav be

xpressed. The first is by the position of tlie wonls only, what exceeds

iking the nominative and what is exceeded the ablative with kay or sa,

»ese two particles expressing "than." The particle ay is sometimes used

Ith the nominative word.

The second method is by prefixing the adverb laid (more) to the

jective, with the same construction as the fore^'oinj:.

The third way, which is oidy used correctlv for comparing (jualities, is

med by suffixing pa (yet, still to the adjective) either alone or in

junction with laid. Ex. : ( 1 ) }fatadA akd sa iyd, or akd' </ mata/is sa iyd;

ak6*y lalong matadssa iyd; (IH nmtadx pa akd sa iyd, or lahtng matans jn

MX iyd. All the forejroing may be translated ])y "I am taller than y< u

" (1) Payat ka aa dati (you are thinner than yrui were before), ni

'o*y jnojttpag kay Juan (Pedro is more industrious than Juan), alin ang

l-jji, kay Pedro ni Jnanf (Which is the more al^rt, re<lro or Juan?); si

(Juan); si Juan ay nmhait sa kaniyd; (2) si Juan ay hdong mabait sa

'd; (3) si Juan ay malnjit pa sa kaniyd (Juan is more prud(*nt than he

le] is). (1) Ang hibanahC y nndial fta kiufainauftn; (2) hibmg nndnil

ibanalan aa kayanianan (worth is more precious than wealth), ifd'y

magaling »a diydn (this is Wtter than that), iydn ay lalong niapuU sti

hat is whiter than this), labmg niarami any nntmjd cabayo sa maiTyd

O sa bayan itd, lapinVt ang inatTj/d laga bukid mayrdon hdong kahdmit

vuiiajd iaga bayan; (3) there are more horses than carabao in this

but tlie fanners have more carabao than the town people, si Ciriaca

\ pa sa akin^ iTgnnVt ang kaptdid k<ntg babttyr'y marikit ]ta sa kaniyd

% is younger [literally, "more of a child yet"] than 1 am, but njy

9 prettier than slie is), siyd'y Udo pang koytnnangi sa kaniyang

Hit pa siyd sa dkin (she is still darker [more brunette] than her

and is shorter yet than I am ) .

•nic but correct form (»f com])arison is expressed by using /></ aftnr
in, especially in asking a question. Ex. : Hindi »»" -

74 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

( It was not reached by you ; shall I? ) . ll'mdt ko tiaaalaman ; xkao paf ( I do
not know it; do you?).

For the negative form of the comparative, as in such phnu^es expressed
in English by *' without comparison," '*there is nothing like it,"
'Hhere is nothing ret^emblin^ it," etc., Taealog has several expressions
almost alike in meaning, which are formed by prefixing ka to various
roots; the negative wa/a, (there is no [t]) with the tie Jig preceding the
root and its prefix. An is sometimes found as a sufiSx with these expres-
sions. £x. :

WaUing kdhalimbAua^ without comparison;

Walang kahalintulad, without similarity ( generally in speaking of objects) ;
Walaug katiUady without similarity; unlike; both the foregoing from ttUad;
Walang kaJiamhing, without resemblance; synonym;
Walang kauHtiujiSy without resemblance;
Walang kaholilipy without likeness (this phrase is rare);
Walang kmnukhd J without facial resemblance, from muk-hdy face;
Walang kapaniag, without an equal; referring mainly to height, length,
rank;

Walang katidamitan, without resemblance (a rare expression) ;
Walang kawangki, without resemblance (also a rare phrase).

To ask questions as to comparative e<iuality, inferiority, or superiority is
done in Tagalog with ga (how) pretixe<l to alin (which), or and (what),
in conjunction with ka prefixed to the root of the quality. With many
adjectival roots ga and ka thus serve to show that the degree of the quality
is the subject of inquiry. Ex.: Gaalin kalaijof (About how far is it?);
Gcumong kalakif (Al>out how large is it?); (iaanong kahabat (About how
long is it?) ; Gaalin kapxUif ( How white is it?) . The answer may be given
with the same construction, prefixing ga to a demonstrative pronoun or
a noun, as the case may be, but if an adjectival root be used, it shouhl be
prefixed by ka, Ex.: Gaito; ganito (like this); ganiydn (like that);
gagatas kaputi (as white as milk); ganUoug knlaki (about as large as this);
ganoong kaliabd (about as long as that). Gaya is a variation. Ganga^
another form, is generally used to inciicate plurality. Ex.: Ganga nili
kaldki (about as large as these); ganga niyan kahafxi (about as long as
those). The noun, j>ronoun, or a<ijective compared sometimes takes the
nominative and sometimes the genitive in these answers. Ga and its vari-
ations may be said to express likeness, and is but an offshoot of ka. In
many cases na is also inserted in the sentence. Ex.: Gaalinq na gaitd
kaoniif (How small is it, like this?). The letter n instead of iTg is used in
some phrases. Ex.: Ganan akin (that which belongs to or affects me);
ganan inyo (that which affects you), etc.

THE SUPERLATIVE.

The superlative degree of the adjective may be divided into the simple
and the absolute forms. The first, UHually expressed in English by the
use of the adverbs "very," "extremely," "excessively," "exceedingly,"
"8urpass«ingly," etc., is expressed in Tagalog by the following adverbs:

(1) Luhhd, very, very much, ex<'ee<lingly.

(2) MdsdkH, extremely, exceedingly, hard (as in the phrase, **to rain

hard"). Distinguished by difference in accent from masakUj (ill).
This adverb is used more with verbs than with adjectives. In some
places sadyd has the sense of "very;" ex., xadyana linis very clean.

(3) Dt sapala, extremely, exceedingly, from <//, not, and sapala, humble,

unworthy, the idea of the adverb being that of plenty or sufficiency.

(4) T)i hdmak, extremelv, from di, not, and hdiuak, vile, worthless, mean,

the whole idea being "not imltry," "not mean."

(5) I)i palakj far, widely.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 75

(6) LiihiSf too, too much. This a<lverb lias soiiietiines a slight idea of

craft, cunning, or slyness.

(7) Totooy truly, exactly, precisely.

The adverbs formed with di always follow the adjective in the sentence,
but the simple adverbs may either follow or precede the adjective.
Ex. :

di lnhmik.
}fa((indd shiii { Inhiit.

tiltOO.

or

»iy(i matandd: He (she) is very old (too, truly, etc.).

Lnhhu ^

Totno

The folU)w ing phrases will illustrate the various idiomatic uses of the
adverbs with the adjective: (1) Luhhd anfj jKn;l:npa«jni ko (I am very tired;
lit., '* very great is my fatigue" ); (2) i7(/(nu, hdong uin.v'ikd aitij kn»j Pedro
(That's so, but Pedro is still more tired; lit., '*bul niore excessive is [that]
of Pedro" ) ; Imthiij kidmnj uuisdkil ( We like you very much ); Pinntjaitdsihini
sdlang ntitucikit (They are re})enting deeply ) ; ( .S ) Mauiumni di mipnln ahid (He
is exceedingly wealthy [very rich]); (5) ('ntjinnhhimoKj hdds (It rained
too much); (verbalized) SajKiknhihis anfj kahndhdn mo ( Vou arc entirely
t<K) good [honest]); LiiudnHiin antj utos ko {<(i infjo ( ^'ou exceedi-d your or-
<lers; vou did more than 1 toM voutod«>); (<>) 'rinolnh'n) iiii/<'t onq iriko (He
is c<)mplying with his word [vcrbalizetl form of (i>to<i] ).

The absolute su|>erlative degree of the adjective ( in the singular numl)er)
which is made in Knglish bv the suflix "est" and bv the adverb '*m<»st"
is generally expressed in Tagalog by repeating the i-ntire adjective, whether
it be simple or compound, by means of the jjroper tie, which is deter-
mined by the ending of th(^ adjective. Kx.: Mohnt'ni'i nadndi (Ijest); ma-
gmnautj inui^onid (worst); ImiKd no homd (most virtuous); utosijHiij no ntos'i-
pag (most diligent); \no}iol uo mohal (dearest, most i>re(ious); niopothoj
nuipnti (whitest, very white); i/ioifiiavo ntodlm (l)iackest, very i)la»k).

The plural of such superlatives as the foregoin*: is formed by using the
particle maio/d with those fonne(l from simple adjectives, and either w ith
imiioja or the reduplication of the first syllal>le of the r^ot with those com-
|X)unded with //«a, the superlatives thus formed, <'ither in the singular or
plural, generally bi-ing ]»rinted as two words in order to avoid unnecessary
length and also to distinguish more clearly from sonn' diniimitives. Kx.:

The dearest [persons or objects understood] [oioj moio/o tnohol uo nndio/).

The l>est [persons or o])jects underst<»od] {oto/ nnuojo mofmtintj inal/idi;
anff inahvhutifif/ nudndmti).

The worst ( persons or things understood ), oioj nnuTj/o inof^onioinj ino!<(und;
ang iiin»an<inton<j niOi<(i,sanid.

The bravest men [or)!/ moinjo molopon'j no nni(o)>o)nj mi loloki; on// niototo-
poiifj }ia vuitot&po}Kj no hdoki).

The ugliest animals (onrf mo/Tj/o poiojd no po,7!/it no hoyop).

What uiay l>e called the relative superlative d«*n^ree, made in Ijiglish ])y
adding the expression "(►f all" or a similar phrasr to the sujierlative, is
formed in Tagalog by adding the w(»rds so lohoi (of all), s>i kondo,
(among them), etc. Ex.: Siuo }<a kond'Yii o)>(j /o/oio; nnifoponf// (Which

of those two is the braver?) ; Sino mi k<indiV ij omj nuitotopomi no nnitolojioini*
(Which of them is the bravest?); Ang nodiit .<o hdmf, sii/o' if motopontj so
lahnt (The smallest of all; he is the bravest of all ).

Superlatives are also formed by ]>retixing ko and sullixin-j: on [hon) to
reduplicated bisyllabic words, and in the .«ame manner with i^olysyllabic
wonw, in the latter case only the first two syllables being redu]»licated.

Ex.: Kfit(tmif(t<nni.san (sweetest), iroiii him is: LalMDialhnnnlan (most virtu-
ous), Inmi htnifi/; huiinluujinlmnnimii (most wliulesoiiie), from (/inliona.
The lirst two roots have two sylhibles and the last has three. This form
jiiay al-o he applietl to abstracts forme<l with La and an {/tnu)^ an«l inten-
sities them. K\. : K'ttain'tnan (sweetness i ; L'tUmtisfanilsan (sweetness itself);
ialxiimhin (virtue); kfihunnlharuilan (virtue itseh); AY/^/?/iara/? (laziness);
kudtnuirtivminuL (laziness, laziness itseh").

Wrhs have a <'ertain superlative form, which niav he mentioned here
for the sake of assoiiation. It is made hy re{M'atin^' the verbal root united
I >y u'infj. Kx. : UiiTiji nan^j ]iii'!''ii ( ask an< I ask over again ) ; labid utimj iikad
(walk an<l walk); '*//<>'" /"o^y "//'■*<" tntj icihain mo (say yes over and
over). This form is also found with nouns, ete.

Sk<tion Fivk.

TMi: Nl MKUALS.

The numerals form a small noun-group by themselves, having the three-
fold K haratter of subsiaiitive, adjective, and adverl*. While the distinction
between adjective and n^im is not so shaip :is with s<»me other words, yet
it is clear that the cardinals in Tagaloir are nouns, as tlu'V show by always
j»n-ceding tli<' imnii affected that "of" must be un<lersiood. Thus //ma/''/
hiilahao literallv means "live ( hea«l ) of cattle," and this holds good in all
cases.

In Tagalojf theii' are four <lasses of numerals — canlinals, ordinals,
adverbials, and distributives.

The i-arditjals are:

< )n«*. />■*'. St'viMi. I'ita.

Two. fhilnir/i, Might. Wdh'i.

riiree. Tnlh). .Nine. Sitffini.

I'our. Jy"?/ (accent on lirsl sylla- Ten. Snmiiumn (contr. of Iaiiihj
\Av '■. j>(nii'i, "one ten " ).

Ki\i'. I.iin'i.

six. Aiiiiii I accent <»n jir>t s\ lia-

ble k

.\s i:i l\ngli>li, decimal nminration, by u ns, i~ that used in Tagalog and
throULditnii the Malayan famil\ «>i lan<_'uaL;es. lint TaLralog n.<es a |>eculiar
form in the numerals from elrviMi to niiiete«'n, inclu-ive, Mhich differs from
tlu' ni'-t hoil followed in <'\ «-t y otln-r hinvrua:ie of buzon. A'////, meaning
"adding," and a vaiiatiofi of A/A/.s, is prelixed to the digits by means of
the enphonie tie i~i\ jxniu, ten, beinLMmder^to(nl.

l"-l«'\en. /, 'thill'/ i.-i'i. Sixtren. hihiiu/ anim.

rWf'lvc. Jjiln II.; iliilmr,]. Si'Ventren. Lnhiinj pito.

Thirteen. Lithm't l<iflo. iMglitren. L'lhi/i'/ nii/o,

Foiirt«'cn. f.ifhiii'f i'ljiiit. Ninrteen. /.nhinff sii/ani.

Fiit«M'n. Ldliiwj litm'i.

The multiplrs of ten IhIow one liundred arc formrd by ])retixing the
di'jit used as the multiplier- to tin* word jnm,',, united by the j>roper tie.

TwentV. f)<il'iir,iiii/ jmnn. Sixty. Amin lul pniio.

Thiitv. T'ifh'ii'/ jt'iiiu. S«'v«iity. I'ltniK} jumn.

Fortv. A/i'if ml /)>'iif'>. Fii^hty. WnlmKj funiu.

I'iftv. LiiiKiif/ jk'Ho. Ninrty. Sii/<im mi ji<mv.

Thf intermediate <lii:its, when used with the f iregoing, are joine<l by
iiu*an> of 't, a contract ior> of at (and ).

T\\»nt\-one. Jhihitrmu/ fumuf i.si'i. I'iftN -live. Linumg poutVt lima.

Thirt v-three. T'lt/am; jinn,',' f (nt/n. Sixty-si.x. Anim nn junnVt amm.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 77

The word for "hundred" is rf/Ta«, wlilrli has a liomonyni meaninj^
"road." It is always preceded by the aj>i>ro{»riate imiltii>her, to whitli it
is connected V>y the projwr tie, d softening t«> r before n(t.

Ojie hundred. Isang daau; sang- Five hundred. L'nming duau.

ihUin. Six liundred. .iahn na nhin.

Two hundred. DaUiwang daan. Seven hundred. I'ilong dt'um.

Three hundred. Tatlong di'tan. Eight liundred. Walong dihm.

Four hundred. Apal na num. Nine hundreil. Siyam mi nian.

NunilK»r8 y>elow twenty added to huixlreds are united with V, the n of
ddan Iwing dropped.

One hundred and one. Sinitjddn't iM.

Two hundred and eighteen. Dulnming dt'ni^t hdnng iralo.

The n is retained with multiples of ten.

Two hundred and fifty-tbree. I)a/<nning dthm liuiang ponot hiilo.

Six bundred an<l nixty-sfix. Anhn mt rnan (hum iki pomVt aiiim.

Fjght hundre<i and eighty-eight. Wtthnig daan inthnxj pomVi vnlo.

Nine liundred and ninety-nine. tSlijaia rui v(uui .^hjain na pom'/l.tiyuin.

Tbe word for "tln)U}?and" is libo, wbifh is found as ///>"and rihn inotber
Philippine languages.

It IS governed, like daan^ by multipliers and snllixed numbers. The
purely Malayan numerals end with Hho, tbose lor bigber mmd)ei's being of
foreign origin. Some bigber nund)ers are said to bave Malayan names, but
it is doubtful as to whetber their values are <leHnite (jr not. Tliey are noted,
however.

One thousand. Sang/iho.

One thousand and eight. Song/ihoU irnlo.

Nineteen hundreti an<l five. Stutgldm ttigniH na raaU lima.

Two thousand. Dnhmang lif/o.

Six thousand. Anim mi lihu.

For **ten thousand" tbe term laksa is used. Tins is from tbe Sanskrit
laMa (one hundred thousand), thnaigb tbe Malay sn-lnk.sa (ten tbou-
sand), the latter people mistaking its value. LaL/t, Avith tbe oritrinal value
of ''one hundred tbousiuid," is used by Anglo-Indians, as in tbe jihrase
"a lakh of rupees."

For "one hundred thousand" anotber Sanskrit term is u.«ed, also with
altered value. This is gfda, from tbe Sanskrit agnia (ten tbousan«l).

"One million" is now ex])resseil by sttnginmong yntn, or "ten one bun-
dred thousands." (ratos and afTj/^io-aiTifio are given in old dictionaries as
ecjuivalent to "million," but tbe fornjer is the word used for "bundred"
in most Philippine dialects, an«l tbe latter .<eems to have more llie idea <)f
"uncountable," "infinite," etc.

In expressing numbers Tai^alogs sometimes give a round nund)er, less
tbe few taken off, as "three bundred ami sixty less tw(>" lor "three hun-
dred and fifty-eight;" e. g., ka/ang ming dalatra sa tal/ong daan anim na
poun.

Cardinals may l>e preceded by ang (the), when a concrete n«)un is modi-
fied, as in tbe phrase Ang da/atntng pisnn na ihinigag mo m akin (the two
dollars which you gave me).

Maiuja ]>receding a numeral indicates tbe i<lea of "about," "sorne."
etc., as in the phra*-e maiaja ])ihnaj tam) (about seven men). When the
exact numlx*r is indicated ntaiTga isojnitrc<l as a sign of plurality. Mx.:
Manga taao (men, people); pilnin/ 1 'nto (seven men, i»ersons).

By reduplicating tbe iirst syllable oi the cardinal the idea of "only" is
brought in. Ex.: lis'i (only one, alone, etc. i; dada/(nr,'i (two only, oidy
two), etc. For greater emphasis u])on the idea of limitation the minduT
may be repeated with tbe initial syllable reduplicatt'<l. Ex.: Ji.<aiKa (one
only); dadaladnlaiod (only tw«)). Tbe adverb hhnang ('only) may aK<o be

used for this same i<lea, the adverb foUowin;; the cardinal affected. Ex.:
/.vf/ li'iinaiKj (only one); dalaoa himamj (ordy two), etc. Jt will be ob>erved
that the tirst two svUahles onlv of ]»olvsvlla])ic numerals like dalaird are
re[>eated, following' the p^neral rule in Ta^'aloi:.

The <juestion "II(»w many?" in expressed in Ta}.Mlo<x by ihhif

Tajralo^ has no abstracts like "a dozen,'' "a score," etc., these phrasscH
requirinsz rountla))out means of expression. **A dozen" may be translated
by iMfUHj Lnpisanfm vanrj Inhmf/ (idhmu't, whicli literally means "a join-
in;,' of twelve." The same is trui' of Kurdish abstracts like "monad,"
"decade," etc.

"More," with a cardinal followinjr, is expressed l>y hihisi or higity which
precede the numeral and are united with it by .<(/, wliich expresses "than."
Ex.: lAihi.<i«i Hnii'i, or hi'fit S'l Innu (ujoD' than (lv«^). Lohis is the more
correct, as hlf/it has an idea «>f excess in weitrht rather than in number.
Ki'ihtixf (less) is used in the same wav.

The indeternnnate numeral "some," "a fi'w." is expressed in Tagaloj;
by li'iu. With the tirst syllable reduplicated or with /nmniif/ the idea of
"only" is expressed; as, H/an (»r i/''in Innnini louly a few).

"Much," " many," an<l similar words are expressed by //n/r(fmj (from
daml), and "a jL'ri'at many" may be translated by inm-aiuiug marami.
Hy makin^j: an abstract of <hnni an<l prelixini: the detinite article of com-
mon nouns is expressed "the most." "the majority," etc. Ex.: Aug
kdruntilidN.

For the meaninur of the numerals, see the work by T. II. Pardo de
Tavera, enlitle<l "Cousiderariones so))re el ()ri»:en del Xombre de lo.s
Numeros en Ta^alo;r," pidjlished at Manila in 1S8^>.

oitOINAI.S.

The ordinals, which are tlie numerals desi'^natin^ the |dace or position
of th(< object in sonie particular series, haw more of the character of adjec-
tives than ha\e the cardinals. Thevanswvr the (piestion Jkolldn? (In
what order?) and an' formed in a very simjilc manner in Tatrah)j; for all
mind»ers excej»t "lirst," which is (piite irn-milar, iLd beini: pretixed to the
cardinal. It should also be noted that tin* lirst s\ liable (»f ^/'.f/a^/v'/ (two)
is omitted, as wi'll as the initial letter ni tnllo (three) and uintt (four)
wluMi preci'ded by ika. "Twentieth," howexer, isfornied witlu7j(/ and the
entire cardinal.

The ordinals up to "tenth" are:

The first. .\)i'i ii'inii'i.

The Se«'<>nd. An'] ikdloua.

The third. An<i ikntln.

The fourth. Aiki {k''i/ittf.

The lifth. All'/ ikdl'inn'f.

Tln' sixth. All'/ ikhiiiti (initial letter dropped).

The seventh. -1".'/ ikdj>'iln.

The ei;^hth. Ami dcnirdln.

The ninth. Ann d.-n.-'niiint.

The tenth. An*! 'kitiKnio: nwi ikandiigpono.

In the »>uthern province-^ (n)'} ikdfxiln is sometiujes heard, due to Bicol
and \'is;iyan intlui-nce. I'xh'i and /n>/-/>> is al>o to l)e found in the dialects
spnken to the north of tl»e Ta;:alo;r re;ri<»n, and this form may be found in
the north, but should be re;:arded as extraneous to the lan<rua^e.

The follow itii: synopsis of th«' ordinals above "tenth" will give an

TAGALOO LANGUAGE. 79

"he fiftieth. Aug ikalinumg pou6.

'he sixtieth. Aug ikdnim na pouo.

!*he seventieth. Ang ikupitong pou6.

'he eightieth. A)ig Ihnralong poao.

'he ninetieth. Aug ikoidi/ani na pond.

'he one hundredth. Aug ikasuugdnan.

'he one thousandth. Ang ikasanglibo.

'he one ten -thousandth. Aug ikuMingluksit.

Nouns following ordinals are tied to them according to the ending of
he numeral. Ex. : Angikalimahg tano (the fifth person) ; ang Ikniiong arao
the third day).

In Tagalog, contrary to wliat obtains in Spanish, the ordinals are used
ar all days of the njonth, and thus agreeing with Knglish. Kx.: Jkailan
rao tTijagon nmig hnaiig itof ( What day of the month [is] this?) ; ang ikada-
iirang pftuui pita ( the twenty-seventh ). .1 nong a mo kagd tu/agon t^a sang-
mgof (What day of the week is to-day?); Sgago'g vie rues (to-day is Fri-
tay). Anong taon f (What year?); sanglihoj .sigant na rda't Ihnit (nineteen
lundred and live). Anong haan iTtjagon nang tadn f (What month is
his?); ang bnan nang enero, p6 (the month of January, sir). And ang
miujalnn vwf (What is your name?); (ilirt>ri<>, p6 (Gliccrio, sir). Angika-
auang pangahni (The second name [surname]? ) ; Manalo, p6 ( Manalo, sir).
faga ifudn kaf (Where are you from?); Batang<ts, p6 ( Batangas, sir).
^U'ln ka nang iadnf (Mow old are you?); Magri^nn ak'nig dalanang pouo't
Imd (I am twenty-five years old) . Sadn naroon ang prtni(fnitef (Where is
he presidente [mayor]?) ; Nariydn sa ikalawang hdhag (There in the second
louse) .

Fractions are expressed by the use of ang (the) if the numerator is one,
he denominatiir being the ordinal desired, and hahagl (a part) following
he denominator either expressed or understood. Numerals may replace
mg. Ex.: Ang ikalavang hahagi (the second ])art); aug ikdpat (the
burtli), et<'. Also isang haliagi (one part); taflong hahagi (three ])arts).
iVhere the numerator is greater than one it is i)laccd in the nominative
md the denominator in the genitive, the two being connected by nang and
he phrase followed by hahagi. Ex.: 7 alio nang dpat na hahagi (tliree-
luarters); da/awd nang taflong hahagi (two-thirds).

**Half" is expres.sed by kalahati, as kfUahating tindpag (half a loaf of
>read). The noun '*a half" is expressed by kahah, meaning generally a
I half-salaj)! or 25 centavos.

It should be mentioned that unauna means "in the tirst ])lace," and
*-hen made an abstract and preceded by the definite article of common
louns, as in the phra-^e ang kannaunahan, nu-ans "the very first." In like
Tianner, huli (last), when made an abstract in the same way, as ang kahnli-
\ulihan means "the very last."

ADVERBIAL NTMERALS.

Adverbial numerals, expressed in English by "once," "twice," etc., and
inswering the question Xakaildn/ (past tense) and M<\kaddn (present
ind future tenses), "How often?", "How many times?" are formed like
the ordinals except ih^.tlnaka\^ prefixed instead of ika Xi) X\w cardinals.
The word for "once" is wholly irregular. In some districts these adver-
bial numerals also express the idea of "fold," as "twofold." "threelol<l."
Kb with the caniinals the sense of "only" may be imparted by redupli-
laiting either the first syllable of the prefixed particle or following the
adverbial numeral with Idmang.

Dnce. Minsan, var. ninsan Nine times. .Vaka.^igam.

(rare). Ten times. Makamngpono.

Twice. MakalauHH. Fourteen times. Makalabing dpat.

Tlirice. MahUntlo. Twenty liine>. Makadalawnng

F«iur times. }r*t/:fn'i/>fit, var. mO' pouo.

kaifHit (rare). Twenty-ti\e times. M ahadolawaufj

Five times. Mdhalnna. pnnot Ihna.

Six times. }f(ik(v'niliii. One Inindml times. Mnkaxaiigdt'um.

SeN en times. M'ihnj>ito. A thousand times. M nka »a n (jl'ihu;

Kij^lit times. Makantilo. viahdibo.

Xatnrailv, as in all lan';ua«:es, the restrictive form is not used for very
\\\)l\\ nund)ers.

Oidyonee. M'uni)i.sini. Only thiee times. MnmakidatJo.

Only twiei'. Mitnntkalaira.

In tliis conne<'tion it should he rememberccl that knili'mf means *' when'."'
used interro;jrati\ely.

DlSTKIHrriVK NCMKi: \i>.

These mnnerals, expres.^ed in lOnjxlish with "hy" between tlu^nniieral.-.
as "one l>y one," *"two l)y tW(»." etc., answer the<juestion Ihhi danf (How
many at a time/) ami are formed in Tai:aloj„' by the sim]ile repetition «».
the cardinal if hisyllabie, or the lir.-t two syllables thereof if lonfjer, no
tie bcin<j: use<l.

( )ne bv one. Isaim'i.

Two by two. Du/tidahnn't.

Three by three. Tdtlnlnflo.

Four by four. A/tnt<'i/)it(.

Five by live. JJni't/ima,

Six 1>V six. Aiiinn'inini.

Si'ven by seven. PiU'tfulu.

Fiizht by ei»;ht. Wnlnuiilo.

Nine by nine. S'ljidutsninDi.

Ten by ten. SniniftoHinitfiHUio.

Fh'Ven by eleven. I/flnhd/nKj is/i.

Twelve bv twelve. Jjdi'ilnh'nni dninin't.

Twt^'iitv bv tweiitv. pii/ifdd/iiti at)'/ p'ftu),

OiH' hundred bv one hun<lrcd. Sni(/d<(siiii(/d('tan.

One thonsind hy <iiu' thou>and. San<j1i^<i iKildni.

Nouns repeated in this manner ac<|uin' the idi'a of "'every."

F\eiv day. daily. .l/v/o-ri/v/o.

W'lM'klv ( als») i'\ «'rv Simdavi. I.nnio-Hnqo.

• > • • • ■

^' early; aimually. /'in'm-tanti.

ilourly. ()'-nx-i, !•>(.'< (from Sp., hora).

The raicalo*: word inr "ev<'ry" is ////'/, which may also bj* used.

Dist rihuti\ cs, answt'rin*,' the •|uestioii Ti'i'iilnn.^ (iiowmany toeaehone?)
are formed by prefix inLr the particle /"/ to the cardinals, tlic lirst sy]laV)le of
the latter bcin;: reduplicated in tho'-e i:rcat<-r than "four". The first syl-
l.ible is drt»pped fr'oin d-ihtirA and the initial / from (ullo.

One to each on«'. 'r"/is'i. Six to eacli one. ligannim.

Two to each one. Tk/'i/h irt't. S«'ven to each (tne. TKjpijtito.

Thici" to each •»ne. T"/<if/n. Fi'jht to each on<». Thftrnindo.

j'.Mir to j'U'h one. T'(/'ii>'i(. Nine to each one. l^it/sbdytnu.

\'\\(' to »ach one. Ti'/h/inr'i . Ten to each one. Tigsdsangjtono.

The.-e may be also translated l)y " one apiect-." etc.

Ti'j prelixed to cardinals may also expres< the stamped, coined, or fixed
value of money, stamps, etc. ill this ca>e the initial syllable of those
numerals ahovt" four i< not reduplicated. \n is now more generally us*^d

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 81

than tig for this purpose. Ex.: Sef/ong tigalnuang centaros (a two-cent
stamp); sola ping tiglinwng plsos (a five-peso bill or gold piece); tUjdalnaang
pouoitg pisoH (a twenty-[>ej»o bill or gold j)ie(e). It niiij^t lu* borne in
mind that the Philippine peso is etpial to a half dollar I'liited Statin cur-
rency, and that it is the legal currency in the islands. Hence the old de-
bates over "gold" and "niex." should be relegated to the past.

In the southern dialect tig is sometimes used to express the time at
which something may V>e done or has b^en done, as in figaga (to do some-
thing in the morning); tighnpon (to do something in the afternoon).

The particle inariy prefixed to nouns denoting money, weights, and
measures, imparts the idea of "each," "apiece," etc. This particle causes
euphonic changes with some initial letters of roots, as follows: b and p
change to in, the final n dropping from the particle; initial r (k ), an<l q drop
out, mo<iifying n to iTg; s anci t drop out; '/ drops out in most cases; initial
m, n, and iTij also drop out, and an initial vowel (r/, /, o, and u) modifies
the final n of the particle to ?*7/.

The former monetary system was founded upon the sdlapl, or half j)eso,
nominally worth 2o cents at a gold basis, and now restored to that value.
Sthtpi also means money in general. The />r.vo of one hundred ccntavos
is worth two f<fil(jpi. Jn the old system the xa/ajn was divided into 80
cuartos, and upon these the people reckone<l their market and other minor
transactions. As these values and terms will linger for some time to come,
especially in districts where Tagalog only is spoken, the following examples
will prove of use:

A peso each or apiece. 3/o;/i <>>.•».

A half peso each or apiece. Mana/op!.

A balf (salapi) each or apiece. }fatig<th(iCi (from AoAaf^, 25 ccntavos).

A real f 12J centavos) each, etc. Mninb'iimt (from sih'iput, a contrac-

tion of aa ihapnf, to the fourth of
a salapi ).

A half red {i^\ centavos) each, etr. jfuniknlo (from }<ikof<'>, a <'ontraction

(•f ."'t ikdintio, to the eighth of a
sala|)i).

A cuartillo (5 cuartos or $().()3125, or yfaiTqulin (froui nlin).
r().(H>2o) each, etc.

A cuarto('*0.0062o, or ^0.0125) each, MaiTijtmJin ( from cmUtn, a corruption
etc. of raartn).

The only measure of weight incorporated into Tagalog appears to b' the
t'llid {iTO\n the Chinese /(/'/, which was a very uiu-ertain standard). By
treaty the liuikuan tml or cu-toms tml of China is now .**A ounces avoir-
duj)oi8. As a monetary unit the hnikunn tnt/ varies from /So to 00 cents,
but is only quoted in bankin;^ oj>erations an<l is n<>t used by Tajralogs.

The Pliilippine tahU may be regarde<l as sliiriitly heavier than a troy
ounce, weighing 509. 7"> grains, the troy and ajKithecaries' ounce weighing
480 grains, and the avoirdupois ounc" 4:»7A grains.

One tahil each. yfum'tJiil.

One i)Ound .Spanish each. M<iii/d,ra (1.0144 United States

]K)nnds) .
One kilogram each. }f(tiTifif(,t/r(imo (2.204t> Tnited States

pounds ).
One arroba (dry) each. Mai77/aroha (25 lil>rasor 2.5.8(5 Tnited

States p(»unds).
One " fardo" each. Mnmnrdo (IJ.'J Sp. or :{.*{. 475 Tnited

Statrs poumls; used in weiirhing

tr)b;ic<-o ).
One quintal each. M<ti7oi,it(il (4arn>i>as or 101.44 I'nited

s

tates iMiunds )

6a55— Uo

82 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Rice and ^rainis sold by the cavdnand its fractions, which areas follows:

One *'ai)atdu" each. MangapatAn (0.1981 of a pint, dry).

One '^chupa'* each. Mangatang (4 apatdn or 0.7925 of a

pint).

One ^'ganta*' each. Manalop (8 chnpas or 3.1701 United

States quarts) (from mlop).

One "(avdn*' each. Mangabdn (25 gantas or 19.81 gal-

lons).

There are 8 jrallons to the United States bushel. United States dry
measure iH slightly different from British imperial. To reduce United
States to Hritinh divide same named measures by 1.031516, and to reduce
British to United States multii)ly by same. For common purposes use
1.032, which is close enough. TrnxUmue.

A "caviin" of rice weighs 133 "libros."

One "picul" each. 3/amtitu/(137.9UnitedStatespound8.

Two piculs constitute a '*bale" of
hemp, ubakA).

The metric system is now official in the Philippines, and its use is gradu-
ally spreading to all sections.
Among the native measures of length use<i with man are the following:

One inch each. Mananan (from sangdoR^ which in

turn is contracteil from sang,
"one," anddattn, *'inch").

The Spanish inch is 0.91 of an inch. Dalirl also means finger or digit,
and the length of a Tagalog "inch" almost exactly corresponds to the
"digit" of the early Hebrews, which was 0.912 of an inch.

One "span" each. 3/f/mi/j/7C(i/(fromrfaiiyca/,a"palm").

The American "span" is 9 inches, while the Tagalog dangcal is one-
fourth of a vara, hence 8.25 United States inches.

One "vara" each. Mamnra (from vara^ a Spanish

yard, equal to 33 United States
inches, approximatelv, and actu-
ally 0.914117 of a vard).

One "braza" each. Mandqxi (from dipa^ a braza^ equal

to 5 feet 5.8 inches Unite<l State",
approximately 5 J feet).

To express the idea of "at such a price apiece" the former monetary
units were used with in {hin) suffixed to the unit, of which the initial evl-
lable was reduplicated. The article or object of which the price was toTbe
denoted preceaed the unit of value, the two words l)eing Imked with the
appropriate tie, according to the ending of the first word. Ex.: Piyi-
sohin (at a peso each), librfmg sasalapiin (books at a half peso each), tind-
pay na fisicapalin (bread at a real a loaf), tahaamg aaliuhin (cigars at a
"cuartillo" apiece).

These terms will now only be found used with those people still unfa-
miliar with the new currencv, but as tliese i)eople speak only Tagalog asa
rule they will naturally retain the old terms the longest.

The following dialogue fairly represents what may l^e said in making a
purchase in the market:

A. Magkmw bagd ang halaga nitdf (What is the price of this?)

B. Isang pisos, p6 (a peso, sir).

A. Malial na iotoo lydn (that is too dear).

B. Hindi p6^t viura (no, sir; cheap).

A. Anong muraf (How [is it] cheap?)

B. Kay6 na'y tumauad (you set a price, sir).

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 83

A. Tatlong pesetas ang ibihigay ko (I will give 8 pesetaa [60 centavos] ).

B. Iliudl pong mangyayari; Apat na peseia:<^ p6 (I can not do it; 4 pe^ietas,
sir).

A. Mabuti (very well [offers a peso]).

B. Wald akong sukll^ p6 (I have no change, sir).

A. I)a!d mo iTga sd amhuj buhay^ (lo6n bahayaran kitd (bring it [them] to
our house, we will pay [you] there).

B. Mahiyo yntdf ( Is it far?)

A. Ilnidi, at doon Idmang sa may ciinrlei (no, it is there close to the liar-
racks [quarters]).

It shouhl l)e l)orne in mind that "magkakano" is used when pricing
objects of which a part only is desired, such as eggs, bananas, etc.
"Magkano" indicates that the entire quantity is priced.

The verbalized forms of the numerals will be given under the respective
particles, as too lengthy explanations would be required in this place.

Section Six.
the adverb.

By the name of adverb is distinguished that class of words used to modify
the sense of a verb, adjective, participle, or other adverb, and usually placed
near what is nnxlitied, as he writes ueUj I rmdi/y admit, you speak correctly,
very cold, )niturolly brave, very general/ y Ackno\\\t'i\ge(\j much more clearly.
(All but one of the foregoing are from the Century Dictionary.)

Adverbs may be classiHe<l, according to tlie san)e authority, as follows:
(1 ) Adverbs of jilacti and motion, as here, there, up, out, etc. (2) Of time
and succession, as nou; then, often, ever, etc. (3) Of manner and (luality,
as fo, thus, veil, truly, faithfully, etc. (4) Of measure and degree, as much,
more, very, enough, etc. ( 5) ( )f modality, as surely, not, jterhaps, therefore, etc.

According to Earle, one of the most distinguished authorities on English,
there are three kinds of adverbs, the flat, flexional, and phrasal.

( 1) The flat adverb, which is a noun or adjective used in an adverbial
position, is not considered as correct in books and papers, luit is to be
heard daily in conversation, as in iralkfasf, walk slon\ apeak loud, speak low,
etc. In (ierman, this form of the adverl) is also literary, as ein ganz schemes
Jlaus(a wholly beautiful house); erschreibt gut (he writes well [lit., good] ).
Adjei'tives of certain classes may be used this way in Tagalog, an<l espe-
cially those of manner or degree, such as uiaga/iitg ( well); masarnd (badly);
madall ((piickly, l)rietly), etc., which are also adjectives. There are also
flat adjectives by signitication, whii'h are explained under the sei'tion to
which they belong by meaning.

(2) The flexional adverb, which is that distinguished ))y a termination
in English and allied languages like vartl, ling, buig, tueal, an<l ///, as in
hachcard, darkling, headlong, piecenienl, and the great number m ///, such
as fpiickly, quietly, rapidly, etc. Tagalog has nf> particle which thus marks
out an adverb from other i^arts of speech.

(3) The j)hra8al adverb, which is also called an adverbial phrase, is
(greatly used in English, and is to be found in abundance in Tagalog.
Amf)ng English examples may be cited at be>t, ut length, by all uwans, for
go*}d aikd all, on every side, etc.

There are also both in English and Tagalog what may Ix^ styled the ad-
verbial pronouns, such as yes and /<(>, together witli the negatives not, uor,
and neither.

Unlike English adverbs nearly every Ta<ralog ;d)verb may be made into
a verb if the proper i)article is used, and the border between adverbs and
prepositions is very mdefinite in some <'ases and must be determined by
the aid of the context.

As the form and composition of a won! is subordinate to its meaning, the
Tagalog adverbs hereafter considered will be classified according to mean-
ing, irrespective of form.

84 TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

I. Adverbs of place and motion which answer the question fdanf
"where?" are usually expressed in Tagalo); by»tt followed by a root, Thip
root sometimes has the expulsive particle i i)refixed.

Where. Sdan,

Where? Saanf

Where indeed? Sdan iTga.

Anywhere, wherever, somewhere. Saan man.

Evervwhere. Sdatisaan man. SAan reduplicated.

Nowfiere. Sdan ma*y wold.

From all parts, may also mean to or Sa sitan man.

in all parts.

Where are you from? Taga A&an kaf Sv^a **he" an<i stiUi

' ' they ' * may be used in placeof ka.

Sc'ian may be verbalizeni with wm inserted, fonning numaan (to be some-
where permanently), and also with ma (na)^ in the latter ease taking the
idea of to Ikj somewhere either temporarily or permanently, as the oai»
may be. Ex.: yasmm ann intthahao lui iloyf (Where is the ford of the
river?); Mamman sij/d Itagaf (Where will he be?).

Sum may be further verlmlizod by 7x1, in which case *'to ajo" is inherent
in the meaning. Kx.: Sajyaman mycif (Where did he ffo^); Xapasaman
Biydf (Where is he going?); Pnnasaan shjnf (Where will Tie go?).

I>i(ian has been corrupted to haan in some districts, owing to Bicol and
Visayan influence, the former using haen and the latter hain.

Sdan has an entirely different meaning with pa following or even alone
in some cases, expressing a negative idea similar to "not yet,** etc. In
Ilocano ndan is also the negative jmrticiple "no."

Sdan pa f also means " where then?" in rather a sarcastic manner. With
d( added to n'tan pa an afl^irmative interrogative meaning is expressed, as
Sdan p^i dt tot6of (How can it not Ix* true?).

It must also be noted that in Manila and places where Spanish is largely
spoken that some particles are used in a differtmt manner than is the
custom in rural districts. Thus, '* Where are you going?" is expressed in
the country by man ka jxtrorot'm^ but in Manila by man ka jmparo^u.
Other ex |>«vssions of like nature v^vq Sdan aruj par<rr(X)nan mot in which
the definite is u.«ed, and »ian ka nagmnldf (VVhere did you start from?).
Another similar question is Sdan ka narTgagdling? (Where are you coming
from?). The answer is generally given with »a in the sense of from: Sa
Malabun (from Malabon); sa Imus (from Imus); sa bdhag ko (from my
house), etc.

There are four 8im])le arlverbs of place, which have heretofore been
explained at length, and here only some idiomatic uses will be set forth.
The^e adverbs are cimi, ditd, diydn] and dijon.

Dini, meaning "here" (toward the 8i>eaker), is verbalized by um, in
the sense of taking a pla<*e near the s|_>eaker, etc. Ex.: Dumini'ka (take
your place here); dungmidini akd (I am taking my place here); dungmini
akd (I took my place here); dirhii akd (I will take my place here).

With mag {nag) it is verbalized in the transitive sense, requiring an
object. Ex.: Magrini ka niyang tindjmy (put some bread here by me).

With pa the idea of motion toward the speaker is expressed. Ex.:
Parini ka (come here toward me). This last form may l>e further com-
pounded with the particle pa, definite, corres|>onding to magpa, indefinite,
to express the idea of commanding, re<]uesting, etc. Ex.: Paparinihin mo
Ki Carlos (tell (^arlos to come over here). "Over there" is expresseil by
m rini.

Ditd, meaning "here" (equally close to both speaker and person ad-
dressed), is verbalized in the same way as dhii. Ex.: Dumitd ka (take
your place here ) ; paritd ka (come here ) ; pnparitahin mo n Carlos ( tell Carlos
to come here) ; Pinauarild 7uo siydf (Did you t<^ll him to come here?). The
four adverbs under ciiscussion admit thedefinites of i and an. That in 1 is
compounded with ka, forming ika, ikina; and in may be used when united

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 85

with pa, the definite of magpa, as may be seen in the last two examples.
The future is Papariritohin vio sitfct? (Will you tell him to come here?) and
the present Pinaparirito mo xi if a f {Are you telling him to come here?).
R€»ason or cause is expressed by ika, ikinn j)refixed to the adverb as a rule,
although "why?" can also l)e expressed by <o/o/ as in A(ni6 hi ritof (Why
are you here?). The more idiomatic way, however, is with ikinn, as Ann
atifj ikinttjHfritd inof (What was the reason you came here?). J fan is used
if the ivlca of place is to be made emphatic, as *V/;/o lnKji'i anrj pinaritnJmn mof
(Who did you come hereto see?). "Time" is generally exi)ressed by pa-
nahon, which also means "weather," as A)i6't di hi ixijxiriW) ,sa kapannho-
nanf ( Why didn't you come here in time?) . " What " is expressed by nn6,
as Sdfjaano ka ditdf (What is your business here?); Miuianno sij/d dit6f
( What is he going to do here?); An/un hfif/'i/ { What of that?) or ( What is
there to do?) ; Jniiano htf ( What is being done to y«»u?) ; Innno kuf ( What
was done to you?); lliiuilka mwiano (nothing can be done U> you). Dn-
mito, with the j>article inaghidnvX its variations, signitii s "to come here for
a particular reason or cause." Ex.: Aij at nai/kadamilu ka/' (For what i)ar-
ticular rea.son did you come here?); An«j ipiiKujkakadnmito ko' ij n Cahemmg
Tuin'is (the "cabeza" Tomas is j)articularly responsible for my being here).

The first of these two sentences is indefinite, grannnatically sj)eaking, and
the last definite. For their grammatical construction see the particle
nutgka, which is used with this signification with all tV)ur of the simple
adverbs of place under discussion. For a tabular conjugation of dHa see
the tables of verbs. To express simply the time or reason for "coming
here," i with7>'t may also be used, although ikina is more correct. Ex.:
Ana aiuj ipinanto iiio^ (Why did you comt^ here?). The indefinite is more
usual witfi kailan, "when." Ex.: Kaihhi ka naparitd/ [When did you
come here?); Kahapon (yesterday).

Diu'in, "there" (near at hand), has the same construction as the fore-
going adverbs. P^x. : Maijdiijan ka nant/ iuhig ( put some water over there ).

Doon, there, yonder, is [)erhaps more commonly nse<l in its various
modifications than the other three simple adverbs of pla<"e. It may be
verbalized with ?/m, />//, />fo/<a, and ina'jha as they an*, with the sanu* effect
upon the root. Pa and unigka nuKliiy the d to /■.

Ex.: />»moo/» Avf (station yourself there). J'aruan ka (go there). Papa-
rrnaiin jno xi ( arhts (ieW Carlos to go there). Pinaparoon ni<> sit/a! (Did
you tell him to go there?) Saauka p<tntro>jii/ (Where are you going?)
8ome locidities, notably Manila, rei>eat tlp^ ]>article pa with the j)resent
and future of the adverbs of place; but tliis is irngular and incorrect. It
is unknown to the early writers. Al'mg innian an^i par<mKniannii>f ( What
town are you going to? Jjt. "Which town will be your going place?")
Ann ang ikina paroroon tno ya Maffnila.'' (Why are yon going to Manila?
Lit. "What the cause of going there your to Manila?") .1// al magka-
(fujHoon kaf (For what particuhir reason are you going there?) Ang iki-
iifiparar6(ni ito'// dalaain ang a king kapafid na h(d»ai/c ( I am going theie to
visit my sister).

yfagkn prefixed to doon alone means "to have."

Ex.: Kung magkaroon sana ako nang nntrani'mg pi/ak, ag hindl akn mag-
knhignnit6 (If I had plenty of money, I would n(»t be in this fix). Ang
pinngkakaroonan niga ang linlaran (IIi^ has c<»nsideral)le property in Hula-
cdn). Ang ipinagkakaroan niga ang pawana ,^a kamga nnng ina niga. (He
[she] has plenty on account of the inheritance to him [her] from his [iicr]
inf»ther. )

The foregoing illustrates the indefinite idea of thethinl singular personal
pronoun, which may mean either "he" <»r "slie." In iMiglish thisiscon-
fine<l to the plural, "they" indicating either se.\, as Tagaiog sda, while
Spanish distinguishes bvellos, "ellas." .l/'o/ gives the idea \\\t\\ (fonn, "to
be there," **to have there," nnigka indicating really "tf» have {plenty. "
Ex.: Biffyanmo »da nang niandoan (take one of those over tliei'e), isang
manddon {sangdocm) (one (»ut of many things over there); fiandnong Inmi-
tang sukd (a small bottle of vinegar); l.^ajtg madoruiai (a person who has

plenty). The word maii jiretixod to <fouii forms the well-known and much-
used indefinite HKiyrdnn, to liave. Ex.: Mdi/nkm kdiuj h<uj>i naiKj t'n>a-
ixfijf (Have you any brearl?) Maiiroon h<tn</ parorooiutiL^ ( Do you have
to <;o there?) ()6 iu/n, mnifroon akomj }>nvoritoii(in ( Yes, indeed, J have t»>
to tro there?). Mniiit'nm ka nanf/ ilnntj tdon/ ( I low old are ycm? J. it. Have
YOU uf how many vears?) Mai/rorm iikori</ <lnktirinnj imiio (1 am twenty;
lit. Have I twenty.) With sonie s^ulilxed particles </oo)f i.s nio<iitied aj*
follows: D'tan din (in the tJame place there); (h'Km .sn iha; doon duo (in an-
otlier ]»lace 1; aa dooa (oyer there i; anduou mnii (anywhere oyer tln're).

^lany phrasal adverljs are made ]>y the particle ^n which means ainon^
other tilings id and in when ]>la('e<l ]>elorea root. Among the most impor-
tant ]»hrasal adverbs of jilncj' with m are:

In front; facing. Sa fapnt: tujuft sa. Kx.: Jlony ftidmij

([If idjud s'l si/(u7i/<in (this house
faces the east) . Tajtaf has also the
i<lea of setting out in rows, regular
order, etc., such as trees, plants,
etc.

In tlie j)resence of: l)efore; oi>posite; Sti Jn'irap. Sn hnrap ndiuj vajtit-'m
to the front. (before tlie captain).

Behind; back of. Sn liked. Kx.: Ai>f] mn/Tiji'i hdhni/ s<i

Hind iiiiiK/ ruiirtti (the hou.^jes back
of the barracks). Antj Hkod {{\\ii
back).

.b)ined to. Sn iidiiKj.

At the edge or side of. Sn t'd-i; s\nionym i^'i i<i)dn'j.

On the other side of; bevond. Sn knhUd. With /n'ln the idea of

"lioth" is brought in. Ex.: Sa
)im(jh<d,ild (oil both sides); and by
the nMhiplication (tf the first two
syllables of the root the idea <tf
"air* is e\j>ressed. V.\.\ Si innij-
k<il>i/.'d,,!<i ((in all sides). Xaim-
rn>'>n sifii sn k<dtifd latyuj 'dtnj (thev
\\ t nt » tVi'r there l»*'yon«i tlie river).
Sii inti'jLdhi/if h»nnj hU'ififin (on
both sides of theb(Mly). Kdhihi
ha^ also the idea of "j>artly'' an<l
is used idiomatically when speak-
ih}^' of lice. Ex.: Iloht/ k>inin mi
k'dfd'tn (this rice is but half
cookc'l i. In speaking of anythiiiir
else, with the same idea in mind,
the n-M'jt' is quite dilferent. ICx.:

/hni'J Sisiil (lilt/ LiihihV ij hifiVt <in<]

hfl>i/'i' 1/ Jiiiidi (this chicken is
]»artl\ <'ook and j»artly not).

( )utsi«le. N/ I'llius.

Inside: wit liin. >S' l'»>f>. This phrase is much used

to expies.- the idea of t/i*' htnrt,
speak iiiL' in a nxtral sense. Ex.:
Sfi ((tihiii'j I'hih I whole-heartedly;
with all tlie heart ).

A]»"ve: up. S'l iti'i<(.< iii(»ni h'laM and expulsive

particle / ).

fielow; «l<iwn. S'.i dudxi i tVom Ixdxi, idea of low,

humble, with r'X|»ulsive particle i).
This word should not be eonfuseil
with the following.

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

87

Ujxjn; on; above.

Under; beneath; at the bottom of.
Halfway (between two points).

In the middle.

Aronnd; about; close to.
As far ag; up to.

To the right.

To the left.

Forwani.

Backward.

At home; in, to, or from the house.

In, to, or from town.

In, to, or from the country.

S<.i ihabao (from halxto and i). Ex.:
S<i ilHthao lumg fmndok (upon the
mountain [mountainn] ). Bnhdo,
with accent upon the last syllable,
meauH jKist^ a.s fxihi'io .sa hatim/
tj(ih-t, (past or after mi(lni«rht ). It
alt>() meauH "near" inj^ome places.
Kx.: Bdhi'io (tar/d <imj Imynn na
atinf (Aro we j)i'rchance near the
town? ) Ma hi pit is now the ordinary
word u.^^ed lor ''near."

Sa i/dliiii (from /dlim, root of idea of
dtj)th and expulsive i)article i).

S(i (/Una. Kx.: y(i.<!a(/tfHd tayo sa
paijlakad ( we are halfway in the
march [trij) or journey]).

Sa pfK/ilan { from (jitnd ). Sa paf/itan
naiKj /(tnnaiTljtin (in the middle of
the .'-treet). Al^o means "term."
Kx.: W'aloiaj bitan amj patfitan
(a term [])eriod] of ei^ht months).

Sa inaij. Ex.: »SV( ukuj raartcl (close
to the barracks).

Ildiigdn. Kx. : Sian aiuj tiuajo mof
{ Where is your trip to? ) llanqdn
Maffiiild. Ilanydn ditd (up to
here). Also has the meaning' of
"until." Kx.: llan(jd)t hdkas
(until to-morrow).

Sa ham I It.

Sa kaliird.

PaJidrap.

I'alalikud.

Sa l>d}(<u/.

Sa hai/an.

Sa hit kid.

Sa lain dole.

In, to, or from the mounUiins.

These adverbial phrases can be indetinitelv increase"! bv the use of sn
with the proper root.

Toward. Ikikft. Kx.: J^ako man aiifj tufa/o hi

.Jiianf (Toward where is John's
tri})?) hakniKj Mufjndd (toward
Manila), hakn.^nan amj tinTjjo mo.''
T(»ward when* is your tri[)?) Da-
k<niii hftyau ka' If aia; tiuTijn ka (my
trip is towanl ujy town). 7'a(ja
sdau kaf (\Vh(»re are you from)?
lUi.'^tlnisn^ fid ( Hosoliosn, sir ). J)a-
kaiiij kaiian (toward the rJL'ht).
Dakniiii kal'md (toward the left).
Ddftil. \\\.. Ih'ijtd Mai/ii'dd (ap-
})roachin</ Manila). I^'i/dt ihahd
(approachini: the lower <'ountry ).
I>-'i/)H sa ii/d ( appi'oa»l)in<j y()U).
I>dit',i lia^ al>«» an i<lea of '*he-
yon«l," "nn the other si<le of."

II. Adverbs of time and succession, m hi«-h L'enerally answer the «|iies-
tion kaiian f (when?), are quite mnnerons in Ta«_'al(»,L'. >-howiiii; that tlie
conception oi time was well <leveloj>e<l for a primitive people, only the
hour and its subdivisions bein^ unknown to the lan^niage, except as de-

Approaching.

nines ).
When ( used relatively ). (1) Kmi. C<»innionly used oiih

present and future tenses, bn
lie us«'d with past indetinite
ti(»n is represented as ensto
JOx.: Kiiii ihwiitiiKj (iinj cd
(tlntnln inn dko (when the et
comes, let me know [futi
Kiln (iLnij itaroroiin i<a ^f^
)i(t/ins(i.su/iih('l<t akontj m
(when 1 was in Manila 1
went to tlie Lmieta [i>asttinn
eustomary action] ). Kun
( whenever) . Kuik; in'ntsnn ( ;
times). Ktni is also used
prc|)osition, *'it ". See under
(2) XaiHj. Use<l with l>oth dt
an<l indetinite past tenses.
^kinif/sih'i' i/tlt,n'ih((i nljfi't kat/alh
riln siii'i^ { when he came to
tlieni la>t ni<:ht, they wen
herei. }\<iuii ilnmafhui ^iiji'i
hiiii iKt (il:o (when he came
tliroui:ii eatin«: ).

( ."> i A"';//. )tilf(')H, inif(hui.

woj'ils mean really ''in
d;iys," "at that time," etc.
.\(iit/i i.oiiiij <ir<ii) (Iff turiK/ifur
j)<i(/fi(ih'ik'i .-oi Jtiin,< (<»n that
tlu' tiirhi at Imus took, pi
.\i>'iii. iKintii Jilt ,v'f Mn>inilu
iiKnTiji'i CnsfiUi ( whilt* the >
iards were yet lu-re in >hii
r»'rliaps "then"' in some
Would 1)«' I ho ln'>t translatioi
Tlu'ii. ]>(»iii. \'.\.: I\iin kiiiunnt l»i,

iiiii<i<i/i( Hill II iiiii, kill) (lH('i (liiff

( when \ . Ill cat t hen v<>u will
what voii are lo have) . Wil
fnll<t\\ iiii^r il.'uni lias an idio:
use. l'!x.: Ji'th) />"\v ijnnui

idlii'l '/iiiiil'i, ilnmi JKI hllii Iki

I A hoy vrt. and doing so,
will he he then when grown
Alwav:-: c<»n>1antlv snuieliuHS Tmi'i. V.\.: Tinrinn tinri itmn
' " w hehevrr " i . (mri ) luai/i'nnii hiU'J <jmi a ( VoU

-••mcthing t«> do always). T(
snmalnf kd { whenever

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

89

Never.
Sometimes.

Seldom.

( )ften.
Since.

-Ago; since.

As Hoon as.

write ). As adjective luiri

means "every." Ex.: tmnnf/arao
(every day). In some cases it
means "as lonp:as." Kx.: Tkiy'nig
(it innftonl niHf paykaidvo (as long
as manhood is not extinct).

Among other expre.*^sions may be
menti(jned walavfj huinp(n/j with-
out end ; vxtioDr; lihtf^ without fail ;
oalniHj (((/tail, without stop, inces-
santly; valitiK) tiKjofy without rest.

There are two ex|)ressions used for
"eternally," formed with tliejjre-
ti-x inagpa to a root which is fol-
lowed by 1IHIU sfhin. Ex.: }fa(j-
palulotf nmn man; and iinujpnral'nig
{(t('tfimj) man aaaii. Another
j)hrase is niagpalcailan man, or
viat/pasaknllan vtan, both of which
signifv alwavs.

Kaihhi man lundt.

Kaiaj niinxan. }faini)tsannii)tsany
{ from time totiine; nowandthen).
Mi.'<an(luna {mrk'ly). Ex.: ^fi.sa7}-
doua tainting ang pagparito mo
(your coming here is rare).

Bill I ra. Kx . : Bilt irang tnugmata tajis
itonf/ hatang it'} (this child seldom
cries).

Malhnit. Ex.: Malunit ahmg stmg-
uKisi'ilat (I write often).

Tauihaij. PvX.: 'lanibag kang 7K///V
inngnia/is} (since you left).

Mala. Kx.: Mala kahapon (since
yesterday). The ])article jmgka
soMK'timcs denotes "since," as in
tlie phrase pagkahatd ko (since my
childhood). "Krom" would l)e
an eipially correct translation.

K((imihi\ from ka and maka] . Kanta-
kallang armt ( .^-ome days ago ). ik*-
tore a cardinal followe*! i)v f'//<:(0,
"day." kiimaka indicates the num-
ber of ilays which have ela]>se<l.
Kx. : Kamnkalain't (day I »ef(»re yes-
terday ), lit. /'two days ago:" ktun((-
kalunang f)/vfo ( live days ago). K<i
prefixed witli }ni following a root
also in<licates "since." Kx.: Ka-
/la/xui jKi (>in<*e yesterday). Ka
alone indi<ates past time, with
some roots. \\\.: Kafatptrn (yes-
terday ), from liapon (afternoon).
Kagtih't (last night), from ka ami
gain ( ni;:ht) .

.S^ use(l adverbially, denotes imnie-

Alivadv.

Yet.

l>i'lV»n': Nvitlial; as it inav ln'

IW'forc; a wliilc airo.

AiH it'ntiv

(tliiH (lay).

Xd. This ]»artiile is in constant use,
an<l is ahvavs ])la(e<l last. Kx.:
y<ij>fii<'ti>n iin siift'f ( JK' Jias <ioiie
aln'a<l\ ). Theri* an* nuiny otluT
uses <•!' iHi in Tairalojr, w hicli will
be s« t lortli as they (KM-ur in the
examples.

J'ti. Tliis |)arti<le, as an adverl), is,
like //", always pia«'ed after the
won] nio'lihe*!. I'A'.: Jx'i pn {ane
yet I ; nnni rmn pn/ {\i^ there any-
thiii«r thrre yet)? It is also nse<l
spt'akiiiL' ironically. Kx.: Ako pa
tuKj piir"ronii/ ( Will I have to <:o
thereyet?). JikIi jki (not yet).

J)'ii/ii. Ex.: Ii<ii;o LdiHj }pninn.-<n,
iiti/is<ut mo mirl yl/i<f (l)el\»re A'Oll
tea<l, swre)> (he rot>ni). — l- J><i(/o
pn (a while a<:o). Bufjo, as an ad-
\crl> of time, always precedes tlie
vcrh it mo(lili('s.

K<nn/itifi, xariation hni'nta. Knt7[j'\-
liuiitj tiiiKih'in ( before noon ) ; kaiTiji-
ii'tinf ii(ti<i(/<i I this morniiiL: a while
a;,'o). IliildiKiiii iin) i/fiuiff] Sfi^ihi
L'lin/liHi ( t:o hack to what yon were
talkiiiu^altont before). [Ketnrnto
(he thread of y on r story. J K^fuTiji-
I.'iinjin'i p>i (a little while ago, a
>liort time a-ro). Kx.: KmTi/i-
LttiT'j'iini )Kiriln .s/7(i (they were here
a short t iuM' a-jo i.

S'l 'I lilt. S't mid jxiiKj !<<i unit ( verv
aiK iciitly ). V.\.: Sa mmng nrao
(in I he "lays (»f old ). Mmm, which
.•I I ways foljdws its verb, means
"fn-t" ciiher in time or j>lace.
V.\.: M''i>>>h hd iinind ( v(Hi enter
first [jHpJite expression]). Ihnjo
Luinniii l.it^ iiKinlniKin /."'/ imnid (be-
loie \Mi] cat. wa>h first [i. e., your
hands] i. — L. (imnii mo imoia (do
it lir>t [def.]). Jlhitatf ka injitia

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

91

Formerly; anciently.
A ! terwards.

Later; presently; by and by.

-At once; immediately.

-\t oni-e; immediately; Buddenly;
abruptly.

Instantly; at once.

Jnsrtantly; like a fla.«b.

Suddenly; in a moment.

Offhand; suddenly. (Used with

ver>>s of doinj? and speaking. )
After beginning; upon starting', ot«'.

(wait firfit [in<lef.]). Mvnay used
with a ])r()n(um without a vt^rb,
comen first, and governs the nomi-
native. Kx.: Mnita knifo (you
first); nmnd hi nn (von ahead).

Sa (hit'i.

JS'ika. Ex.: (rinmrd <in(j Pai7<jmt'nni
DioA (n)(} IniTi/it, .sv//»7) an(/ bipti (the
Lord (lod mjule the Heavens,
afterwards the earth). Bib. Xn-
taui't shfn (she laughed): <// sahaf
(an<l afterwards?) i^. S(iknrrt}«ikd
(long afterwards). }f(n)ahn}(ih)
(after a lonp: delay). N(i(/snsah)-
saLn (one who is dilatory in his
work or dnli(^s).

^idimiiin. Kx.: Snsnldt ak'o irunmn/d
(I shall write bv and bv). — L.
MniiKiyniKj htipou (later in the af-
ternoon). Mtnn(n/*iiii(iffd (onetime
or another, little by little). Ex.:
//.'/// ininnnHiinninifid ho ( I did this
little by little). Mdf/inttffd (to do
anythinjr little by little). MtKjpa
imparts tin' idea of waiting to this
root and its (Mimbinations. Ex.:
X(Hf/Hipnnititfiiiinif/('i (tko (1 am go-
ing to wait a little while).

TtuiihuHf. This Word is out of use in
Manila. Ex.: k'nuiain l:a tdinhlntj
[iridef.]; I'Dnh'nTijhi mo hnnoin
[def. ] (eat at once). Tdmhlmjm
iiunuj kiin'm ( take it at once ) ; Hain-
hiiHj iiio)i(/ ifti(/in/ (give it at once).

Aijod. Ex.: A'jorin ino}u} (jnw'in {(\o
it at (»nce). Commonly used in
Manila.

Ail polo. Ex.: A/ipnhi vofjdid aiifd
( he became an^rry at once). Also
means ''one by one" in some
}»laccs. Ex.: A/ifxtlaU dkiiu; hnnn
(1 will take them one by one).

Kay int. Ex.: Kntjlat no'/tiu/ihulng
s'nfd an okiiKj nintn (like a tlash
he disappeared from my view; he
was out of sight instantly ). Tnyl-
hn/ni/, idea (d disai)pearinfr or l)e-
cominjjT invisible.

Kn(/iiiK(n/insn (I'roiii (/ui}i<t, repetition
<»f root and prefix kn). \'aria-
tion knhiiisnhith^n. Knalnmnlnm
sometimes nutans suddenly (from
nlnm re<luplicated, and prelixAv/).

Knraknrnkn.

Knpni/ . Ex.: J\'npn(/k(irn ko

Late: tanlv

VotenlMN .
\a\s\ ni^'Iit.
To-nmrmw .
Mi(Mav; ikmhi.

T' t-lll' 'ITdW.

timi
p(n7
<lay

Sir
ill h

lati'
<lay

ten

.\(/'n/i

llioi

tnin
Kx.

ni'itt
[an

(th.
nut
(•re
(wl
l^iit
nio;
Jiahi:

iii'j
(\vi
Kx.

kiln

T. I
r( • w
rnu
rra:

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

93

Morning now.

Day now.

The sun is rising now.

Risen now.

A little up now (the sun).

About 9 a. m.

About 10 a. m.

Midday; noon.
Alx)ut half past 12.

About 1 p. m.
About 5 p. in.

About sunset.

Sun is beginning to set.
Set now.

VtrKtfja na.

Arao na.

Sisilang na ang arao.

Suugmilang na.

Mattaastaafi iui.

IpaiujitH/illog inann/: (lit., "egg laying

of the lien" ).
MaH(t^anJl iia ang arao [Mi. ^ "return

now of the sun").
Tanghali.
Bagong nakiimg ang arao (WX.y "the

.**un indinpH again").
Lainpas na (lit., "past now").
IlamjKtfiin iikin ang arao (lit., "to Iri

touched by the 'tiquin' or pole

used hv casco men" ).
Kanitiii pa/arol (lit., "to be caught

by an ax").
Bagong suHnkintk ang arao.
Lungmnhng na. Another expression

is /nnginvnod na (lit., "drowned

Between daylight and dark.

Xight now.

Midnight.

now").

MasiliiH na. Also takip sUlm.
(JalA na.

Kahoong gal/i. The usual word at
present is hating gala.

The following adverbs of time are also used in Ta^alog:

Hourly. Ora.y-orr/.'* (from 8p., /*ora, "hour").

Daily. Araa-artu).

Weekly. Lingrt-llngo (from Hng't, "week."

which also means "Sunday," and
is derived Irom Sj>., Ihnninao,
"Sunday").

Monthly. Bnan-bnan {irnu\ Iman, "month ami

moon" ).

^'earlv. Taun-tann iiiam tann, "vear").

Continually. Pavati. Verbalized, this word has

the idea of " perseverance," and
in the ]>lirase magitaraling nnin
i^aan means "eternally." A syn-
onym tor parafi, in the sense of
"continually," is p'l/agi.
Some day. Balang arao.

The particle maka, in addition to its meanings as a verbal particle, sig-
nifying power, ability, cause, etc., indicates com]>leted verbid action with
verbs of doing, saying, etc., tninslated by llie word "aftrr" with the verb.
iCx.: MakayaH niUVg paroon ka (alter yon do this, «:•) there).

III. Adverl)8 of manner and <juality, which generally answer the (]ues-
tion maanof "how?" are munerous in Tairalog, many a<lverV>s of manner
l)eing the corresponding adjectives used adverbially, es])ecially th()se
compounded with ma. Not all nni adjectives can, howexer, be so nstd,
and neither can adjectives which are roots by themselves be used as
adverbs. Thus adje<'tives like ?»'o''//,o//7 ( wise), malmit (prudent, etc.),
nlul (crazy) are not used as adverbs in Tagalog.

How? Maaiin* Fa'.: Miudu') htifuf (How

are yo»i?) Magaling (well).
Mtatno ang mna ninijof (How is
yonr father?)

So; thus; in this way. Canito (from (fit'>).

8u; thus; in that way. dduiin'in (from diijdn). Gmnamyan

{ to act in that manner).

So; thus; in that a\ ay. Go/ioon (irDWi doon).

J^ikc ( ro(|Uires genitive); thus. (ia>/on (from y(inn). Gnmayon (to

act in that way). Ex.: (rdtjon ui
J'fdro si .huDi (Juan is iike Pe<Iro) .

Like: as: so. (r<ii/a.

How hirire; how much in extent? (innlinf Kx. : GaaUnbdayo^ (How

far? [about]), hang horafi, ]»6
(one hour, sir.)

Ga lias ])een (juite fully explained under tlie comparative of adjectives,
to which the leader is referred. Amoiij.,' some examples may be (iU(»te(i
</a hiito (iiHj fi'ioh }iio (your heart is like stone), and t/nHohin mo (make it
like this). • "Hoth alike" is ex]>ressed by kapmu'i, as may be seen by the
examples: fm"<il,i nio k'ni>oui'i sihuKj duIanA (prohibit tliem both alike);
<iiul Ldjtoth'i )no ti'mo (like you, a [>ersoii [ri;i., your "neighbor"]); ako
vari /:tij»()nn mo, irolanfj bait.'' (Am 1 perha]»8, like you, without judg-
uient?)

Intentionally; i)ur|M»seIy. Pals^L Ex.: 7^'?>(f^.vv/ ?///('/ (they did

it intentionally). Syn., Mtd'njn.
Another wonl is tikia. Ex.:
Tiit'ikisniln [ thev did it })urposely ).

Voluntarilv; willingly. Kn.-^'t. Kx.: Klmi.^tf hd'/a tiii/anf

(Did he [she] do it 'willingly?)
Knnisii iili/o (He [she] <lid it wil-
lingly). With verbs knfid follo\\y
the same construction as to the
parti<les as do the verbs. Ex.:
Kii-«ihi iiiotKj tiUKKjin x'nfd (call
him purposely, i. e., do not for
get to rail him). Jkusd mohf/ ita-
jiini iin (throw this out ]>urposely,
i. e., you should have thrown
this ou{ yourself). Pafjliiman
iiioit'i }>t(jiiai) .-<> JiKin (give ittoJtthn
v(»lnn(aiily ). A'?/.*''/ is intensified
by reduplication. Ex.: ]Vnl<j kaug
k'lsok'isdntj (/uiiiona iiomj ainnnan
(y<»u <lo not do anything with the
lea-t willingness).

I )y force. *sW y,///7roM from /»/7/7). Ex.: PUif na

<ihn II i>'ir>'>'ni ( I am going perforce).

Especially; only. IlnLod. V.\.\ Ihikod .sit/niig nntunag

(he wns [has been] 8umnion«.»d
especi.illy I. Jhtkod k(i mi lahat
( Non are the only oneamong all).
Ma ft III I tti'ih (iiig ffiiio(>\if hukod
ifini/aititm si i \i/til<ni. /jo.s' (there are
many " princijudes," buttheonly
riili one is ('a]»tain l>uis).
T(ii7i;i is sometimes used in this
sen>e.

.\s Well as, etc. Akl'iiii, var. (igha)/; <i(j<dniy; agapay.

As well as: conjointly. Sahui/. \]\.: Amj /(d<iki kasahaynang

b<tii(d>f (the man as well aa the
woman, or the male as well a8 the
female i. — L.

Hurriedly or more (]nickly ( sai<l to SiniiaaiKjoj/ikn ( from .s7(?Wo/>?Av'/, idea
be a]iplied only to whi}>i»ing). of punishing another).

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

95

Quickly; hastily.

Except; besides.

Except; excuse me; by permission.

llardlv; scarcely.

^k*arcelv; ha nil v.

^Nearly; almost.

Accordingly.
Agreeably.

Inside out.

Upside down; reverse<l.

Slowly; smoothly; noiselessly.

Bigld. Ex.: Xamatay siyang hiyld
(he died quickly). — L. Verbal-
ized. Ex . : Bi<jlabt mo any tiilol mo
(hasten [abbreviate] your account
[or story]).

Liban. Ex.: Libdn sa iy6y icalnng
ib(ni(j ma/id] Hir or oou (except you,
there is no other person who can
go there) . Libdn sa iyd ang mulia^
ay dill ko ibibigay (except that you
are to be the one taking it, I should
not give it).

Tabi. Ex.: Tabi p6^ ako'y dardan
(excuse nie [for going Jbefore you,
for leaving first, etc.].) This is the
shout '*cocheros" use, Tabif It
literally means thus: "Aside."
7abi is also used for a polite cor-
rection or contradiction: Singtabi
m iyd, lii lidi gaydn {y o\\ will pardon
me, l)ut it is not just like that^.
Tdbiha)!, refuse heap, rubbish
heai>, etc.

Bahayyd, var. bahagid. Ex.: Bo-
lidgid ltd mdl:d.'<iyd (it is hardly
sufficient). — L. A synonym is
buli)iyd.

Bihit'd. 8yn. ara; ddt-ha. Ex.:
Ddtha kung iuabutan (I scarcely
reached it). Bihird also means
"seMom." Ex., as "hardly:"
Biiiibihird ko ud dtig udgai/idritd (I
think scarcely anyone has come
here yet). Bihirdng dl iiapdrdon
(scarcely anyone was not there);
i. c, nearly everyone was there).
yfdltiitd ]ni filyd' y bi/iirang indkdld-
kdd (she [he] is weak yet, an<l can
hardly walk [is hardly able to
walk] ). Bihird is verl)alized with
mdg iiud uidghi. Ex.: Pdgbdnra'in
mo dug kdnin (change the food).
\dgkdkdbihird sild nang pagdd-
vdiiiit (they differ in their manner
of dressing).

JJdbjK. Ex. : n<i/os namdtny siyd ( he
[she] almost (lie<l).
A yon.

Alin.<d)i<td (from addod, to follow,
obey).

Bdliktdd. Ex.: Itdlikidd kd uiydn
(indef. ); b<d'iktari)\ mo iyan (turn
that inside out).

Toidtrik (from touad). Syn. toudndik.
Ex.: Tonarik rid bantd (light-
headed; injuilicious).

Mdrdlidu (from daJion). Mdrdhdu
ihdnnt or fltihtm d/ilitin viTV slow-

96

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Woll.

Carofiillv; in an onlorlv inaiiiUM-

r.:i(llv

llai'l: FMii-'lilv; \ iL'<>r«Mi<lv.

r>r'u'Jly; •iiii<'kly.

Str<>ii;,'lv.

Moffpdhirahan kang Inmnkad (go
very i^lowly [indef.]). Pnknrn-
httuin nut nnij paghlla (throw it
delilu'rately [def.]). Majxikara-
lian, to ^o very smoothly; slowly,
etc. Kx.: ynjmhirdfian nn (it
has ^llowed up already; it ha."
(|uietrd down already, etc.).
There is also a definite with <ni.
Ex.: D'dtmmn iim if/aiif/ f/nna )nn
(do that work (juietly, etc. ). Met.
a<lject. Kx,: Marnluin amj lt'n.th
t(ii/('( (lie ha.s a tnag:naniinou.*<
heart). Iimf iitot, very hIowIv;
"little by little" is not much in
use. LoiifUf lovdij, little by little,
i.s nhont e(|nal to irhoa, etc., and i.s
usimI i^cnerally callin*^ to aninials.

}fa',nfl. Miihutlnt/ iiKthuii, very well.
Syn. }f<f'i(/i.

Mtihi'isfiif. }fahus(tf/ 110 )u(ihuiifn/,
\ery carefully; in a very orderly
manner. Kx.: Itn fi »f<urin ithnininj
iii'ihi'isdf/ (do this carefully).
Jluliilin iiK>H(/ xuiJiusaif ( wraj> it up
carefully). Jfunii'isat/, to put in
order; to arranjre; to <li.'>'entanj;le.
M'n//Kihil,Hs>ti/, to arrange well: to
.•-•'ttU^ thiuirs with care. Adj.:
"Will ke]tt,'' vie. Kx.: IliU'tfi im
Inih',/: ( w«'ll kej)t hair). Ainj li'mu-
•-"'/ (what dit<entan^led or set in
orders /Insinf mi ufUfjt (a care-
ful conversation ).

M<'< nn'i. M<is'iifi<tn(/ uin.'<nin(U verv
l)a<lly. ]''x.: Xntuh^fifiktuu] nuistunu
l(i(;af>} (I ^lept hadly last ni^ht).

M*i/(iLi'is. Kx.: Jif}iiti(/ ntn (ikofi'j Idk-
k'lsdu ndiHj jHifTi/u/rffHsiip (do not
talk to nie so much in such a
rou«:h manner) , l\((hi/<tkan hnnj
hiiiiahiid ( walk w ith vijror). It'i-
iioliil: )n>tn itdHt/ iiHi/tik'is (itKj hatxfko
( he pushed the hanca [canoe]
vi^'ontusly ).

Ma(/iifi\ var. iiKintli. Cornl)ined with
l»oth uiii and iiutq, an anoma-
lous veil) is formed, tmif/dmn'ili
to make haste, and in turn this
is nse<l with a noun to indicate
time. l''x.: MntfihannrnHf t^rao (a
short while, «jrtime). Kxamplen
as an adverh«if ///'/'/'»// are: (itnnv
iiKHKi ni'ula// ( do it <|ui<'kly ) ; sahi-
hiii uuni'j HKulnft (tell it (piicklv).

M<il'il>(ni. Kx.: Ta/i(in inotuj indfifmif
(tie it stronyrly). Wnhtnrj vnnnufj
tihmi pi}(ikns'tr<y y ha/ijihan (there
is no re])airin<j: strf>n^er than to
replace what is destroyed). — T. P.,

TAQALOG LANGUAGE.

97

Finely.

Frequently; often; closely.

Wisely.

Swiftly.

Judiciously ; prudently.
Customarilv; commonlv.

Openly; publicly.
Secretly.

Do you understand ?
6855—05 7

822. Manibay, to prop up; to sup-
port; to Hustain. Ex.: hjaiKj ba-
lonij ang pinanhiiboi/fui naug bdhatf
(that Htone is the prop of the
house).

M'tgdliiifj. Maijalnig na magulhig,
very finely. Ex. : Knngiuahi akong
magaling (I ate finely). Ang
nagagaling^ person injj)r{)ving (aa
from an illnen.^). Giuiud'iiig, to
grow better (as a sick person).
Maggalingy to prepare. GalhTgin^
what prepared. Mmigalhig, to
improve greatly. Makagdling, to
do good. Ex.: Ang mniiga gamot
ay xiyang ikinagagdUng nang maiTgd
may mkit (medicines are what
cause the sick to recover) . Mag-
pagaliiig, to prosper. Mngpakaga-
llng, to improve; reform, or cor-
rect one's self. Ex. : Magpakaga-
ling kayo nang viaiTlja dsal niayo
(improve yourselves in manners).
KagaliiTganj goodness. Ang pina-
gagaling, thing Ix'ttered (present
tense) .

MalhiiU. Ex. : MaVnnit akong naUligb
(1 bathe often). Also name of a
close- woven basket made around
Bosoboso, Rizal l*rovince.

Not expressed by a single word, but
by phrases, the adjt^ctive maru-
iiong, wise, being expressed with
the subject in the nominative, and
the verl) in the inlinitive. Ex.:
Manitwng i^iyang inndral (he
teaches wisely), not nngmadral si-
yaiig tnarunong, which woul<l V>e a
proper construction if maruuong
were an adverb.

Matnliii. Tumulin^ to do anything
swiftly. Magtii/iti, to go swiftly.
Ang ipagtulin, the cause of going
swiftly. Ex.: Papagtalininmoanq
bangkd (make the banea [canoe]
go swiftly). Matuling tnmakbo to
run swiftly). Katulivan [abst. )]
swiftness).

*S''/ bait.

Sa (tgaH, also with al)Stract, sa kan-
ga/ian.

Sa lidyag.

Si lihim. Lihini na gnod, a secret
dei'd. Ang ganitng Hhiin ay )taha-
Jidyag din (secret deeds are the
very ones found out). — T. 1*., .M5.
Ang lihini ay si>i<tng finyag (the hid-
den is wliat is discovered). — T. P.,
414.

JIani/ var. ''lumid/-^

hush."

lintlv. S(nn/nin. Wlien followed hy tiaufj,

info, lunnaii, eU*., the final n is
<ln>j)peti. Syii., }Kiti.

iiiHiiiiu'li. (iiKjiiuHti ( from '/////, idea of a little) .

Ex. : MniitiiKi tnhi(j (a little water ).
Kanuti, a little, as in speaking a
langiiajre, etc.

irthwith; instantly. Sa mndnli. Kx.: llomuj kang ma-

halnm doon, souiunnUill innn Imuantj
(do not delay there more than an
instant). Sn i^aiuj kimp mala (in
the twinkling; of an eye).

hy not? S'Hui }Hi dif var. Snd'if Snan ]hi dl

qatiuiif { Why not that wav?)

hy? At<tnof Atfanof ( Who doubts it?)

,1/ or (ui joined with eertain parti-
cles means " whv?" Ex.: At dif
(Why not?)
would he better. M<ihoi7>/(i. SltudhatTj^a (hi^tier). A'a-

IniiTi/nhmTi/'i (admirable) .

it were not. Kuu daiTijtni, Pnknndnt7?;a)i {(or the

sake of ).

'rtainly. Tand). \'erbalize<l taido means to

un(Wrlstand. I']x.: Xntatanto nutf
(L)o you uuderstan<l it?) Ddikofxi
Hudihfuli') { I don't understand it
yet).

••ulv. Totnit inaudhi. Also (otou din : lijU'nt

* _

i7<i(i ; intooiH/ fotoit ( very truly ) . To-
to(/ ummlimj ((/too (very truly, in-
deed).

•rtaiidy; indeecl. )nj<i, vnr. to/<tui(. ICx.: Sif/n to/a tmg

noijnohao (he is eertiiinlv the
thu'f).

ruly; really, ]>iii. ( ( 'han-jfcs to r'ui after some

words. )

I\'. Nearly all the adverbs of mr-asure and deu'n'o have been fully
c|)lain«*d under the <'oiiiparati\(' and superlative of the adjective. It may
3 noted heir that the a<l\erb is made siiperlativ<' by the reduplication of
u^ ad\(M-i», with the propei- tie. in the sauH' manner asi the adjective.
any examples hav<' betMi ^iven on the forct^oimr pa<j:es. The only adverbs
L.ed here will be l''nn<fn«j, *'<»nly;" >///./ no; and i^ukat na, "enough."

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

99

Indeed; without doubt.

Also; likewise; a« well.
Should.

Would; should; could (idea of com-
pulsion).

V. Adverbs of modality, such as "surely," not, ** perhaps," etc., have
been treated under otlier adverbs or will be included with the adverbial
pronouns and expressions of affirmation, negation, and doubt.

Affirmative adverbs are fairly numerous in Tagalog. The principal are:

Yes. Oo. Op6 (yes. sir [or madam]).

Oo r7j/a and 60 iTf/anit (yes, in-
deed). Paoo (to say yes). Ang
ipaoo ( what said ) . Ang pinaoohan
(person to whom yes has been,
said ) .

Pain. Siyd pala (it is lie, indee<l).
This word is used in asserting
when a thin^ is certain. Ex.:
Indl pala si Pedro ang nagnakaof
(Is Pedro the thief without
doubt? ) Siya pala ( he is, indeed ) .
Kapala pa (it is clear). Ex.:
Kapala j>a' g paroroon ako (it is
clear that I am going there).
Kapala pa' g <li paroroon ak6 (it is
clear [of course] that I am not
going there).

Narnan. Man (even).

Din'ni. Ex.: Kun siga'y su»iilal di-
sin, ay paroroon sana ak6 (if he
should write, I would go there).

Sana. Ex.: ihig ko mna'y snmidat,
rijIuuVl vald akong kapanahonan
(i would like to write, but I have
no time). Ako ang pardon sana^
hago ika(>'y naparito (I had to go
there, before you came here).

The principal negative adverbs are as follows:

No. Hindi.

Not. Indl. rudi pa {not yet). Indl man;

mr//rm (neither; not either). Indi
na (not now). Indl Idmang (not
only, solely ). Indi iyan (not that) .

Aayaoako. A' [pronounced abrupt-
ly] (I don't like it). Kaayanan
[abst.] (dislike). Ang inaayanan
(what disliked or refused).

Dl. Ex.: I>1 isa u«tn; dl man nana
(in no wav). Dl man; dl }>a (not
yet), lifauhinf (What matter?)
Dl aiduti dent na (for it is said

that ). J>1 (nnann (it is said).

Dlaun }Kif (How can it bo?) Dl
iTga salamal (may it be thus).
Ito'y dl ma'tgi (this is not goo<l).
Dl sino ( to who else ). Kx. : Dlaino
ang da i in] an mo, knndl ang capitanf
(To who else should your com-
plaint be made except the cap-
tain?)

Ddl, varia. dirl. Mapadirl, to say

I don't want to.

Not

Not

100 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

whom '*no'* has been said many
times (past tense). Padili ka,
say no. DUi rin, no indeed. At
the end of a sentence dUi some-
times means * * or not. ' ' Ex . : Ba-
bdyad mla^ dilif (Will thev pav or
not?)
No (forbidding). Honug. Ex.: Ilouag na (do not do

it now [presuppojses previous com-
mand]). //oMo^ ii/an (leave that I
drop that ! ) Uouagan mo iyd n ( let
that alone ) . Hm^ngan mong knuin
(do not take it). Honagan mong
itapon (do not throw it out).
Honagan mono tingnan (do not
look at it). Houag kang par6on
(do not go there). Pahouagin mo
iyang tnno niyAn (tell that man not
to do that). Pahouagan mo iyan
diift'tn m bntd (forbid that to that
child).

There are a few adverbs of doubt in Tagalog, as well as some phrases
meaning the same. They are:

Perhaps. Baga.

Possibly. Kayn. Kay A nga (just because, just

for that reason). Used with af-
firmative sentences. Kayd nganit
(as soon as) . Kayd nijgani ( since ) .
Used with negative sentences.
Makakayd, to be able (in a phyt*-
ical sense). Kayd is also any
hunting or fishing utensil or in-
strument.

Why? For what reason? Wain. Ex.: At akd wari jtardonf

(Why do I have to go there?)
With neg., At di vxiri akd pardon f
(Why don't 1 have to go there?)

Perhaps. Vpan. It is never put last in a

sentence.

I don't know. Avdn. Do not confuse with adyao

(I don't want to).

If it could be thus. Naud. Siyd nnud (it may be this

way). Use<l for **amen."

THE PREPOSITION.

The preposition, which serves to connect a noun to the sentence, in the
same manner that the conjunction introduces or attaches sentences, is not
as highlv developed in Tagalog a:^ in English, and for this reason thesame
preposition means what it would take several different ones to express in
English. The principal Tagalog prej>OHitions arc:

In; to; from; against; at; by; on; Sa. Ex.: (in) Sa bayan (in town);
per; iH'tween; with; ot: among; «' bnhny (in the house); (to) sa
lor; acroiis. nh ko (to my aunt); sa amain ko

(to my uncle); *«a amd ko (to my
father); sa inn ko (to my mother),
the^«c also mean **for" mv aunt,
etc.; an hdhny (to the house); i*a
iynn fn'thay (to that house); (from)
sa bt'ihay (from the house);

• • • •

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 101

(against) laban sa kaanay (against
the enemy); (at) aa bahay (at the
house); (l)er) iatld sa sangdd (8
per cent); (between) sa ma gating
at niammd ( between good and bad ) ;
(with) »arna sa kaniyAng anak
(she is going with her child); (of,
rare); (among, unusual); (for)
pataiHjo ko sa America ( I am leav-
ing for America); (across, rare).
Sa is verbalized, the verbs thus
formed being explained later.

Without. Wald. Ex.: Wald akoiig salaj)t (I

am without money). Magirald, to
run away; to get rid of. Mana/d,
to lose; to miss. Kx.: Nawai/in
ako navy lakds ( I lost the strength ).
Makairaldj to be able to run away.
Ex.: Hindi makay'(dd iTi;ay6n (it is
not possible to run away now).
Maypdvttld, to pardon, forgive.
Wald with in also means to remit
or cancel. Ex.: Walin mo na any
litany ka m iy6 (cancel the debt I
o w e y o u ) . Ma ykaua Id , to go a pa rt ,
to break away. Ex.: Pajtayka-
valhi ma kanrt (let us quit [as
partners]) (excl.). Sinony iraldf
(Who is absent?) Wald ka kaha-
])on (you were absent yesterday).
May ikinairainild ka nany balauy
naf ( Is there anything you lack?)
Wabnty vald (absolulely nothing).
Aawabl sa kamay ko (it escaped
from my hand). Mauald man
i.sany anuany kalakian^ honay any
isany salita^in ( better to lose a cara-
bao bull than a moment of conver-
sation. — T. P., H6iK Jbd any may
ay-ay sa vald (it is better to have
a scarecrow than to be without
ont^ ) . — T. 1*. , 8G(i. NayntamaynW y
vald (they pretend to have some-
thing, but are destitute). — T. P.,
8()7. Majti/tilit any mardmot, any
vabVy hindi (the miser may be
forced [to give something], but he
who has nothing, no).— T. P., 868,
Wabiny masamany kaniya, vahtny
ma'iyi sa. ibd (faultless what is his,
good for nothing what is of
an«»ther).— T. P., 870. Wald also
means " the open sea, a gulf," etc.
Maypanald (to put to sea). ICx.:
Nay pa wald any Mora nany kain-
yany samsatnin (the Moro put to
sea with his bonty).

Of (and family or associates). Kana. Any buknlkand ali ko (the

102

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Of (genitive of .s/).

Of (geiilitive of nvf/).
Tu (dative, etc. of id).

Airaiiist.

From.
From.

iV/ . Ex . : A ng r? logan n i Luis ( Louis'
eocoannt ]>alm ^rove). Anfjbahay
ni Ihindn (Thonia^i' house).

NiiiKj. lOx. : Ang hi'thmj natif/ amn ho
(my fatlier's house).

Knff. Ex.: Itong tmtf/kod at/ katj
Jfum (this eane is John's [is to
Jolin]).

I/ihaii; Inhaii sn. Ex.: Jkao^i/h'thmi
Sft ukiii (you against nie). Imng
hokhoh'than ndiKun sa iha (one army
a;:ainst another). Mafilnhan (to
resist or strug^'le against).

Bultitt. Ex.: Si'ian ha naghuhatf
{ Where (lid you come from?)

Mn/n. Ex. : }fii/a wjngon ( from now
on). Sa unihi (from tlie begin-
ning). Ex.: }fiiln mi tunes hangan
s(i rierncs (from Monday until
Friihiy). ^f(|^<i sa }fay))i/a hangan
sa Santa ^fr.'<(f (from ^lanila as far
as Santa Mesa). Magmula (to
start; to commence).

THE ("ON.IINCTION.

(ienuine conjunctions are iath«'r scarce in Tagaloj;, hut many otiier words
may he used asa«'onjunction would he in JMiglish to join sentences together.
The principal ones are:

And.

To(:«'th<'r with.

Not nnly — l)Ut.

l'nl<*ss.

I', veil ; us well as.

Or.

< )r lint.

Either — or.
Or.

Al. This loses the vowel in many
cases, being pronounced with the
w<»rd preceding as a linal t, and in
such cases is written '/.

Kns^ifiit) (from f:a and sama).

I! nidi /I'lni'iiig — knjaii tmgkns.

Ilninnj ti'iiihuig.

Sal Hi I/.

J fill. \ Iso num.
Mil '/in — indiiin.
O (Sp. I

The f<>re}ioiiig are calle<l binding conjunctions as to the llrst f(»ur and
alter;iti\e conjunction^' as to the last four. The following are called adver-
s;iti\'e <onjnn«*tions. They arc:

J>ut. Xgiiiii; kiii'ili; dalajuniii; snhati; aliii-

(fiii'i. Sgmii never begins a ])rin-
cip:d <l;uHe. but always a subordi-
iiatc one. and generally in an an-
su<r. |]x.: f hig ki'SiiHinig ktnnainy
injiiiiyi hinil! nii'i mnnOffagari (I
Would like to eat, but I am not
able to I. — L. V. from af, is almost
inxariabiy joine<l 1(» injnitt. Knmli
\< ii'^ed forsii)>ordinate clauses, gen-
eially w hen the ])rincipal one has
a iiegati\e meaning. Ex.: Ilimil
/'i/iiU, kintfl! balxn/t' ang \tnni (tlu*
bird is not a male, but a female).
I)iihil,niia, which generally take'/,
means "but" still stronjrer than

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

103

But rather.
Neither — nor.

Although; though.

Although ( more formal than above).

Kver so much, although (givhig a
reason or making an excuse).

Although.

Since; whereas.

No matter if; even if.

What; because
But; vet.

Some conjunctions may be styled
Tagalog are:

Why?

htndl, denoting a sharper contrast,
as b(»t\veen rich but miserable, etc.
Snbtili means '*but for," etc., as
conditional. J /////a)/'7, which takes
V in beginning a clause, means
'* but forall that," etc. Verbalized
the two foregoing words mean "to
except." linijo is sometimes used
i n t h e sense of " bu t . " K x . : Tn n-
ffhaH Hdfhnfjn^ 1/ ira/d pa sii/i'i (noon
already, but he is absent yet).

Ktivdf ffUfjkus. These words nmy l>e
used alone in this sense, and may
also be joined together.

Man — man. Man — manJiindi nn.
Ex.: ]yald ham'i h'njds man, Hltuj
man (we have nothing, neither
rice nor eggs.

Baqamdn. Ex.: Ikujami'tn dnkhd ai
Juan, i<a pun nama'y maifd}nan tdyd
(though Juan is poor, he is rich in
a good name).

BlsttVl. BUtd^t napopoot sly a sa akin,
ay hlhlyydn din akd (although he is
angry at me, it will be given tome).

Mafaynn'in. Ex.: Malaynnrnakoynaa
ka'dng paritd, ay di ko vmhtyaiuui,
(although I wished to come, I was
not able to [I had no strength]).

Kahi, var. kahinial, kah'niyd^ kahi-
)iyd mrtn, kali'iU. Ex.: Ktdtirna^t
di mdyay si/d, parordon din ako,
(abhongli they do not consent, I
shall ^o there).

]*alih]iaHa (from Sanskrit, pariUid-
AJid, sentence, reprimand, etc.) . It
is followetl by '// in sentences. As
an adverb it is equal to kayd iTija ;
kayd pa/a, as well as to "since"
and " whereas." As a noun it
means ' ' irony. ' ' Mayp(dihhasa ( to
speak ironically).

Snkddn. Ex. : Maypapakahnsoy )nunn
>'///'(, snkddn xiyd" y maykasakif ( lie
will ^orge hini.^elf first, even if be
makes himself sick ).

M((yapd, var. mayapd'f, little heard.

Bftyo. Ex.: SihVy tiny may s^dn, ffiiyn
tikd any pinarnsalnni (they are tlie
ones at fault, but I am theone who
has l)een j»unished).

"causative." The principal ones in

Because (giving reason).

Bakin' \Rr. />dkit. Bdkif dif (Why
not?) lidkd also means "as,"
"how," etc., in scnti'uces. .As a
noun ftf'iklt means an old monkey
with develoi>c(l teeth. J ;<<>'/.'' also
means " why?"

Sa payka^t.

A fifth trroup of conjunctions i.s generally that called ''conditional.**
The significations of the memhers of this group are self-explanatory.

If; rather. Krm.

Unless. Kkii diri lamang; hm di Inmang;

lilxni na.

As if it were. Kuii i«tn<i sa.

Were it not for. Knn tfatu/av; daiTtjan.

Provided. Knn h'uudng; houag l/imang.

J^est. Biik'd, var. maka.

The sixth and last group of conjunctions is that of the class called "con-
clusives" in s(>nie grammars and "illatives" in others. In Tagalog the
principal ones of this class are:

That (relative). N<ntg. Ex.: Mngpagamot ko, uatig

iki'io Of/ gniiKiling (allow yourself
to l)e treated, so that you mav be
better). — !..

That. X'l. Kx.: \(igyahi slgii no uku \f

hatuliig { he.<;aid that I wa.« a«K»ep).

Consequently; that is to say. Dt tfatn.

Therefore (conse^juently). Sn nmldtfiiidi lit. "in other words")

Kx.: Xdkttd ko sild kagah-iy sa ma-
L'ltoniil }iiii<fi si/('i sUYtginnkng (I
saw lliem last night, therefore
they did not embark).

In order that. Vjxiu. It is never put last in a

clause.

luaHinuch; in so far as. Yainnng, var. gagdinang; ijngang;

/i(ii/'nii(tiH/; /i<nnffng. Ex.: Mang-
}/fi;f'iring gair'ni nlgn i/((g<nnan i<iga^y
gnhi rnntlnr-geucrdl (he is able to
do it, inasmuch as he is governor-
general) .

THE KXCI.AM A HON.

The exclamation, or interjection, can hardly Ije regarded as a part of
s|»(M'rh, roiiiparcd with verbs, iionns, ;i«ljectives. etc., but for want of a
better rla>si(i<';ition ihev mav be treated here. Thev are generallv self-
explainintr, and many seem to be ro(»ts used as iniperativcs of the verb.
The mo>t charai-teristic Tairalog interjections are:

Dear me! Alas! A},a!

<)iK'h! Wow! Armi! Arat/f

Oh how ! (.\lwavs follows.) Aiku'i! (mosllv used bv women).

(^h how ! (^ .\1 ways follows. ) Jiiifn'ta. May be used together,

Ixipi'in prece«ling. Bapda is more

in use bv men.
(lOod! Fine! B"fi tTi/<i!

Poor thing! K<nnn'uni/i.'

Would that it mav be so! C>h Kdhinifnnmri.' Xaua! Maano!

that !

(^lick! /)<//;.'

Be silent ( to one) ! llmnig kdng magiwjdp!

No talk! SileiKM'! Ilomuf k(HfO)i(/ indgiilgayf

Lightning! (Oh, hell!) Linfik:

My mother! Xdknf y((ku/ (Contraction from

ind ko. )

What a|>ity! Sdf/ditg/

Move on! (io ahead! Sulo)}g!

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 105

Look out! Aside! Take care! Tabl! Hag!

!?tand back! UronyJ

Look I Behold! Here it is! Manad!

Tagalog cursinj? is rather peculiar. It has evidently been derived from
native sources and not from contact with the Spaniards. Among the most
usual expressions are:

May a crocodile eat you! Kanin ka nany bnaya!

May the earthquake swallow you up! Lnmurdn ka nany f'mdol!

May a snake bite you! Tlikain ka nany ahas!

May the lightning strike him! Tinamadn siyd nanyimiik!

Section Seven.

THE VERB.

L **The verb is distinguished from all other words by marked oharacterin-
tics and a peculiar organization." — EarU'. The eminent phiiulogisit .speaks
thus of the English tongue, but his remarks applv equally to Ta^alog. He
further defines a verb as *' the instrument by which the mind exprei?Hes
its judgments," a defmition which was fi^^^t enunciated by the Danish
philologist Madvig, in his Latin grammar (Copenhagen, 1841, 8th ed.,
1889). Madvig calls a verb vdmynmrd, literally " out-say ing-word."
Other characteristics of the verb have been noted and have given names
to the class, such as the German Zntirurt (time-word), and Kwald's
Thatnort (deed-word). But in Tagalog the line between nouns and
L'erbs is much less than in English, where it is still less than in Latin,
jlreek, and other languages of southern Europe.

n. The simplest verbal form is the imperative, which consists of the
"oot, followed by ka (thou) or kayd (you; ye). An adverb (jf time is some-
innes added to the phrase for emphasis. Ex.: lAkad /ca na! (walk
>n, nowl) hip ka! (Think!) Aral ka! (Teach I) Dald modoon (iiik^ it
ihere).- I)al/i mo dito (bring it here). As in English, many of the roots
.L-seil as imf)eratives may be used as nouns also. Aral, as a noun, means
"d'K'trine" or "teaching." Ex.: Any and ni Monror' y any dral nany
America w/aydn (the Monroe doctrine is now the doctrine of America).

IIL By prefixing ka to the imperative, and reduplicating the first sylla-
ble of the root at the same time (sign of the present tense) the idea of
quickness, intensity, care, etc., is imparted to the command. Ex.:
Kalaldkad ka! ((Toquickly ! [to r)ne]) . Kalaldkad kayo! ((ioijuickly I [ye] ).
Kaimp ka! (Consider it well I) Kadadnla mo ddon (take it tliere ean»-
fully). As a general thing the agent takes the indefinite form, as will
be seen by the examples, but the definite is used when necessary. A'(/
with the reduplicated first syllable of the root has a very different mean-
injf with any other person than the second. With the first and third per-
sons it has the idea of "time just past," when followed by />a,as will beneen
by the following examples. Sometimes pa may be omitted. Din may
also take the place of pa, as may also Idmany. In English the time may he
expressed by " has" or " had," according tothe contex. Karardtiny ko pa ( I
have [had] just arrived). Karardtiny ni dat Innnh (Don Tonuis has just
arrived), ibiy many makakain t<a dminf (Do you wish to eat with us?)
Saldmat, aydoakdU kdkdkain ko pa ( thanks, I do n()t care t< >, I have just eaten ) .
Kaga yd ling nany kajta lid na habaye ko !«i hayan (my sister has just come
from town). Kahihiyd, ko din ( 1 had just lain down ). Kapafxinauy kn din
at hapapanhik Idmajiy nild (I had just gone down and they ha<l just gone up
[i.e., tne house ladder] ). Kapapdmk Idmany niyd mi hdlmy (he had just
entered the house). Kapapdsok din iTijaydn ni Kstt'han so hn.^ahan ( Estel»an
[Stephen] has just entered the reading place [i. e., the master's place]).
Katmmlat ko (1 had just written it ). Katatapns ho ( 1 have just fini^hed it) .
Kaiatagpi ko (1 had just men<led it). Kanuta» na ko (1 had already finished

106 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

it ) . KaaallA lA mang niyd ( he has just gone away ) . KaaaHs pa nang Aking
amd (my father has just gone away). KaaalU din nbaydnnang camtdn
(the captain just now left). With roots Hke /ira/, which have several dis-
tinct meanings according to the verbal particle prefixed, ka does not
require the first syllable to be repeateil. hx.: KapangaiigAral din ngaydn
nang pare (the priest has just finished preaching). In this case the prefix
is reduplicateil, murTgaral meaning '* to preach." KapagalU din ni Benigno
nnng damit (Benigno just took the clothes away). Magalis means *'to
takeaway."

IV. Ka has many other functions, which will be taken up later. It is a
most important particle and should be carefully studied. It should be
noteil that the pronouns with the imperative are mostlv in the nomina-
tive, while with the first and third persons they are in the genitive.

V. All such sentences are in the definite or so-calleil ** passive," which
is by far the most usual form in Tagalog, but which would look very
strange manv times if translated by the English passive.

VI. The foregoing form is also used to express oppoeites, the wonis
being linked by ay. It may be expressed in English oy **now, again,"
or •* now, then." Ex.:

Now he slee|)s, then he wakes. Katuidlog ay kagigising niifd.

He comes in and goes out. Kapap&wk ay kakUabas ntyd.

He is coming and going. Kararl&ing ay kaaalls niya.

Sometimes he walks, then he rests a Kalal&kaday kahihintdhinid niyd,

little.

Now she laughs and then she cries. KakUaua ay kaiiyak.

VII. When a prefix changes the meaning of a word, it is retained in the
imperative. Ex.: Aral ka (teach); pagaral ka (study); pangdral ka
(preach).

VIII. With the exception of the forms already cited, the verb is always
accompanied by particles, which sometimes modify the root itself for
euphonic reasons. Nearly every word in the language can be made a verb
of some kind or another by the use of these particles, which are the strik-
injif peculiarity of the Malayo-Polvnesian languages, but have l)een re-
tameil in the primitive tongues of tne Philippines much more than in the
Malay, Javanese, or other cognate dialecte. There are some twenty of
these verbalizing particles, oi which seventeen are used as prefixes to
roots and three are the definite auxiliarv particles m, i, and an. Of these
particles, which are tabled at the end ol the handbook, the most impor-
tant are nt, i, an, um^ mag, and ma, the last three being indefinite particles.
Pag^ corresponding as a definite to mag, is also imi)ortant. The mastery
of these particles is the mastery not only of Tagalog, but of every other
Philippine dialect, as well as a valuable aid in learning Malay or any simi-
lar tongue of the family.

IX. The root with any one of the indefinite particles prefixed may be
transmuted as the infinitive, provided the particle is merely attached to
give the meaning of the root so modified, but whenever a tense is expressed
the particle or the root is modified, and sometimes both. Besides the
imperative and infinitive,Tagalog has really but one other mode, the indic-
ative, as the subjunctive, including those modifications? known in various
European languages as the optative, conditional, dubitative, potential, etc.,
is expressed by certain words corresponding to the English ** could,
should, would, may," etc.

X. Strictly speaking, there are but three tenses in Tagalog, the past,
present, and future; but it is possible to render the imperfect, pluperfect,
and future perfect tenses by means of auxiliary particles. The first three,
however, are those in common use. The participle is also in u.se, i-orre-
sponding literally to the English participle in some cases, and in others
must Ihj rendered by a phrase. The same remark may be made of the
gerund in English, which is variously rendered in Tagalog. One tense
is sometimes used for another, when the context clearly indicates iheiimt
of the event, as happens in English.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 107

XI. A? in English, Tagalog verbs may be transitive, requiring? an object
to complete the meaning; or intranj?itive, in which the meaning is com-
plete within the verb. These do not always correspond in the two lan-
guages, and a Tasralog root may sometimes be intransitive with one prefix
and transitive with another, which mav reverse or modifv the meaninjr.

XII. Within the tense the verb does not change for the person or num-
heTj and requires a noun or a pronoun to indicate the same.

XIII. The eminent Indo-Tibetan philologist Hryan H. Hodgson (1800-
1894), in his Monographs upon the Tribes of Northern Tibet, reprinted in
Part II, pages 73-76, of '*The Languages, Literature, an<l Religion of Nepal
and Tibet" ( London, 1874), gives it as his o])inion that the (ivarung dialect
of Eastern Tibet has a very similar structure to that of Tagalog, quoting
Leyden and W. von Humboldt (the latter at secondhand) in support of his
views. Rockhill, the Tilietan scholar, now United States minister to
China, who has a wide acquaintance with Tibetan, says that <Tyarung is
merely a variation of onlinary Tibetan, and this being the case there can
be no possible affinity between the two languages. As Hodgson's error
hsL^ \)een given wide puV)licity by its incorporation as a footnote to the
article by de Lacou|>erie U|»on Tibet in the Encyclopedia Britannica, it
shoold be corrected as far as possible by any student of Tagalog.

XIV. As quote<l and corrected by Hodgson, the remarks ot I^^yden, as
taken from the Researches of the Bengal Asiatic Society, Vol. X, page 20V),
upon Tagalog are as follows: '* Few languages |>resent a greater api)earance
of originality than the Tagala. Though a multitude of its terms agree pre-
cisely with those of the languages just enumerated (western Polynesian),
yet tne simple terms are so metamorphosed by a variety of the most sim-
ple contrivances that it becomes impossible (difficult — H. 11. H.) for a
person who understands all the original words in a sentence to recognize
them individually or to comprehend the meaning of the whole. The arti-
fii^es which it employs are chiefly the prefixing or postlixing (or infixing —
B. H. H.) to the simple vocables (roots) of certain particles (serviles),
which are again (may be) combined with others, and thecom]>lete or par-
tial repetition of terms in this reduplication may be again combined with
other particles."

XV. Hfxlgson notes upon the foregoing as follows: " I may add, with
reference to the disputea primitiveness of Ta-<:ala, owing to its use of the
'artifices* above cited, that throughout the Himalaya and Tibet it is pre-
cisely the rudast or most primitive tongues that are distinguished by useless
intricacies, such as the interminable ])ronouns, an<l all the perplexity caused
by conjugation by means of them, with their duals and plurals, ami in-
clusive and exclusive forms of the first person of })ot)i. * * * The
more advanced tril)es, whether of the continent or of the islanrls, have,
jrenerally speaking, long since east away all or most of tliese 'artifices.' "
As has already been noted, the Tagalog pronouns do not modify the verlis,
which have the same form within the tense for all ))ersons and numbers.
As compareil to tongues like Fijian an<l other Melanesian dialects, Tagalog
has maae long strides toward becoming a vehieU'of a much higher culture
than it now enjoys.

XVI. W. von Humboldt says in his Kawi Sprache, Vol. II, page :]47:
**The construction of the Malayan verb (to sj>eak of the entire linguistic
stock) can be fully recognized from the Tagalog verl) alone. The Malagasy
and true Malay contain but fragments thereof, while the Polynesian lan-
guages have a more primitive scheme of the verl) — fewer in forms. It
therefore seems appropriate to ])resent:

First, the Tagalog verb complete without any regard to the other
languages;

Second, the Malagasy (verb), which has in itself very much of the same
construction ;

Third, to show what the Malay language in its discarding and grinding
of grammatical forms has still retained; and

108 TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

Fourth, to make a research an to how the simple but uncultivated Poly-
nesian verbal construction stands in relation to the partially cultivate
Tagalog.

THE DEFINITE.

I. As has been stated before, the definite form of the verb, which is really
a verbal noun with tense-indicating particles, is more common than the
indefinite form, which is more of a true verb in construction. One of the
^reat difficulties to be overcome by speakers of non-Malayan tongues is the
improper use of the definite and indefinite. It is as easy to begin right as
wrong, and if attention is paid to the conditions existing, an idiomatic
mastery of Tagalog may readily be require<l.

II. The true definite particles, m (hin after the final vowel with acute
accent, and nin in a few cases for euphony), i, and an (^n after a final
vowel with acute accent), are used either alone or in combination when
emphasis is to be placed upon the object or there is a special idea implied.
These three particles are further combined with fmg^ the definite verbaliz-
ing particle corre8pon<ling to the indefinite mug; i, m, and po^ many times
commencing a definite verb with the combinations ipag and ijAnag. The
root begins after these combinations, subject to tense reduphcations, as
will be seen by the table at the end. The subject takes the genitive with
the definite, the object taking the nominative case. Ex. : Root gami ( idea
of making or doing) . Gtunawd ( to make or do ). And ana ^xod mof ( What
is your work?; i. e.. What are you doing or making?). This is an indefinite
question, with the verbal idea al most ab^nt, the verb "to be" beingunder-
stood. With an wlverb of time, such as kahapon (yesterday), ngay&n
(now), or bukas (to-morrow) the verb could be "was," "is," or "will
be. ' ' But the more u^ual form is with the definite particle in an(l the proper
tense. And ang ginau'd mof (What did you do? [or make?]). For the
pa.st tense in is inserted with consonant roots between the initial con-
sonant and the rest of the root. And ang ginagawd mo ditdf ( What are yoa
doing here?) As will be seen, the prenent tense is formed by the redupli-
cation of the tirnt syllable of the root, in which in is infixed. And an^
gagau'bi mo? (What are you going to do? [or make?]; what will you do?;
what will you make?) The future of this verb is formed by reduplicating
the first syllable of the root and sufiSxing in. And ang gagatiinnang amain.
mo niyang kdhoy na iyanf (What is your uncle going to do with that lum-
ber?) Amain^ from mndy father, with in as a sufiSx, also means "step-
father," as well as "uncle." Kalioy also means "tree." hang h&hmf
ang gagairin niyd ( He is going to put up a hoiLse ) . The imperative is formed.
by suffixing m to the root. Ex.: Jtd^y gauin ninyong mahiimy (Do thi»
carefully [^in an orderly manner]).

III. in IS the principal definite particle in Tagalog, corresponding to the
same j)article in Ilocano and to rm in Bicol and Visaya, the two last men-
tioned also using in in combination with other particles.

WHICH DEFINITE.

IV. While it is not so very hanl to lay down fairly clear rules as to when
the definite and indefinite should be used (the former laying stress upon
the object and the latter upon the subject or the action), it is extremely
difficult in some cases to say which one of the several definite particles
should be. As a general rule, in signifies motion toward the asrent, or some-
thing by which the agent obtains control of something; i indicates motion
away from agent, or an action by which the agent loses control of some-
thing, and an generally has either the idea of place or of person connected
with its use. /joined with A:o, resulting in ika, and further combined within
t^) pr(xlu(!eU'«7Jrt, denotes cause, etc., with roots when joined to them, either
alone or with verbalizing particles. For this reason the proper definite to
be used in sentences having a definite object without other mollifying cir-
cumstance is determined by the nature of the action, subject to some
exceptions, mainly for euphonic reasijns. Such words, however, as require

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 109

on, for example, in place of in are not numerous. / can not be replaced
by in or an^ and an only replaces in as a tiuffix, never as a prefix or infix.
The following examples will show the different use of the same verb:
Root, panhik. Panhtk kaf (Go up! Come upl). Panhikin mo ak6 sa hag-
dan (come up [to me] by the ladder). Jpanhik mo sa bahay Hong mangd
9&ging (Put tnese bananas up into the house). Panhikan mo ako nitong
mangd mging (Put these bananas up there for me). Pumanhik (to ascend) .
Magpankik (to hoist, or put something upstairs [or up a ladder]). Ang
panhikin (the person upstairs) . Ang ipagpanhik ( what hoisted or taken up).
Ang panhikan (the ladder [stairs or place] ascended).

^. With sentences containing but one direct object which is directly
connected with the action, the prevalence of cause, instrument, or time
requires i, and place an, Ex. : ih&nap ninyd ak6 isang cabayoug inabuti
(look out for a good horse for me). Ang bayan ang hahanapan mo navg
cabayo mo (You will have to look around town for your horse). With iii a
proper use would be: Hanapinmo ang cabftyong nairald (Look for the horse
which has disappeared). Ang pinaghanavan ko ang corral nang cahayo^ p6
(Where 1 did look for the horse was at the corral, sir). Hindnapko ang
aking cabayo sa bayan ay nahdnap ko (I looked for my horse in town and
found him ) . Humdnapf ( 1, to look for) ( 2, to claim ) . Manlidnap ( to scout,
to reconnoiter). v4w^ panAiwa/nn (what scouted for). Ang paghdnap {the
act of seeking). Ang paghanapan ( the place of seeking) . Ang paniianapan
(place scouted or reconnoitered over). Ang fnndnap (what sought for
[past tense]). Ang hinahdnap (what is being sought for). Ang hanapin
(what is to be sought or looked for). Ang hanapan (i)er8on from whom
something is claimed or sought). Ang ihdnap ( the means for something to
be looked for). An^ ihinanap (the means with which something was
sought). The foregomg illustrate the ease with which verbal nouns can be
formed from verbs and vice versa.

VI. When a sentenc^e has more than one indirect object, and stress is to
be laid upon one or the other object, the nature of the action determines
the particle to be used. The following examples, taken from Lendoyro,
show this exceller\tly: Sulatin mo Hong mlat i*a Inmesa nang kdmay mo
(** Write this letter " yourself at the table [i. e., with your own hand]).
liiikU mo nitong sulat ang iyong kdmay sa Hong lamesa (Write this letter
** with your own hand * ' at this table ) . Sti lamesa ang mUatan mo nitong sulat
nang iyong kdmay (write this letter with your own hand, using the table as
a writing desk). It will be seen from the foregoing that many of the defi-
nite verbs are verbal nouns with ang (the) left off. Bearing this in mind
the use of the definite is made much easier.

VII. Circumstantial members connected with the action should be care-
fully distinguished when using the definite from adverbs or adverbial
expressions. Some examples of the definite with adverbs or adverbial
expressions are: Sadiyang ginnv>d niyd it6 (He did this willfully). Dina-
lohong nild siyd nang boong bagsik (They assaulted him [her] with great
barbarity).

VIII. Jpagt ipinag^ and ipina^ the two first being coml^inations with pag
and the last of i with pa, the definite verbal particle corresponding to magpa^
confuse the student at first, but are simple when analyzed. Ipina, ipoy
when foUowwi by a root commencing with g, should not be confused with
ipag and ipinag, as the idea of pa is **to order to do" what is signified bv
the TX)ot. Combinations with other parti(rle«, like mngka, are also foun<f,
forming ipagkn (imp.), ipagkaka (fut.), ipinagka (past), and ipinagknka
(present). It will be noticed that the last syllable of the particle is redu-
plicated with pagka for the future and present tenses. Ex.: Ipagahutan
ninyd iyang mangd lihro (Pass those books from hand to hand). Ang nhu-
tow ( the person reached for or overtaken ). Sinn ang ipinaglulntb mof { Who
are you cooking it for?) And kayd ang ipinagnlos mo sa kaniydf (What
were your orders to him?) Ipaghuhugns sa}ut kltd nang itong damU la/unVt
wdd akong sabdn (I w^ould wash your clothes, but I have no soap). A'/M
is really **we two," but here means *'!.'* Ipaglagd mo nang sa itong oji-

110 TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

ci'd ltd (Make some tea for tliis oltioer). Aii(/ inUatji) (what boik'd or mudc
[as tea, coffee, etc.] ). Atty ipaglajd (the person f(»r whom Ixiileil, made,
etc.). Anfj hiffnan (the teapot, coffeepot, etc.). In the foregoing exam-
ple.*^ })'iff is used beciiuse the sentence expresses tlie person for whom an
act is f)criorme<l. J^uj is also u.sed with in and (tu coinhined in like ca.'^c^s.
Kx.: Jtuntj hi'thdi/ na itij ii amj piinKjaiutiftin nib) (Tins house is where they
quarreled). Root, awiij.

IX. I\t(j nuist also be used with the definite whenever the sentence
exi)resses plurality of acts (►r a^^ents, ur of feigning or reciprocal actions.
The article being generally used, the i<lea of a verbal noun is most promi-
nent. Kx.: AiKf i/>iim(jt<n/:iLsiiLi((nt uiinVtj <unj hiiull diutafiiri (He was
malingering scj iis to escape punishment). Root, mkit (illness). (Diminu-
tives made by repeating a bisyllabic root or the lirst two of a polysyllabic
one, add mt to im])art a scornful or contemptuous meaning). Ang cuarlel
o)t(j jiitKn/niuralnui niUi (They insulted each other in the barracks).
l^iiu.Kj.iira inmtj mnwi^'i tnlii^nn iijaiuj inaiTijii hi'ihnjf (The ladrones have
destrtjyed many of those houses). Mnnnninf; buhay ainj pinngsird. niU'i
(Many houses have been destroyed by them).

X. With verbal roots which have different meanings with um and mag,
the delinite is ac<'ompanietl by jtag when the verb formed by mag is used.
Kx.: Root, btii (idea of trade, l>arter, etc.) Bamill, (to buy). Magbili (to
sell). Itong bi'thay aug ijiirifigbili ko, or Jpinogf fill ko itong biihay (I have
sold this house). Itohg bahai/ aitg binill hi, or Binill ko Hong hahag (I
have bought this house). J\ig { jnnng) jirelixed to /*//« with A'fu suffixed
indicates the ])urcluuser; the |>lace or the? price (jnist tense). For the pres-
ent tense the Hrst syllable of the root is reduplicated. Kx.: Aug pimuj-
bilihnn (])ast); nng ])ngbibilih(in (pr. ). Ang a king kapatid na lalnki aug
jiinaghili/nta ko nitnng bnhag (Isold [have .sold] this house to my brother
[lit., "my brother was the pun!hascr from me of this house"]). Root,
utang [di*\)t}. Vinntnng (to borrow). Magntang (to lend). Magfjautang
(to lend willingly). Mngknntang (to owe). Kx.: Pinagutang ko igunn
sabi}i'i »(i knniga (I lent him that money).

XI. The u.se of the j)ai'ticles gives a great freedom in Tagalog foi the
variation c»f sentences, which, however, luive the same idea. Thus the
Kugiish "Di<ln't I order (or tell) vou to do this?" mav be rendered bvthe
following with e(jual accuracy: Hindi ko ijtinttgntoR sa igo itn gautn mo i7o?
(def. ). Hindi nko n<ign((fs so iynng gnnfiifd ndn.^ (indef., Stress on action).
Hindi (iku nagjuigan-d so ig.) nito.'' (indef., stress on action). Hindi ko
jnnn/fiiitl ndn ( dcf . ). Hindi ko ipmngtn/d s<( igo ifo/ (dcf. ). iJi Ipinngau'il
ko .V. f ///<* //'// (del". ).

XII. ///and If' are coiid»ined with earh other als»». P^x. : Ano angiUnxdntti
mi'.'' ( What ar«' \(»u cooking? I For cu|»hony the verb with this combina-
tion is much varie<l, there l)eing also foun<l the forms innlulnto, inilulutb,
and e\ en nilidntit.

XIII. The v«t1>s itioijruon and innii (to h;>ve) and vabi (not to have)
re<|nire. the <K'tiiiite form of a vi-rb following them in a sentence which
expres>»'s u h[it is had or «lone. or vie(» versa. Roth subject and object,
however, take the nominative in >uch ea-es. Fx.: }[ogroon knng gagtunnf
( I la\e you iinythinL' to do?) ]\id<i /in, irold okong gng<iu(n {"So^tiir; I have
nothing). Mo;/ sihmg ginomi'! (Have they done anything?) W'aid p6,
ndb'i sibmg ginoir,! (No, sir; they hav«' not <lone anything).

XI\'. Tlu' di'linite is also u>ed in si-ntenees having a person for the
object, or in which tli<' oltject is mo<liii»'d by an attribute or attributive
adjiUH't. Jvv.: 'roiingin mo si /',dr<> (Call Fedn*). DnUiin mo rito igainj
lihnnig hiiiosd kong kog<d>-'' ( liiiuLT nie that book I was reading last night).
I/ii'ioi/ iii'oig ii'ikoin iif'ni ( l>on't sav that i. l.ntoin nto itong manuk (Cook
tlii.-i <-Iiicken I. P'dh'm iii>> tiiouo (>'i>,uf i r.riii'j that water).

X\'. r'nrthei- dis<*iission of the <!eliiiite j-articles is reserved until the

1 : - I

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Ill

THE INDEFINITE.

I. The indefinite particles most in use are tun, mag {nag), and ma (na),
which will be explained in detail hereafter. These are called active par-
ticles by the Spanish grammarians, but indefinite seems to be more appro-
priate and correct.

II. Sentences in which the subject is emphasized have this in the nomi-
native, the verb bein^ expressed with the proper indefinite particle which
is sometimes preceded by the article of common nouns. The imperative
indefinite does not require the article in any case. Ex.: Shfd'y hahasa
nhnng lihro (He is going to read this book). Ihio iTijn nng^ahi nigan (You
said that yourself). The object, it will be noted, takes the genitive. Sigd
ang magpapasioL (He is going for a walk [lit., "He will be the walker]).
II: 'to ang tumduag kag Juan (Call Juan [be you the caller to Juan]). Si
Juan ag ang nagndkao (Juan was the thief).

III. The indefinite is generally used in an intransitive sentence, where
an object is not required to complete the meaning. Ex.: ASungmumlat akd
(I am writing). Sungmxdai akd (I wrote). Samlat ako (I shall write).
Xagtuiral kayd (You are learning). Magadral kago (You will learn).
Kungmakain sigd (He is eating). Kutigmain kaini (We were eating [but
not you] ). Kakain (ago ( We will go eat [all of us] ).

An object may be called indefinite when the idea of ''a, an, some, anv"
is inherent, or an undetermined part of the whole is indicated, provided
that there are no modifying circumstances of time, cause, purpose, instru-
ment, or place in conjunction with the action. Ex.: (1) Marnnoug ka
nang wikang castilaf (Do you understand any of the Sj^auish language?)
Marutiong akd Idmang nang wikang lagdlog, fiindt marnnoug ako mamjusap sa
wikang caslila, p6 (I understand theTagalog language only; I do not know
how to talk in Spanish). Magsalitd ka iTj/a sa vikang lagntog (Then speak
in Tagalog). (2) Maglahas ka nang mawja Ma (Bring out Home chairs).
Magdald ka dito nang fonforos (Bring some matches here). Mngdald ka dilo
7uing tafxiros (Bring some cigars here). Magdald ka dilo nang tdhig (Bring
aome water here). Magi aid ka nang isang mannk (Cook a chicken).

IV. The indefinite is also used with sentences having a definite object if
a part and not all of the object is meant. In some ca.<es the place- particle
**an*' is used for this purpose, as it does not indicate an object. //< or i would
l)e used if all the definite object were to l>e indicated. Ex. : Ako g kungmain
ria iiitong lamangkati (I havealready eaten some of this meat ). rniiniim kayo
nitong Mag na mnlindo (Drink some of this clear water) . (1) Maghiqag ka
9a dkin niyang tnhig (iiidef.) (1, Give me pome of that %\'ater). (2) Biggdn
mo akd iycing tuhig (def. ) (2, Give me that water). Ihig ningong niaghili
ti'itong bigds? (Do you wish to sell some of tliis rice?)

V. Actions expresse<l by intransitive verbs which do not re(]uire an
object take the indefinite unless there are modifyincf circumstances of
cause, purpose, means, instrument, or time in conjunction with tlie action.
Ex. : Natisod ako (I stumbled). AmYt Idmli. ka lunginalnkad nang niaUdinf
(Why don't you walk quicker?) Tiiuginnfand aigd (He is lau«;bing).

VI. A sentence commencing with an interroixative pronoun takes tbe
indefinite if the subject of the incpiiry is an ai^ent, and tbe definite it a
cleternriinate object is a»<ktMl al)otit. Ex.: »/yo ting nagdaln nit<nig maiTj/d
kdhoyf (Who brought [wasthebringerjoftliis lumber [timber]?) Akoang
nagcUild, p6 (I brought it, sir [was the brin^'er] ). ,!//''>'/ di hi uaionnTgnsapf
(Why don't you talk?) N<diihii/<1 ka h(fg>'i/ ( Are y«»u ashanie<l to?) Sino
€ingnagmUtdnang sinahimomdktn? ( Who related to you what you have told
me?) [indef.]. Anong ihig m(>f (What do you want?) Anong cahai/tt ang
binilinildf (Which horse did they buy?) An<>ng \< a contraction ior ano
ang (def.).

VII. The indefinite is also used with comi)lox sentences in wliich the
subject is amplified by an adjectival clause. I'.x.: Ang ('nm gnugnnigana
nang kabanala^y magkakamil nang kapalaran [Tha person who does right
will obtain happiness [be happy]).

112 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

VIII. It must be noted that maka in the sense of cause, used with
roots denoting conditions, wron^ (torts) and betterments, has a different
construction from all other particles, even inaka with other meanings. In
the definite, which only exists with i, combined with in in the past and
present tenses, the a^^nt takes the nominative and the object the genitive,
like indefinites of other parti<*les. In the indefinite the agent remains in
the nominative, but the object takes the accusative, which is always pre-
ceded by sa (not by nung). Some other verbs have this ut?e of sa also.
Roots conjugated by mag and man retain the definite forms ;>a^ and p*in
with maka.

IX. The Tagalog verb demands that the subject of a sentence shall V)e
expressed, the tense being indicated by the verb or verbal noun. The
subjet^t may \>q omitted, however, when a number of verbs depend upon
the same subject, except in the first clause, where the verb must have a
subject. As will be seen bv the examples, the syntax of Tagalog is very
simple, but care munt be taken to use the right particles and tenses. If
not, some annoying errors are liable to be made in conversation.

V. For any common verb see the vocabulary (English-Tagalo^). It
must be borne in mind that Tagalog has manv words expressing variations
and modifications of the general verb as well as other languages. These
will be noted in the proper place.

THE DEFINITE PARTICLE **IN.''

I. The plain root, if capable of being verbali • ed, is sometimes used with-
out a definite particle if an adverb of time or the context makes the tense
clear. The definite particle may also be used with an adverb of time, but
as a rule, if the tense is to be emphasized or the context is not clc^r, tense
particles, according to the rules of the language, are used in the verbal
forms. And ang saJfi mo kaJiaponf (What did you say yesterday?) Aui>
avg sabl mo iTgay6nf (What do vou say now?) An6 ang aaU ma bukatf
(What will you say to-morrow? [with adverbs of time] ). An6 ang sinaJtt
hiof (What did you say?) Ano ang sinasahi mot (What are vou saying?)
An6 ang msnhihin mof (What will you say?) Ang sabihin (the person oi"
thing mentioned). And hagd ang sasabihin ko kay Ignaciof (What shall E
say to Igna<*io?) Sahihin mo sa kaniyA na thi6nag ko siyd (You say to hinm.
that I have been calling him). Ang ftabihan (the conversation).

II. In {hin after acute final vowel, and nin in some cases) is the tru€^
definite particle. In is prefixed, infixed, or suffixed, as the case may be^
hin and nin are suffixes only. In is prefixed to a vowel root and infixe<l.
between the initial letter and the first vowel of a consonant root for the past:"
(l>erfect) and present tenses. It is suffixed for the imperative and future
tenses. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated in the present an&
future tenses. The tenses calle<l the pluperfect and future perfect may b^
expressed in Tagalog in two ways. The first pluperfect is formed by adding
na to the past tense, and the second pluperfe<*t by prefixing na to the root*
The first future perfect is fornie<l by adding na to' the future tense, and th^
second future perfect by prefixing ma to the root. These tense<9 are littler
used in conversation. Na and ma correspond to the indefinite verbalizing
particles ii<ikn and maka respectively.

III. The subject of a verb conjugated with a definite particle takes th«^
genitive, except in the cases already n<»te<l. If the subjet^t is a pronoun, i*!^
may either precede or follow the verb, the latter usage being much morfc?'
common than the former. If the subject is a noun or phrase it always?
follows the verb.

IV. For the con j nidation of a root with m, whether a vowel verb, o*"
a consonant one see the ty|>e-scheme folder at the end of this handbook*

V. In i>refixed to or infixed with rootsof the following classes forms words
denotinj? a showing of the pro|K»rties of the root or a resemblance thereto,
as the word *' like " does as a suffix in Enjrlish. ( 1 ) Roots denoting flow-
ers, fruits, or other objects imitated in gems or precious metals by jewelers.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 113

denote ornaments or jewels of the shape or pattern of the ol>ject named,
when in is used as above explained. Ex. : Bnlinffbing, an octagonal berry;
hinnlinglnng^ a jewel with eight sides like the berry. Samjmgay Arabian
jasmine; sinainpaga, a jewel iniitatinj^ the eampaga flower. (2) With
r<x)ts of colored objects in denotes the color. Ex.: Dumero (Sp. romero),
ros^emary; dinumero^ rosemary -colored. (UUny^ verdure, vegetables; gi-
TtuUitf, greenish. (3) With s<:»me objects m denotes rice which resembles
the object in the shape, taste, or smell. Ex.: Kanda, a lily-like flower;
kinandjy rice, with an odor like the kmuh't, Karayou^ needle; k'lnarayom^
needle-shape<i rice. Kamaligy warehouse; lAdauigan Knimdiqan, Ambos
Camarines ( province) ; kinmnalig^ Camarinesrice. Kastu/i, musk (fromSan-
skrit kastdriy through Malay); kinaMuIi, rice with nmsky odor. Aug kal6^
the carabao tick; kinal6, riceof a variegated ap}>eurance, resembling t he A«/^.
Kaxtdn ( Sp. ), white person : kbuul'da, a white class of rice. AlaiTgllan, a tree
with fragrant flowers {('awviga odorntn)^ tlie ilang-ilang; inahnnjilan, rice
with this odor. Bamhang^ an herb; hinamhang, a class of rice which resem-
bles the bambang M'hen growing. Angdnlong, a very small lish; dinid<mg,
rice shaped like the dulong. Baiad, a kind of ])eu-like vegetable; b'niatady
rice so shaped. Bulaklak, flower; binu/nkldk, rice which opens like a flower
when heated, or like pop corn. Pornk, the flower of the jttnigdan or
jttihutau: pinorak^ rice resend>Iing this flower. Sankf, the C-hinese anise;
finangkiy rice resembling anise. Snmbilang, a species of sea flsh without
scales; siiinmbUangf rice of this shape. Tuuki, body louse, grayback;
tinnnia, riceshape<l like a tuina. Tumhdga, copper; tlnnmbngdj rice with a
metallic luster. Tumhaga is copper alloyed with a small amount of gold;
it is from Sanskrit tdmraka (copper), through Malay tnmfxtga; tembaga
Taliihihy common reed grass; tinalahlh, rice which resembles talnhih when
growing. There are many other names lor different classes of rice, but the
foregoing are the principal ternis derived with in following the rule cite<l.
(4) With names denoting relationship hi expresses the idea of persons
occupving the place of such relative to some degree. As this condition is
regarded as permanent, the flrst syllable of the root is reduplicated to ex-
press present tense. Other nouns also follow this rule, with some excep-
tions. Ex. : Ally aunt; rnaali, uncle's wile. Anu'i, father; inaamn, godfather.
Amain, uncle; stepfather; inaauia'in, aunt's husband. Auak, child (son
or daughter); inaanak, stepson or ste{>daugliter, also godson or goddaugh-
ter. Amua, spouse (husband or wife): imiai<<hui, \o\vr or mistress (c(»n-
cubine). Bnyat), brother-in-law; biimbdyao, husband of sister-in-law.
BianAn, father-in-law or m(»ther-in-law; binlhlnnan, wife or husband of
father-in-law or mother-in-law (not |)arent of wife or husband). Mnnu-
gangf son-in-law or daughter-in-law; innminmingang^ one regarded as such.
Kapatid, brother or sister; kiiiakn/tfUid, half brother or half sister, or f(»ster
brother or foster sister, ll'ipng^ sister-in-law ; hiniJiffxig, wife of brother-in-
law. Biliis isthee(iuivalent h^vb'nxihniitun^Tli'ntdupfuj. Snno, grandparent;
ninununi), one regarded as a grandparent; hamimnmnn, jincestors. Atn\
grandchild; inaapo, descendant. -ly>o y<i ti'iJiod, great-gran<lchild; (t/to fta
tcdampaknn, great-great-grandchild. PnniangkUi, nephew or niet-e; piiui-
pamangkiii, one regarded assuch, J'itis'in, cousin; pinipiitsnn, one regarded
as a cousin. JHnsihtg boa, flrst cousin; plnsditg imibdaui't, second cousin,
etc. (5) With verbal roots denoting the preparing; of food, etc, in denotes
the food so prepared, provided the root is conjugated in the inlinitive
indefinite with m//», although there an^ some exceptions, l^x.: Mnglngt),
to cook with a spit; such as camotes, etc.; Linngo, vegettbles so cooked.
Maasigangy to cook meat or tish with a s])it; :<ini(iiuig^ meat or fish .«o
cooKed. LumugaOy to stew, to boil meal; ang Unngan, tlie nuish or stew.
Maglugao is more usual. Sumaing, to boil rice; ong sinning, the boiled
rice. lfa^««ir*^7 is also more usual. Magfcunbong, to cook fish entire; nng
Hjiamhong, the fish so cookerl. 7'umi'iinuf or u\agf>'i}i(iii, to knea<l; <ing tina-
|)ay, what kneaded ; bread. (H) With verbal roots conjugated by tnn, the
product of such action is denote<l by in, preflxed to a vowel root or infixed

«855— 05 8

114

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

with a consonant root. Ex.: Sumulid, to spin; sinulidy thread, anything
spun. Some mag roots also have the product denoted by in. Ex. : ^fag-
pipiQf to press, to crack rice, etc.; pinlpigf roasted and cracked rice. (7)
Witn some roots in forms adjectival nouns, the first syllable of the root
being reduplicatd. Ex.: A'uan, known; ang kinukuarif the person known.
Mahal, dear; ang minajnahalf the esteemed (person). SirdA, love (from
Sanskrit, chintdy thought, through Malay); ang ffinisintd, the beloved (who
loves in return). Ang naginta indicates a person loved without being
aware of the fact.

VI. As in has the idea of attraction inherent within it, there are many
classes of verbs, conjugated in the indefinite infinitive by tew, which take
in to form the direct object. (1) According to this rule verbal roots of
taking, asking, and appropriating something take in. There are some
verbs conjugated with mag which also admit iu. Ex. :

To buy (general term ).

To take ( general term ), bring or take.
To carry ; l)ear, etc. ( bring or send) .

To scoop out, or take anything out
of a hole, or insert the hand into a
hole.

To use.

To choose (between good and bad).

To select (from among good thmgs).

To pillage; to plunder; to loot; to

despoil the enemy.
To seize; to snatch.

To pray for; to plead.

To complain; to entreat; to implore,
to pray (as to a judge).

To request.

To borrow.

Bumili. Ang 6im7i, what was bought.
Gumulangf to buy rice by the ga-
tang or chupa, Umdmot, to buy
one th ing out of many. Umangkat,
to buy on cre<iit. Umaapln, to
buy fruits of the country.

Kumuha. Ang kin aha, what was
taken or obtained.

Magdald. ^n^c^uio/d, what brought
Ang ipinadaldf what sent (lit,
" what was ordered brought" ).

Dumukot. Ang dinukot, what taken
out, or what hand was inserted in.

Gumdmit. Ang ^indmit, what used.

Pumill. Ang pmilif what chosen.
Ang pinilian yVt'h&t rejecte<l (singu-
lar). Ang pinagpilian, what re-
jected (plurality of objects).

Humirang. Ang hinirang, what se-
lected. Ang ninirangany what left
out.

Sumamsam. Angttinamsam, thespoil;
loot; plunder.

Umagcu). Ang inagao, what seized
Agao nang tamls, inagao nang asiniy
somewhat of sweetness, and some-
what of sourness (said of any sub-
stance which has this taste, like
some fruits) (idiom).

Dumal&ngin. Ang dinaldngin^ what
prayed or asked for. Ang dalang-
many the deity prayed to or person
pleaded with.

Dumaying. Ang dinaying, what re-
lief asked. Ang idajfing, the com-
plaint. Ang daybiaan, the person
entreated, implored, or prayeii to.

Humingi. Ang hiningi^ what re-
quested. Ang hingdny person re-
quested.

Utnutang, Ang inutang, what bor-
rowed. Ex.: Inuiang ko iyang
salapt ibinigay ho 8a kaniyd k€Jiap<m
(I borrowed that monev whicn I
gave him yesterday ) , Ang iHtangf

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 115

the cause of borrowing. Ang
vtiuT(iiiu^ the person born^wed from
the lender.

To borrow (any thingexcept money). Ilnmlram. Ang hrniratn, what bor-
rowed. A)i(/ Jiihacin, tlie lender.

To ciemand a treat (a.^ at a celebra- Tdinanilani. Ang tinarahcm, what
tion). received as a treat. Ex.: Titut-

iitnthdii itiimin itong kakanitt (we
are pet ting these s weets as a t reat ) .

To catch hold of; to catch on the Dtntudip. -!?/{/ (/maX*/;;, what seized
winjr. thus.

r<> absorb. Iliiinithit. Aug hlnithil, what was

absorbed.

VII. Under this section may be considered /// prefixed to or infixed with
he personal pronouns, with which it implies the idea lA possession. As a
»ulHx with the^e pronouns, in (hin) ex|>resses the sense of repardin<r, hold-
ng, reputing, etc., in bome cubeti. Ex.:

bTour. Inyo. Ang in'nnyo, your property;

your. In If oil in mo, consider it as
your own; take it for your own.

His; her. Kaniifn. A)ig kinakiuiiya^ his [her]

|)ro|K'rty. Kahnxiynhin ho (I will
liold it as his [her's]).

Their. KanUn. Ang Linn kaniln, their prop-

erty. Kanilnhin mo, regard it as
helonging to them.

Dnr (all of us). Atin. Ang unnUiny our property.

Iliad n niyn, lie regarded it as ours.

Hur (you and I). Kiinltn, Ang kinakanita, our prop-

erty. KhmknniU'i ko, I regard it
as yours and mine.

Our (but not you). Aniin. Ang i nan ni in, our f)roperty,

but not yours. Aniinin mnyo (you
[plural] regard it as ours, but not
yours).

My. Akin. Ang irnjakin, my property:

mine. finikin ko (I held it as
mine). Inankin ko (I am holding
it as mine). Ankinin ko ( 1 shall
iiold it as mine).

VIII. Verbs of calling, whether by voice or signs, also follow this mode
of c<mjugation. Ex.:

To call. Tiunanng. Angtinnnag^who or whRi

called. Ang ifnung, the call, in-
strument, or cause. Ang (anagon,
the person calie<l in order to be
given something. Ex.: Sino ang
tiiititi'inng ///o/ (Who are yt)U call-
iu'j to?). Tinnnag ko ai lV<(ro, ]>o
(I was ealiing to IVdro, sir).
Dni'ujon ino sign ining iada (Call
him to come and get some lish).

To call; also to bring; to fetch. Kuinnon. Ang kinai'm, what called,

or brought, etc.

To make signs for; to motion to. Kninnmni. Aug kamniln, what mo-

tlitru^M fiir \ tut tlut Hti II vfti'if n«i»-

116

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

I X . Verbs of * * searching for ' ' also take in for the d irect object Ex. :

To look for.

To search about

To look in every (!omer for.

To go in search of another.

To prope for (as in the dark or like
a blind person).

X. Verbs of moving, when not due to turning away of what is moved,
also take in for the direct object. Ex. :

Humdnap. Ang hindnapf thing

sought for.
Humalihao. Ang hinalihao, what

searched for.
SujncUiknk. Ana nnaliksik, what

looked for in this manner.
Sumunadd. Ang sinungd^y person

sought by another.
Umapdhap. Ang inapdhap^ what

groped for.

To move.

To move restlessly.

To shake (like objects badly packed)

or to move (like loose teeth).
To move anything.

To Rhake (as something in a sieve) ;

also to rock or dandle ( as a child ) .
To sliake a liasket or measure so it

will hold more.
To shake the head in negation.
To shake anything, as a tree to

gather the fruit.
To wave the hands while dancing.

Kumibd. Ang kinibdy what moved.
Synonym: Kumislot; umibo,

Gumaldo. Ang ginal&o, the mis-
chief done through restlessness.
Ang galauan the person disturbed
thereby. Magcddo ang kamay niydy
his hand is restless; i. e., he is a
pickpocket or thief ( idiom ) . Kag-
alaiAan, mischief.

Umugd. Ang inugd, what moved
thus).

Tumugoy, Ang iinugoy^ what moved.
Synonyms: Umugoy; umugd (some-
times). Umugoy also means to
stagger, to totter.

Vmugug. Ang inugug^ what .shaken
or rocked.

Umulog. Ang inulog^ what shaken
down.

Umiling. Ang iniling, what denied.

Lwnuglug. Ang linuglug^ what sha-
ken, as a tree.

Kh m u n day, A no kinnnday^ the wav-
ing thus. Ex.: Kinunday niqa
(she waved her hands while ebe
was dancing) .

XI. Jn is also used to express the result of the action of verbs which
signify carrying, cutting, measuring, or weighing, when the result is con-
sidere<l on the side of the agent or ended therein. I'm is generallv the
indefinite, but mag and other verbalizing particles are to be found. When
the result of a verb necessarily falls upon a person, in is used to signify
the person. Ex.:

MagdalA. See under verbs of bring-
ing, taking, et(\

To drag along. Humild. Ang hinild, what dragged

along. Means also **to arrest,"
AngninUdf the person arrested ; the
prisoner.

To carry on the shoulder. Piimasdn. Ang pinasdn^ what car-

ried on the shoulder. Ang pofti-
naiif the person who carried any-
thing on the shoulder.

To carry a child on or suspended Maasahu Ang sinabi or anagabihWf
from the shoulder. the child carried thus. The cloth

by which the child was supported
is denoted by ang itabL

To carry (general idea)

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

117

Xo carry on the head.
To carrv in the arms.

Xo carrv a child in the arms.

Xo carrv under the arm.

Xo carry anything? in the lap.

Xo carrv hy the mouth (as a dojr,
cat, bird, etc., carry food).

Xo carry in or by the hands (as a
l>ai^ket, jar, etc.).

Xo carry hanging from the hand (ai? a
pail, etc., by means of t lie handle).

Xo carry anything along (by or in
the hand).

Xo carry on a pole ( palanca) .

Xo cut ( general term ) .

Xo cut clothes (as a tailor).

To tear.

To chop, to hew, to cut with an ax.

To cut down; to fell (an a tree)-

To cut into pieces (as sugar cane).

To cut the tuba palm (to obtain the

Mayanuouff. Ang minorTgin^ what
carried thus; the burden.

MugjHingko. Ang pmangko, what
carried in the arms. Pangkohin
ino ito (carry this in your arms).

KuiiHihnig. Ang khiolong^ the child.
Kdlomjiii ino nhja (carry him in
your arms). Ang kahnTgan, the
mother, nurse, or bearer.

Mtigkrlik. Ang k'ni'ilik, what carried
thus. (With accent on last sylla-
ble), indgkiHk, to carry much
thus.

Mdgcandong. Ang kiuandong, what
carried in the lap. Kimtkandimg
nigd (she is carrying it in her lap).

MogUuTgay. Ang dnaiTf/ag, what Ciir-
ricd thus.

Magf<ttp(). Ang simifKj, what carried
tiius. Sn/ohin mo igan (carry that
in \(tur hands).

Magf/ithif. Anij hinithit, what carried
thus, i. e., the pail.

Mngtaglng. Aug tindglag, what car-
ried along. /.I//0 (ing lataghtgin
mo- What will you carry along?

Unuisong. }f<(gnsong, to carry on a
palanca between two. Aug inn-
}<ong, whnt carried thus, as a pig,
bundle, etc. Synonym of mugu-
.song; nmgiuting. A ng (inuang^whaii
carried thus. Vaoiujin (tnnjnjin)
iniigo ifo (carry this on a pole be-
tween you).

Miigin'itoL ,\fmnul(tl, to cut up (as
cloth, etc.) Ang pinnt(A, what cut
or cut up, as the cloth, etc. Kx.:
I'dt/in tno Ho nongpaftabd (Cut this

lengthwise).

Tunnth 's. Magldhda, to cut much.
Ang (innb'iH, what cut out, i. e.,
the cloth or suit, etc. Ang tinn-
I'osnn, what left over, also place.
Ang filnagtfilKisaii, the cuttings,
clippings, remnants, (»r places of
cutting nut.

Omtiisi. Ang ginisi, what torn, i. e.,
the cloth or clothes.

Tutn-igt. Aug t'mogd, whaf chopped,
c. g. , the tree, etc.

Suiimpol. }f'igsopol, io fell much.
Ant/ Kiniipo/, what felled or <ul
down. Ang un/Kjl, the mean^ of
cuttinij: down, e. g.. the axe. Ang
jt'inagxojKthin^ what remained, e. g.,
the stump.

Vniirid. Ang inirid, the sugarcane
thus cut up. Kffirid, a piece of the
cut-up cane.

Vnnn'dd. A ng (iraran^ the palm thus

118

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

To cut into piece«.

To cut into equal piecee.
To cut u]) into et^ual leugthfl (as sugar
cane, etc.).

To cut poU»8 or bamlxK.) into piece?;
also to cut at a distance.

To cut into pieces (as a log) .

To cut water grass in order to catch
the tish.

To cut, as with scissors; to snip off,
applied generally to cutting nair,
metals, etc.

To split open (as bamboo); to cut
against the grain; to peel off, as
shavings; to go against the cur-
rent; (tig.) to oppose.

To cut or break a rope, cord, or sim-
ilar object.

To cut off the ears or nose.

To nieaijure { eithergrains or liquids).

To gauge; to measure liquids by

means of a rod.
To measure by jmlms (8.22 inches).

Magpiilas. A no pbialaSy what cut up
thus. Manga palaspalas na taluh,
pieces of pure silk. Ang ipalas^
tool used loT cutting up.

Umaias. Ang inalas^ what cut thus.

Puminlid. Magpinlid, to cut much
in this way. Angpininlid, what cut
into equal lengt lis thus. Angpinag-
pinlid, the large amount cut thu.s.
Ang ipinlidy the utensil used.
Ang ifHigpinlid^ the utensil us**<l
much.

Pmuidpid. Ang pinidpid (1) what
cut up thus; (2) wno cut thus.
Attg ipidpid^ the tool or weaiK)n
U8e<i. Ang pidpirtm^ the plai^.

Gwniling, Ang ginliing, the wood
thus cut up. Ang igUing, the tool
used. Ang mangigding^ the Wixni
cutter.

MagiidA». A ng tinalAs, what cut thus.
Ang pinagtaliiSf the lai^ amount
cut thus. Ang ilalns, the tool by
which cutting was done. Ang
ipa'JahU^ the tool by which much
cutting was done. Ang pinngUda-
i(an, the place where much cutting
was done.

Gvin ipit. Maggupiif to cut one's own
hair. Ang ginupit^ w hat cut, i. e..
t!je hair or metal. Angghmpitauy
the person whose hair has l>eeu
cut; or object from which some-
thing has been cut off.

Sumnlutujat. Ang sinalungatj what
split oi>en or peeled off thus. iSn-
IntTijatin vio ifong kauayanj split
this bam])oo.

Mof/patid, Ang pinatid^ what cut
thus. Patarin {Pat dun) wo iyang
lubidf cut that rope. Mapai'id^ to
part; to break in two; to cea.«e
(tig.). Najmtid ang kaiiiijang hi-
nirTjja, he exhaled his last breath;
he ceased to breat he. Magkapatid-
jKitid, to break up completely (as
a cord or rope); or into several
pieces.

PumoiTgas, variation Puminffas. A ng
pinow/oSf what cut off, as the sev-
ered ear or nose. JHngan has the
same idea, but is generally applieil
to cutting inanimate objects.

Tiunaka!. Ang tindkal, what meas-
ured. Tnkalin mo itong hig(U^
measure this rice. Ang takaidn,
the measure.

TiLinaroL Angtindro!, what gauge<l.
Ang itnrol, the gauge.

Ihunangka}. Aug dinangkal, what
measured thus.

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

119

To (rompare measures.

To weigh.

To balance, to conpider (f).
To verify a weight.

Sumubok or magsiibok. A ng siniiboky
( 1 ) one of the measures thus com-
pared. (2) Also to observe closely;
to ** shadow." Ex.: Svbukan mo
siyd (watch him closely). Ang
pinagmbok, the two measures thus
compared. Kasiibokf equal to an-
other thing. Ex.: Kasuf>ok Uiuo
ang tubig (the water is the depth
of a man). Mngkasubok, to have
an understanding. Ex.: Nagka-
kasubok sii/i ang bait (they have an
understanding with each other).

Tumimbang. Ang tinimbong^ what
weighed thus. Ang thnbangan,
the scales or (.'ounterweight. Ka-
timbangy ecjual in weight Ak6''y
katimbang mo (I am of the same
weight as you are).

Tvmalard, Ang tinalardj what bal-
anced or considered.

Tinnaifo. Ang tinaya^ what verified
(obs.).

XII. Verbs which signify destruction, or change or transformation of
the object as a result of the action, take *7i to express the result of such
action, if no modifying circumstances, such as of cause, instrument, etc.,
are implied.

To destroy.

To tear down; to raze.
To kill; extinguish.

Sumird, Ang ^m/rd, what was de-
stroyed.

Gumibd. Ang ginibd, what razed.

Pumatay. Ang pinalny (1) f>erson
or animal killed; (2) What ex-
tinguishe<l. Ang ipatay or pinag-
patayt the weapon or means of
Killing. Ang pinagpatayan, the
place where a murder was com-
mitted. SiyA pinatny niya, he kill-
ed him. Ang ipinatay niyd fa
kaniy& ang bard, the gun was what
he killed him with. Pinatay niya
»iyd nang barily he killed him with
a gun. Mamatayy to die. Ang
knwatayay}^ death (abstr. ). Ang
kinaintitaydn, the place of death
(past time). Ang ikinamatay, the
cause of death (past time). Ex.:
Patay na siyd (he is dead now).
Namainynn ak6 nang am A (I have
l>een bereaved of my father by
death). AUnq Inihay ang kinama-
taydn niydf (in which house did
he die? ) And ang ikinaniatay niyaf
( What was the c^use of his death?)
Nahirinan siyd nang tinik (he was
choked by a linh bone). Ma^ta-
lay, to sentence to death; to have
another put to death. Mamdtay,
U) kill habitually. Tlgapagpatay^
butcher or executioner. Man-
h im atay, to fai n t away . Magpaka-

To set fire to.

To ri|); to unseam; to undo.

To exchange; to]»arter.

Tt) arrange; to disentangle.

To blacken.

maldii (1) Xo allow one's self to
be killed; (2) to commit suicide.

Suinuno(j. An g fnnunoyyWhfLi burne«l.

Ttuitaitfas. A tnj fiticmtds, what ripped
u|), undone, etc.

Puinnlit. An(j pinalit, what ex-
changed or bartered.

Htnnnsmi. Aikj hinusay^ what dis-
entangled or set in order. M<nj-
jhikdhustjif, to arrange well, to set-
tle things with care; also to Ih*-
have well.

M(t(!'itnn. AiHj initlni, what V)lack-
ened. Aicj lltiin, the blackener.
Kaitiman, blackness. Imitimj to
become black.

XIII. Verbs of receiving take in for the object of the action; some
taking /// for the thiuir affected and ati for the person affected, as will be
seen from ihc examples.

T(» accept; tn r«'ccivc. 7'n.nntngap. Any (innngap^ what re-

Ci'ived or accepted. A}ty((tnyapan,
the person fnnn whom accepted
or received; also the place. Any
Unuyiip, the cause of receiving, etc.

Togo out to meet anyone; to wel- Snimi/ulnmy. Any sdnnb'ibony^ the
come by meeting:. person met or welcomed thus.

Mdysindlnhnny, to be received by
many, as a governor, etc. May-
hts(i/uh(iny, to meet accidentally.
Vj X . : A< lyLdsdln bony a ny da la imny
nniyhapatul na hahaye sa Mayniln,
(the two sisters met accidentally
[by chance] in Manila).

XIV. /// also denotes the object of verbs ot "inviting," etc.

I'mnkit. Any iin'dit, who invited.

intanyaya. Any anyayahatij the
person invited.

Pnuiiy'niy. Any jf'niyiny, the j)erson
invili'd.

Mayjh'iniy. Any ]>innniy, the ])erson
invit<Ml.

Mityf'huK Any t inn no, the person in-
vited. Idnolihi )n() siyt'iy invite
him. Tannlanttfiin mo any payko-
hdui, divitle the food for each one
«»f the guests li. e., put it on
plates ).

I'lnnlnJ:. Any inalok, the person Sf)
iii\ ite«l.

To invite.

To invit(> a )><*rsoii to I'at.

\\. //' gen«Tally denotes tlie ]»er>on affecti'd by tlu" action f>f a verb,
with those verlis which ne< e>sarily ha\ e a p«'r>on for the obj(M't, on account
of their natnre i\u<\ meaiiin'.:.

To ))re\ail Ujton; to persuade with

l)];indishinents.
T«) wait for.

Mayiroyd. Any liniroyd, the person
so prevailed upon.

Il'iuiintay. Any Ji'tnintay^ the per-
son waitt'd for. IJiiuln mo fila,
wait fortlu'ui. Mayhinfay (1) to
wait an«l guard something for an-

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

121

other; (2) to delay. Ex.: Ilouag

mong ih'mUiy sd bukas ang pagpa-

roou mo (do n(»t delay your poing

until to-uiorrow).

To cany in the arms, (as a child); Snmakluln. Ang sinakiuld (I) ch'M,

(2) to aid, to succor, to protect etc., carried tluit*; (2) person aided,

(rare in Manila). etc.

To reprehend; to reprimand; to lind

fault with.

\

Suniatd. Aug ainald, the person rep-
rimanded or found fault with.
Kx.: Sdlahin mo sign nana kani-
gang ginagmcd (reprimand him for
what he is doing) [ginaivd, what
he has done]. Magi<ald^ to lind
nmch fault, or for many to find
fault, etc. Magkasaidj to err, to
commit a fault, to sin. Ex.:
Jfonag inoiig ipagkasald ltd (do not
commit thin error [sin], Ipinag-
naya/d ko aug pakikipagauag »a ivgd^
( I am doinj^ wrong in quarrehng
with you). Jplnagsald niyd ang
pakikipaginiag sa inyd (he did
wrong in quarreling with you).
IpagkaHaMildnUdaniipakik'qmgaiiay
mi hi niyd ( they will err in quarrel-
ing with him). Magkakamld^w'xih
re<Iuplication of last syllable of
particle, means "to forbid."

Tiunanong. Aitg tinationg, what
a<ked; the questir)n. Magtanong^
to ask about. .1 ng iiinanmig, what
has been asked, or the n^ason for
asking. Ang inajtagdrnong, per-
son fond of questioning. Ang
matanowjln^ the questioner. Ang
tinanongan, the person questioned.

XVT. In generally denotes the catch, result, or (juarry with verbs of
hunting and fishing. A few other verbs also follow this rule.

To aak; to inquire.

To hunt (in general).

To hunt with dogs or hounds.

To hunt with a ** bating" or net
(generally for deer).

Vmdkad. A ng indkad, what hunted.

MitiTgaso ( from *;>o, dog ) . A ng iinii*<t,
the cbase, the game caught. Ang
ipina/n/cu<Oy the dog used thus.
Ang niaiTgaiTtjaiio, the hunter with
dogs.

Jhuutiting. Ang hinating, the deer
or game thus cauirht. Ex.: Ang
binating ko nng btmdok (1 was net
hunting in the mountains). Ang
blnaf'ung<niy the place of " net
hunting."
To hunt with a shotgun; to use a Mamarll (from barll, shotgun). Aug

vunnaniaril, the hunter with a
shotgun. Ang pinamaril, what
sh<»t thus.

Mai^lldlr, nnigpniTgntl (from kati.
Ang jdiiaiTijaii, what has been
canjrht thus.

Maniinnit. Angblninvit, what caught.
Ang ibinnif, the hook. Ang ina-
tnijiiinititj the fisherman. Ang

shotgun.

To cat<:h birds by means of a bird-
call, or bv a snare, or w ith another
bird.

To fish with a hook.

122

TAGALOG LANGUAGE,

To fifih with the seine or net, called
*' Jam bat.''

To fieh uein^ a light (afl also to hunt
with a flare).

To fish (in general).

To sweep.

phifimiminnitany the canoe or place
from which such fitihing is being
done.

Maidnmhal (from lamhat,) Amj li-
nnmfHit, the v&tch; the haul. Ang
ipdnlnmftntf the means for fishing
thus, i. e., the seine or net.

Maiftfjilao. Ang pinangilnnany the
place where such fishing or hunt-
ing was done. Ang pinangilao^
what caught thus.

MarTgifida (from isdd fish). Ang
pinatTgindil, the fish which have
Deen caught. Ang maiTgingutdd^
the fisherman.

Magividis. Ang inwaJU^ the 8weei>-
ings; what was or has been swept
up ( from waliSj broom) .

XVII. In is also used to denote the object with verl>s of eating, drinking,
swallowing, and analogous acta.

To eat. Kama in. Ang kinain^ wliat was

eaten. Ex.: Kinain ang kajmiid
na lalaki mo ang tindixiy^ your
brother ate the bread. Kanin^
food (cooked rice). Kakanin^
delicacies. Ang kaiidny the eating
place. Ang kakandn^ the dining
room; or platter. Magknin^ to eat
much or by many.

Uminum. Ang ininwn, what was or
has been drunk. Inumin^ drink.
Ang inumany the drinking place;
trough; cup (drinking vessel).
Maginumy to drink much or by
many. Magiminum^ to give an-
other sometliing to drink; (2) to
water animals or fowl. £x. : ( 1 )
Paiinnmin ko »iyd nang tdhxgf
(Shall I give him some wat^^r?)
Houag, painvmin mo gigd nan(^
aiak (SOf give him some wine.)
(2) Pinainum ninyo bagd an(/
manga cabayof (Did you water"
[give drink to] the horses?) Op^,
(Yes, sir). Papainum ka kaiy
Tom(U (Ask Tom^s to give yoi»
something to drink). [indef.J

Lnmanion. Ang linamon^ what wa^
or has been swallowed thus. Var-
Lnmitnlon.

Lumagok. A ng linagokf what gul{)ei1>
down.

Hum if/op. . 1 ng /ii><t^o;;, whatsipped -

Pmnainjoit. Ang pinangdSy wha't
sucked at.

Kvmagat. A ng kinagat, what bitt<»n -
Magkagaian^ to bite mutually (a^
two <logs. ) Magkagaikagata'n^ \cy
pretend to bite mutually, yag-
kakagalkagat ang daUiwang aso ( th^

To drink.

To swallow (fo<Kl) greedily.

To .'iwallow (gulp) liquids.

To nip (as soup).

To suck at (a.s fc?ugar-(»ne).

To bite.

TAOALOO LANOUAOE.

123

two dogs are only pretending to

bite each other). Manga^at^ to

run around biting, as an annnal in

a rage.
Stntiinghd. Aug sinirighaly who or

what snappt'd at.
KxiimMnh. Ang kinabkaby who or

what bitten by a pig thus.
S^gumogd. Ang iTginoydf what

chewed.

XVIII. Acts of the senses, either general or nio<lilied, admit m to
express the definite results of such actn, with two exceptions. These are
tumir^in (to look at) and tumimtim (to tante liquor) which take an as a
suffix for reasons of euphony.

To snap at.

To bite (as a pig at people).

To chew.

To see; to look at.

To look at.

To watch for; look out for; to sight.

KnniiUX. Ang kinitdf what seen or

looked at.
Thiiniirgin. Ang thTgndn] ang t'ming-

na/i, what looked at.
Tnjnando. Ang tinandoy what sighted.

Tanauan, watchtower; lookout-

place.

jfanannOj watchman; lookout.
To look attentively, turning the eyes Lum'nTlfnn. Ang liningony what

or head.

To look much at things, noting and

considering them ; to inspect.
To look sideways.

To behold; to view.

To hear.

To hear.

To listen to; to pay attention to.

To smell.

To scent; to perceive a strong odor.

To taste.

To relish ; to like a taste.

To sample; to try; etc.

To taste without swallowing.

To taste liquor without swallowing

it.
To feel; to touch (general).

looked at thus. Kx. : J)l mo ako
linifTfjon (you did not turn your
head to l4:)ok at me).

Utn(fnhiao. Ang xncminuoy what in-
spected.

Sumuliyap. Ang sinuligapy what
looked at sideways.

Pandod. Ang mnandody what be-
held.

Dtimingig. Ang diningigy what
heard. Ang diiigdriy person lis-
tened to.

Mngkinyig. Ang kinmyig^ what
hearci.

BunuUyag, Ang binatyogy what lis-
tened to. Var., kinamatyag and
inalyng.

Ununnoy. A ng Inanwy, what .«inelled,
i. e., odor. Amoyin mo itn (smell
this).

Suninnghoii. Ang it'mnngliody what
scented.

Lnrnfiaap. Anglhidsajt, what tasted

Nunidmnam. .ing lunammiyn, what
relished.

Tiimikin. Ang tikman^ what sam-
pled.

Tnmijnng (r. ). Ang tijtiiTgan, Vk'hat
taxted thus.

Tnmimtim. Ang iimiimaiiy what
tasted.

Jlnmipo. Ang hinipo, what felt or
touched. Ex.: WithniguKihihij^uaa'
kan iyang hahay. [idiom ] ( t here is
nothinji to touch in his house, i. e.,
he is very poor).

124

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

To prei?8 down; also to clo^ or seal

a letter.
To touch lightly.

To touch any part of the body lightly

but suddenly.
To touch suddenlv.

To run into; to collide with.

To touch carelessly and affectedly.

To touch with the lips.

To feel fur in the dark.

To pinch; to soften.

Tomb: to soften; to annoint.

To pick (as a guitar) ; to pluck at (as

a sleeve).

To play any instrument or ring a bell
(by strokes).

XIX. In also expresses acts of the will or mind.

To remember.

Magdlit, ^na diitatif what pressed
or closed . Pandlit ; seal ; w^ax ; gum .

Tumangkd (r.). Ang tinangkdy yfhai
tou(;ned Syn. Tuman^hL

Humipik (rare). Ang hipikan^ per-
son touched. Syn. taghid (also
rare).

Ihtmantik (rare). Ana dantikan^ the
person thus touched.

MagjKtronrfjn, \&r.magparorong. Ang
pitKigpfironron, what touched.
Aug ipinagparonron^ the cause of
having touched thus.

Sumagi, var. Sumagoy (latter rare).

Gumtimil (rare). Variations of this
root are gamU^ gof/il, and gmnlil.

MagdiifTgil (rare). This is not the
verb *'to kiss," which is hiunalik.

Hnmikap. Ang hinikapf what felt
for thus.

Pumisil. Ang pinisUf what rubbed,
etc. Fisl'ni mo Ho nang kamay mo
(rub this with your hand).

Humilot. Ang hinllotf what rubbed,
etc. Ang hilotan, the person
rubbe<l, etc. fft/o^ (n.), midwife;
matihihilotf massageur.

MagkaUilnlf var. magkcUbit. Ang pi-
nagkalahitt what plucked at or
picked thus, i. e., the sleeve or the
strings. Ang ipinagkalabxi, the in-
strument or means, i. e., the fin-
gers or plectrum (pick). Ang
patigalihUf the instrument played
upon thus.

Dinnigtug.

To calculate; to consider.
To desire; to like.

(To caress.)
To love.

To think.

UmalaaUiy to remember (purposely).
Makaahialfif to remember (cas-
ually ) . Aug inaalaala, what is re-
membered purposely.

Magbulay. Ana pina^hubulay, what
is being calculated, i. e., the result

Umihig. Ang iniibi^y the person who
is liked (and reciprocates the lik-
ing); (2) what is liked; also ang
ibigin.

Umirog. Ang inilrogf the person be-
ing caressed.

Suntinta. Ang »inisirUdf the person
who is loved and who loves in re-
turn. Aug nasisintdf the pers^^m
who iH loved, but who is unaware
of tlie fact or does not return it.
Mng^udaUanj to love mutuallv.

MaqUip. Ang iniisipf what is f)eing
thought of. Ang inlrip, what was
thought of. Ang iistptn^ what will
))e thought of. magisipinpt to

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

125

To esteem; to love.

To think.
To explain.

To inquire; to assure one's self; to
verify.

To verify, etc.

think deeply; profoundly. Anp
pagkawip, the opi nion ( act) . Ka im-
pan (abst. ), opinion, thought.

Lum iffug ( rare ) . A ng liniliyng, what
or who enteenied or loverl. Sinid,
is more common, but is a Sanskrit
word derived through Malay.

Pau'undnn. Aug p'nmp<niirndun , what
is thought.

Mag.vdai/Aug, var. magnagnny. Ang
slnaMdaifsag, what is being ex-
plaineil. Salaysayhi ino ito (ex-
plain this).

Vimdnsithd (r. ). Ang inmdusithd,
whatisbeinginquired, etc., var. «/o-
s'dhd, idea of verifying, etc., also.

Uinushsd. Aug innusMy what is l)e-
ing verified. Tauong walang imisd,
a person without carefulness; a
careless person.

XX. The making of something from raw or crude material is expressed
by using the finished pro<luct verbally or as a verbal noun with //?, thema-
terial U8e<l taking the nominative, if there are no limitations of cause, time,
place, etc., connected with the action.

To put up a house. Maghahay ( from hahay, house). This

word lias l)een given as derived
from Malay b<dei, hall; court, from
Sanskrit vnlayo, an inclosure, but
it would seem rather to be a Ma-
layan name, as in Ng<'la ( Florida
or Anudha) Island of the Solomon
(inMip the word is ndf and far
away in Hawaii is hale. There
may be said to exi^t intermediate
words throughout. Kx.: Bahayin
mn i(</ng kafiuy ( l*ut up a house
with tills lumber). Mnghahdyha-
Imytnt (dim. ), ( to play at building
ho\ises [as chiMren do] ). Xaghd-
hnyhahoyan dug manga batd (the
chiUlren were ]>laying at building
hotises).

To roll one's self up in a eloak or Mnghaldhal B(d(dtaUn mo ilong kayo

»i

balillml."

To put a shirt on; to wear a shirt
(occasionally), from haro, a cloth
U8edt(^) make shirts, and also mean-
ing a shirt itself.

To wear trousers.

To wear shoes (occasionally ) ; to put
a pair of shoes on.

do { make a cloak out of this cloth;
or wrap yourself in this cloth).

Mngljdro, Itoitg hiyo)ig ittV y haharoin
hiya (he [she] will make a shirt
out of this cloth ). An indicates a
person as the object of the action.
Ex.: Btinmn mn iyang hatd iydn
(]»uta shirt on that child). JA/-
tntirn, to wear a shirt habitually.

MagsidaiKd^ from x(dannl^ trousers
(Arabic, Stfiurar). Jdmg kayong
ito'y int.sa/dudfin ko, I will make
trousers out of this cloth.

}fngs(ti>in { from tfof/ni, a shoe or san-
dal), liong bnlat na iti'/ysasaj/inin
iiil/i liht^y will innlrp tlnw loiithpr

126 TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

into whoes). Mnnapln, to wear
ghoefl habitually.

To put an apron (tapis) on; to wear Magtapis. Jynug hnjong iynn «// U\-
a tapis oocaf<ionally. p'tHin nhjn (let her make an apron

out of that cloth). 3/<in«/)M, to
wear a tai>is halntually.

To carry a cAne, or tunfjk'oil. MaglnnkoiL TUmg hthoy na itiVgliuU'

Unigko<l ko (I am making a cane
out of this wood).

XXI. hi, used with the name of a destructive a^cnt, denotes the present
or pa*«t result of the destructive action. It is prefixe<l to vowel nouns and
infixe<l with thosi' l>eginning with a consonant («• is counted as a vowel i.

White ant (termite). Anay. InAmiy ang manga Uhro (the

books were destroye*! hv the white
ant«< [were white-antedy).

Locust. Bdlang. Bimif/aiang ang palay {iht"

rice is being destroyed oy fhe lo-
custs).

Itat. Daqi\. JHnadagd ang higtU (the rice

fhulle<l] is being destroyed bv the
rats [lit. is l^ing **ratte<f*'] ).
Mandaragdy rat-catcher.

Crow . Uak. Inuuak ang waging (the l>ananu.''

are being destroyed by the crows
[being "crowed^*]).

XXII. 7n, prefixed or infixed, used with words denoting parts of the
bo<ly indicates past or present pain or suffering in the i)art name<i. The
first syllable of the root is re<Iuplicated to indicate the present tense.

Hea<1. Ulo. Inula akn (I had a headache).

Inuuio nlyd (she [he] has a head-
ache). Masakil ang ulo ko (my
head aches).

Chest. Dibdih. Dlnibdih niya ( he had a pai n

in the chest).

Stomach. tSikmura. SInisikmura kat (I>»es

your stomai*h pain you? ) Op6^ sinl-
Hiknnira ako (yes, sir; I have a pain
in the stomach).

.\lxlomen. T^ydn. Tiniydn ako (my abdomen

pained me). Tinitiydn ako (my
abdomen pains me) .

XXIII. In like manner, in, prefixed to or inserted with roots signifying
diseases may denote the past or present state of the disease. The first
svllable of the root is re<luplicated to indicate the present tense. If a
clironi(; state of the disease is to Ixi expressed, the patient is denoted by
the suffixing of in (hin ) to the root. (The future tense, it must l>e remem-
l)ered, reiiuplicates the first syllable of the root.) The suflfix in may also
denote a physical defect or tlie result of a disease.

Small[x>x. BuhUong. Ang hinufndutongf the y*er-

son who is having smallpox. Ang
hinuhUttng^ the i)er8on who has ha<i
small i)ox. Ang bulutongin^ the
marks of smal Ipox. }fagbulutong,
to become marke<l by smalliK)x.
^fagkabuW^mg^ to have an epi-
demic of smail|)ox.

Asthma. Hikd. Hikain^ asthmatic person.

(lOut. Piyd- Piyohin, gouty person.

AUlomon. Tiydn. l^yanin, (rorpulent person.

TAGALOG LANOrAOE.

127

•'IN (H[N; NIN)" SIKFIXKD.

XXIV. In {hin) suffixed to names of birds denotes jrarnecoeks of tiie
general color of the bin I named. Some words cliaii^e 1'm^ accent of the
root, while otliers retain the original accent. Kx. :

Hawk (several species). Lairin. Lalaw'uiin^ game cock of a

brown color, like a hawk.

('n>w. l\ik. rW(/^/7i, black pime cock. It

will be seen that the first syllable
of the root is re<in|ili<'atf^d.

XXV. In (hin) denotes the completed actiim or result of a verb which
rci^uires an object if sullixed to a verbal root of this nature; provided the
root admits In for the liirect object. Kx. :

To drink.
To eat.

To sew (occasionally).

UiniiiHin. Inumin, drink.

Kiinutin. Kanin, food. Kakdnin;
Lakdln, refreshments, sweet.s, nuts.
These last words formed with ka
mean "food-rcsend)liiig."

Tunntln. Jaliiiu, anything sewe<l:
tailor W(>rk. Matjtahi, to sew in
company (numy) or to sew nnich.
Maitahi, to .<cw for a living. Man-
(innhi, tailor; tailore.'^s; seamstress,
nec<licwon)an (<lressmakcr ). }fihf-
]i(it<ih!, to order to sew. Ex.: Jtu
au'i jKitahl iiit/d iiu akin (this is
what slu' told nje t<j sew).

Stnunlnt((h. . 1 n(i HnJjaahi n ,\\\\'c\i grazed,
i. e., the grass. Atitj sdhsdhan, the
grazing ])la<*e; pasture, etc.

XXVI. Jn U8e<l with verbal roots capal)le of ex{)ressing tjualities which
may l)e acquired or exten<h'd to persons, animals, etc., indicates the object
of the action. Ex.:

Ti* graze.

To look out (as from a window).

To swim.

Ittninnnino. A nij d n /Tj/n n i )) ,\\ hat ijven
by looking out. This and similar
forms c<>ntain no ten-'^e idea. A)uj
iliiiinTijtn,^ what was <ir has been
looked at thus. ^\n'j fUntirntTj/aa,
what is being looked at thus. Au(/
ihiiiii?,/an(tti, the window. Man-
uin/do, to l<»«»k by many thus or
sometimestoa{>i)earat the w in(h)W
(also idea of habit thus). Ex.:
lioiiatj l.tinn mninnT<i(U) sn dnnuTii-
nuiin (<lonot l<jok out of [or appear
at] the window). MarniTijttn^ tt)be
at the window. Mnrurmufao '<iiii'i,
he is at the window. MukarniTijiio^
to look (»ut of a window casually.
Matfpaduin/'Kf, to orderto look out.
Maki'hnTijdo, to jiMU anotherin thus
looking (lUt. }fai/kn/f'ithn7i/(in, to
look (lut su<ldenly, moving(iuickly
in ord*^r to do so.

LmiKiiTiiini. Mmjl iT(;<,if, toswim car-
rying something. Aug l<itH/o)fin,
what gained by swimming, or ob-
ject swam for. Aw/ ildiTijf/if, what
carried while swimndng, e. g. , the
<'l"tlie<: uIn* I»v what means.

128 TAGxVLUG LANGUAGE.

L<ui[j(f;ia)t, a buoy. Lanf]oy<h}, a
plare for >^\vi!nining; wliere swim-
inin^niay bedone. Pin'i(//(iwjoi/a)i,
\A-Arv wlieie switiniiin^' \va.« done
while carrying Koniethine:. Ex.:
MarunoiKj kti))ij lnmiuT[}Oiif Jlindi
jto. ( I >o you know bn\v to Hwim?
No, sir. ) .1 na ! Tuf/i'i/otj ha '/ / lutli
inanhif/h;/ hiitf/ hi/mii7^^o>:/ ( What!
You a Tap:alo«r ami dou't know
bow to swimV) T(t(/ti sthin knf
(Where aie you from?) Tacja
Iminbik, ])o (\ live in the nioun-
tainfj, sir). Pain (I did not know
it).

To fly. Linnijiod. Antj Hpnr'tit^ the object

of the flight. Anij ilipfuh the
wings, or instrument of fliglit.
Any lijKird)!, pbn't'of Hight. -V//'/-
/ipn*l, to 11 y nHuh,.or to and fro.
M(n/j,tili)ui({, to cause or teach to
My. Anr/ jti)fnHjHnl, what f^et or
taujrlu t«> lly.

To dive for; to dive (occasionally ). Smni.sn/. Am/ sislriti, what dove

for. The reasr)n for diving or the
body subiiu^rged, f///'/ isisid. Atitj
.slslntii, the <li\ ing place. MntjH'tsitl.
to dive nnii'h. Aihj })'in(H}^Ui-L
what dove for much. Manisid, to
dive prof<'.<sioiially (for a living).
M'ltnii'fsl'f^ <li\('r.

To run. TumaLhu. Ami inklinli'tn, what mav

be run for. Tnhhohin, runaway.
Maf/(n/:l)n, to ruu nuicb. A)ni
ifalJ-n, the cause for running or
what is carried while running.
AiKj tnh}>n1niit ( n the ])lace «»f run-
ning; ( *J ) the person run away
from; (iJ) the person fr)r whom
souH'thing may be <'arried. Tn-
unll'ufttLI'n, to rove about; to run
around; togadalxMit. Mahitnhho,
to be abh' to run.

XXN'll. /// used with )n'i adjectives which have an attributive ."^ense
imparts the iih-a of holiiing, considering, reputing, etc., acjMnding to the
meaning of the a<ljeeti\e. This has been fnlly explained under the adjec-
ti\(' ( «|. v. I.

\\ Vlll. /// snllixed also e.xpresses the act of can.*-ing i'lnotion or sensa-
tion in others when used with roots wlmh >('<inife no object, and form the
cla^-s of vejbs called neuters, which aie generally expressed in English by
" to br " followed by an adjective. It may also be jtrelixed.

To be hungry. Mit'ii'ilnin. Ex.: yiffjiujutnm ancj ra-

hai/ft (the ho rse i s h u ngry ) . Houmj
imnui f/iiltnnui mnj nihaifo (don't let
the horse go hungry). Kar/uixi-
iiuiii. hunger.

'i'o be thii>ty. }f(nih(io. Uoikkj rnoinj hniuhao ang

nso (<lon't let the dog rt^niain
thirsty, or b<' suffering from
1 1 1 i rst . ) . JO x . : XaijugiUum bagd

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 129

hay of ( A re you h un jary? ) Hindi' t
natiuhao lamamj nkn (Xo, I am
only thirsty).
To be afraid. Matdkot. Natatakot kaf (Are you

afraid?) Ojto nrja^ nku'i/ nataU'tkvl
( yes, sir, I am af raid ) . Mahatakot,
to cause fear. Avg ikat/ikoty the
cause of fright. Ang kntokntan^ tl»e
person feared, also thing feared.
Ex.: Ana ling k'm<itithih(dan mof
(What are you afraid of?) Aug
knmilakotfin ki/ y aitg tnaiTgd tulimn
(I was afraid of the ladroues
[bandits]). Tumakot, to frighten
or scare another. Ang takotin^ the
person frightened. Takotin mo
f^iyo, frighten (scare) him.

XXIX. It will be seen from the foregoing that in is not used with
roots conjugated with ?/n/, except in certain senses, as shown by the above
examples.

XaX. In suffixed to terms for money forms words denoting an object
or material costing the amount represented by the money quoted. The
first syllable of the root is duplicated, but the accent <loe8 not change.
Ex.:

Half peso (25 cents U. S. currency). tS<il<ijfi. SisalapUn, a half- peso's

worth.
Peso (50 cents U. S. currency). /*/.«?/*.«. Piitiiio.sih, a i>eso's worth.

XXXI. In suffixed to some nouns when paying comi»liments, etc.,
indicates that the party addresse<l resembles or partakes of the (jualities
exprc^-sed by the word used.

The Candii ( which has a sweet odor ) . Kandn . Kandah in , a sweet piTson .
Honev. Pidot. Pj</o////, honev (term of en-

dearment ) .

XXXII. 8ufiixe<i to roots capable of being expressed with tlie idea of
plurality, in denotes something to have taken place many times. The
accent of the root changes invariably. Ex. :

Idea of whipping. Jlain/nU. Unmpaftin, whipped many

times.

To lose; to miss. Mnnnld. nVf/o<.<, to lose many times.

To sue another; to litigate. Mag>)mp. rsnpin,i\ suit tried many

times. PnhuiMip, barrator (one
who is continually engaging in
causeless litigation).

XXXIII. A7n, when prefixed to class names of human l>eings signifies
a resemblance to the class named. Ex. :

Woman; female. Bnlxvn'. Bdhminin^ effeminate man.

liinahayt'y has almost same mean-
ing.

Man; male. Lolnki, />fA//.'/<//j, iiiasculine(>rman-

nish woman or girl.

XXXIV. Theobject toobtain possession of whicji an intransitive action
ia performed sometimes takes m, if not otherwise exj)res<ed. Ex.:

To go or come out; to take out. jAnnaJnU. . I )ni lahaiiin, who or what

sought thus: object for which ai--
tion performe<l. Mng/ahaa, to take
out. Ang lahmiij what may l>e

6855—05 9

taken (»iit. (as food from the
\n^^ lM»t), or what may flow <
tlie hody (as hlood, etc.).
Ijihm'ni vio ako nang kanin
i?ome ri(V out for mo). Muq
Infu'ts, to jio out and come in,

To jump. Liimokud. Ant; lokfiohinjwhutju

for. Av(j loksolian^ the j)h
jumping. Mtiglokso, to jump i
or hy many. Magiok)n>h<
jump l)y many in competiti(

To leaj^ or jump down; (2)toalip:ht. Lumi'fsoiig. Aug ImtotTgin, •

leaped down for or alighte<
Aug/iisoiTi/dii, thephiee of hgl
Lliom. L('i{<ong 7nt pdlacf, t
(siroke) of hick, Muglusoi
thn»w down or pusli down.

To fro or come down (the stairs or a Pfiiiiiiuang. Angpamwgin, the<
ladder, etc.). tor winch action may be

formed. Ang jxuHtognu^ the
or jxTson forwiiom action n
jierformed. Kx.: Panaognm
lidng ti'thig (brinjjr me some
down here). Mdg/mudog, to
somethin<; down tfius, or to
come down much.

XXX\'. Some transitive ( re(iuirinjr an object) verbs do r<o^ and
intransitive verbs //->, admit in.

IN — AN.

XXXVI. /// ]»retixiMl to or infixed with a root to winch on is suflR:
the same time is used to exprcsHtlie result of an action when the .«aid
is a concri'te object. J^x:

'J'o cml>rnidcr mats (j)etates). Mogsalmt. .sV//r//;f/A/;/,anembroi

mat ( petate).
To (jo line needlew<irk; to do lin<' Suinnhnii. SinKlnm/iu, fine n<
SI 'wiuL^ work, as a lian<ikercliief or

article of line sewing.

XXXVir. The same construction is also used to express the folio
(1 ) Tiling's piM'pared for foorl from the raw nialiTial. (2) .\ct.s done
the objert expressed bytluMViot. ( ii ) Tb«' refuse caused l>v some ac
riurality with the last is expressed by the use of the definite jiretix /:
coufiectiou with in [pmag). Kx. :

Ivji:. ItJog. 7r//7/o//rb/,anythinirmadt

CL'gs, as cake or an omelet, e

lloncv. Pul"(. Vninloti'tu, anvthintr

w ith honey in it. I*nh>ti'ni, s
made from honey. Pnli}t
honey an<l cocoanut milk.

To peel rattans (bejuco). Ktini'iifas. KtHngnsiiii^ the p<

(sing.). Aug jiinagkagasar
]»eelings fjjlur. ).

To thresh. (iin/tilk. (ilnlihnt, straw.

giiknif, much straw. Afagl
thresh mui-h.

To saw. Lniiiiignn. I*mnqjngar'\an^ sav

A})>i iiKDihihigdr), the sawyer

To sort cotton or silk; to cull; to Pinnili Attg plniltluni, the r

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

131

MA— IN (HIN).

XXXVIII. In {hin) sufficed and ma prefixed to roots signifying mental
emotions, passions, and involuntary actions form adjectival nouns which
generally require to be expressed in Englinh by an adjective and a noun.

XXXIX. If the root admits of contraction, begins with /, or an intensive
degree is to be expressed, the first syllable of the root may be reduplicated.
These words have the accent on the last syllable as a rule. For examples
see under ma.

XL. It may be repeateti here that acquisition or assimilation isgenerally
denoted by in; the instrument, if allowable, and the reason for the carry-
ing out of the action by i; an<l the place, or the person from whom, by an.
Additional examples:

To reach; to overtoke; (2) to con-
clude (as a meeting).

To buv.

Vmi'dnit. Ang nbutiii, what reached,
etc. Anginabut^ what was reached,
etc. Aug ahuUiu, the person over-
taken or tiling reached for. Vina-
hut, to reach for one's self. Magn-
hul^ to reai'h for another. Ang
pagnhuf, (heact of reaching. Mega-
bnf(tiij to reach for each other mu-
tually. Magabiitabiitfui, to reach
manv things or pass things from
hand to hand in nund)ers. Maka-
dbtit, to tiike; to be able to reach.
MtiL{<'(but, to ask an()ther to reach
forsoiiKHhing. Ex.: Xalinbuf (d't
k'uif .lunu Vfing fnbig { I askt d Juan
to reach nie [get for me] some
water) .

Jhunil'i. A ng bilh'w or ang 7)rt^//<, what

goj.

To sell. Mitfjlull. Aug ipaijlAl'i^ what gold.

Aug ijiinngbH), what was or has
bei'ii sold. Ang pinagbdhi'iu^ the
l)ei>^oii to whom sold (past t<.*nse);
the j>laee, or the price. Aug luii-
jt(f(jffi/t, what has heen sold by error.
Ang nojtaghillini), the money real-
ized fn )ni what has been sold. A ng
jKigblhU't, the act of selling. (The
act ()f buying; is ang paghill. ) Mag-
hihili, to sell by wliolesale.

To snatch; to pull 11]) by the roots; tu Kniunmldm. Aug kinatnkauiy what
take by lone. snatched, etc., thus (past tense).

Aug hinihuuin, what snatched,
pulli'd up, etc. (no tense idea).
MaiTg<t)}ik(nn, to go about pulling
u|) things (as a gardener ])ull8 up
weeds).

To take. Knnmhn. A)ig linuhuy what was or

has been taken. Ang ikuh<i, the
means for taking (no tense idea).
Ang knnin, what taken (no tense
idea) . AtKi ikinvhn, the means bv
which soiiH'thing was or has been
taken. Aug knn''in, the ]>lace or
person from whom taken.

Tore*|ne?^t; to ask for. UnmnTgL .I///; ////<///f//, what asked

for. ,1//^ niiU'nTijl, what obtained
by asking. . I ng luiTtftn, what asked
for ( no tense idea).

To close the hand. KnininiLnn. Mogkinikhn, to gra.<p;

to il(»e the hand ujK)n. Ang kim-
k'nniti, what gra>i)e<l. Ang kinhn-
/•///>, M hat was or has been grasped.
Aug ik'nnk'nn, the grasping instru-
ment: e. g., the hand.

TUE I'AIMK i.i: 1.

I. The definite particle /, w hi«]i i«j ahnost invarial)ly a prefix and found
as an infix with a very few words \i*r strictly euphonic leasons, is used
with s«-nteiH'es or i>lira"^es by which the subject is represente<l as losing con-
trol of something, expulsion, cause, means, instrument, time (not tense),
and \('rl)sof adjusting, c«>pyini; into, transferring, translating, transplant-
ing, etc., in the latter case indicating the object of the verb.

II. Sentences or ]»hrases iiicludim: a verb with / liave the agent in the
genitive, the «lirect ol)j<'ct in the accusative (if tlierc is a direct object),
;md the word denoting the instrument, time, or cause in the nominative.
The nominative word is eniphasized by being place<l at the beginning of
the sentence or j»hrase.

To ]>inion: to tie the hands. dnnn'i /><>.«. Ang ignpoR, the means —

i. e., the rope. Kx. : Ignpos mo so
hihiiigo'ni ilimg ]>(intalt ( Pinion the
prisoner with this rope). Em-
phatic: IfotHj )uiiit(iH igapo» mom
}>ilangn'ni (with this rope pinion

TAGALOCi LANGUAGE. 133

III. /, meaning cause, is generally combined with koy the definite form of
makdy forming ika; and further with in for the past and present tenses, ikhia.

To come here. Puinarito. Amj ipinnrito, the reason

or time of coming here, Aug iki-
naparitOy the reason or time thus
(pai-t tense). Ex.: Anoangikina-
parito mof (What diil you come
nere for?) ^SV Jiuin ung ikuiaparito
ko (Juan was the cause of my
having come here) . Sino angjnmi-
ritohiin mof ( Who did you come
to see here?) Si J turn (Juan).

IV. Some verbal roots have the idea of going away, leaving, etc., inherent
in themselves, and therefore have the definite in either in or /. Ex.:

To go away; to leave. Umnlts. Ang inalk, the leaving

(pref. to n)fg ialU). Kahdpon, ang
itKilli ko (yesterdav, I left). Aug
jHigali.^, the act of leaving. Muga-
liSj to take something away. Ayig
jicn/cudiK, the action of taking some-
thmg awav. KopagaalU ko nito
iTijuin'm (I have just finished tak-
ing this away). Makaalh, to be
able to go away. 3fakapagalis, to
be able to take away.

V. An indirect object following a preposition takes the genitive with a
wntence or phrase using /, but the construction of the rest of the sentence
<»r phrase is unchanged. Ex.:

To buy. Ihimi/i. IhiUino tnu/ hnO) nang kaka-

iiiii (Buy some sweets for the
child).

To carry; to accompany. Hninotid. Ihatkl mo ako mi bahay

lunig (und ino (Accompany me to
your father's house [to the house
(»f your father]). Maghalidy to
S(Mul; to remit. .Vtighntidhafiran,
to send to each other mutuallv.

To look for. lliiiniuiap. Ih'indp moitkoiKingisang

mdlmting tdfnii/o ( Look for a goo<i
liorse for me). Ilnhinjt mo ako
iKUig m(iiTgi'i itlog (Look for some
*^^^i^ for me).

VI. The person for whom some act is done and the indirect object of
an action benefiting or performed for the benefit of another, take the
nominative; the verb being used witii / and the proper tense forms. The
foregoing sentences are also examj)les of this, as well as the following
examples:

To cook; to make by cooking or like Muglnto. Ex. : Jpag/ntd mo (lugcopi-
procea*-'. tan uong sicofatr (Make some choc-

olate for the caf)taiii). Iinighiti)
mo (iko iioiig kit tun (Cook mi* some
rice).

To build a house. Mogfh'ilmii. fpoghnhm/ mnako (Build

nu» :i IkuispV

184

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

VII. 7 generally replacoH in with verlje which admit )x)th direct ami
indirect objects, t heinj^ u»ed to express the direct object (accusative)
and an expresMUg the indirect object (dative, etc.). Kx. :

To recouimend.

To make a gift; to present with.

To advisee.

To give l)a<'k; to rt^ntore.

To tell; to narrate; to report.

To talk; to apeak.

Maghiliu. Ang ipagbilin^ the rec-
ommendation. Ang ipinaghi/iiij
what was or has bc^en rvcom-
mendiHl. AngimgbUinanj the i>er-
son ret»ommenaeii {no tense idea) .
Ang pinnghillnan, the person who
was or has l>een recommende«l.

Maghii/aifo. Ang ipinnghiyaya^ wliat
was or has been given, i. e., the
gift. Ang pinagbiijayaan^ the i>er-
son to whom something was or has
l)een given. Mabiyarfang Uino, a
lil)eral i)er>»on.

Maghatol. This verb also means in
some c&ses to procure women.
Ang ihtiiol, the ativice. Ang ihi-
natol, what was or has l)een ad-
vised. Ang hnUiUm, the i>erpun
a<i vised. Ang hinntolan, the f^er-
son who was or has been a<l vised.
Ang ijHighi'itol, the woman j)ro-
curiMl. Man(ighnti>l na lalaki^ pro-
curer; pan<lerer. Mapaghdtol na
bubiiye, pnx'uress.

Magmoli. This verb also means to
go back, to return to the plat-e of
starting. A ng mmntl'i, what was or
has Ijeen restor(»< 1 . Ang xina<dinn,
the person tr) whom something
was or has been restore<i. Ang
jHjgmolnn, the place retumeti to.

MagmlM. Ang mlithi^ what told or
reported (no tense idea). Ang
sinalM; ang isiwiiitiif what was or
has lK»en told, etc. Angshttmiilfd;
ang ifdnasalltd, what is I wing told,
etc. Ang mmlUin; ang uaMiliUi,
what will l)e told or re|M>rte<l.
Ang jxtgwiJitadny the j>erson told
or reported to (no tense idea).
Ang pinogholitadny the person tt)ld,
eiv. I past tense ) . A ng pinagmm-
litadn, the fwrson being told or
reported to (present tense). Ang
pngmmUtiu'tn, the person to he
tohl or re|)orttHl to (future tense).
Ang ininagHniiidy what was told
and tlie reason for telling. Ang
uagHoliMy the teller ( pa* t tense).
Ang nagmtmUtdj the narrator
( present tense* ) . Ang magsawiitd,
the teller (future tense). Ana
kamVdanny the companion in tell-
ing; the coreporter. MamlMy
garrulous, like an aged person.

Snmahi. Ang Habifiin^ what said or
the person or thing mentioned.
Magsabij to converse; to say.

TAGALOa LANGUAGE. 135

A)hj isahi, the reason or causae of
the conversation, ^luff isindbi,
what was or has tx*en said. Aitg
ijthiwjmbi, wliat was or Ijas been
said and the rt-ason or cause. Aug
ttahiJidti, the conversation orstorv.
Ang ))in(tf/S(ihiU(ih, what said to a
certain person or said at a certain
I)la(v.
To signal. Ttuuvro. }f<i(/ttird, to ])oint out; to

show; (f. ) to teach. Aug ifiunroy
what sijxnalcd, pointed out or
tau}j:ht. Aug tirnirotnij person
shown (taujy^ht) or signaled to.

Other verbs which have two objects like the forej^oinji^are ?////r/rr//, "to
teach;" nwghaliU'ij '"to reiK>rt;" rndghigng, "to give;" and magblit, "to
^11, " which have been or will 1)8 explained in otlier ]>laces.

VIII. In the majority of cases / expri'.s<es tlie in<'ans or instrument l)y
which an action is brought about. It is y/?r//.'r'7 <hrectly to the root for
thone conjugated with um in any manner, and to the verbalizing ])article
in the other conjugations. Tliis apphes to all tenses. Tlie first syllable
of the root or the last syllable of the ])article, a,s the case may be, redupli-
cate in the j)resent and future tenses. In the second pluperfect and second
future p<»rfect tenses the particle / is inserted between the particle ?jfr or
ma and the root, whether the latter be simjde ar compound. ( See tables, )

IX. The root denoting an instrument, if capable of conjugation, may
denote the indirect object, if there is no nominal direct object in the een-
ten<*e. Ex.: Aaoang ipintttdgniffa !^ { What was he killed with?) Iftinuril
iiiyt'i (lie was kille<l with a gun). With in the sentence would be: piuntny
nh/d nctug hnril ( he was killed with a gun ). In the last example the nomi-
nal subject fniril is exj)ressed. (See tables for the conjugation of an instru-
ment with /, and with means for accon^plishment of an action.)

X. /is also used, as has been stated, to express the means for the ac-
complishment of an action. Kx.: Wal'l sigdng ihi/i nitong hdhag (hi- is
"without the means to buy this house). Mdgrodn dlo Ihdhdydil sd Ujo ( I have
the means to pay you).

XI. / combined with h} may express the direct object (accusative) of
actions performed lor the benefit of others, which may also be exjiressed
bv in alone; an expresses |>lace in general with such verbs; and / com-
l)ined with ;>f///and jtnidg according to the tensi', expresses the i)erson who
is, was, has been, or will be the benefic'iary of the action.

To roast (meat); to l)ake or fry (fish }higilid<K Aug iniiltdo, what is being
or meat). frie«l or roasted. Aug ipuntgiUido,

the })erson for whonj something is
beini: roasted, i-tc. Aug ihdodtt,
the fr\ing pan or roastei*. Aug
]fiitdgi/idt,fiii, i\\v place of roasting.
To scald or make, as tea; to boil (as M'tg/m/d. Aug inihu/d, what boile<l
potatoes, etc. ) . or made tlin.^^. Aug iimgldgd, x\w

]>erson lor whom to he made, .h/7
Idgidht. the (M»oking pot, teapot,
etc. l''x.: I/<u/fd(;d nut dkn Udug
Sd ( make mr some tea ).
To cook. Mdghifn. Aug /utoin, what cooked.

Ang luih'tn, what cooked (see next
paragraph ). Aug hifoi'nt, the cook-
ing utensil. Aug pdghitodu, the
cooking place.

XII. When roots beginning with A. /, or a vowel (including tr) are con-
jugate^! with iu and instrumental /', etc., the Tagalo«r revi'rses the |)article

ISfi TAOALOG LANGT^AGE.

in to >// or clianges it to /m, in order to avoid the harsh .sounds of the double
i, e^pel'iall\ witli roots ooininenoing with /. Kx.:

To thnnv down. MiKjfu'i/of/. Ang ihnlog^ whatda:ihe<i

to ground or thrown down (no
ten.^e idea). Aixj I Inn ulog or a tnj
inaltufiKj, what was or has het^n
thrown down, etc. Antj ihinuhnlog
or aii(j iudlmlinlog, what is being
thrown down, etc. Aug IhuhuJog^
what will he thrown down, etc.
( See tables for these. )

To place; to put. Magbigoif. .b<</?7</f/«v, what placed.

Aiuf iilnagay; aiig i)iilngnij or aug
inalagag, wliat was or lias been
placed.

To get rid ol; to disappear. Mugnala. .I///7 mi^'v/W, what was or

has been gotten rid of, etc.

XJII. With certain classes of verbs such as (1 ) tho>e re<juiring two com-
plements, e. g.. tHfign'i/lfd, "to tell;" indgntitng, "to lend;" maghigag^ "to
give," etc., and {'1) wit h those expressing expulsive or dispersive action,
e. g., inngtfipoii, " to throw away; " imigu'dtog, "to scatter see<i, etc.," t forms
a true piussivo, which may be so expn^^sed in English.

XI \'. With verbal roots not included in the foregoing classes i forms ai^
expression peculiar to Tagalog and allied languages by denoting either the
instruini'iit, cause, or time oi the action. In these cases the cau.«e, rea>Jon,
instrument, or time lu'comes the subject of the siMitence in the nonunative
case, especially il the sentence should inchide jui imlirect complement ex-
pri'ssiveof such instrument, cause, time, etc., in addition toadirect object.
Kx.:

(1) To give. M'lghigdtf. Aug ihlnigag, what was

or bas been given. Kx.: Ihinlgmi
III Jiidfi if/fing sdhij/t (tliat money
was the gilt of Juan).

(*J) To ibrnw iiway. Maghtjum. Tdntdfton, to cast (as a

iH't). K\. with iiidgtapdu: Itina-
jxdi h> dug si'iJdf ( I threw the letter
a\\ ay ) . A nu <(ng gdgdwin ko nilong
isih'i' (What shall \ do with this
lisb? ) Ihi/inn nut (throw it away).
I^x. with fnhhijidn: ^f(n,snng itapon
luiliiiD in iinitg isiU't [\ caught this
(is!) with one throw [of the net]).
Ahd (ajtinidii, the lish line; also,
wbcrc anything may be thrown;
tlie scrap hole or heap.

T" i»lant: 1<> s<»w. M<i<;fd,,iiii. (2) Also to bear hate or

rancor toward anotber. Alciug

irnidhiiiiiii ihnig jn'l/dg {[ aiU plaut-

iii'^ tills rice I. Aug (dnonhty the
placrol planting. Aswill l)eF(H*n,
boidcs l)cing contracte«l, there i.s
a transposition with m and u with
tbis word with suHixed an.

( S<<' tabh's for conjugation «if sunidlmg. to sow, with /. )
X\'. It" tbe instrument i- expressed in full wit h a \erb using the expul-
sive /, the instrument takes the proper )irepo>ition in the genitive. Ex.:
/hiid/tuH /(ii/d and fnifidn'/id nund ixinhd bni I he threw the Sjiud awav with

1 ' • ■' • •

• I I I < to k

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

137

XVI. (1) Roots which take mag for the primary idea in the indefinite
generally have < for the corresponding definite, comhined with in for the
past an(l present tenses. Um roots generally take hi only for the siinj>le
definite (direct object). (2) Roots which vary in meaning according to the
verbalizing prefix or infix um, mng, etc., generally retain the definite form
of mif/, magkoy etc., with i, forming iput/, tf>i^f<'<j, '/>'N iphid, etc., as pre-
fixes to the root. " (See tables for conjugation of knmulat, to spread, to
propagate (of its own accord); magkalut, to spread widely (by outside
a-jencv). Kx. :

( 1 ) To sun ; U) put in the sunshine.

To pour out.

Tr> scatter.

To add.

To heap up; to lay in layers.

(2) To spread; to i)ropai:ate (of its
own accord I.

To spread wi<lely (by outsi<le
iigency) .

To borrow (money only).

Mag}tilnd. Ang ibhiilad, what was
or has been put in the sunlight,
as clothes to dry. A ug hikushi, the
place. Aug bilnran, the mpe by
which suspended, etc. .1/)/; ihtlad,
what sunned, dried in the sun, etc.

Maghnho-'i. . 1 ng ihuh(ti<, what poured
out. Aug ih'nmhoi*^ what has been
I)Oured out. MomulioSy to spill
out; (2) fig. to spread out or run
to, as a road. Kx. : *S''J an nmiuhos
iUnig ddidt f ( Where does this road
run to?) XnntihoA sa hat/an (it
goes to town). .Vagkahuhoi^, to
run together (as two roads). Xag-
knkdbiihoH (iiKf dahurang damn, the
two roads run together. Kidm-
hos duga, of the same blood, as
children of the same mother,

Maghidog.<(ik, var. magfm/akstik. Ang
ilnd'igsitk, what scattered. Ang
ihinidngstd:, what was or has been
scattere<l. Aitg ilnnnhnfagsnk,'w\n\t
is being scattered, Ang ihnha-
Ingsdk, what will be scattered.

Magdagdag. Ang idngdug, what
added. Ang idinagdag, what was
added. Ang (higdagan, what has
been a<lded to. Arnj niandaragdag,
th(» adder.

Mngpnlong. Ang ijjattnig, what
heaped up or laid in layers. Also
used for generations. Ex.: Jinn
nng pntong nng nngnndn sn Lakitn-
dnhi .'' (How many generations
have there been since Lacandola? )

k'unndtiL Am/ iknbtt, what mav
spread. Amj iknwbd, what lias
spread.

Mnghddf. Aug ipngkfdnt^ what may
be spread thus. Ang ipinagkabit,
what was (»r has been so spread.
V]s. (indef. ): y<igkah'd<d xi kmni
nnng niknin] inikiitfnsnrnd sn knpmni
innn (what's his name has l>een
spreading bad rep<»rts all over
al»out his neii:hl)or). Knbdhdnt
ang dih) nii/a (he has a most tat-
tling tongue).

l'mi'iia)ig. Am; ^ifaiTj/in, the loan.
A)ig ntam/an, the person from
uliMin borrowed. Ang n'ltang, the

.\) U'ihI (nionov only). Mnyi'ttdwj. (Also to Doriu», ...

Amj ipiungtUnng^ tlie loan.

To lend willingly. Magpnntang. A ng ijf<nU(ing, the lo&n

niiult* thns. A)ig jKiudnTgii)^ the
person lent to thus. Kx.: Pnu-
tam/in mo <ikn ndiig ]thos (lend nie
a |)<'S0). Isiing snfapt lancing
(ing ijKiniUfiiig in m if/n (1 will only
lend you a half jm's**). Ijnnai'iUmg
/.o i*(i iifo aug Mil n pi ko { I have lent
my in<uiey to you). Il'ikit hindl
ni't ako p'tiiniii'itaiig ining sfilapi/
(Why won't you lend n»e .some
money?) Su jmg/.d't na/a, (be-
cause* I have none). Paatnng,
eredit. Kniit*n7ij<i)i, ileht.

XVII. Tills is also ?«ho\vn by hnnii/}, "to ])uy;" and indghilt, **tx3 sell/'
already explained i.

To ])uy by n-tnii (<>ii a <mMll scnlf i. Inniltiu. Aug innfdif^ what was

Ix.U'^dit thus.
To sell (»n a small s«ale. M'lgtihn/. Ang ij/uKigiiinii, what wa^?

.-old thus.

Will (1) //'" [li.nm I'oi- past an-l jMornt t«*ns('s) is generally used to
ex pri's;^ cause oi' lea-ou, and also tiim- i lor the latter see under mti).

To de-trov. Sidiiin). ^fll(fslrl), to destroy nuieh.

M'lLftsln), to be abh^ to destroy.
I'^x.: Aug ihi nasi en imng hniignug
ai-i aiig ji'igsnsngal ( irandlliug was
tin' cause by which he lost his
property ).

To ))e sa<l. Mafn'ipii<. .^fa La ha pis, to cause sad-

ness, Ang iLahajtis, the cause of
sadness (no tense idea). Kx.:
ILiiia/ii'ipis I.n ang pagLanaitag
nif/a ( 1 was >addened by his dying
[death] i. IL'wihahapis Loaitg ptig-
inniat'iii niga \ \ am saddened l)y
his death i. J/:a/nfhapis mo ang
paijLa inataii ni iial Jnan ( YoU will
lu' .-a<liiened by the death of
Don .fiiant. Kahapisan, sa<Ine«f»

labstr. I. k'aln'ijtisfn'ipis. <in{ OTiHir-

r. 'Willi (tl>jfct or s|)ectacle: also
gicat soii'ow.

I ■_' I //.'/ \iLiiia] abo expre-^«'s welbpcrt'ectefl acts resulting from a }>5lov\'

j,f, ,«•(•>«> .If d<-\ rlt ipnirUt .

Ti • bi'conu' bettei'. ( innniUng. Mftggafing, to adom.

Aug gaJiiTgi,,, wiiat adomed.
Maga/uig, to be better; als<>
"L'ood/" "ilever.'' Mangaling^Xo
l>ecomennich better. Makagaling,
to do good. Ang i ha gal ing, the
cause ot betterment. Kx.: Ang
iiKiiTg.'t gainof ag sigang ikiinigngU'
ling n'ing inmTga nnig sakii ( medi-
cint's are what cause the recovery
of those who are ill ). Ang jHum-
f'-V 1/ ana iiinnaaliiui niuii fthe

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 139

weather caused his improvement).
An(j pdijiuuni tntomj i/aniot (ut(j
ikinaijnliiKj niUi ( the taking of tliis
medicine was what caused them to
recover). MmjiinijaliiK), to pros-
per. Aufj fnnaf/a(j<i/in(j, person or
thinjJT j)rosperiiii;. Aiujnufjiujalbnj,
person improvin<r. Magpakiuja-
liny, to imj^rove one's self; to
correct one's seh'. Kx.: Mfu/pnhi-
(jnling k(it/6 vninj fnniTj/d a sal nmyo
(Improve yourselves in your cus-
toms [or manners]). K'a(/((/ii7i/an,
gocuhic'ss; iujprovement.

(3) Tka, as well as i alone, prefixed to intransitive verl)s indicate time
Si* well as cause or reason. Kx. :

To repent. Mufjuis!. Ant/ ipimif/slsi, the time,

cau.<i', or rea.'jon of repentiince
(j)ast tense). tSnuii.Hl, to quarrel
with oj^enly. Aiu; islsi, the cause.
Mtujjidhiaisl, to repent deeply.

To he asleep or sleepy. M'ltiilit'i. Xfitntnhnj lnnfn kaffo/ ( Are

you sleepy?) Oo; ih'nj kn stnm iTija
mafi'i/off ( Ves; I would liketoiio to
sleep). .\f'!k(ttnl(>(f, to fall asleep.
A)if/ ikntuhni, the time or cause of
fallin«; asleep.

XIX. / is generally used alone to express i*ause or reason with verbs
M'hich do not re«juire an object to complete the meaning ( intransitives):

To obey; to ft)llow. SummKn/. yl//f/ />///^o(/, the cause of

(jbedienceor tollowin«:. Kx.: Ano
(in(j i!<lnii.-<iin<nl iian(/ ntni7(/i'i snndttlo
mi k<n)'ilnn>j ;>"/mV ( Why do sol-
diers obey [follow] their com-
nuuidini; ollieer [chief]'.'). Antj
jKinuiiiinipn 't pli<u/iin <n/ iiiiij isimi-
simofl liih'i (Tlieir obedience is on
aecount of their oath and also their
respe<'t ).

To weep (purposely). Tunitimiis. .V'^7/(f/r<//.s', to weep much

or by many. Mutmnjis, to weep
(iinol.). Ai)[! /7rn77//,«, the cause or
reason of weeping;. M(ii/p(ttni7(/'n<,
to weep exressively. Miikit'iinils.
to jnin another in weepin«r. l^x.:
H'tkil ii<nniiint7i(s i/nmn/ iKilminf
(Wh\' is that woman weeping
[crying]? ). .1/^'/ HifKiiihTi/is-nif/iy if
tnui hnii'itdiimi nnnn utiuk [ Her (TV-
ing is caused ])v the death «>f [her]
child).

To remain behind (letting others go Ttuniru. Mnf/tini, to allow soirje-
ahead). thing to remain. J//y /7/////V/, what

was nr has been left lu'hind; also
the n-niaining l)ehind. I'^x.: Jk'io
(tiHj it i III n't kn <liin ( I have re-
mained here on ynur account).
M'ttini, to hi' left behind. Wnbnuj
ntifirn, not oni' remamed.

140 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

XX. In like manner intransitive verbs alj^n express time (not tense). If
the expression for tiie time is deliniti', it may either precede or follow the
verl), but if the time is indetinite it should always precede. Verbs which
reijuire Hci [il:ina) for cause or reason likewise have the same combination
to exi>ress time:

To arrive. l>nmntiug. Aug idating^ the time of

arrival. Ex.: Ano ang onu* aiuf
ifUnoting nii/of ( What time [hour]
did he [she] come? ). A)ig nftinUing
iiiiji'i ang laiig}ud\ (He [she] came
at noon). Ann ang arao rta iifard-
ting ifi/nf (What day will they
comeV). Ang ikalimang arao nang
hunan (The fifth [day] of the
month ).

TtM-mbark or travel (also to mount). Sninakag. Ang sakayan^ what em-
barked on or mounted. A)tg isina-
kaif, the reason or time ( past tense)
of embarkinji, mounting, et<». Ex.:
Aug taong i.sinakag ko sa FUlfnnai*
(The >i'ar [in which] 1 enibarkeil
for the Philippines).

Tti cat. Kmnain. Atnj ikiu'tin, the reason or

time of eating ( jjast tense) . Ex, :
J>i (kinakain ang hwTijang hila<>
kailan man (green fruit should
nevrr bu eaten).

To die. Maniatttg. Ang oraf< na ikinainatag

niga, the hour at which he died.

XXI. / is also used with vcrl^s of adjusting, conforming, copying into,
traiisiVrring, trunslatin'j, transplanting, etc., to indicate what has been
thus tran.-fcrred, translated, etc.

To (Mmfniin; to make suitalile; to Maghagay. Ang ihinagay, what was
L^ct ready. or has been made suitable. Ex.:

Jlr'igng i(,'i ihnni (Make [do] this
like that I. Maghagay ka nang
iiiainj/i fmt<i inagsasayao (Ciet the
children ready for the party).
Mnhag-iy, to be proper or suitable;
also to be pi'oportioned. Ex. (1)
Saliahnginj Ixtga tta ixing dalaga
ang h(ui<'ikail na migii.vi na ntatnjd
}ii,i.«nTg an / (Is it proj)er, then, for
a young woman to go alone about
the streets'.') Mahahagaya)i ininij
III I'd }t fiiig laki nang kat^alanan (The
punishment Avill be suitable for
the gravitx of the offense). [The
])unishnient will lit the crime.]
(2) I>di nahahagay siya i<a kanilang
k'lffnisnn { He [she] is not prorH>r-
tioned to his [her] height). The
act of making suitable, ang pay-
kahagay. Ex.: Ann ang pagkabii-
gag nlln dttonj^ (Wliat has tlus tO
do with that?) As a nouUyhagoy
means "thing, matter, subject,
si/.e, proportion, appearance."
K\. : A ni'i liaga ang h'lgay f ( What,
then, is the matter?) Ay^vAn ako

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

141

To compare.

To €H:jualize.

To (1) transfer; (2) translate; (3)
transplant; (4) copy out, and (5)
to change from one vessel to an-
other; to empty.

(I don't know.) A)w ang hiUjay
liil/i't, Anterirano kiuHf ('(istilaf
( What does Ik* look like, an Amer-
ican or a Spaniard?) Americano
p6 (an American, sir. ) B'ujoy »(i^
"a.s for, " " as to. ' ' Kx. : B'h/ay sa
akin ( as for me ) . Baijay mi kan iyd
(as for him [her]). J^ayay tfu
ihuny lnhjay (as to other matters),
etc. Haijayhaijaii, different things
( in class ; sj>ecies, etc. ) . Maykabd-
yaybdyay, to differ much. Ex.:
Nnykakahdya yhdga y xHn S'l pagda-
ramit (They differ much in their
manner of dress)

Maghaliinhand. A tig ipinaghaUni-
hai((), what was or has l)een com-
pared. JJu)fiali)nhaii(), to imitate
another. Ang fudimhaaaan^ the
person indtated. Kahafimhauri,
like, alike (ohject). Kahaiiin-
haaaan, resemblance.

Magpind. Ang ipinaid, what was or
has been equalize* 1.

Mngsdlin. Ang isinalin^ what has
l)een ur was transferred, trans-
lated, etc. {2) laalin mo Ho sa
ii'ikang Tagdlog (translate this into
Tat^'alug). [ri) Imiliti nio ang la-
nning nitong haMo (empty out the
contents of this basket).

THE I'ARTirLE AN (HAN).

I. An (han after acute final vowel), sometimes nan, is suflixed with all
tenses of the verb. The particle /^i, either alone or in cond)ination with
V^y {P^^^^o)i etc., is retaine<l in the j)ast and present tenses. Kor the con-
jugation of roots with an and hon t^ee the tal>les at end of book.

II. yln usually represents place, or expresses the case called /^>ca///r in
many European languages, replacing an adverb of place or the i)rej)osi-
tion which would be employed with another form of conjugation. Thus,
if a sentence with a verb other than those which admit a per.^on or place
as the direct object, or tho.«e requiring aii fur euphonic reasons, includes an
in<nrect complement of place relating to the action, the use of on with the
verb expresses the relation of case exi)ressed in English by a prej)osition.

To gather; to pluck (as flowers); to J*ainittU. Ex.: Ann fDig pinijntda mo

diydn.'' ( What are you gather-
ing there?) AktVy pnngmipitds
nang ImUiklak (T am gathering
some fl(>wers). Ang halanntuo' y
ang Ingar (^\k) na pinipita.^an ni
Anthrnsia imng inaiTijd hnlaklak
( Ainbro.^ia is gathering the (lowers
in theganleni; lit., "tlie garden
is the place where ari' being gath-
ered by .\ml>ro.«ia tlii' llowcrs. )"
Maniatay. Aug kaindt'iynn, the place
of fieath. distin«jnished by the
linal accent from Lamotdynn, death
(abstract). Ex.: Jhnnj hahoy mi
ifn muj kinaut'ilaifdn ni ama (father

))reak off.

To die.

(HlmI in tliis house): lit., 'Miiis
house \va.H tliedving ])laceof (rnv)
fatiier."

III. If a verl>al action a<hnit8 of a j>hio(' l^r it< direct object, the latter is
l^etieraliy expressed hy an.

To (1) open; (2) uncover. MfujhiiL/is. Aug hvkasl n^\vhaio]yeued

or uncovered. Aihj ijHighukfhy
the means by whicli opened or
uncovered. xituj hukoxan, the
j)lace opened or uncovered; also
the person or object uncovered.
Contracted many tiine.s to fmks'ht,
esj)ecially forthe imperative. Ex.:
lUdson )iio a)t</ pinto (o|>en the
door).

To sprinkle from the mouth (as Mm/hni/a. .!/<<; //////A<77J, the j)lace of
Chinamen do clothes): also to such sprinkling, or the ol)ject so
bul)bk' up (as water frnm a foun- irealcd. Kx.: HhnU bny/nni mo
tain or spring I. nw; tiKii7>/n ihnnif (don't sprinkle

the clotlies from the inouth).
There is also an idiom: Bnghan mo
ixtlin dinnf b(nj() tmoKj dam it (treat
us on account of your new clothes);
'*uet down your new strijx^s."

To 1111; to make u{>. M'i(/f>n/io. AtKj imn/nt, the place of

lining, or making up. Ex.: ^f(lg-
jHiitn La naiifj lahiinj dalaird (make
up twelve [a tiozen] ). Pumin mo
(iiKj tnam/a tasd (fill the cups).
I'll /HI linn ko bona otx/ tnaiu/d ra.<of
(Shall 1 till the glasses?) M\ujpono.
with L'raxe accent, stress on next
to last syllable means to begin; t<>
govern; to head; to lead; to pre-
side. Maouirut, to go ahead or in
front.

To line. Mo'/sfii/m. J//r/ .svfy;////;^, the place of

lining, etc., also the imperative.
Aii'f i.^aptii, the material. tSap'm,
shoe or sandal. A'/f,s'a;>//^ a leaf
(of a book) or sheet (of paper).
S(ij/nis(ii)iii, many leaves, sheet«,
or loMs of lining.

To plant' to sow. M(i</taniiii (2) also to ])ear hate or

ianc<>r toward another. Ann torn-
mht, the place or manner of ])lant-
ing. \]\. : TiiKtinnnn ni Tinndi^a^Kj
LitiinidiKf hnhi'l nnmj ninkiini {im'i-
(jiiiiut) ( Thomas ])lanted his liekl
by machinery). As has been
noted bef«ire, l>esides a contrac-
tion, tliej-e is a transposition l>e-
tween // an(l )n with this definite.

To cover. Tiiiinikii>. Mnt/takif> (1) to cover

up; ( J ) to lish from many canoes,
getting the fish in between. Aug
t<d,i>''ni, what covered or tlie place.
'J'dkju'ii iini ling tnpagan (cover the

TAGALOG LANGUAGE,

143

IV. An is generally used to iuclicato the i>ers<)n affected by an action
with verbs \%hich require a j>er8on as the direct nl»ject.

To menace; to threaten. Ma<iln\}i). Amj jxtrfhaltKin, tlie per-

son menaced or threatened.
To frighten })y rujshing out from Jiunuihiga. Maghaluga^ to frigliten

hiding and shouting.

To diminish (of itf^elf ).

To give.

To trade or sell rice.

much. Aug hnlaghnt or ang Intla-
glutriy the i>erson thus frightened.
Kahahalnglmiig gawa, a marvelous
work. Kahnlnhalagu itojig gaining
i(6 (this [is] a most wonderful
work).

BumniKju. Magha\inHj to diminish
by out^si<le agency. Ang hnuimyi,
what diminished. Aug bnuasan,
the place (corresp. to 7tm). Attg
])(igff«n(tisnn, |>la<'e (corresp. to
mag), the ])erson to whom some-
thing is given thus. MahdWhs^ to
diminish (inan. action). Aug na-
')imuns, what taken from. Moka-
fnuHis, to cause trMliminish. Mag-
pdhnuas, to order or request to
diminish. Kx.: lUimiHan mo hjniig
ifidiTj/d tufKiinia (take something
out of thosL* jars). Mnghmms hi
■nang hci/ngn, re'duce the price.
Jliml'i iiuihitaHDi ko sd llimnig pi^os^
I ciin not let it fall Ik'Iow t*o.
Xdfxnins nn cdhj Itiimjin (the wind
has diminished now).

Mdghigag. A iig if'igdi/y the gift. A ng
Ihinigdi/, what was or has l)een
given. Ang higgihi, tlie person re-
ceiving a gilt. Ang hinigi/dn, the
person to wh(»m sometliing wasor
has been gi ven. Mdjtdglngdg, gen-
erous; liberal; indulgent. Mdnii-
gay, to give much; to lavish. Kx.
Ano dng ihinigdg iiiof ( What di<i
you give?) lUgj/dn nio dkn nang
kddnting itidkdkdi)), ^\\v me a little
refreshment [to eatj. Jtiggdu mo
dko ndng i(/og knn indi/rnoii (jzive
me some eggs if there ure any).
Si JntDi dug hinlgf/<riig ko (I gave it
to Juan ). -SV 'J)fnn'is dug hihiggdng
ko ( 1 will give it to Tom:is). Ang
ipduiigdg, what lavished. Ex.:
Ilthidniigdfi nli/t'i itoug hiltnt (he has
lavishe<l all this). I/iiinnnlnngd}/
ii'ild itiing Idlidt (theyari' lavishing
all this), l/idiniiiiitfdi/ n'nuio iionq
Jdhdtf (You will lavish all this?)

Mftghigns. A ngp'igftign.sini^ the seller
or dealer in rice. li/ong pi/dk
dug pin'if;hlgdstin nii/d (he made
that money selling: ( ti*a<ling ) rice).
Mdki/>igds, t<» ask for a little rice
(see j)article maki).

144

TAGALOa LANGUAGE.

To guard; watch; look out.

To charge against (as a debtor).

To dress one's self.

To <ieceive.

Magbantay. Also means to make a
bird siiare from bainlxK). Ma-
manifiy, to catch birds with a
**bantay." Ang immaitiay, -^hsX
caught. Ang binabantay or ang
^nnapngbabaniay, the person stana-
ing guard, watching or looking
out. Ang bnrdayan^ the sentry
box, post; watcii tower; look out
p'ace. Also Ang pagltantnyan.
Aug hintaydn ( 1 ), thing or person
guarded or watched; also impera-
tive without art. Ex.: Buntaynn
mo itong Ipohay il6 (watch this
house). BhianUiyAn ko ang cttar-
iel (I was on guard at the bar-
racks). Binnbantay6n niyd ang
cnarid (he is on guard at the bar-
racks). (2) arms or scales or
correctness of the balance. (3)
A banilxK) bed for sick persons
under which a fire may be made.
Magbantayan^ to make such a )>ed.
Ang bantayaninf the material; ang
}Hwtnya7iany theplaceof sucha be<i.

Magbintang. (2) To bear false tes-
timony against another. AngjHtg-
bintawjnn (1 ), the person charged;
(2) the person sworn against
falsely. Ang ipagbintangy what so
sworn, i. e., the testimony. Kx.:
( 1 ) Phtagbintaiigan akd nang mm-
ponong pUtos (I was charged up
with ten pesos). (2) l^nagb'm-
tniTgan niya ak6 (he bore false tes-
timony against me). Ang pagbi-
bhdangf the act of swearing falsely.
Angbintan(jan^angmab\ntangin,ang
mapagbintang, the person who ha-
bitually swears falsely; perjurer.

Duvinmit. Daramtin, clothes (pres.
tense). Ang damtdn^ the person
dressed or clothed. Magdarnitj to
dress or clothe another. Ang pag-
daramity the act of dressing (pres.
tense). MaaparamU, to cause or
order to be clothed. Ex.: Pti^niW'
titn mo ang vsilang damit (clothe
those who are without clothes).
Bakil hindt mo pinadaramtan ang
anak mof (Why don't you clothe
your chi Id? ) Sapagka* t unild akong
maibili nang damit { because I have
nothing to Imy clothes with).

Magdayh, Ang pagdayaariy the per-
son deceived. Ang pagdaraydj the
act of deceiving. Magparayd, to
j)ermit deception. Magparayd ka,
I)ermit the deception. Paraydj to
i'onsent or allow one's self to 1)6
decei ved. MaQdarayd,^ fraudulent ;
cheating (adj.).

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

145

To kiss.

To l)C sorry

To Hteal.

To listen to.

To teach.

To be charitable.

Humaiik. Aug haghhi, the j)orson
ki88ed. M(tghaUk\ to kiss each
other ((hial). Aug mawja piuag-
A<77^77n (the two wlio have ki^^ed
each other. ) J^ahalik, to request to
ki?H. Ex.: rahalik p6 kayd sa
knitidij (permit me to kisH your
hamj). (Sp. Q. B. S. M.)

Mnhbu'tyaiig (from snyangj idea of
sorrow ). .1 ngkiiKthinayinH/an, the
person for wliom sorry, or for what
reason sorrow is felt. l^x. : Kina-
hlhlimuaiTi/du ko niga (I feel sorrv
for liim — lit., he is the person 1
am sorry for.) M<ii>hiuiijfntig, to
he very sorry. Aug jxtulthia-
yaiujuti, the i>erson for whom felt, or
the cause of much sorrow. Mogpa-
h'nu'iyarig, to regret a loss of any
kind.

MagtKtkao. ^[ng phiagnakao, what
Avas or has l)een stolen, jing
inngiiow'tkdn, the thief. Ai)g pag-
nahnni)}, the person robbed. Ex. :
AV//0 aitg jn(igrniri<'ik(io/ ( Who is
the thief?) S'nu) ung pinugnakniion
muf { Who did you steal from?)

Pakinig. Aug jKtkingt'in, the person
listening;. Ex.: J'(tkh(gnn v'myo
(uig a rat (listen [ye] to what is
tauf.;ht).

Cini'iraL Ang nrdlaOj the person
tau<rht. Ang ianil, what taught —
i. e., the lesson, .ing iniarnl, what
was or has been taught. Aug
vitgmnantl, the teacher. .1 ngpiiga-
raly the act of teaching. Magaraf,
tostudy; to learn. Augpngdralan^
the Source of learning — i. e., the
teacher nr the book, etc. Ang
mngaral, what learned. Aug pa-
gtn'iral, the act of studying. (Note
that the "ait of teacldng" is ex-
pressed without reduj»hcation of
the initial s\ lable of the r«)ot.)
^1/y// is said to be from Sansk.
drhnni, eustom; habit; rule; V>y
Kern, t>ut Pardo de Tavera thinks
it d(»ubtful. AJ'w is Malay, "to
teach or to learn" from Javanese,
yl. «<'//, custom; habit; ismorelikely
to be from Sansk. <h-liarn. For
further mnditications of anil with
particles, see under man.

Mannn^ also compassionate; charit-
able (adj. 1. Mdnntihi: inojuig-
katinn^ a humane or charitalile per-
son. Ang ainnin, the reci|»ient of
comjiassion or charity. Ang />ng-
ktnnn), the act of charity or com-
passion. Kaauacm, (abst. ) charity,

6855—05 10

146 TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

compassion. Ex.: Kaauanmosiyd
(have charity [or com passion] /or
him). ^ri^Hnoauaari, what given
in charity or extended in compas-
sion. Ang Unnauudt the cause of
giving in charity or extending
compassion. Makaaud., to move to
compassion. MaffmcU:aniui, to he
able to move to compassion. (Aud,
is generally reduplicated. Ex.:
NagmamnkaaudauA, akd itongdukhd
(tliis poor [person] moves me to
compassion). A rig ipinagmama-
kcMudy the cause of being able to
move to compassion. Paand, to
ask for charitv; to plead or l)eg for
mercy, etc. Ex. : A'njHiaud «iy<i m
Akin (he begged me for mercy).
To hear (casually). Marhujig. l>umingig^ to hear pur-

posely. Ang niir'ingig, what heard
casually. Ang dingin, what heard
purposely, as conversation directed
to person. Ang dingdn, the per-
son listened to. An indicates per-
son, in the thing, with this verb
and the following one, also others
which will be seen in other places.
Makar'nTgig^ to be able to hear.
MagkarirTgig, to be deceiveil by the
hearing. Magpariiujigy to force
another to listen. Ex.: WdUiakong
dhJgifj (1 heard nothing); lit, **I
(was) without hearing.** NaritTgig
mo ang shiabi kof (Did you hear
what I told you? ) Hindi ko nariiupg
(Idid not hear); " I was not able to
hear." Xakadiringig kabagaf (Did
you hear?) Lit: **Are you hear-
mg?" Nagkaringdn akd (my hear-
ing deceived me).

(1) To untie; to loosen; (fig.) to set Kumalag. Ang kalgiyi, what untied
free; (2) to absolve. or looseneii. Ang X'a/^h), person

set at liberty or absolved. Arkg
kalagparTgaOj the jailor's fees in
former times, when set free.

V. In actions by which the subject tries to draw something to himself,
an stands for the i>erpon from whom that something is drawn.

To ask for; to request. JhunhTgt. MakaJnngU to obtain by

re<iuesting. Maklhingij to thank
for. Ang hitTginy what asked
for. Anghinhlgt, what was or has
been asked for. Ang hirTgdny the
person from whom asketi. Ex.:
Akd'y hmnitigt nang mangd bunga
\i/ nakahingi akd (I asked for some
fruit and got it for the asking).
Mapnghiugi, an importunate per-
son. See also tnngtnll, to sell;
kumuha^ to take; dumainOf to en-
treat; humdnapf to look for; and

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

147

tumangap, to accept or receive
which, among others, use these
same forms.

VI. Roots which express the ideas of coming or going, when verbal-
ized, take an for the person affected by tlie action, and i or ika {ihhia) for
the reason or time of such action. Ex. :

To <'ome here. Pnmarito. ParxtOy come here. Avg

ifniiaritOj the reason or time of
coming here (past tense). Also
(tng ikinaparifo. Atifj pimirltohai),
the person (or the place) who was
the object of the action. Kx.:
Ann (iittj ik'iiiaparito mo k(i ]\i-
si(/f ( Why did you come here to
Pasig?) Alhuj tx'tluuf nng phuiri-
tohan Dio/ (Which house did you
come to? ) ( Pnmarito has been dis-
cussed previously. Pamitroon fol-
lows the same rule ^n pnmarito and
has also been explained.)

VI. An is rare as an ending to the direct ol)jt-ct of a verb. Some verbs,
however, which would naturally take hi for the direct object substitute an
therefor on account of euphony, as the words are contracted.

To salt; (2) to make salt.

To pay for.

To noXk^'j to experience; to perceive.

To pierce.

To grasp; to hold.

Magan'in. Aug asm'in, what salted;
inat<nan, what was or has been
salted. Aug pal<i<(}<i)(<iii, the .«alt
pan; also the saltrellar. A tig
v'ignaf<iii, the person who eats salt
on rice or food. Makia^hi^ to ask
for a little salt.

Maghagaft. Aug hngaran, what
I)aid for; the ol>ligation. This
verb also has the idea of covering
up, and originally meant "to buy
or sell slaves." Kx.: Igong hagii-
r<tn <ing lUang mo (your obligation
is to j)ay your debt [pay what you
owe] ).

Magmnsid. Aug pagmaadan: avg
nutudnn (def. ); ang mimai<i<l (in-
def. ) what noted, etc. Magpa-
mnnid, to order to note. Aug
jKipagiiiasdan, the ])erson ordered
to nnte. Aug /fapagmasdin, what
ordered to be noted. }f(i/uigniniiid,
one who notes, perceives or ex-
perieiK'es a great deal.

Tiiin(d((ft. Aug Inhlhi, what pierci'd.
Tnnndahi^ also ''to be<*omedul]"
(as a knife). Mdgtolali, (1) to
pent't rate deeply; ("2) to dye with
the t(d<ift ro(>t. -1".'/ pagtahdtau,
what pierced deeply. Angtnhthin,
what dyed. Aug daUtb, the instru-
ment.

MfigtntH/nti. Aug taiTijnn or nng tawj-
(iiinii. what grasped or held. Ang

used to ^rasp or hold with. Syn.:
Maffltntink, wliirh means generally
to hold or grasp by two. Kx.:
M<i}j hanak alo lujnyoii (1 am busy
now [or to-day] ).

(1) To try; (21 to sample; (3) to Tiunikbn. Aruj tihiuw^ what sain-
understimd a j)erson well. pled. (Admits in combined with

pa.) Ex.: PiUlkmin v\o iTtja akn
DitoiK] (link (allow me to trv this
wine). Tiknt(t7i mo (taste it; sam-
ple it).

To look at; to vi<^w. Tvni'nTlnu, (2) Ma(/tit7<jiu, to look at

much or by many. M<igthT(jhuiUy
to look at each other. ifaf/iiiTfjin-
tiiTj/inini, to look at each otlier
elosely . A nfj tinhi(jhi^ what was or
has been looked at. A ugtinid/Tj/in,
what is being lo<»ked at. A rnj fiinj-
unii, what looked at; alone impera-
tive. A injjiitijihujmhi, what looked
at much or l)y many. Aug ifiiTgiu,
the cause or with what, i. e., the
eye. .1 ng ipog-{ i])inng)-tu7girt, the
cause of much looking or by many;
also the eyes of many, etc.

To learn. Magt'iral. Aug pagarahtn^ what \^

learned. Aug pagorahin, the
source of learning, i, e., the teacher
or l>ook, etc.

\MI. Some roots used witli in with lun, mag, etc., take <i)i when conju-
gated with Dingp'i.

To treat well; to pros])er. Mag/Kigafing. Ex.: <inVnTl)iin niosign,

(treat him [her] well).

\'1I1. An sometimes replaces the ])repositi<»n ya when the latter means
"to," as an imj)licsthat the sul»ject ])arts with souicthing, in the followiuij
exampU's. Ac<|uisition with thesameconstruciion ( "for" ) isexpressed bv /.
l']x. : IViiiiggan iii/''inko)iltonghigas { they gave me this rice) . A l.*:o ex pressed:
akn g (lug hinlggnn nlh'i uidmg higas. Jt will be clearly seen that the deti-
nite is a verbal noun. Sino haga <mg pHuagftilluhi n'tga nang igfmg rahiitfo
(to whoui hashesold [did hescll] your liorsc?) J^inaghilltan niga ang hiu'i-
gaiig kaihigan (bis purchaser was a frien<l of his). Also expressed: ^ing
kfiihig<in inga ang /)i/iaghi/Ji('fn )iigt'i.

W. An with certain noun orverbal roots indi<'ates ])lace. The first syl-
lable of the root is reduplicated fi>r roots aduiittiui; contraction or begin-
uinL' with /.

r»u\o-Ieal ( piper lu'tel I. Jtmn. limoltnn, buyo-leaf garden.

J^»aiiibot> (])anil»usa I. Ka'Ktgan. Koiiagduai/y bamboo

grove or thicket. Mag kanaganf
( I lave [you, or is there] any bam-
boo? 1 A''o//r;?/'f//a;/, tothrowliam-
boo weaj>ons at anotlier. Attg
k'lHagani/i, the object or person.
MaiTt/nnagdH, to cut bambo<^. Aug
]>ni7gauagan, the instrument, i. e.,
the bolo or hatchet, etc.

Cocoaiuit palm. ying. X'nigan, cocoanut grove.

K<tniijgaii, ]>lace of many cocoanut
palms. KaiHUnmg niog^ a single
tree. Kahoong niog, a cocoanut.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

149

Pasture; grazing place.

Banana. (MuFa par. and others,
l)oth the tree and fruit. )

2Sujj»r cane.

Stone; rock.

Water.

Xumioij, to throw a cocoanut at
another. Aug niogin, tlie person
or object thrown at. Ang iniog,
the nut thrown. Magviogai), to
throw cocoanuts at each other.
Tliere are many names for cocoa-
nut, according to its age and con-
dition.

SabsdlKUi. Ang sabsahiny the grass
eaten (no tense idea), or what
eaten as animals eat (by the
mouth). SuitKiIfsahj to graze, eat
(a> animals). Magf<ab,Htiby to eat
much. Magsimbsfib, to graze in
herds, flocks, etc. Pusabsab, to
allow to graze. Ex.: PaHibmb'm
mo Uong rdbogo; rung i<absabin
digan :<n ImrafHin (Let this horse
graze; there is grass there in the
yard). Sungmambna}) ang rabogo,
p6 (The horse is grazing, sir).
Pnnuig is a large j>asture. Sabm-
b(ui is more a grazing or eating
place for animals.

Sagiiig. SagiiTgnn, banana grove.
Kns<igirTg<niy large banana grove
or pUice where there are many
bananas. Magmging^ to eat l)a-
rianas.

Tubo. Tabohav, cane field. Tubo-
Immtn, sugar-cane land. Mngtubuy
to plant sugar cane. There is no
Tagalog name for sugar, osiUn/,
from Sp. nzncar, being used. The
^hilay uses xhaknr and gula^ the
latter from Sansk. guda.

Bain. Bdtohdn, <\uiirry. Kabaiolmn.,
l^Iare of stones; rocky ground.
MubaOntg bukid, a stony field.
Halo also means rice which does
not o|XMi when toa^^ted; and
kidney. Magbato, (I) to cut
stone; (2) to lay stone; (8) to
build out oi stone. Kx.: (1^)
Nagbtibnto .s/ ./(fan nung knnigdng
balidii (Juan in building his hou.^e
out <tl stone ). Miiginbatu, to turn
into stone. Kx.: Afig <isdiia vi
Lnth og ii'iginbdt'thg (i.vn (Lot's
wife bccanjc a pillar [rock] of
salt).

Tub'ig. Tnbigan, irrigatiMl Ian<l.
KfitK^'igan, place where water may
be bad. Maglnbig^ (1) to put
watt^r into auytbirig; (2) to water
an animal, etc. Mdiu'dtig^ to go for
water in a canoe or (tn an animal.
(To go fnr water with a j>itcln'r is
iiniigib \. A iig j'liiiiiblgan^ the J>la('e.
J'tfftnbig, to make water. Makiln-
big, to ask for water. .SV Juan ag

150

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

Church.
Cockpit

Head.

Foot.

Stern; last part.

Bow; first part

To make port (as a vessel).

To l)athe; to take a bath.

iiakikatubig m 6 kin (Juan asked
me to help him j?et water).
Patuhigin mo ak6 (Give me some
water). Tubig na hihilamonn,
wash water.

Simbahan. *9iimimW, to worship.

SaboiTgan. Samabong^ to fight (one
gamecock against another ). Mag-
sabongj to fight against each other;
also to play one against the other.
Aug ftittabongin, the game (cock-
fighting). Ang i'(ipag)-iiabong,
the gamecock (s). Palasabong,
cockfighter bv occupation.

Uln. UltMriy head of the bed; also
a large-headed person. Ufun6n,
the head place (pillow). Unan is
the word for pillow itself. Ex.:
Ihnulo ka rim (Put your head
here). Uluhin mo yan (Put your
head here towanl me). Uiuhdn
mo ito (Put your head on this).

Pad (from Sansk. 2>«rfa, foot). The
Knglish is also from the same
8ansk. word. The English paw
does not seem to be from Sansk.,
but to be of Teutonic origin, but
remotely may be the same. Paa-
Muy the foot of a bed; place of the
feet. Mag}WL&, to set the foot
down; to step in or on.

Ang hull. Ifumuli, (!) to steer; (2)
to remain behind purposely. Ma-
huUf to be left l>ehind. Ang hu-
lihdny the last or hinder part Ka-
hiUihdn, tardiness. Ang kahuHhu-
lihAny the very last. numuH is to
catch, etc. (note the difference in
accent).

Un6, Umiindy to lead. Houag kang
munA, do not go ahead. Ang nna-
hdiiy the fore part or place. Kau-
nafidn^ priority. Ujiaumif firstly.
Ang kaundunaJidnf the very first
Sa nnd, anciently. Sa und pang mi
wild, very anciently. Sa unang
draoy in the days of old. Mang-
um\, to precede; to guide (in per-
son ) ; to lead, as a guide.

Dumdong. Ang idmng, the vessel
put into port. Ang doongan^ the
place. JAilauigan is another name
for port. Mogkapaddong^ to make
port suddenly. Maddong^ to be in
port.

Paligd. Ang paliguan, the bathing
place. Ang ligoin; ang paligoin^
the water for bathing. Magligd;
magpaligdf to bathe another.
(See the phrases on p. 24 for use
of these words). Pambo is a rare
synonym.

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

151

To make a niiulhole under the house.
To wound.

To scraU'h orpcrapo thejjround with
the hands, claws, t'eet, etc.

To enter a room.

To he down; (2) to pro to he<l.

X. Verbs in whicli tho idea of ex
as an ending for the direct object, w

To place.

Mnijjm.^iiH. "The place,'* ang hi-
}tHsi\J'mn. J*asali(ni, "mudhoie.'*

Siunihftit. . 1 iif) ifUffatin, the wounded
I)ersori or animal, etc. Ang ihasn-
ffuJ, the cause. Aug sugatnn, the
])lace or what part wounded. Ex. :
Sinui<ng(ttan iiigt't so kamnij (he is
wounded in the arm [hand]).
There is no separate word for (inn
andA<///'/inTagaln^. liaraso, from
Sp. hnizo, is sometimes used. /Vf/f,
foot, is also a foreign w<»rd. Kus-
sian ha.s exactly the same peculiar-
ity, rnka meaning both hand and
arm, and naga both font and leg.
Miujm'igut^ to wound muclj ; )niikasa-
gnt, to cause to be woun«le<l. Sugtit
(note the accent) is another root,
with the i<lea of trailing at retail.
Stumignt, to buy at retail, or go to a
retail market. }f(ig>tiig(it, to sell at
retail. Ang mgotnn, the place, i.
e., the market. Tldiigi, aS]>anish-
Aztec word, is the usual name for
a market.

Kiiniotk'ot. Magkothtt, to make a
diU'h or trench. A))g kothodn, the
earth .scratched up, or (2) thrown
out of a <litch. Kx.: (2) k'inotkot
iinngiiKiiT'ga Aintthilo <iug ln/m nnng
knindff { thesoldiers threw the earth
out with their hands). Aug ikffl-
k'tt, the means, i. e., the hands,
<'laws, etc. Kx.: Ang bming ang
ikinntkot ndng inniTga smnhtlo nntig
Inpn ( with their hancls the soldiers
threw out the earth [or <lug the
trench] ). Ang kotkolun, the place.
K\.: Ifi'mng kini>tk<ttnn nang )nni7!gn
i<ntn1nhi{ this wiis wherethesoldiera
dug the trench). Pni7tfft(k(f(, the
instrument used for digging, as a
s]tad^", sh<>vel, etc.

Sntnlfi'l, from .s///"'/, a room. Ang
s'nlh'tn (c), the room entered (no
t^Mise idea). Ang s'laidli'in, the
room. MngaU'nh to put into a room
or to enter nuich. }fnsi/i<f, to be
in a room. Aug jxigxisid/nn, the
room entered mucli. Syn., Unnoh,
from /'>nh, within; inside.

Ifnmign. Ang hihignn (e ), the place;
the bed. }f(tliigi), t< ) be lying <u)wn,
or in bed. lv\.: >V//o kagt't gnong
naliiliif/n/ (who is that Iving down
there*.').

pulsion i^ iidierent do not admit of in
Inch is replace(l by ft)t, Itdii, etc.

Mnqlngng {/ root). Ang bihiggan,
♦ I.,.' .'-) I .. . ■/.■.'.. \".u..*

To sn\v {n^ rice, corn, etc. J

T«» use or make H»ap.

To tlirow awav.

To erect; to e^et np.

To j»ay a salary or wa^es.

soiaiers are leaving ine lown;.

Stnuahofj. A)i<f iinhoff^ what sown,
i. e., the grain. Any xafnnjnn^ the
place, the lield, rice paddy. Kx.
as verbs: Js''iho(j mo it 6 (s^ow thi.«).
lanhotj mo ito >a ^'forifj bukld (.*kjw
this in your tield). SdhiKjan mo
nito (uuj iffonfj huLid, or antj iffntn/
hi'iki'l, sdhiKjdu mo nUu, sanietran>-
lation as with /, except in the first
the emphasis; in on the act, and on
the i)lace in the second. Mttym-
l>o<j, to sow mnch. Anff ipaysa-
l»>ff, what sown thns. (See table*
for conjn<:ation of Hi'iitog. )

M(ttj}<nhoii , f n un Sf >. jahon, soap. Ex . :
Ai>6 (Dig .siiKisdho)} mof (what are'
you washing with soap?). S'llumdit
mo (iioj dainit (use soap with thes-
cl«)thcs). Wald akong sahon (L
have no soap). MUi la wuuj hi-
Ik'hi (buy some soa]>). It will be
sei'M that assimilated foreign words*
follow the sanie rules as native*
f)nes in all respects.

MfKjtfipoN. An(j It'i/ton, what thrown
away. Kx.: //<^//)o;< ?//o ?//> (throw
this away). Ifnpoi) mo it 6 sa tuhifj;
tnponon mo au<j tuttitf nit{); or awj
ti'ihiij (iitfj topojifui mo info (throw
this into the water [in order to get
rid of it]).

Md(ffof/n. Anfj ii pfi(f)t(n/6, what s>et
up thus. Aiif} jiwitoiiodUy the plaiv.
lv\.: [i] Ilotjo nil) itoncf im'nu/d ha-
//f//(sct these posts [pillars] up-
ri<:hth ItoiHj (oohdiKj itoy siyn
hnn) /KOftdtdi/ooH uatig akiny bdhay
(I am iToing to put up my house in
this yard ), T^imayo, to stand erect
(animate being). Kx.: Any .vid-
ilnlo fiinyiHdlifyo so harap nnny
kdfii'/diiy jmno (the soldier is
standi n;: [stands] erect in front of
[before] hisc(»mmander) . MatayA,
to be erect (inanimate object).
Any iiidi7i/i'i Ii'tliyi )idny dk nyhdhay
ndfaf((i/n (the posts (d HIV house
stand [are] u{)right). Matovid
also means nj>right, l)ut generally
in a moral sense.

Viini[fd. Any lnjKi, the wage or pay.
Any itinilidii, person paid or what
paid for, as a rente<^l house, etc.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 158

Aug pagupahan, the place. Ex.:
M(tijkauo aug paginipahan s<i Ma-
ffiiilnf (how much is being paid
in Manila?).

XI. With some nouns denoting ])arts of the body an expresseH personal
adjectives with an idea of augmentation.

Shoulder. Baltknt. IkiUkatan, broad-shoul-

dered. Ex., verbalized: Balikafm
mo itoiig kanngmi (carry this bam-
boo on your shoulder), hftba/ikat
mo (tnng pang6 (spread this hand-
kercliief over your shoulders).
Balikntfin nfo nii/i'i (catch him by
the shoulders).

Mouth. Bihig. Bihigan, large-mouthed, also

gn-at or reckless talker. Ex.: Bi-
naghlhignii nhja ako (he talked a lot
about me).

Nose. /long. Jlongan, large-no.«ed.

For places expressed with pag — nn and kn — on, see wndtT pag and ka.

CONSTUCiTION.

XII. With a« the direct object takes the accusative and the agent the
^nitive. Ex. : Hinahagknn nang aiiak (agt. ) ang kanigang ind (dir. object)
(the child is kissing his [her] mother). Lit., *' Is being kissed by the child
the his [her] mother." Ttikitran mo igang kdhog (prop up that tree). Lit.,
** I>et be proppe<l up by you that tree."

XIII. If an indirect object expressing i>lace is included in a sentence,
however, it takes the accusative case, and the direct object the genitive or
other oblique case, the agent remaining in the genitive, as explained in the
preceding paragraph. Ex.: Tuintamm'ui ni aind iKiiig sdrisnring knhog arig
halamanan (Father is planting different kin<ls of trees in the orchanl [j;ar-
den]) — lit., "The garden (ace.) is being planted with different kinds
(ahl. ) of trees (gen. ) by father (ins.)." J*in<ighan(f/jaii »<o frngn tm rtthngo
itOTtg daring itof (I)i<l vou look for the horse on this road?) — lit., " Was-
looking-place your perhaps (gen.) for horse (<lat. ) this road? (nom. as
trans., game form as ace. )."

XIV. If an is used modifying a place or person in which t<t, for, from,
hy^ on, in, etc., precedes the place or person when translated into English,
the place or persr)n shouM be ex)«ressed. In these eases the agent, as usual,
takes the genitive an<l tlie direct object tlie aciM>ative. The indirect object
may either precede or f(»llow the verb, except interrogative pronouns or
adverbs of place, which always i)re<ede. The person or i»lace is empha-
sized by being placed before the verb in the sentence. Ex.: Jyinuhtt niga
<ing dking sulat (He wrote my letter iar me) — lit., ''Was written by him
(her) the my letter." Sinnsnhittjn ko Kong paprl (I am writing on this
paper) — lit., "Is-the-writing-place my this ])aj)er. " I'of/susnldldu ko Hong
papelito (I will write on this paper). Same construction as foregoinyr,
^ith future tense; Sino nng jnnnglnllinn mo ni(<»ng rolmgo* (To whom
have you sol<l this horse?) — lit., "Who (was) the i>urehaser your of this
horse?" Ang anak naitg kapiiVx'thag ko (To the son ot" my neighbor) " The
eon of the neighbor my."

THE INDEFINITK IWKTICI.K "iM."

I. f/m is called the first verbalizing particle by the Spanish writers on

Tagalog, and is generally used to verbalize roots wIhmi the action is j)rimary

or expressed as the act of the subject without special reference to the object.

Ifin also has the idea of action toward another j»erson. Some ro(»ts <liffer

radically in their meaning with mn and mag, or rather in opposite ways
from a neutral point. With other roots )nfi(/ expresses intensity of what is
exi»ressed {)ritnarily with ym. Ijh, which is found in the so-called indefi-
nite, chancres to tiiHjm in the i)ast and present tenses, and drops out in the
future tense. There are also plu])erfect and future perfect tenses, but they
are iK>t generally used. For the conjugation of a root witli uni see the
tables. There are some irregularities with some roots which are noted in
the ))roper ])lace. In the mechanical structures of the language um is jtre-
fixed to roots beginning with a vowel and infixed between the lirst letter
and the following v<»wel of a consonant root.

II. The ])hilologist Keane gaveU. \V. Parker, author of the (irammar
of the ^htlagasy Languages (London, iss:>), the following information as to
the use and origin of infixes, which ap|»lies to Tagalog as well:

"The inli.x syllable om {um, am, oni) is a feature which Malagasy has in
common with Khmer (Cambojan), Javanese, ^bday, Tagala (sic) (^Philip-
pine Archipelago), ami no <loubt other members of tlie Malayo-Polynesian
family.

"Khnu'r: >S'A/y/, dead; amnla)), to kill. Javanese: Ifuruh, flame; Jtnjini-
ruf), to inflame. Malay: J*i/ih, to choose; jxunilihan, choice. Tagala:
Basil ^ to read (idea of readiuir); humaxt, to make use of reading (to read).

"Originally a prefix, as it still is in Samoan (Kx.: ^folo, unripe; momoto,
to die young I, this j)arti<;le seems to have w<»rked its way into the bodv(»f
the word by a j>r« "(M'ss ot metathesis analogous to the transposition connnon
to most languages (compare Anglo-Snxnii thrit/thi witli third)."

III. As has been stated, vni is generally used to exj>ress the simple un-
ie(!iprocat«Ml act of the agent, either toward himself or others, provided the
action is not modified l»y eoticiitions of time (not tense), n»anner, instru-
ment, nund)er ( ]>lurality ), or otherwise carried away from its simplest
sense. Manv roots admit both mn and luaf/ with little difference in mean-
ing, and hence it is (tften diflicult to decide upon a choice l>etween them,
but it is generally sale to use inn. Again, many root* differ widely with
the \\\i> particli's. ('/// refers more to sul)ject and his action, nuifj to the
object and the acti(ni of tlie verb uj)on it.

Cl,A.s?lK..S OF "CM" ROOTS.

F<tr convenience of reference the roots conjugated V)y nni have been ar-
rage<l into numlu-red |»aragraphs, those following the regular conjugation
beirjggivrn in Par, I-X\'II, and those having irregularities coming under
Par. X\*I1I-X\'I. Diminutives are treated in Par. XXJI.

I. Ko<its which denote (jualities cai>able r>f being slow ly assimilated by
the agent form the first class. There are some a<l verbs which are verbal-
ized by nrn in •■ertain cases.

To grow dark. Diimilun. Magd'iUm, to grow very

dark. Amj ilHiman, what is ob-
srnred by darkness. ( Ang d'd'unan,
the osier with which fish corraKs
are tie<l. DUininn is also the name
of a village near Manila). Ex.
with nut: rhtngnivlilun ang gahi
(The night is growing dark). Ang
pagdiiiiliin nang arao, the eclipse
of the sun. yfodi/u)), to ))e over-
taken by darkness; al.'^oadj. dark,
obscure, Kx.: yndiUnam kami
(ex el.) s<i <Jaan (We were over-
taken by darkness on the road).
Mad, Tint ,1(1 lit is dark already).
Madil'nn pa ( It is dark yet). }fan-
(I Hint, to travel indarknesH. Ex.:
JIoiKig ipandilim iynng cabayo (Do

TAGALOG LANGUAGK.

155

To grow up; to )>ecome large, etc.

To jjrow cool or cold (as food or
drink).

not travel in the dark with that
horse). }fak(i(iilirn, to become
dark ( not limited to a slow process,
as with (U)i.) Tuydiltm, time or
season of darkness. Twiliglit,
t({Lij)silijn.

JjUiiidki. Kx.: Lumjmdki akn mi
}[u>in'ih\ (1 grew up in Manila).
M'nj,'<ikij toincreiu^e; tomake some-
thing larger. Anfj Irdhi'ni, what
made larger. Aixj ungJalal't, the
agent. Mukaldki, to cause or to be
able to grow larger. Amj ihihtLi,
tlie canst'. Anf/ jxik'thiLilun, what
la to l)e made larger. Kalnkln'tn^
(al>s. ) size. Amj kalakHnkihitn,
the very largest. Mapakaltili, to
grow greatly; or too large. ^f^l'J-
]Kil(ikiy to rear (as a cluld) ; to edu-
cate. Kx.: Si no (HHj fHftjfHijKtkik't
xa iffo/ ( Wlio reared yon?) A)i'j
uk'inn mufo'y aif/ang n'l^jmldki ^a
akin (My grandparent wa.s the one
who reared me). Mahtkl (a<ij.),
big; large.

Lnnnnnif/. Kx.: LnloDilg <int/ sn
(Tbe tea will becon)e cold). Aug
iKtkdItunIt/ (indef. ), "mj ikalaniig
(del.), tbe cause. Mfujhtinbj, to
cool anything. Ang l(nnl(/nn, what
cooled. AiHj pdkahiinigin, what
put to Cool. Magpdldinigy to jnit
out to cool. Malnntig (a<lj.), coM:
(tig. ) Mo/nmlg nd ha)ita odhi looh,
cold-hearted.

Puinnfi. Kx.: Pungnmjtnii <ntg hn-
Inklnk (The flower is growing
white). Angpnt'in, what bleached.
Magputf, to whiten anything. Avg
ipnti, the means or the whitening
mateiial. Aitg pntmn, wliat whit-
ened, as the wall, etc. Ang jMig-
ka/ntfin, what whitt'iied greatly.
Ang knpnt'nni nang it/ng, the white
of the ii^^. KapntifiHj whiteness
(abs.).^

Lumuhhd, from lnf,hd, very (adverb).
Kx.: Attn ang lagag nang aii\a mof
(How is your father?) Lang'
nmlnhfni ang kanigang Mikit (His
illness is increasing). Xa/nlnbhd
nn sign ( 1 le is near death's door) —
lit. " Heis exceedinglv ill." Mat/-
Inhhd. to increase nnich: (tig.) to
be impndent. \(igh(/n/,}ni ka sa
i'lkin (You are too forward with
nu'i yon an^ impn<lent to me).

II. f^ is used to indicate intentional ads of destruction, damage, etc.,
by the afjency of an animate being. If <au.sed by an inaniniatt; agency,
such destruction or damage is expiessed by tnaka [naka). Kx.: Amj lin-

Togrow white; to ))leach out.

To increa.se, etc.

<lol HI/ ntiLnsiri) sn hahaij (the earthquake destroyed the house). Examples
ill this chi.ss with am :

To kill; (2) to extinguish; to put Puinatny. Kx.: Ako haga anff impa-
oui (aHalij^ht). /'/// itmuj Uaof (.Shall 1 put this

li^ht out? {Hindi, ako iTija arnj
jKifxitoy (no, 1 will put it out my-
fielf).

To destroy. Sumirn. .l>ir/,si /•«??<, what destroyed.

Kx. : J an an(f ."oniffmirfi mmg inaiTljd
hahnndii/ (What has dejjtroyed
the i»lants?) Aug itiaiTija bahtnrj
aiitj s'nidhij Inufjiidjutl linnff bilutt
(the locusts have wiped outevery-
thiii«:). ( Ltuiiiftol, to devastate;
extemiinaie; wipe out; lay wastn;
destroN ). AiK/ isim, the eanse of
destrncti(»n. Mmjaira, to destroy
much. AiKj jxigslrdin, what tlius
destroved. Kx.: Pinof/sird lunni

(the j»i^'s have destroyed these
jdants jjreatly). Mnr<niii}ig hila-
innit dug pi)nig.sisird nih'i (many
plants are heing de.«troyed [hy
them]; or they are doing mueh
damage to the plants). Masira,
to l)e di'str(»yed; to spoil. Sira^
sp<»iled. Sird nn dug matdinis (the
preserves are sjioiled already).
Mdhd.sin), to cause U> <lestroy.
MdL-dsisin), destructive. Arig ik<t-
sirt), the cause of siM)i]ing (dug
iLiidisisiid, j>rcsent tense). Md-
nifd, to <lestroy irreparably; eoin-
jdetel v; or ( 2 ) hv manv. (Idiom. )
Mddirdug }diri, to destroy the
honor of another; to dishonor.
MdgLd.^udsii'd, to be destroyed
comph'tely. Kx.: Aug jfindgkdka-
sirdsirduii lididj nidtTgd fntgd^f ajuj
l>(igfnil,dhd (war destroys towns
[fi^'. , countries] completely).
To si't liri' to. Sii nn'inog. Sinn hdgd dug sdngituhiog

ni/nng hdhin/ ud itnf ( Who burne<l
this house?) Atiu'ddii dk'\ po (I
don't know, sir). Ang ainduog
{ what was or has been set fire to).
Mdij-^'hing, to burn up (intention-
jdly I. Aug pindgndnog, what
burned uj) thus. Masihiog, to burn
up; to be burned. Kx.: \dgsdiiog
s'liji'i ang dining hdhdg (he burned
oni* house). \d,*(i'niog ang dining
hdhdg (our house burned down).
yi<if:>isi'iii<i'i, \i\ cause to s<*t fire to;
al>o to be burned, as from another
hou-e, etc. Mngkdsnnng, to suffer
( many ) from a conflagration. *S«-
iio.j, con(hc._'ratiou (note aecent).

111. .\s a L'cneral rule, mn verbs have a corre-^pouding definite with in.
The rever.-e is not always triw. as the acts of causing emotion in others,

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

157

expressed by in with definite gentence^, take the indefinite with ma {na).
Certain other roots used with magim {niujpa) in the indefinite take the
definite in an. These will be noticed in tlie proper places.

IV. ('m, with roots denoting weapons, tools, and instruments, expresses
the use of such objects.

Dag5?er. Iwa. Umiu;(i, to sUib, Anrj uman,

the person stabbed. Mnffltra, to
wear a da^^er. MntTj/iira^ to use
a da^jrer on one's self. Mar^/Ki-
jKiiTljiua, to wound each other with
dag^rers (as in a iiielce).

Spear. SUmt (syn., tandos). tSinnibat, to

spear or to throw a spear. Ang
>'iUi(i)i, the object. An(j isihat, the
spear thrown. Maf/aihaf, to carry
a si)ear. .1 ngp(u/sih<Uan, the place.

A<lze. Ihirns. I)inmints, to use an adze.

Aii'j juindanU, theadzeit.self. Amj
inandninmA, the user. Ex. : Dura-
sin mo i(6 (plane this off).
(fimlinfj. (itnnviding^ to cut with
scissors; to shear. Amj (funtiiTjflnj
what cut off. Aii(f(fH)iiiiT(/(tn, from
what. Mdijnnlim/, to use the scis-
sors nn one's hair, etc. Moffujjit
is the better word for this la.«t.

Plane. Kotnm. A'v////o^//>;, to plane. Mniuj-

aiTfjaimn, planer.

L)niin. (iiinhnl. (t'n)ninihn/,U} drum. Mnn-

g'nj'nnhal, drnniuicr.

V. Vin is us^eil with roots denoting postures to expre>^s such postures or
jK^sitions when taken voluntarily.

To stand up; to go to the defen.se of Tnin'mdlg. Angtindignn, the person
another; (3) to go to get married. before whom standing; the place

Sci.ssors.

•i\ fi^.

W/ .*«(.! tl

♦ .,

)w

» > » O »* »• 1 rf^t

J

T<» kriet'l.

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

159

To lean upon; to recline.

To lie down.

To lie face downward.

To prostrate one's self.

Tu lie on the side (action); to place
one's self on one's side.

To lie on the back (action); to place
one's self on the back.

To crouch on hands and feet (not

bending knees).
To sit down; to take a seat.

HiLin'dUj. Aug ih'dUj, what part of
the body leaned upon. Ang hili-
gan, the place; couch, etc. (//«-
iniligis ' * to weave. ' ' Note accent. )

Humiga. (Previously explained in
detail. )

T\im(iob. Magiiwl)^ to place another
face downward.

DuDinpd. Mariifxiy to fall j)rostrate
(accidentally).

Tumngi/id. Magtag'did, to be lying
on t he side ( state ) . A ng jtatagUui,
the ]X)sition of lying on the side.
(ill id is side; also entrance to a
house.

Tuinilntya. M<tti}tayd.y to be lying on
the V)ack (stiite). Ex.: Bahit ka
ixitidhngd/ ( Why are you lying on
your back?) }lap(ililmy(i^ to fall
on the back. Aytg fxitlhayd, the
position of being on the back.

Tainnnd. M<igfKttuady to stand on
all four feet (as an animal).

Vintifnj (one). Mdgnpo (more).
Manf,(\ to be seated (state). Aug
jKiujfo, the sitting position. Ex.:
ftiVy gaga II 'in imnig n(Uig panp6
(This will have to be done bv vou
while sitting down).

Miiglilnin. Ang fikmoan, the resting
plaee.

VI. rm is used to expre.^^s voluntarily or involuntarily (but consciously)
performed life-supporting actions and organic functions of the body, except
SH)ine which are UJ^ed with niag, an<l a few with innn. Some actions of
inanimate objects also follow this rule.

To eat. KuiiKun. ( Partly explained l)efore; )

Magkmiiy to cat much ; or by many.
Miigkanikit'ninn^ to nibble (dim. }.
Ex.: y<igk'ik(iiiik<iiiiau tfiydj he is
nil»bling (pretending to eat).
MdiTj/nli), to eat continually; to de-
vour. J/r///(//^ edible (adj. ). M'l-
knk'tiii, able to be eaten. Magjut-
kdiii, to give food to another i)erson
or animal. Aug jkU.<ihIii, who or
what led. ^ing ipakd'ui, the food
given. Ang jmhin'unin, the ])la('e.
Ex.: PnfKik'ii)i kit kny Jiutn (ask
.1 ua n t o gi vi' y < )U s< »met 1 1 i ng t< > eat ) .
TfKipnkdiu nil) sa ^^ rm-lmrn^^ itmig
hall) (Ti'll the cook togive this boy
(child) something to cat). />nklt
hiiidi nui I'l'iKik'ikiiiii ilmig inaiTijn
ti'in(tf{ W'liyarcn't \ (Mifccdingthcse
jicoplc. ) Piikiniin ittn iTi/ii sih'i, feed
them. .!//«'; ting ipunikdkiiiii inu sa
kdiiih't.^ (What are you giving
tliem [to eat J?) Phuikdiii ko Kiln
)iinig kfniiii,fin. (I liavegiven them

To sit down to rest (briefly).

^ /' 4 • I k / •

T(i swallow food.

To swallow ]»lts or seeds of fruit.

To drink.

To swallow li»inids.

(1>.)
To show tlu" tiMili: to ^rin.

To smile bashfully.

To lau«rh (voluntarily).

To sol).

To slu'd tears: to erv (inictlv

w 1 •

To weep.
To snore.

LmHdiiiou. (Already explained.)
Lwimnok. AiKj fnnok'ln, what swal-
lowed.
Viithunn. Md'jimun, to drink much
or ])V many. (Tartly explaine<i
before.) Autj j)iiHiununy who or
wliat^ivenadrink. A tiff ipniiiuin,
the drink given. J\ilalnutn, ha-
l>itual drinker. Univnun has an
irre^rular form of conjugation like

Lnmarjok. Kalagok, a swallow. Ka-
kdh.KjttJ:, only one swallow.

J\(j(iitn.ii. A\so mo giTt/Isi and wjlniji-
siiTt/isi. AiKj iwjiM or an<j ijm-
iT'i'tsl^ the cau.^e of nhowing the
teeth, or the moutli and teeth.
Ait[i iTtjiiiiiTi/i.'tihn}!^ the |>er9on or
animal the teeth sliown to. Syn.,

y(/iiunsiTt/li<. The wild hog is called

y<jisi when the tu.sks begin toshow.

yijuiiuVi. AnglmjUt, thesniile or the
mouth. .1/77/ )Ti/itian, the person
or object smiled at thus.

TiiiiKnid. Magtiuui^ to laugh much,
or 1 )y a f e w . Mn iTfjnfjta ua, to laugh
(by many), Tatana imng UUnud,
to lauirh and laugh over again.
MagldHdHdii, to laugh at each
other. Aii(/t(Hi(ui(in, what laughed
at by one or a few. Aug juigtau-
tinaii, w hat laughed at by many.
Aug ildU'i^ the cause (one or few).
Aug ijmgfdiKt, the cause of many
laughing. Mdldna^ to laugh inyof-
nntarily; to giggle. JidLit hi Hd-
tdtdudf [ W by are you giggling 80?)
Mdkfitdiid (»r 7ndgp<itdtta, to cause
laughter. Ai/g Idtaud, the com-
panion in laughter. MatdUiunny
laughing person.

]liiniil"k. .M.so hihikhibik. Avg

ihihik or dug ikd/iihik, tlie c-ause.

A variation is /nunimbik or hitnhik-

fiiin/'ik.
f.inniihd. Aug hdgluhihd, the eveS

shedding tears. Aug i/uhd, the

tears. ^\iig /innhfhdd)*, the }">er8on

before whom tears are shed, etc.

M'lgkn/nhd, to shed tears iincon-

s«'i<»usly. J.nngnidldgoalos ang luhd^

the tears are trickling.
'riiinniTgh. (Already explaine<l.)
Iluii'ilik. Aug hilik, the snorer.

Also I/inn'ikdh, var, lunnigab.

These last wonls ab^^o mean "to

yawn." Mdghi/ik, to snore much.

Aug pdgliilik, the great snorer.

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

161

To spit; to expectorate.

To bite.

To wratfh another.

To blow the nose.
To sneeze.

To make water (vohintarily).

To stool.

To drip; to nin throujjh a pipe {aa

water and other liquids).
To trickle; to run in a small stream.

AUo mac/hikab. Ex.: Naghihikah
anfj mnkdkutulog (the 8leei>er is
snorinj^ a proat deal ). Ifihikahhi-
knhy to breathe with great diffi-
culty, as a <lying man.

Lninvrd. To perform the same ac-t
an a sign of disgust at anyone, inan-
huii. J.ithtnhtj s])ittoon; cu.spi-
dor.

KiuiKiijat. (Already explained.)

KmiinnnA. Magh'unotj to scratch
one's self. A tig pcDu/amoty the
scratcher (instrument).

SumtTi/o,

Ihimnhhi. Pahihahui or mapanbn-
hui, a person who snt'czes much.

Cmihi. Paiiuhig is a more ])olite
term.

Tinittw. Snan aiig kutnoii? (Where
is the water-closet?)

Tnmulo.

Ltiuiagtmlos. (Idiom)

VII. Roots which express objects which may be j>roduced by slow seH-
s?ustaining processes generally take vui to indicate the process, although
•^ome important ones take 7/K/// ((|. v.), the latter usually commencing with 6.

T'o come up, to grow up (as plants);
to bear (to give birth to), as ani-
mals. Manganak is *'to bear a
child."

1o put forth shoots.

Tuinnhd. T'llntnti^ j)lant already
sprouted (usually applied to cocoa
]>alm). Mngtvhi\ to gain; to win.
Kdtutubby of the same age; born
at the same time (no relationship
idea). }[agp(ihtbo, to invest; to
l»ut out at interest. Ex.: fyttkit
hinfJl mo stiija jniKini'itnng unhg 80-
ln])lf (Why don't you lend him
some mom-yV) S<t jmgld't iniM^
at ling ak'nig sahipl a-/ pinntuboan
ko ( Uc<anse 1 have n^>ne [to lend],
and my money has been invested).
Sa limnng jiiso mi i uniting k<> kny
.hum, fi'i ])innfiit!ihd ak/i nif/d ita
isnng stihipl (for liv(^ ])esos which
I have borrowed from Juan he is
now asking u\v. a half peso as in-
terest ) . J no/ ( W hat? ) Jsang sa-
id /n (ing ipinah'tiiho nl Juan sa
a king .v/ /inning pi.^tt na Inntang ko
an hnnifd ( A half peso is the inter-
cut asked me by Juan on live pes(»s
which 1 borrowed from him).
Kx.: "Tocomeup." Tnngnndnbo
fintfi'i lUKi nniiT'id sifi/ (Are the
jx-jipcs [chiles] coming up?)

tSuniilxfl. Snngniisibtjl mi (unj maiTtjd
fi'i/aman sa haja)nanany the plants
in the ganh'u are already ])Uttin<j
out shoots, el) Also applied to
the growth of the beard and other
actions of like nature. Ma)<ibol, to

6855—05 1 1

well out, as water from a well or

sprinjr. Anq sUxjIan^ the months

during which the rice sprouts, etc.

To bud. Vmiuiboinj^irovi\uiiboug,\)\i<i. Matjus-

bonw, to have buds. Syn. jUshi'ts and
ufjhus. Uinuffln'iSj to bud, to sprout.
Ex. with Uithijurj: L'n(jinmu<bowj na
(lufj inntTlf'i kahof/ (the trees are
l>iiddin^ uut now).
To .«prout (esi><-cially of tul>ers, like Su)n>'(/o/, from sulolj a sprout.

the (/(ibi and the niniott ).
To sprout ( Jt< Slickers Irnm the trunk Snump/in'j. Anfj »upUwjany the tree.
of or at tlie f<»<)t (jf a tree).

VJII. I'm exjiresses (1) meteorological pheuomena, provided the root
does n<»t commence witli b; and (2) astronomical transitions, if the change
is represente<l hj^ occurriuir and the phenomena are not otherwise expressed.
Kx. f 1 I :

To rain; to In- raining. I'limi'm. Vniulanub'in^ to drizzle.

Matfiibhi, to sow seed or to do anv-
thing in the rainy season. Aug
t<i'/iib'iu, the raiiiv season. Pana-
fjub'iu, land wliich is planted in
the rainy season. Ang t//«///, the
rain. Maidtm, to have many rains;
also to l>e caught in the rain. Ex.:
Xdf/bib'iLdfl huni'y iiauUnmn (We
were walking along and were
caught in the rain ).

To blow: to be blowing; to be windy. JfninaiTifin (from ItaiTj/iny wind).

Mii(j}ia,T,j'(n, to blow continuously
or much. M'Hfpfibai7(jin, to wait
until the wind changes; also to
put anything out in the wind.
Md'liniJiuiTijhi, to i»lace one's self
where the wind is blowing. (Note
accent. )

To li^diteii: to ln' li-jhtcning. Km/ii'Ib'f (from hidbit, a flash of

lightning). Maghidbif, to lighten
much. () Id form, /■<>/<//. 8yn.,A<7a/
( rare) .

To 1m' >irn<-k b\ liirhlnin^'. Lnininti/: ( Irom Until:. The "thun-

derbolt."}

To thunder. Kuumbuj. Magkuhg, to thunder a

Kx.

great deal.

To<la\\n. I'liidiia (from (ir/(^ morning). (2) to

rise early. Magdgd, to rise early
(many ), as a regiment, etc. ; (3) to
eat early. Amj ar/ann, what eaten
thus, i. e., the breakfast. J\taod.
to come early. Xaa(f<\ W///», he
cauM' early. Aug ijxfoga, what is
to \n' done early.

To sliin<; t as the suiv : to i>e sunny ('iih'irno i from arno. (1) Sun; (2)
\- i to grow light. day; (.J) weather.) J/ir/(/arao, to be

\er\- sunnv. Maarao, t»> be over-
heated l)y tlie sun. llouag kang
inalis in;'i;/n g inaanrauihi kaU maii'
iiitdn (l)on't go out now, because
the sun will be out and you will

TAG A LOO LANOUAOE.

163

Tu become late.

To btHXiuie night; to do anything
at night; to be overtaken by night.

To grow dark.

To grow cloudy; dark.

To grow dark; to become twilight.

To eclipse (lit. "to l>e dragoned"

get overheated ) . Manqa raoy to use
dailv. Aug pfnTijdraoiraOf what is
used daily or something for daily
use. MmjjMu'inu)^ to wait until the
Hun shines; (2) to wait for day;
(3) t() sun one's self; (4) to put an
object in the sunshine. Ex.: (3)
lhma(j hiiKj nuKjpaarao (Do not
sun yourself). (4) Magpadrao ka
nung dam it (Sun the clothes).
Magpakndrao^ to continue at a
thing until daylight. Ex.: Nag-
pakadrao si gong mngdral (He
studied until dayliglit).

Huinnpon (from Itapon^ the time be-
tween noon and dark; afternoon
(Northern United .States); even-
ing (Southern United States).
(2) To go to roost, as chickens.
Mtighnpoii, all day. Kahapim^
yesterday. A', nnnif umagiiy yes-
terday morning. A. nang hnpoitj
yesterday afternoon (evening).
A'. s<i gain, last night. Mama gang
hapoUy later in the afternoon
(evening^l. Maltapon, to eat sup-
j»er, Ang haponan^ the meal.
Manighapon (from tighapon)^ to
do something in the afternoon or
evening (generally applied to
l(M»king after plants, etc, ),

(ii(mnhi (from gahl)^ night. Ex.:
Magmadall ka't gagahihln sa gubat
(Make haste or you will be over-
taken by night in the timber).
Nagahihan sigd sa ddan (Night
overtook him on the road). Mag-
])akagahi, to continue at a thing
until night. Ex.: Xagpakagahl
i<ilnng magdral (They studie<l until
night).

Dam Hi til. (Already explaineil.)

Lnmimlim (from limlim). Midimliniy
t(j be cloudy, etc. Lumitnlim also
means to cluck, as a hen when
she lays an egg. Ang Unilimliman,
the egg laid. Magpaliminn, to set

Sam'dim. Ex.: P<i.'<ilimiii (<i muna bago
Inmdkad (Let us wait for dusk be-
fore we march ). Lit. "Walk on".
(2) To )>enetrate (as the cold).
{'!) Siiiis't/im ak') nmig hiniig (I am
chilled through by the cold).

LiniKtfin. fjiimniiaii, "((►swallow,"

104 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

to eat the sun and mcx^n from
time to time.
To rise; to shine out. StnuUnng. Sung^nHhmg nn amj nrno

(Tlie sun has already n.^^en ) . »SW/-

hiiKj (tmj hoiiai}ij inadalt (The moi.n

will rise quickly). Suntjitilxittut^j

ffiKj maiTtjd hitnin (the stars are

?hmin^). Ahtj sihuujnn, the Ea-^^t.

Amj siniIniT(/ai}^ what was lit U|>

by the ri.se of the sun or the

moon, or the Bhining out of the

stars. M(ui)m.^Uait<j, to wait until

one of al>ove-mentioned Ijodien

rise. Kx.: li'iLif hindi mo pinrnfin't-

I'UHf liiniKt ovij I'rnof [ Why don't

you wait until sunrisie? ) Pm^iJninjin

t(i nnma antj itraa ( Li't us wait until

the .<un rises).

To eonie out; to rise; as tho sun. SmnU.nt. Kx.: (1) Sif<ikat nn uufj

moon, or stars. (2) To till up <'nvf/> {/>o//(///) (tlie sun [moon] will

with ])e(H»le; as a cliurrh. house. rise soon). (2) Summkat ina^iM-

etc. k<(t<iii) (nuj hi'ihat/ nana (I'luo (The

house is filling [lilled] with {.)eo-

ple). Mitgpns'ihnt^ to wait until

rising: of sun, moon, etc., takes

]»laee. Ex.: PasihitiyDuo atu/nrao

{ Wait until the sun rises).

To set (as the sun); primary mean- Luimhimf. Jz/y //a////to/vr/^ the West;

in;;, "to«lrow^n." Applieation a> lit. "the drowning place." Ex.:

to sun from fact that su!i st-ts in /.'///^///////rK^ <n*</(;rr/<> (Thesun has

the sea to Tagaloj^s. set). LiLinjnnib'tmxiiUKjti'iuo (The

man is drownin«r himself). Mab't-

no'l, to be drowned. With nm

volition may be un<lerstood, and

with iiKi accident.

To dive; to j)luni:e into; to y:n to the Luiiu'ihtKj, Lnm/ihotj nnr; amo (The

bottom. (L'l Toset. lit. *-t.)divc," sun basset). Eit.'"dived.'' Mmj-

as tlu' sun. I 'il»ni^ to )>lun^e another «>r an ol)-

ject under the water.

1 .\. I'm is ns('<l u ith rn<>t> w lun attraction towai'ii thea.irent isexpresstnl,
or when the aL'int Lrains cnijtiMl nf somethinir. 'J'he o|»posite idea of los-
in-r ( "UtrMl. rtc, is sonietimrs »xpres>cd with the sanie root, and in other
(•as»*s with (lil'fcrent r'x.ts. the i»arti('le nota bcin^ then the verbalizer.

fit

r ty

To buy. Ihiiiiil't. Miuj})iJU to sell. (Both of

these ha\(' already l)een ex-
plained. )

To borrow. I'lnntdtK). M<niiU(ni(j, to lend. (Roth

partly explained V>efore. ) Ex.:
I fifiiinfiiH kn ai Dunns nnnrj Vwiaiuj
l>)KO il will borrow 5 |>esos from
TouKis). Knnlaiuian, (abs. ) debt.
J'(iiif<ni(j, credit.

To <-xcliaiii,M'; to barter. J'fnitnltt. Ann ]}innlit^ what ex-

cbanired or l)artered.

To take. k'niiiii/in. Antj patjknha^ the act of

takin;;. (Forms with ?/j, ?, ika,
<kii,n, and nn have been exj>lained
iMTctofore. )

Jo redeem; to ransom. Sumnln}). Mmjsnk'op, to re^leem

riiU'b. }f<isnkoj), to be dominated.

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

165

To encounter; to strike.

To purloin; to filrh; to steAl.

To catch; to seize; etc.

Aug mkop, the vassel or follower.
Makasdkop, to be able to dominate.
Nasasakojxjn vii/d any hai/dn (The
village [town] is under his rule).
Lit.: *'The town is ruled bv
him."

Stirnumpong.

Ciiuwiit. Aug umitin, what pur-
loined. Man m it in or mapngumil^
purloiner.

Huinuli. Ex.: Ihd nag pogoug hull
na, aa hnhuUJiin pa (Better the
quail caught already than that
which ha.syet to be caught). — T. P.
Manltnl'i, to live by robbery.

Among other words coming imder this das.s may be mentioned tnman-
gapf * * to accept or receive; ' ' dumdhip, ' ' to seize or catch hold of; ' ' vrndbut^
*'to overtake; to reach;" and sumaJdhong, ''to go out to meet anyone;"
all of which have been explained before.

X. Uin expresses voluntary acts of agents upon others when nuituality,
duality, or pluralitv is not denoted. The latter are expressed by mng, an
being generally su&xed for mutuality. Examples:

To accompany.

To leave another.

To join with; to unite with.

To talk to; (2) to sue another <»r
bring suit.

Suinaifia. Magndirid^ to accompany
each other (two or more). Ang
kotmnid, the companion (servant).
A)ig kaaanKilKin, the person accom-
panying another. Makisama, to
thru.^t one's self into the company
of another. Magknttaina, to gather,
as a crowd. SunKnnd is "to go
into partnership," and Scntumd is
"to become bad or evil." These
examples show the great impor-
tance of accent in Tagalog.

Iffuniivnldf/. .lug hiwalagan, the
person left. Magliiwahnf, to sepa-
rate mutually. MuhimtJay, to
]>art accidentally or casually, etc.
Svn. (iiralag, with the same com-
binations and meanings as above.
Jioth jirobably from indd, without;
not to have, etc. Titrnlug in oft^n
used in the sense of divide, Init
iiaidk is better. Magk<uinUtk^ratak,
to be divided into many parts.

l*ii/ii(fi<ni. Magftlsan or nKi</k(t}ji^^(ni,
to associate togetlier. Ex.: Aug
pindgknkdjtisiiiKin umig innwjd. kd-
nuiOfT(/dn, tlui uniting place of the
sciences ( knowle<lge, diinong),
i. e., scieniilic societv, university,
etc. ]*isdu as an adjective means
''merely; purely." There is a
noun jnndu meaning " sudden
death." Mahdjnmv, to kill
another suddenly.

Ctnnsd/i. 'Aug vsdplri, the ]>erson
sued. Aug kdu.'<dp, the compan-
ion in conversation. Magi'iimity to
con verse ( two or more ) ; ( 2 ) to sue

166 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

one another; to litigate. Marupii-
mp, to talk much; to talk to an
audience. Ex. : Jfoung mo akimg
lakasan nang pangurXip'iBap (don't
talk to me so much in 8uch a
rouffh way). (As the variations
of the idea ** to sue " are derived,
they will be omitted ) . Makipngu-
sapf to converse with another; (2)
to thrust one's self into a conversa-
tion. "Ex.: IbigmongmakijxiguMp
m dkinf (do you wish to have a
talk with me?). 0/>^ (yes, sir).

Ngayffy himlt mangy ay ari, it is not
possi ble j ust now ) . MakipakiHsapy
to rush uninvited into a conversa-
tion l)etween others. Palaiisnp, a
barrator or perpetual bringer of
ground lew suits. Maginpalausap^
to l)ecome a Iwirrator. Ex. : Aa-
qinjHtlaimip siyAH naginmalalajigo-
hin (he has become a barrator and
common drunkard). The first
vice, barratry, is very prevalent
with Tagalogs; the 8eiX)nd is very
rare. It would be unusual to fim'i
the combination set forth above,
but grammatically it is an excel-
lent example with niagin.
To reprove. Umiiuay, Mag Ana y^ to quarrel with.

KaAuay, antagonist; enemy.
Ang ijxigduayt the cause of quar-
rel. Ex.: Ana ipinaganay nang
viaiigd kanidbahay namiti ay ang
aso ni Feliciano^ p6 (a dog of Fe-
liciano was the cause for the quar-
rel of our neighbors). Itong htihay
na it 6 ang pinagauayan nUA (this
house is where they have j>een
quarrelling [or where they quar-
reled]). MakipagAuay^ to pick a
Quarrel or to interfere in a quarrel.
MagkaAuayj to quarrel (two or
more ) . NagkaAuay a ng data nxing
magasana sa tiangi (the husband
and wife quarrelled in the market
place).

XI. Um also expresses movement in itself; movement from an outsi<le
agency being expressed by mag, except for the root harigo, which takes
um. Ex.:

To walk; to pjisn on; to march; to Lumakad. ^hi^/a/ran?}, what walked
travel (on foot). for, i. e., the object of walking.

Ex.: AwjU hindt ka lungmaUikad
nana matulinf (why don't you
walk more quickly?). MaglAkad,
to walk niucn or quickly; to carry
something while walking. Ang
ilakadf the means of walking, as
the foot, or the object carried

TAOALOO LANGUAGE.

167

along. Atifj lakaran, the person
Avalked to, or the place walked to.
A)i(j jxKjlnhmhiy the route, path,
or roa<l, etc., walked over. Ang
mnglnliikad^ the walker; traveler.
Miigldkiullakad (dim.), to stroll.
Ang paglnkadlakaran, the ground
strolle<l over. Magpnlakad^ to or-
der or cause to walk up or go
ahead. MakaUtkadj to be able to
walk . Ex . : l\dakarhi wo wja igang
calm go ignn (make that horse walk
up ) . Jlmdi muhdnkad sigiCtjnlag^
rto (he is not able to travel; he is
lame, sir). Xnkalnh'tkodako (I am
able to walk). NakaldhHnd siyd
n(ina (he may be able to walk).
Lnmakhag is " to go a long ways
on foot;" **to make a hike." It
has tlje same changes and varia-
tions as Idkad. There are several
other variations of the idea, all
rare.

Tiimnkhn. Already explained.

Lunioksn. Already explaine<l.

Tuinah'm. Aug tnlonnn^ the ])la(e.
Ex.: Tionnlon k(t .*<« tuhig (junjp
into the water).

Jjiniiustmg. Already explained.

LuiiHuTljog. Already explained.

Lumuhog. Already explained; syn.,
sli<id.

Tniindidii. i)fiigt(thaii, tostopanother;
}fag((diajtfmj to stop each other
(two). iVa^/<///(bi street in Manila
means "stopping place," as it ends
at the bank of the Piisig River.

Jftununijxtif. Walang hHinpatij end-
less.

T'innfinan.

TnifKtkdS. Aug Tnngtatakni^y uiatakn-
.sl)), or })al(i((ikaj<y the hider (person
hiding).

llnnuiiTijit. This form originally
meant to redeem another from
slaverv, and um has been retained
while tbe meaning has changed.
MagliniUjn (now out of use) meant
to re<leem one's self from the same
condition.

(liniini»ing. Aug halt) ai/ nakngngn-
pang (the child is able to crawl ).

XII. Um is u.^ed with voluntiiry actions upon or against another. Ac-
tions affecting the subject are ex]>ressed with mng. Cm is not used with
involuntary actions, as mat'txitd, " to stuml)le." \\\.\

To run.

To jump.

To leap down.

To leap or jump down; to alight.
To swim.
To dive.

To stop.

To cease; to end, et<'

To run away.

To hide (from fear).

To pull out; to take out; to draw out.

To crawl; to walk on all f<Mirs.

To wash the face of another.

ITniniUiiiKi^, e\idently from drinios;

168

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

To comb the hair of another.

To shave another.

To cut hair.

To cure another.

To scratch another.
To whip another.

Tulfia na hihilamonn^ wash water.
MaghUamoSf to wash one's face
(occasionally). Manhilamw, to
wash one' s nee ( habitual] y ) . Ang
ipanhilamaSjtheineaLDB, i. e., hands,
sponge, wash rag, water useil, etc
Ang panhilamoMTij the place, i. e.,
the wash basin, etc.

Stimuklay, Magmiklay^ to comb one' s
hair. Ana suklayinj what combed,
i. e., the nair. Ang pagmkifiyin^
what combed much. Ang pagsu-
Hayan, what combed upon. Ang
iiuklayf the means, etc. Ang m-
klay, the comb, ifagpaguklay^ to
order to comb; alpo to allow one's
hair to be combed.

Umahii, Magdhitf to shave ones-
self. Ang pagdhit, the act of
shaving ( another ) . Ang pagaahit,
the act of shaving ones-self.
MaiTgdhitf to shave (as an occupa-
tion). An^ manaAhitj the barber.
Ang pandhitf the means, i. e., the
razor. MagpaahU^ to order to
shave; also to get shaved. Ex.:
MagpaAhit ka kay Juan (Tell Juan
to shave you). Magpadhit kay
Juan al Pedro (Tell Juan to shave
Pedro). Ang pinagaahifan, the
place of being shaved, i. e., the
oarber shop. Ang ahitan, the per-
son shavea. (See phrases also. )

Gumupit. Maggupity to cut one'fi
own hair. Ang ginupit, what has
))een cut, or the person whoee hair
has l)een cut. Gumupit also means
to cut metal. The use of shears is
implied in all cases. (See the
phrases for examples. )

Gumamot. Maggamot^ to cure ones-
self. Mangamoty to cure profes-
sionally, i. e., to practice meoicine.
Kagamolan (abs.), medicine.
Ang mangagamotf the physician.
Ang pangamotinf the person cured.
Magamoty to have much me<li(!ine,
or to have many kimlsof medicine.
(Idiom:) Walang gnmot ang Umot,
there is no cure for the forgetful.
Ex.: Bago dumnting ang itakitf
lagydn nang gamoi { Before illness
comes, ai>ply the remedy). — T. P.
362. This seems to be an adapta-
tion from the Spanish.

Kumdmol. ( Alre^y explained. )

HumampAs. .VaghampdSf to whip
ones-self (as in penance). Ang
hampasin^ the person whipped.
Ang hampws sa kcdabad'y sa (xwayo

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 169

an() l/ttay (the lash to the carabao
and the welt to the horj«e). — T. P.
'MO.
To cane or chib another. PuuhjIo. Magpaloan, to cudgel each

other. Ang pamalb^ the garrote.

XIII. Vm is also iise<l to express voluntary acts of the senses, except
with those roots which commence with h. Ex.:

To look for; to see by so looking. KumUd. Ma(jk'Uay to look at each

other (two or more). Magkitd^ to
look at intently, or at many things.
Makitdj to be seen. Makakitd, to
see ( casual ly ) . Ex. : A hVy naka-
kikitd (l am aV)le to see). Ak/i'y
uakukUd rtang isatig tauo dit/dii (I
saw a person there). Xakild mo
har/d ait/df (Did you see him
[her] ?) Hindi, lujmi'Ct mnkikiid
ko Sana, (no but I may ]ye able to
[see] ) . Mngkakitd, to be deceived
by the sight. Ex.: Naf/kakakhd
kitd aki't'? (Do I see visions?)
NoijkdkakinikUoum ako (My sight
deceives me). Nagknkimtaan ako
(My sight deceived me).

To hear (by listening). DumitTtjig. (Already explained.)

To feel; to touch. Ilnmlpo. }faglnpo, to touch much.

Aug hipohi, what touched.

To smell of. Vmamoii. Ex.: Atnoifin mo ito

(smell this). Mnatnog, to smell
casually. Ex.: Xniiait\ini mo })agd
(tug fffiiTijong isiinisainhi'ihit nnng
mai7(jd hnldklakf (Do vou smell
the fragrance shed by thetlowers?)
Makadinoy, to be able to smell
something. Xakaaaniag k<f f ( Can
you smell anything? ) .l.yo, smoke.

To taste; to relish (purposely). Luitmsap. yD?7/(/.'«fT;>/;j, what tainted.

yfaknlamjt, to taste (casually ) ; also
to cause a relish.

XIV. Some roots denoting pai?sions an«l emotions of a certain kind are
conjugated by um, when the idea of voluntary action is expressed. Other
Toots of this nature are conjugate<i by mng. When casual, ideas of emo-
tions, etc., are expressed with ma. Ex.:

To love. Satninta. ( Already explained.) Of

Sansk. origin, through Malay. Ln-
iiiiffag is a synonym, now rare.

To care for; to desire; to wish. I'ndldg. .l/ar/zA/V;, to long for. Magi-

170 TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

the fact. Maibigin^ an amorous
man; a Hirt. Mnknibig, to care for
naturally. Kaihignn (abt't.), love,
dej^ire. Aug kaihigan (note ac-
cent) , the friend. Aug kinaibigau,
what loved. KaihigVng (adj.),
amial)le; loving. Absolute, tbUj.
Am) nug ibig utof (What do you
\vi.**h? ) Ibig mong unimnma sa aklnf
(Do you wish to po with me?)
yfniTg'tbig, { 1 ) to like many; (2) to
llirt habitually; {'^) to care lirst
for one thing and then another.
Kx. with ibig, T. P.: Aug liniag ikd
p'igibig bangan sa hull inat'UnU
(True love is sweet to the end). —
44(>. Knng tapat oug i»ngibig, mn-
pnlt mini ag mfitnm'is ( When love is
real even bitter i.s sweet). — 447.

To caress; to fDudle. I'mirog. Aug irngin, xUe pc»rson ca-

ressed. Mnirtigiit, an affectionate
]»erson. Aug bigAgat intg .^-igdng
nnhabihimug (gift^ and carc-sses
^'ain over what can not otherwise
be gained).— T. P. 144.

To like; (l^) to desire. J'lnnit't. .)A/y)/7a/a'?i, a desirous j>er-

son. Ag <ntg pita luntg i'tob ko (It
is the <)esire of my lieart). Mag-
jtlta in s<i kaitiga naug aunmang ibig
mo ( Ask liim for anything you
wish). Pifhttga in a rather rare
synonym. J^iimithaga, to like: to
desire.

X\'. r'//Mised with .svr, "at," "in," denotes }»ermaneni:y in any place.
I*'.x.: Aug niiiiTii,) Ai/n rirano i*'nig)iiii>'ii S'lngkaiHi/jian (The Americans are
settling; jicrmanently in the archiiK'lajj:<») .

X \'I. fill is ulso U"^cd in some phuu-s to «'xpi"css the idea that what may
be sli:nifi('d by the root is taking place hcn\ there, and everywhere; the
idea of (••tnfnsion being inlierefit. Kx.: Uiivhidg {or tnutgau) <io('ni (all is
<liianelinir there). l'm<t.<>htn (nftnuin) dittt (everyone is getting marrieil
here I.

I'lK i< :il<o use(l for the imperative in Manila, the tensi's being distin-
^Miisiied by adverhs of time, but tins in j)robably due to the fact that the
speakeis f»f Ta^aloL' in >binila generally liave some knowledge of S|)anish,
whi< li coll fuses their gnisp of the nice (Ji'^tinetion of tense in i>ure Tagalog.

X\'I1. Cm, used with some roots indicatinu: certain actions means to be
oecnj.ied in a matter, althouLdi ]>erhaps not actually performing the act
indaated. Ex.: Stimnsi'ihit si .ln<tn (.Inan is busy with writing).

IHUKfULAHITIES.

XN'ITI. In Some ]>arts of the Ta'jalo'_r leiriou tlie pres(*nt tense of the in-
deliniti' with the primary idea (besides the rcL'ular formation with ungm
and the re(|nplicati<ins of the (irst syllable of the root), is sometimes ex-
jtressed hy the i>article im prelixed to the root. Ex.:

To read. Ihnnaaa, from Sansk. wdrbd " word,"

" di.-^course." There are three
forms of the present indef. with
primary idea. F.x.: Ahygnahoia
(I am [or was] reading). Ako^y

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. I7l

nalxinfC ij nakati'dog ako ( I was read-
ing: and fell apU'cp). ymmtia ako
(I am reading). Buuffmoha^aako
(I am reading), (See tables for
other tenses. ) Ah(j basahm, what
read. Aug basaJtatiy the person
read to. Basahan, professor, lee-
turer. Maghcmaj to read nuieh,
or by many. Angpagbamiy the aet
of reading. Mnhdhasa, anything
legible. Ex.: X<iba,'<a mo ita ang
I'lbnmg ipinahmnn ko sa iiiaf (Had
vou [ifiave vou already] read the
book 1 lent you?) JHudi ko pana-
basd ( I have not finished reading
it yet). MugpobiiMiy to order to
read. Kx.: Nagpopabasa avg
muiTgaarul sa marTf/d batii (the
teacher is ordering the children to
read). Mabosahin; mamamasa or
pnbibasa, reader. Tagabasa^ reader
bv occupation. JUisa is also ap-
plied to a gravestone. Bnniasd
( from bam ) , is * 'to wet, to moisten. ' '
This last is evidently a Mala van
word; Malay, basahknn, to wet or
moisten. Jiaaa (from v'^ansk.
7i:arli(1) means language, speech, in
Malay, while bacha has Wen se-
lected to represent the idea of read-
ing.
To write. Snnn'ilat (from Arabic t^' uraty a chap-

172

TAGALOO LANOUAOE.

To eat.

To buv.

To obey; to follow.

To resist; diwbey; contradict; con-
tend with.

To Hhow an^rer; (2) to turn aside

from.
To Htand up; t^) rise to the feet.

Ti> pit down.

To l(K)k at.

Bnjang $u$tdatan niyd (this paper
ifl for him to write upon [fat]).
Magsulat, to write muchor by many .
Maasulatstdatan (dim.), to write a
little; to scribble. Ex.: Nagnmi'
latmlaton ak6 (I am writing a little;
I am scribbling). iTonuZal, to write
as an occupation. Ang manunulatf
the clerk; writer. Ang panuldt^
the pen, stylus, brush, etc. (See
also under makaf magpa^ and maki).
Afapagsulatf a person who writes
much.

Kninain. (Already explained.) Ex.
with na: Nakain siyd (he is eat-
ing) . Kungmakain siyd ( he is eat-
ing [regular form] ).

Bum ill. ( Already explained. ) Ex. :
Nabili akd nang damit (I am buy-
ing some clothes^. Also tungmi-
bili ak6 nang damxL

Sumnnod. ^afunod siydy he is obey-
ing or obeys. A ng mindalong gang-
muMinodf stuiarin gi^fd. kun oficial
(the obedient soldier will be
obeyini when an officer himself).
Magsunttran, to follow each other.
Magmnodftnnodj to follow in rapid
suc<H»«iaion ( many ) . Magtumunod,
to follow closely, also two children
bom in Huccesnion. Magkasumu-
noflf to follow wherever another
may go, or to obey implicitly.
Ex . : yagkakcummunod ang sundalo
m pmumgniyA (the soldier follows
his officer wnerever he goes).
tSino ang pinagkamimunddn mot
(Who are you obeying so implic-
itly?) Ang punong ko (mv com-
mander). Alio ana ipinagiakasu-
muntpd mo [ninyo] sa kaniydf
(Why do you [yej obey him so
impliVitly?) Ab^y sundalOy p6 (I
am a soldier, sir).

Sumuay. Nasuay giyd^ he is disobey-
ing. MagBuay^ to disobey, etc.
(much). Mamay, disoliedient;
contraclictory. J/o^auai/rtw, to con-
tradict each other. Magttimay^ to
disobey (many). Kcuuayanj dis-
olxxlience.

TumiVtog. Ex.: Xatdbog siyd (he
shows anger; he is turning aside).

Tumindiq. Satindig niyd (he is ris-
ing to h is feet ) . V'^er b has al ready
been explained.

UmupO. A a up6 sUd ( they are sitting
down). Verb has already been
explained.

Tu m t ugin . XatbTgin akd ( I am look-
ing). Verb has already been
explained.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 173

XIX. Bisyllabic (two-syllabled) root.^ coiniiH'ncing with h, k\ ;>, ^ or a
vowel, j^nerally admit of a similar irregularity in the imperative, past, and
present tenses; n being prefixed to vowel roots lV>r the j)ast an(l present
tenses and m for the imperative, wliile tlie initial letter of />, k, j>, and t
roots changes to n for the past and jiresent tenses, and to m for the
imperative.

To read. Bumaso. Ex.: (Irreg. ) Mam ka;

(Reg.) Bnntnita /.t/ (read). (I.)
Xasd nko\ (R. ) Bun(jm<M«i ak6 (I
read [|>ast tense]). (I.) Xdnai^n
(ikn; (It.) I>nyi(/inahfis(i ako (1 am
reading) . The other tenses are
regular. Kx.: Xakahafia nko (1
had read). Hnhaaa ako (1 sliall
read ) . MttkaOasa ako ( I shall have
read). Aiif;/ pafjhasa^ the act of
reading.

To capture. Buinih<i(j. Koblhagarif captivity.

Same as foregoing.

To take. A'^n/i/zAa (partly explained before).

Imp., Muha hi; kmnnha kn; kuJia
kn (take). Past, Xuha fik6; kung-
inuhn (iko (I took). Pr., S'luuilm
ako; kn)n;)nnkii]ia ako (I am tak-
ing). Pip., Xakaknha ako (I had
taken). F., Knknha ako (1 shall
take). F. P., Mahikuha ako (1
shall have taken). }faiojnha, to
take habitually. Aug paiojiiniii^
what taken habitually. (Note that
the u is all that remains of knha.)
Makakulta, to ])e al)le to take.
Ex.: Nakn]i(i nila igatig vuiiTija
bu/Tija (thev were able to take that
fruit [pi.])'.

To go for; to bring; to call. Kumaon. ('onj. Wkiykamuha. (Al-

ready explained.)

To enter; to come in; to go in (vol- I\nnasok. Moi^ok ka; pantasok ka
untarily). (come in). Aasok siga; jniagtua-

sok sit/a (he went in), yanaaok

174

TAOALOG LANOUAOE.

To pluck; to gather, fus flowers.
To tempt; to try.

To peck (as a bird).

To leave; to go away.

mit (Juan told Pedro to get into
his clothes) . NagpapAiok fi Pedro
nana damit (Pedro put on the
clothes). MakapagpapAwkj to be
able to order another to go in.

Pumt/(i«. (Already explained.)
Ck)nj. \\)Le pum&8oh.

Tamuksd, Imp., Muksd; tumuksS
(tempt, try). Past, Nuhsd; lung-
muk»6 (tried). Pr., Nunukso;
tungmuiukso (trying). Pip., Naka-
tuksu (had tned). F., TuluksS
(shall, will try). F. P., Sfakatukud
(shall, will have tried). Angpag-
pagtnksdy the trying, tempting.
MagtuksOf to tempt much or many.
Ang tuksohin, the person temptefl.
Angpagtukaohirif the person greatly
or many times tempted. Ang
Uuksdf the cause or means of temp-
tation. Ang ipagtukadf the cause
or means of great or repeated
temptation. Ang tuksohan, the
place of temptation. Ana pagttik-
sohaiij the place of much or re-
peated temptation. Mag tukso-
iuksohan (dim. ), to tempt a little,
or in mockery. ManuksOf to tempt
habitually. Ang manunukndf the
tempter; temptress. Magpanuks/i^
to tempt frequently and a great
deal. Ang ipanukso, the cause or
means of the foregoing. Ang pa-
nuksohanf the pla^ corresping to
foregoing. Magpakatuksd, to tempt
strongly. £x. : And ang ipinaapa-
katuksoiian ( ipinakapagtuktonan )
nilM ( Why were they so strongly
tempted?)

Tamukd, Gon\. like tumukid, Ap-

girently applied to bite of snake.
X.: Siydy linukd nang ahas (he
waa bitten by the snake).
Umalis, Imp., (I.) Mails ka; fR.)
umallf ka. Past, Nalis akd (L);
Ungmalis akd (ik.) (I left, went
away, etc.) Fres., Nanalls akd
(I.); ungmaalls akd (R. ) (I am
goingawav, leaving, etc.). Pip.,
Nakans ahd (I had left). Fut.,
Aalis akd (I shall leave). F. P.,
Makanllg akd (I shall have left).
Ang pagaliSf the leaving. (This
root nas already been partly ex-
plained. )

The following roots are conjugated like alls:

To ascend.

Umakyat. Anginakyat^ what ascend-
ed or the person ascending. Ang
iahjatf the cause. Ang akyatdn^
the place.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

175

Not to wish.

Vmaijao. Ex. : Paayao ha (say you
do not wish to). Bah'd siya najxi-
(lynof (Why did she say she did
not wish to?)

Urn Igib.

Uminnm. Imp., Mi nam Aa, drink.
Malay m'nnun means "to drink.'*
(This verl) has already been ex-
plained. )

Vmurong.

Uinuut.

Vinund. (Already explained.)

XX. Some polysyllabic (of more than two syllablen) roots beginning
with 6, k, p, /, or a vowel, are conjugated with the ])artiele mati ((j. v. ).

XXI. Some sixty-six polysyllabic verbal roots coniniencing with pa
replace the first syllable with na in the pa.«t and present and with ma in
the imperative and future. In the present and future tenses the second
syllable of the root is reduplicated and )i(}t tlu; first. This conjugation
resembles but is not identical with man. There are also some euphonic
vowel modifications. (See tables for synopsis of conjugation. )

The verbal roots, which are conjugated in tliis manner, are the following:
To verbalize these roots, change initial p to n or m as required for tense
of indefinite.

To go for water with a pitcher.
To drink.

To turn back; to go back; to fall

back; to retreat.
To return; to come back.
To lead; to go ahead.

To rise early.

To profit; to make (in business).

Paaf/d, from af;<), "morning."

Pakinahang. Probably from a lost
root tnhanr/, wliieh still exists in
Bi('r)land Visavan, with the mean-
ing "to aid; hel[); succor;" and
the prefix fniki, def. of viaki.

Pakinlfj. To listen to much, magpa-
kinig.

I*akinynp, from //.sa/> and paki, def.
of maki.

Pallgd. Magi i go, to bathe another;
also rnagpa/lgo. Syn. panibo ( rare) .
Maliqbka ( take a batli) . PaJigoan
mo ang cahago (wash the horse).

Paniaga, from bagd^ "a tumor, ab-
ce>s," and pan.

Pamaltag, from ht'ihag, " house," and

To swell up (as a sting); also to Pamangind, from panghld^ "to

swell badly.
To supplicate; (2) to aacend into a

To listen to (with attention).

To solicit or urge (for good or evil).

To bathe one's self; to take a bath.

To swell.

To dwell; to live in a house.

house for important reasons
To wag the tail (as a dog]

p(
swell" (the nerves), and pan.
J\inianhik, from j/aiihik and pan.

1*o incite; to provoke.

Paiiidgpog { rare ) . Seiple thinks may
l)efrom loi^t root;)a///>o>/, variation
oi pagjHUi, "fan." Mamagjtay, to
fan one's self or aimtlier. I'snal
Word "to wave" i^ jtainasjK'm.
Paspaidii iiKt {tug handila ( wave the
Hag).

Pamofigkalu. Kx. : Pinamninongkaliian

ttiim ii/iti/i }irt vi/tfiift' tint II n'l mi I mt

:i variation of pongkd^ **to incite
to a(jiiarrel," and jxtn. This root
\< sai«l to V)e of Chinese origin.

To offer; to <le<Hcat»». J*n)iinj«utn. Seij)le says from Vira.

j»art. jxuunj and auo, "what."

To envy. PdnxijhU). Seiple also jjives thin as

from p<tnnfj and ////», **<-nvy."
I',x.: IfoiuKj hnuj manaffhifl so
l:nj)nn mo tauo (Do not envy your
neii:hl>or). Syn. piuiyhnffoln
( rare ).

r<> si'jrh; (2) to whistle. Panaffltni/^ from tdfjhoj/, "to pant, t«>

hreatlie hard," an«l p(tn.

r<) dream. PainKjhiip, from <jhit}> and pana, a

(Oi I d)i nation found by Seiple in
))nt four words of polysyllabic
structure, llx.: Xaimnarpnip kn
fxfi/.'if ! Are you dreaming?) Syn.
}tiifnj>i,itnl(t<}^ iromti'ihfff, "sleej)."

To put one's sell under the control pifufit/lsin/o^ from t'ti/isnt/o and fi^in.
of another. Tlie ultimate root is su»fd with the

same geru'ral meaning.

To ]>ray. Piniahnnj'nt, from (fn/^nTjjIn and jnin.

To trust; to (•(iuri«le. J'<ini'iliif, from snlig. Kx.: »SVv»i tniij

aiiitisn/if/an ko, kntft nh'o mnt-'tpntnj
( 1 tru"^t in him, and am brave for
tliat reason). J^innptuia/itjan inn
{j)Hitfi/i'fn}ii)i itio) (i]i[i I)i(tH (let
vour trust 1m' in (lod [trust in

(Jod] ).

To vau'juish: gain; <'oM<iuer; win. Pawiht, inww inlnawd pun. Sino muj

lutmiJof (Who was the winner?)
Tuiu'iJo, totlispute (one). Mafjtnlo,
to argue ( two, etc. ). Manah)^ indef.
of jxiii'ilo. Mtujpatnlit, to allow
one's^elf tobecon«juered. ]*atnlo,
to eonseiit to be van«juishe<l. J/(j-
l:if>i/'i, to interfere in a dispute.
Aii'j iN'tiKiudlo, the winner; con-
<lui'ror. .!?<'/ tdlnnan, the van-
• juIsIumI.

T'» <iiijT iuiM*r;il SMinj-.. p(iii'nnf>it(!)t, from satnhit, "funeral

song,'' nn sutlixed and pun.

To desrend by >tairs oi- ladd«*r: ('J) P<iii'u,ij. SeipU* gives a Panay-Vi-
t" spend; to use up. sayan root ihhkj, but the Samar-

bi'sle dialect seems to lack this
word. l''x.: (Tag.) J'umnru'uuj^ tn
dei^vi']u\ a ladtler (also, to go or
Come down stairs), .^[(njp^uujofj,
to do tlu' above much. Mngpupit-
n-'it>'/, to order the above to be
done; to use up; to spend. Ex.:
\ii,/ihi/nnt(h><f umifj (wi ung nnrn-
r'lUni (The property iias l.)een u«e<l
upou aeeountof j)overty). Xapa-
p'in(n>'/(in (ikn nam/ tijnung pisos (I
have spent live pi'sos). Also with
iiiti. K\.: Ant; luipunnoi] fia akin
(11/ liiiHuifjpisos ( The amount of my
s|)eudi ng was iive pesos). Mag-
pnt\i'in>j also means to bring some-

'1^

TAOALOO LANGUAGE.

177

To sit clown (with the feet crossed
and knees apart).

To promise; to resolve

To j)er8evere; to persist; to last.
To i)enetrate (as water).

To })e able to do.

T<^ kneel down; to kneel.
To prop with the liand.

thinj: down .stairs or oy means of a
ladder. .1 ng ipanmnj^ what brou«j:ht
down. MagpapngiHint'tng^ to order
something to be bronght down
thus.

Pa IK t silt), from sll'), with same mean-
ing with iHOfj and pan. .Seiple
tliinks7)r//«i a root, but it may also
l)e from the in<lef. Aug pinana-
'ndnilaan, the person sat down be-
fore, or the place.

PnnaUi. Angpnnntahii)j what prom-
ised. A)ig jHtnatahaUy the person
}>romised. Syns. PiuTgakd; Tu-
mandang. The roots ta/agd and
pa una n have somewhat similar
meanings.

PanalHi, from tifi, idea of propping
up; and pan a.

Pduhniim (from timtiinf and pan).
Seiple gives liglm as the root, mean-
ing "to ooze into; to leak." No-
ce<la gives jxindginttlm as the word,
l^x. M'i/)<uifn/imfi)n S(( looh ang ma-
.HdhKDig asdl (The evil habit pene-
tratts the heart).

Pangtiari ( from garl and jKin). Ma-
hiipnugijarilunij powerful; omni-
pott'ut. K(tp(nigif(irih(ni, j)ower;
taeulty; authority. Kx. Magrnoii
siifaiigk(ip(i)ig>f(irdinn ( he has power
[or antliority] ). ]\'(ild signng /;.
(lie is without a). ]V(tld a Long k.
(1 am without a). Mangijari., to
l)e ]>ossi))li'. Ex. Jfindi mangga-
yari (It can not l)c). Ulndunann-
yaring d( tiio punnirnon (I can not
possii»ly keep from going there).
Manf/gnri fmgaiig dl nkn pumnroonf
(Is it not j)ossible for me to keej*
from going there?) Annt dl nnin-
gi/dgarl/ ( Why should it not be.vo.'')
Mag naitggari dona sa h'l/iag nigd
(Snniething has hapi)encd in his
house overt here). Snkaf manggari
(Supi>o.<e it may happen?) ]>l
snhat niangiiarl ( It should not h<\\^-
]>en). Maitggagai i dm I It Will lU-
<lee<l be posj^i))le). )'<in alone
means done; linished; fomplete«l.
I'.x.: Ydi) na ang fii'dat (The letter
is alr(^a<ly finished U

pdiiikhdind. (Alrea«ly ex}>laine<l ).
Syn. Ldinnhnfl,

Paio'ni. Ang ipinant'in, what|)rop])ed
thus. Mdgtiin, to put out the
hands in ordrr t«) rise; (2) also to
stamp or jtriut. TiiiKin mo ang
]fdj»/, <tanip or })rint it on the

6855—05

d2

178

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

To think; also **to regret*
To Hquat.

To believe; to confide in; to trust

To guide; to lead.

To accomplish the will.

To view (as a spectacle); to gaze at;
to sight; to behold; to look at
from far off; to view with astonish-
ment

To make water.

To lodge.

To wait upon the pleasure of another;

to flatter; (2) to serve.
To promise.

To dare; to venture.

paper. Root tiin and pan. Ttin
means ** to prop oneself with hands
and feet in order to rise."

Panimdim (from dimdhn and pan).
This root is domdom in Bicol.

Paninakayad (from tinkayad and
pan). Also tumingkayadj with
same meaning.

Paniwala (from tiwaia and pan).
Jn^ibatinvtZa, the confidant; bosom
friend.

Pan6got.

Panofos (from a lost root, toloSy sug-
gests 8eiple, who cites the Java-
nese word *Uulns, sincere; faith-
ful; loyal, etc." and adopted in
Malay). Ex.: Htndt ak6 manolos
kumainf at ang muasakit akd nang
lagiiat (I can not force myself to
eat, l)ecause I am sick with fever).

Pan (tod (from n6od and pan). Ma-
iwodf to look at what contents and
gives pleasure-. Ang pinan6rpd,
what beheld.

Panubig (from tubig and pan).

Pamiluyan (from tuloy ana pau).
Ang panuluyananf the lodging
place; also ang tuloyan. Ang ipn-
nuluyan, the cause or person for
whom lodging is looked for. Mag-
papanuluyanf to give another lodg-
ing. Ang papantduyanin, the per-
pon given lodging. Titmuloy to
lodge. Magtuloy, to lodee many
or much. Ang tuluyan^ tne lodg-
ing place. Ang pagtuluyan^ the
lodging place of many or much.
Ang itiUoy, the cause. Ang ipatj-
tuloy, the cause of many or much.
Magpatuhy, to give lodging. Ang
patuluyiuy the person given lodg-
ing. Ang paliduyan, the place
where given lodging. Ang pajHig-
tuluyin^ the person given much
lodging. Angmaiigdpapagtnluyin^
the persons given lodging. Ang
pmagpapatxduyan^ the lodging
houses. Ex.: Sino ang nanunu-
luyan sa bdhay mof (Who is Uie
lodger at your house?) Imitg ma-
h trap na pinaluloy ko 9a dking bdhati
(a poor man whom I have ^loweci
to lodge at my house).

Panuyd (from stiyd andjMin). See
panagimyd.

PaiTgakd (def.); mangakd (indef.).
Syn., panata. From ako, "secu-
rity," and pan.

PaugaMs; mangahas (probablv from
dahcutf **idea of bravery," and-
pan). Seiple points out that the=

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

179

To become tired from niuoh standing
or being in the same position a
long time.

To become thin; emaciated.

To become numb {m* thv, arm or lej:
from inaction); to "go to sleep."
To fold the arms.

To rest the face upon the hand; to
bnrv face in hands.

To apprehend; to dread.

To Ix-ar a child; to lie in.

To }^. with child for the first time
To dread.

To l«x)k in mirror or other reflecting
^Urface.

T^ hurt; to damage; to malign; to
rnake a.«hamed.

To talk in nleej); to dream.
To humble or abase oneself.

To niake love; to woo.

To Vje jealous.

To tremble; to shudder.

To warn; to guard oneself; to sneak
away.

regular formation should be pana-
Juis. In Hicol, dahas means .vio-
lence; force.

J*aiT(j<ilay. Ex. : Nangangdlay ka naf
(Are you tired already?) Hindi
p6 (no, sir). The roots rujalay,
hin/jalay, wjalo^ and iTyimi have
about the same meaning.

PaiTfjoliraiiy (greater than yayat).
Sy n. , jKifTyatigany. Root, rujalirang
and })nn.

J\ti7j/(Uo (from iTfjah, '* idea of pain
from fatigue"). Syn., nyiini

Paiujd/oLijtkip (from Judokiplipy to
cross the arms). Var., pnuhnlo-
kilfk'ip. Ult. root, kipkijf. Ex.:
Kiuitipkip, to lay the arm or leg
upon anything. BokH bi ntuufajTij-
(dttkijtkipf (Why are you folding
your arms?) Seijde shows that
lid/n often prefixes roots composed
of two i<leiitical syllables.

P(ii7(i<dmidnd>il (from iTijrd urn ha hd and
pa u ) . Var. , mjaynmhahd . Tauong
niapniT<j<dund}ahd, a melancholy
person.

PaiTj/amha (less than paiTf/dMb or
lakol). From gitrnha, *'idea of
dread," and }>an.

l*(ii'i]}<n«ik (from anaky *'ehild," and
pan).

I*ai7</anay.

Pamjnnih (from gdnib, ** idea of being
in danger' ' ) . ( C i reater degree than
pdiTljainha. )

Pawjaunit) (from an'ino, "image,
shadow," and pa/*).

]*ainjaiiyayii (from anyaya and pan).
MakapaiTj/anyaya, to cause dam-
age. J\ii7i/anyayaiig tana, a person
who destroys property, maligns,
etc. AnyayangtayOj a lazy person.
MukapapaiTijanyaya (adj.), harrn-
fni; hurtful; slanderous.

raiTy'trap (from arap^ "i<lea of
dreaming," and pan).

Pai7(/<iy((]tapd (from lu/ayupapd and
])an ).

PaiTi/thly (from ihiy and ])an). See

Pairyiyhoyhu (from hoffha, "idea of
jealousy;" still found in jtanl-
Imy/io, * * jealousy " ) .

Painjih'i},(,t (from kilabof, "idea of
tremblintr" ).

P<tmidag («Ief. ); )nafTjjiltig (indef. );
l»oth from 'day. VmUay^ to flee.
May'day, to draw aside; to avoid.
PaiTydayan mo any maiUja ti'unnig
iirdany pinayaralan (avoid men
witljout education [l)reeding] ).

To \)v scornful. Pai7l;ilap. Seiple thinks may be

from sllavy "idea of a wordy (juar-
rel," ana )>(in.

To keep holiday t>. PniTii'din (from iTfjiling, "idea of (t\y-

tiervinjjj lioHdays [tie^tas], etc.,"
and jftin). Seiple tjhserveH that
tlie final (; of the root has l)een
droi)ped, l>ut this may he acci-
dental.

To become numb (jis t])e arm or leg J\uTijinii{ir(>mt7(jimi). 8yn. ;/a//7/«/'>.
Iruni inactiom ; tn "l:o to >U't^p."

Totrem))le (much witli cold <>r tear) . Pttmjinig (fnun k'nii(jy really kinyitj).

Kiiminig, to tremble with cold or
liar. M(n/Hni(j, to tremble much
thus. MaHuitj, to !>e trembling?
thus [state]. MaiTlfmig^ indef. of
jnuTg'in'uj. MahipaiTghiig, to cause
to trend)le with cold or fear.

To feel a tin^linj; i»ain in the teeth. J'afTfpiTjfUo (from pangiloy itself from

wi'ilt\ a tingling pain in the teeth.

To sliake (as from till' agui^ ). I^uHjiki (from iTj/lki). Aki'>'g nan-

g'nTgiki (1 am shaking).

To precede (as in room or street); PotTguna (from ?(«(/, "first," and
to <ommence; to stait or brjiin. pun).

To lo.<e in trade, business, or barter. I\iwjnhigl (from iTgulugi^ a loss in

business, and jKin).

T< ) lul k. PaiTgAstip ( from tUap and pan). F^x. :

Hindi kd )nukop<i}7[jnMi]).^ (Can't
you talk?) (See usajt, already
jiartly explained).

DIMIMTIVES IN • CM."

Vni vrrlts jire made diminutive bv the repetition of the root if )>isvllabii',
or tin* lirsl l\v<» syllables if longer. I'.x.:

T(» nm. Tnmnkho. Ttnnakho-tnkho,ii)n\ui\Av',

to run a little.

To rain. VumU'tn. Pinnlnn-nlnii^ to <lrizzle.

in ordinary composition the hv-
l>hens are generally omitted.

TUK VKKn.\M/.iN(i ivMiTicM: "ma(;."

Tiic particle nnig is usecl t<> verbalize roots, as a general rule, either
when a delinite o)>je(t is held in view or else when the ^■erb fl«>es not
re.|iiiie an ••hjeci to expri^ss intensity (smnetimes j>lurality) with n.ots
which .ne \ crhaU/ed in the simplest sense with nm. Mtni has also a reel p-
r-Mal ,:i]Utiiali idea, on i/nrn) bi'ing Usually sullixed.

.1/"-/. uhi(h i> al\\a\s a ]>rt^lix. changes \(^ nng \n the present and past
len^r-. The ji r.'^f >\ liable nt the To/./ is reduplicated tor the jiresent and
tuline t(ii-.es. MiiLn an<l imkn, which are used to indicate the second
lulufc perfe( t and i>luperlect, respectively, retain /ur//, the definite of ntng^
with the i<>. .1, as tlie\- are also independent jiarticles when used alone.
In this resjicct, anil also in the retention of the particle in front of the
redni>licated initial s\llable of tlu' root in the future tense, all j)article8
flitter from nm, (See t)ie table tor conjugation of mug ro(»tS. )

1. V'^'/, jirelixed to n'(»i> whicli admit "/// and which do not change the
iiii'ini,,'/ witji imi'i, sigiiilics ])lurahiy either of ])ersons or acts, this being"
t)ie general njeaning imparted hy this particle. Mog (nag) sometimes
throw- the accent U])on the last syllable of a root. Ex.:

TAGALOO LANOUAOB.

181

To guard; watch for.

To sit down.

Ttimauod. Magianod^ to guard much
or by many. Ang tanorafiy what
guarded. Ang pagtanoran^ what
guarded much or by many. Ang
ttanodf the cause of guarding.
Ang ipagtanody the cause of guard-
ing much or by many; also the
person for whom guarded, if there
be a person concerned.

Umup6. Magupdf to sit down ( many ) .

Among other verbs may be mentioned maglnisd, to read much or bv
many {bumam); magkainy to eat much, etc. (kumain); maggiiky to thresh
(gumiik); maainuniy to drink much, etc. (umxnum)\ maglakad, to walk
mach, etc. (Ium6.kad)\ magmlntj to write much or by many {sumulot);
magUikbdy to run much or by many (tumakh't) ; magtangiSy to weep much
or l)y many {tumangis)^ and magtuksdy to weep much {tumukad); all of
which verb« have been heretofore explained.

II. Those roots which do not admit um as a verbalizing particle are not
pluralized by mag, but simply verbalized in the primary sense. Besides
others, all roots beginning with in fall in this class on account of caco-
phony (harshness) with um.

To grind (as grain).
To enhance.

To think with care.
To see well (purposely).

To inherit.

To note; to experience.
1*0 start; to commence.

Magbay6. Ang hay in y what ground.
Ang bayohan, the grinding place.

Magmahal. Ang ndnaviahcdy the es-
teemed, etc., person. Ex.: Ang
banal na tdito ay luiuamahal (the
just person is esteemed). Mama-
haly to rise in value. Ex. : Nama-
mahal ang lakd (the merchandise is
rising in value). Manpakamahal,
to esteem highly. Ex.: Pinagpa-
pakamahal ko sa kaniyd (I do es-
teem him highly). Also with
maira alone. Ex.: Pinakamamahal
ko sa kaniyd. Makimahaly to act
like a noble person. Mapakimahaly
to arrive at a state of being es-
teemed. Kamahalany dearness;
nobility, etc.

Magmahang.

Magmalas. To see well, casually,
makamalojt,

Magmana. Ang pagmanahiny what
inherited. Ang magkamanay to
leave property. Aug ipamanny the
estate. Ang pamanoy the inherit-
ance ( verbal noun ) . Ex . : Iloang
painana sa dkin nang amd ko (This
was my inheritance from my
father). Ang pagmanahany the
heir. Makimanay to ask for an in-
heritance.

Magmamd. Ang mapagmasidy the
person who notes or experiences.

Magmuld. Muldn mo itOy commence
this. Used only thus in impera-
tive and past indicative. As ** pro-
ceed *' it IS used in past and present.

i

. 1 inj pifinrjinHnnihin, the point from
which proceeding. JA(/a as prep,
means "from; since."

To recall to memory. Matfimil). Also nieanj^ to 0{>en the

eyes widely; and to look at well.

To cliea})en: insnlt; <lishonor. yftujinm-n. Mannint^ to lower in

vnhie. A)ig hiurahin, vvhatchea]>-
(MK'd, or who insulted, dishonored,
etc. Miii;pri/:(Uitnr(iniiir(f, to despise
intensely. Mognmrahatij to insult
mutually. .1 nfjlinkomnnam/ jiltup}-
)fiur(ih(tn nilnj they insulted each
other in the court room.

There are c()mparatively few vcrhal r<»)t,s heginning with //< in theTaga-
ln;j:. The forcgoinjx are nearly all tliat arc in connnon use. A few otliers
arc to be found, which will he notc«l later, u>ed with other particle.'^.

III. Konts ^vhich chanizc the mcanihvj with <'/// and m<uj are pluralized
in two wavs with VKto. \i the fiii'il svllahle of the root is iiranted nor-
mally the^/r.s7 fiyjlahlc of the /v^oMs added rxtra in all tenses, hut if the
accent is not normally upon the last syllable of the rout, plurality is
expressed by chan«:injj: the accent to tlie linal syllable. It should also be
noted that tlie meaning i/iau(/(s hack.

To buy, ThiniU'i. Miui}»il'i^ to sell. Xncfhihil'i

itko, I amsi'lling. yuf/hihibUl <iL''>.
1 am buyinji much. This form is
now rar«'. nnni ( <j. v. ) being gen-
erally used. Ex.: yniniinH'i ak'>
(1 am buying nuich ).

I'o teach (as a doctrine 1. I'nn'irnl. Minjt'iritJ, to learn; to

studv. Mdonrnl, to teach much:
to j)reach. Now generally re-
place<l by mail. Kx. : Mdiiynntf
to preacii.

The reduplication ot a bisyllabic root or the tirst two syllables of a pr»ly-
syllabic mot inleiisilics plurality with imi'j roots. This same construction
with inn roots indicates <liminutives. M<i(/ roots a<ld (in {han) to express
<liminutives or i'e«'iproc:d verbal acti(»ns, which have to be distinguished
by the context, meaning, etc. Ex.:

To think. Mn<i'i/iji. yfat/isip'tsip, U) think

dee}»ly; j)rof()und.Iy.

To me«litate. Mmin'thni, M<if)nil(jyn'ilaii, to me<h-

tate j)rof«»undly. Mnu'ilat/ )ta ti'ivo^
ji consi«lerate person. Mnn'ifat/.
also means to lisli. J\ininilat/int,
a fishing canoe.

To fnllnw ; to obey, Sii nniiiOil. MiKjsiinods'iUHKl^ tO foUow

in rapid siMjuence (many).

1 \' \'i). boots which may admit the idea <»f more or less take an addi-
tiunjil rcp.-tiiion <»f the tiist syllable to signify intent or ])lurality. If tlie
entire ro(»t be repeatt-d the ]>lnrality is intensilied. Hootsof threeor more
^\ llables repeat only th«^ two lir^t, according' to the general rule in Taga-
l^-^r. V.\.\ y<n;siis>iiii/><i 'i/:n s'l Ic'ijtldlx'ihai/ L(f {\ have cursed my neigh lx)r
many times). Xti'j.^iis)ii,tit<isninjn't <thn s<i InpidhaJuui ko (1 have cursed
[slan<le)cdj my nei'jhbor times without munber).

\>>) .l/'/y and the (jdublcd root in certain cases signify the perfonnanct*
of an act and it<^ opp«'>iie. N'nbs e\]>i«'-sinLr an unsteady motion orcpiick
change iA jm. sit ion are also fornnMl in a similar manner, (c) In the present

TAGALOG LANGUAGK.

183

tenj^e nag may be dropped, being
syllable of the primitive root. Some

To pase.

To go or come out.
To tarn over.

To stagger; to reel.

To shift about; to chanfje mntimi-
allv; to turn over continuallv.

To wander alniiit aimlessly, (inn).
To stagger.

To tiptoe about; to walk on tiptoe?j.

To l>end over.

To move (r).

To walk with the head on one sidt

replaced l»y the reduplicated initial
xirn verbs^ have this lorin also. Ex. (6) :

DuntfUDi. }f(u/diuni, to \)Sl<s many
times or by many. Mrujdiiaudadn,
to ))ai?s and repass many times.
Dinniiht, a made road. />/ nuulan-
71(1 If, irnpa.ssible. Mnkaraan^ to be
able to j)a.«s. Maifparuan, t<> allow
to pasH Ex.: Pnmanin mo ak6
( 1 et m e pasH ) . Ilin di ho para rani) hi
haui/an dl mo ako bibi(f'/dn namj
kavnfinfj tuhi<f (I will not let you
pass until you give me a little
watiT). Ihian also means '*hun-
dre<l,

LuDiahd.'i. Maglafms, to take out.
Miujl(dtan/(fhas^ to go out or come
in (many times) .

Magbalif/fod. Ma(jhnid>ali(itad, to
turnover. Ex. (c): Babalibaligtad
antj ntaf/ sakit ,sa hiltignn (the sick
man is turning over and over in
be<l).

Miujbalhmlx'd'nKj. Ba balingbd I in g
ynnini tdno, that man yonder is
reeling. Magpapa<jbaHng}H\l'mg, to
be staggering from walking, etc.
Ex. : Pi)i(ipagb(fba/in<fb('iH/Hj mo akd
mtng pag}i(iii((p na igd (I am ready
to fall from looking for you. Syn.
Mng)>aring}Hding.

Magbil{mfbHi)ig. Ex. : Blbi/ingbi/hTij
inaitdin siga (he is shifting about).
/iibi/ingbl/ing an;/ l6ob ko ( I have
my d(Hibts). BlbUlngblUng ang
mng sakil s<i fiihigdn (the sick man
is twistiui: an<l turning in bed).

Stim n/liigsnling. SKsnUngfii'dliig ,*tigd
(he is wandering about Mindessly ).

Magsfinii/st'i rag, Snsitragsu rag sigdf
( Is he staggering'.') Opd, finglasing
ag stfsnr(n/i<''irag knng Inmdkad (yeS
sir, a drunken man staggers when
he walks) .

Tnni'md. Magt'tadtiad, totiptoe about
nuicli. Tttiadttdd akd (I am walk-
ing about on my tiptoes).

Cntdkod. Magdkod, to l)en<l over
much. Madkod, to be bent over.
M'lgukaddkod, to walk bent over
or wavi'rinjrly. Cnkoddkotf sig'f
( lie walks bent over) . lukodnkod
ginnig iiHif'indd (that o|«l pers<»M
walks lialtinjzly) .

K'linibn. Mdgklh'ikibd, to movi.'

ninch.
Magkilingkdmg. hjang hnld^g kiki-

To wa]»ble (c). Kumtndntf. Magkindaykinday, to

wabble much. Syn. Magkinding-
k hiding.

V. Mag is also used to V'Xpress pergonal actions which may Ik* dual ur
plural in character, reciprocity or mutuality bein^ implied. If the plurality
IS to be intensitied, the root is repeated, Ful)jeit lo thejjreneral rule for jxjly-
gyllabic roots. Kx.:

To quarrel; to light. Magbalmg. ^ing pa gba bag ^ the &ctoi

(luarrelinji. Mdjmghahag, quarrel-
some jierson. A)tg huhtigiu, the
[»ers<>ri (juarreled with.

To a.ssemble (purposely.) M(tgpn/oug. Ex.: Xagpupulong dug

)(idiT^j('l iinigiutni Sd bayau (the
"principales" of the town are
a.^semblinj;). An'> *nig p'umgpn-
loiTi/dn kuitilnf (Whv have tiiev
met?) Aug ip'niagjtnlong idhVy
itdng ])dgt(sdf>dii ang j/dgdating
tidiig gobi'niddor-gtnerdl (The pur-
pose <>f their meeting; wad to talk
over the coming of the governor-
^enrral ).

To as.semV>lc; to meet (purposely). Mngt'ipon. Tnintpoit^ to join (one).

}fdg/:dtlftoii, to meet or assemble l>y
cluuwe (as a street crowd). Ex.:
Xdgkdlip'ui a tig mniT-jd tduo sa bn-
//(////;«> (S<»mei»eoi)le have happened
to meet in my house). Aug kdti-
pioutit, the a,'^st'nd)]y. Also tlu'
poj)ular name of the well-known
revolutionary society, the K. K. K.
Ex.: Ang pindgkdkatipiman inmg
iiidiTgd nHirio'dnong ( Tlie meeting-
]>hni; (tf tlie learned people — i. e.,
of lcarne<l societies, etc). Ifint-jg
kdiig suifidnuiU hlinli itdbabaguy >a
Isdiig fbtldgdug }>ntndrooN m piriaf;-
kokatipunan nang viai'dining lulaki
(l>t) n<»t accomj>any [him, lier, or
thiMii] because it is not proper for
a ^'iil lo go where there is a meet-
ing of many men).

Other verbs <.f this nature, all of which have been mentioned before, are
indgliiird/dg, to se[>arat«' mutually; nidg/ti.^dn, t<» associate; magkit/i, to see
ea< h other; iiid-i.«iind, to ae«'<Mnpany each other; waghilo, to argue; and
iiid[iiisii p, to <(i|i\ t'lst^; Im litiifate.

\'l. The di>lin(tinu lutwren plurality, inti'nsity, etc., and mutuality,
reci[>ro( ity, etc., i^ .^nmetimes made by a ihange ot" accent. Ex.:

To approach (one i. Luim'tpit. Mdglapil, to draw near.

M<igld/>i(y to ajiproach mutually.
Md/dpH, near. M<ib'ipit siya sa akin
{ lie is a relative of mine).

Tol-.(»kat. Kinnild. Mdgkild, to look at each

other. Mdgkitd, to look at many
things; or to look at intently.

VI I. M'lg verbalizes reciprocal action- <>f m nature admitting com[)etition
r»r nvalrv, provided that ii«> special emphasis is }>laced upon the conten-

4 I.""..

TAOALOO LANOUAOE.

185

To become reconciled (two).

Tostir, mixingataametime; to shake.

Maghatl (also to epeak in a friendly
way ) . Magpabatif to become recon-
ciled (many).

Humaib. Ang haloing what shaken;
stirred. Maghald^ to mix two (or
more ) things together. Ang ihald,
what mixed, ^n^/ia/oan, the mix-
ing place, etc. Ang hinaldy what
shaken (past). Ang ihinald, what
mixeii (past).

VIII. Voluntary reciprocal actions of certain classes are also conjugated
with mag prefixecf to the root and an {han) {nan) suffixed. Ex.:

To mock; jeer at.

To suffer; to endure.

To kick.

ToCOIBB.

1*0 help; to aid (another).

Magbird, Maabiroan, to mock each
other. Makipagbiroany to mock
greatly'; to jeeratanothorviciously.
nirobirbf mapagbir6y j>alabir6t all
stand for degrees of being a jester,
etc. Magjyalabirdy to jest with a
good deal. Tduong hirdj an incon-
siderate i>er8on.

DumalM, Magdalitaany to suffer for
each other, or mutually. Magpa-
kadaiidalitdy to suffer intensely.
Mawt^dalitd^ sufferer. Kadaliiaan,
puftenng. I)i madaUtd, intoler-
able; insufferable.

Sumikad. Magnikady to kick much.
Magsikarany to kick each other.
Manikady to ki(;k habitually. Also
inagsumikady to work with rapidity.
Synonyms for kicking: Tuma-
dyaky magUidyak, viagiadyakan,
tumindaky magtindaky magtinda-
kan,

Sttmumpd. Ang ^umpain, who or
what cursed. Aug istimpdy the
reason or cause of cursing. Mag-
sumpdf to curse much; also many
at same time. Ang pagsumpainy
who or what cursed thus. Ang
ipagsiimpdy the cause or reason for
cursing thus. Magsvimpanny to
curse each other. Manumpdy to
curse habitually; also to take an
oath. Ang paiasnmpd, the habit-
ual curser; also the witness. Ang
panunumpd, habitual cursing, or
the oath taken. Ang panumpaany
the person administenng the oath;
also the place. Ang ipunumpdy
the testimony given; also wnat
sworn habitually.

Tiimulong. Magtulong^ to help
another much. Sfagtulongany to
help each other. Mannlong, to
help another often. Manulongan;
magpanxdongauy to help each other
much or often. Ang katulong, the
aid; assistant; helper.

1S(> TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Tonse in.'^iiltint; or iiulecent language; MatjtinTijayao. Magtuuijayauan^ to
to sav f*ucli wonls. abu^^e eat'h otiier thu^. Manuiuj-

(I'/do, to alnifie or insult thus con-
tinually or habitually. Mapag-
tiuTt/tii/'in, alniser; insulter.

Ainon^ other verbs of this <lcf^cription may be cited nuigkngatdn, to bite
t'ach otijer; ifiagihif/dn, to like eacli otlier; nmgjhihHtn^ to cudgel each
other; inngsintdhni), to love each other; iitiigsmionin, to follow each other;
and )N'(g(anan'tn, to lau<rh at ea<h other. All of these have l)een mentioned
before.

IX. In tlie use of mag to verl)alize actions admitting reciprocity, care is
necessary in noting tlieir nature and tlie intent and j)urf>ose for which the
actions may bi* executed, as there are local differences in this respect.
Reciprocal verbs reipiire an object which returns tlie action. (A) Thus,
mug prelixed and an sutiixed with a root which admits competition
expresses rivalry. (B) If the action riM|uires an object and rivalry is to
V>e expressetl, the sullix (in should be rei)eated.

To jump. Lfnif'fls,]. Maglokuf't, to juni]) much

or by many. Mng/okstthan, to junij)
in com}>etition. (This verb has
already been explained. )

To look. Tninii7i}iu. MagtiiTghi, to look at

nuich (►r by many. Mdgt'uTij'nuin,
to look at each other. (Hereto-
fore explained.)

To jjush; to shove off ( as a boat ) . Tnmnhik. Magtulahy to ])Ush hard

<>r l>y many. Mnglulahhi^ to]>ush
:i«:ainst each other. MagfaUihnxui,
to i>ush in rivalry or competition.

X. ,V'/f/ and tlie reduplicati'd root form intensive reci]»rocal verbs which
can only be distinguished from «limiiuUives, verbs of feigning, mockery,
imitation. <'tc., by the context. ,\s usual, polysyllabic roots re|)eat tlie
lirst tw<» syllables onlw Ivx.:

To (Mubrace. }'tiin('t/:(ij>. MaggaLap, to embrace

each other; to tie up to a j)ost.
MnggnLtipgnLtf/KDt, to tuid)race
each other warndy; also means
"to end)ra<H* a little, to pretend to
end)race. to imitate embracing."
etc.

Other verb^ aln*ady cited are ntdgdlxil'thfilan, to reach many things; to
]»ass many things from hand to ban«l, etc.; iiingh(tti'Uio(irnii, to send to each
otber. elr.. an<l inngtiiTiiint'nT'giiKfii, to look at each other closely; to pretend
to j. »ok. et<".

.\ 1. .\</'/ Uiay also be iiilixeil with nuig. forming //<'//M/rf</, the j>article thus
made iinpartiuir \\\v idea ..f great }»lurality when prefixed to a root. PLx.:

To (•< inverse. ^!it</i'i.<iij>. Mumjtigu.vtji^ to converse'

I as a gr«'at crowd).

XII. Ixoots uitli iiKi't may 1m- us«d liotb with and without an object, the
UH^uiing \ai'\ing more <>r U's^ in >urb «a>e>. V.\.:

T«) divide into 4'(|iial parts. Ii(ini<ili<igi. Maghiihagi haga! Dis-

perse I Mitglmht'uji higo Tiiloiig sa-
lii()i (divide this money).

XIII. Movement caused l»y an outside ai^ency is expressed by mag. As
uill be ri'n]end»ered, self-niovement is expressed by inn (l*ar. XI, vm).
If'imam/n, to pull out, take out, etc., is an I'xcej'tion to the rule. Ex.:

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 187

To fell tree?; to blow trees down (as Mmj^mnl. .l/i^/)?/^///), the tree felled,
the wind). Aixj ilmnl, the person ft'lling, or

wind. Anijhtt(i/a)i,i\\{^]Aiice. Antj
P'lmudl, the instruiiient, i. e., ax.

To part from another; to j^o to a dis- lAunm/o. Lmnaifd, to remain left far
tance. away (l)y another). Ma<jJ(f}fo, to

part (two) J also to remove any-
tlnng to a distance. Mahnjo, dis-
tant; far.

To ri.se (voluntarily, as a bird). Tuiik'iuh. 3/a7/(J</.*?, to raise; toliftup.

M<it''ms, high; tall; noted, KdUvi-
san, height. KntaasOtdsai). ex-
treme height.

Among other verbs of like nature, which have alreaily been explained,
are //ia^/a/^s, to take away; tnafjh'i/tif, to draw Fometldng near; viaij/Kint'nn/,
to take f>r let anything downstairs or a ladder; ifunjp'ifflnk, to take any-
thing upst aire or up a ladder, etc.; mafjsilld, to juit anything in or into;
magtnyOf to si't up; and iiKK/finffitf, to stand anything U})right.

XIV. Bodily voluntary actions affecting one's self only, or thi>se per-
mitted to be done, are expressed with vnn;. Tlmse actions of like nature
performed upon another take run (Par. XW, dm). Ex.:

To whip one's self (as in penance). }f(i(/l(anip''i.'<. Jfunitnnjtas, to whip

anotJHT. MfKfjuiJuiinpns^ to allow
one's self to be whipj>ed, etc. Pn-
hantj/is, to consent to be whipjK'd.
Ex. : IIotuHj kiuiij itnltiimpiUsa shtO'
in'in («lon't letanyone whip you).

Other verbs following this rule are fully explained in T*ar. XIT under
nm.

XV. As has been noted 7nfi;j expresses for the indetinite the idea of los-
ingcontrol, as ?///< expresses the idea of a<(|uiring the same. What is lost
control of is ex])res.sed in the deliuit(» with /', coml)ined with in for the
pa.^t and other tenses where necessary. For the aid of the memory it
inav be said that verbs of throwing away, tli rowing at, etc, sowing, scat-
tering, pouring out, nnxing, })lacing, jutting, giving, and selling follow
this rule. Ex.:

To throw away. M'i(jf(i//(in. (-Vlrea<ly exj)laine«l.)

To throw or dash down. MtujIu'tliKj. (Alrea<ly explained. )

To throw at (as with a rock). MtKipnkoL An[i piill'm^ what thrown

at, or stoned. Aikj ijjnLu/l^ what
thrown.

To throw at; to pelt. }f<vi}t'i'iin. Ex.: y(n/h(n/i.'< nko naiuj

haf'f (I threw a intone).

To throw up (much). M(n/stiL<'t. ^Snmnha, to throw up.

To scatter rice seed. Mat//iifi<i/:. .\f(ntli<isil:, to sow nuu'h

rice thus or by many working to-
gcth( r.

To scatter in the air; to emit. Mdfjsn/nhi'ilat. Aikj l.tmnln'i/dl, what

scatterecl, as grain, etc. Smntnn-
hnhtf, to scatter. disj>erse, as a
crowd of its own voliiinn. ,1/'/-
iitiiiihi'ilnt. to scatter much, either
by inside nr outside agency.

To scatter seed. Majsahmj. (Already explained.)

Svn., nioiiii aliif. Manlnlnf,:\\Tv'M\\
set forth: means to spread, prop-
agate'.

To transplant. Mni/pinihi. Mmitannn, to plant, to

set out (already explained).

188 TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

To scatter. MagbulagBak. (Already explained.)

To break up; scatter (as parts of a Maguxuak.

house torn down).
To pour out. MagboM. Ang boMn^ what poure<l

into. Ang ibobd^ what poured
out Syn., maghuhos (already ex-
plained).
To pour out ; flhake out (not liquids). Maghohd. Ang ihohd, "what poured

or shaken out, as grain, etc.
To saturate with water. Maghmik, var. magbaygak.

To mix. Maghaid. (Already explained.)

Syns., magsahog; maglnhok. Lu-
mahokj U) join.
To stew; to boil meal, etc. Maglugao. AngUuaao^ the material.

Ang limugaOj the mush; stew.
Ang lu//auan, the stewpan, etc.
To put wooil on the fire. Magg&tong^ also to stir up the fire.

Magpiujdion^, to ask that the fire
be stirred up. Makig&tong^ to ask
for a few coals to start a fire. Ang
igdlong, the poker, etc. Ang
gaiongin, what burned. Ang ga-
iongan^ the place.
To place. Maglagay. (Already explained.)

To put in the sun. Maglnlad, (Already explained.)

To place in layers, etc. MagmUong. (Already explained.)

To give. Maghigay. ( Already explained ) . )

To present with; to make a gift. Magbiyaya. (Already explained.)

To grant; to give. Magkal6oh. Ang ijtagkaldobf the

grant.
To give; primarily, to hand to an- Maagdtuid, Gtimditac/, to stretch out
other by reaching out the arm. the arm in order to reach soine-

thinj|. ^4?iflr^aMarm, what reached.
Angigdnaa^ what given or handed
over. Ang iginduadf what was or
has been given, etc.
To sell. Maghili. (Already explained.)

To sell goods. Maglakd. Maglaki, to peddle from

town to town. Ang ilako, what
sold. Ang ilakd, w'hat peddled
from place to place.
To trade on a small scale; to sell at Magutay. (Alr^uly explained.)

retail.
To sell at cost. Magdmot. Ang ipagdmot, what sold

at cost.

Verbs of *' permitting, sending, restoring," etc., also follow the ma</ an<l i
conjugation. Ex.:

To permit. Magiuht. .in^^i/ii/of, what permitted.

To send; to remit. Ma/jhatid. (Already explained.)

To restore. Magmoli. (Already explained.)

XVI. Being of like nature, verbs of "speaking, relating, telling," etc.,
are conjugate<l bv mag in the indefinite and i in the definite. A few% how-
ever, have um with i for the object. Ex. :

To tell; narrate; report. MngmUtd. (Definites, already ex-

plained.)

To re|X)rt; to announce; to tell the Magbalitd. Ang ipinagbalUd^ the
news. news announced or reported; also

the cause or means (past tense).

TAOALOO LANGUAGE.

180

To converse (two).

To converse (two or more).

To speak; pronounce.
To explain.

To speak in a low tone; alt^o to mut-
ter; grumble; talk about another
in absence, etc.

To ask; to inquire.

^iug ]>i7Wf/halitam}^ the persc^n to
whom told, etc. (past ten.se).
Mak'imaiUd, to ask for news.

Magmbi. Totalk (one),/?yn//ff.'>i. To
talk much, rnagsuh'i. (This verb
has already l)een explained.)

Magi'iMip. (Already explained.)
MatTjjuftaf), to talk. Ex.: Mnkn-
ftfiiTj/H,s(f]t knf (Can you talk?)
Hindi fid makaiKnHjustap.^ (Can't
you talk?)

Magirikii. Hindi ktt nimrik'd (I can
not pronounce it).

}fa(fsalntff<tiif. ( A Iready explained. )
Another won! is riKUfmiiHag^ which
with inn has also the meaiiinjj of
to arrange, as the hair of another,
and with vmg to arran^'e some-
thing for one's self, as the hair,
etc. Kx. with 7//'/..- Hindi lo ma-
nmjuay (I can not explain it).

Maghvlong. Kx. : May ihidndung ako
sn iifo (1 have .«amething for your
ear only).

TtniKtnnitg. Magtamntg, toa»skaV)OUt,
or concerning. A)tg (anowjiny the
}>erson questioned. Kx.: Sinoung
iiiHwong mo/ (Whom did you ask,
or of whom did you incjuire?)
A ng itanoiig, what asked. A no ang
itiiKimnig mo (what did you in-
quire).

Mngaiii'ix. Kx.: fnnuit mo (tell it
gently).

Mn<f.«)imhon</. Mapogsnudjong, tat-
tler.

Moghnld. Aug ih'dd, what said.
Midmlo la (say something). Ba-
fxdnditi uio II ug )n(u7gi'i ('h'o nilo
(notify the ])eoj)le of this). It
should be noted that the definite
here takes an extra h<i.

MnghAnnl. Aug iin'mnl, what forbid-
den. Aug hdindon, the person to
whnm something may be forbid-
den. Aug pagffnhaiud, the act
of f«)rl lidding (j)resent tense).
Iiii,~/,iiig lnhiid, forl)idden fruit.

XVII. 3fa^ prefixed to rof)ts sJLrnifyinir nations, races, conditions, etc. ,
means to behave to s»>me degree as the root si^'iiities, but if a complete
assimilation is to l)e implied, the particle ///(//./ (po/d) is used. Kx.:

To speak gently.

To tattle.

To say something; accuse, denounce,
notifv.

To forbid.

To be somewhat Americanizefi.

To be quite Hispanicized; to be like
a Spaniard in some ways.

Magnintricftuo. Kx. : Xngnitnwricdno

aigi'i miiig dnmit (he [she] is <juite

Americanize<l in dress).
}fngrti:<td(i. Xngrnrnsfi/tf ^iln )ning

as(d (they are <|nite Spanish in

custom).

XVIII. (a) Mag, with natural objects, ^iL:niti(^•< to produce them: CO
with artificial objects, to mak(^ them; ('•) with articles <>t barter, to trade

190

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

or sell them; (d) with e<lible thines, etc., to eat them; (e) with property,
to pofleessfl it; (/) with names of relatives, to know how to act toward them;
ana (g) with the possessive pronouns, to have:

Ex. (a):
To put forth leaves (as a tree, etc. ).

Ex. (/;)•
To build a house.
To maki* Km p.

Ex. (r):
To sell or trade rice.
To sell or trade unhulled rice.

Ex. {d):
To sell c»r eat pickled fish.
To eat fruit or to sell it.

To eat or fi«ell fish.

To eat or sell ejips.

To eat bananas or to sell them.
To drink chocolate.

To U8e tobacco.

Ex. (t):
To have property.

To have auvthing of one's own.

Ex. (/):'
To know how to treat a father.

To know how to treat a child, i. e.,
how to be a jro4:»d parent.

Ex. ig):
To have as yours.
To have as theirs.
To have as mine.

yfagfln/urti. Also means to put the
food on leaves, as when out of
doors. Ang tagapagdcUwn^ the
cook. Ang dahonan, the eating
place thus.

Magbnhay. ( Already explaineil. )
Afagsabdn, (Already explained).

Maglnpds. (Already explained. )
Magpalmj. Ex.: Magpdlay ka nang
pulot (trade palay for some honey ).

Magbagoon.

Miighunga. £x. : Naglmbunga fiyd
(she is selling fruit).

yfagisdd. Ex.: Nngiitdd sila (they
are selling fish). Umisdd^ to have
fish once more in a river or creek,
etc. Ihigmi'tRdd ngay/in sa ilog
(there are fish now in the river).

Magiilog. Ex. : Nagiitlog ttiyd (she is
selling eggs).

Magfi^ging. f Already explained).

MagnciilcUe (from >iex.-Sp., chitco-
late; from Nahua( Aztec), cAooo/a(/,
choco, cAcao; and Uitl^ water).

Magtahaco (from Sp. and originally
a West Indian word).

Magart. Mcuxri, landowner. -Irta-
rtan, small farm; also household
furniture.

Mag^ar'dx.

Maganui. Ex.: Si Jvan ay maalam
magamd (Juan knows how to treat
a father [i. e., how to be a good
son ] ) . Sfagamd also means father
and child.

Mngamik. Ex. : Si Juan ay mariinong
maganak ^Juan knows liow to treat
a child [i. e., how to be a good
imrent] ). Also child and parent

M<xgiy6.

MagkanilA.

Magakin.

XIX. Words signifying articles of wearing apparel may be verbalized
with mag to express the wearing of the same. Ex.:

Mirror; (2) spectacles; glasses. Salamin. 3/d^«a/amln, to look in the

mirror; (2) to wear glasses or spec-
tacles. Ang mlaminan, what seen
in the mirror.

Trousers. Salaviol. Ma^Mlawal^ to wear tron-

sere.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 191

Hat. t'^ainUililo (from Span, sombrero).

}fafjsainhalilo, to wear a hat (occa-
sional 1 V ) . }fa na m halilo, to wear a
hat habitually.

Shoe, sandal. Supin. M(u/.'<ap'n}, to wear shoen;

alyo to line.

Apron. Tdftl^. ^f<^(/tap^)(, to put on or wear

an apron.

XX. 3fa</|renerally governs all Spanij?h, Englit»h, and other foreign words
not incorporated into the language. Ex.:

To play baseball. Mwjhfshol. Kx.: Xaghehesbol anq

inaiTija hata (the boys [children^
an» playing l)a:sel)all.)

To gamble. }f(njh(ir/al (iroui^pan.jufjar). Sugal

in the u.sual term. lAtro is the na-
tive word and means, like the
Spanish, either to play or togamble.

XXI. Roots denoting officials may take iiukj to expre.^ the discharge of
duties jxTtaining to the office named. Kx. :

To be governor. MiKjgoberixuUir.

To be mayor (nresidente). Mn<jitreni(hnk.

To l>e a councilman. Mdganm'jnJ.

To be secretary. M<t(/semtnrio.

To l>e treasurer. MagtcMtrero.

To \ye prosecuting attornt^y. MdijiiacaL

XXII. -Va//, prefixed to abstracts iK^ginning with ka and ending in lui,
^signifies to do what is expressed by the al)stract. Such wonls are used
c>nl\'in the infinitive, and should be j'learly distinguished from tliose roots
prefixed bv the particle mofjkd, which lack the suffixed an witfi the in-
definite mfinitive. Ex.:

To do deeds of virtue or justice. Mayhdimlnn (from hthanalnn, virtue,

justice).
To do right. Mugkatfinm (from katmrati^ right,

justice ). Ex. : Ilnto/tni niosihi naitg

httninin (Advise them what is

right).
To act chastely or in a cleanly man- Ma(/knli)timn ( from Aa///u,sa//,cleanli-

ner. nessi.

To l.>ehave obscenely. M<i<iknliahiiidii (from knlialaiiart, o\)-

sccuity ).

XXIII. With adjectives formed by prefixing um to the root, }n<t<i signi-
Hes to assume or Ixiast of what is expressed l)y the adjective, if the mean-
ing permits such assumption or boastiiiir. \n some cases utag means to
r^egard as signified by the adjective. Ex. :

To boast of good judgment. MagnKilmit. Ex.: yngnunmthdlt .v/

Juan (.luaii boasts of his good
judgment [•)r |rudence]). Ma-
hait, judiiioiis, prudent.

Xo boast of knowledge. Magma n'nuaaj. Ex.: Xagmamara-

))ong .V* .b/'//v.>< (Andrvs l)oasts of
his kno\vlc<lgr). Marunong, wise,
leariie<l (Irnm (fihimig). Karuno-
iT>ja)i, wisdom, knowle<lge.
To boast of beauty. Magmarikif. K.\.: \agniamarikit si

Biaiajof/ (Maria boasts of lier
l^eauty). Marikit, ])retty (fn)m
(fikit). Dumikit, to grow pretty.
Mitndikit to hi'Hiitifv.

To l)(»a^^t (»f elegance, l)eauty. Ma-imaiiaml'i. K\.: Xa<jmamafjandd

.<i Lolmnj, Dolores (Lola) ix>avSta
of her elegance; beauty. Ma-
'jcni'fi'i, elegant, l>eautiful. Ka^jnn-
(l'(h<in, elegance, beauty.

Ti) Ijoast of V>ravi'ry; t»» swagger. Mnijiniiii'iiifinij. Kx.: yafjmatafmng

si FdHstiifo (FauHtino l)<)asted of
bis bravery; or Fauntino swag-
gerc'l). MntnjHinff, brave. KfiOi-
jtniTi/nH, l)ravery.

XX1\'. If an action docs not admit of boasting, 7/^/1^ used witb a »/'f
adjective tlenotes l)econiirjg, growing, etc., wbat may be signified by the
adjective. The definite ]»arti«'le in is generally suttixed to the roots in
these cases, l^x. :

To become forgetful. M'l'/indli/nolin. Jjtnihnnt, to try to

forget. ,Ur//yf//mo/. to forget. Ma-
/'nnot, forgetful. Aikj iKilintohui^
what forgotten. Maliliuintiji, a for-
getful person. Knlhnotnu, forget-
lulness.

To grow intirm. Mfu/)iiasal:t'in. Ex.: Xaff/ttanuhvikthi

.V////J (He isgrowing intinn). JAf//
sfthif, to be ill. Mosanaktiny an in-
tirm, sickly })erson. Smnuk-H, to
feel pain anywliere. Antj finL'ttaii,
thesentof jiain. (See Par. XXVI).

XX\'. N'erbs with ma^/ are ma«Ie diminutives by repeating a bisyllabi*-
root or the first two ot a longer one, and sulBxing an, /«//j, or nan, as
refiiiired. ]]\.:

To write a little; t<» s<'ribl>le. Ma'jsnfntsn/titini (from .<nlat.). (Al-

rea<ly used).

'J'o cry a little; t<» snivel. M'liiiiinliiiakdit (from itf(tk). Ex.:

S'lff/iil/dhiifiih'du iijnnf] ln'itang It/niiy
that chil<i is sniveling.

To nibble. MfKfl.niithiithDL (Already used. )

XXVI. The >ame form as the above also signilies feigning, imitation,

mockery, {►layin;^'- at, etc lloth these antl those mentioned in Par. XXV

can <inly be .ii>iing(iishe<l by the context from intensive reci]irocal verbs

fmnie'l in the >ame way. (See Par. X).

To affect \ii(ne, i. e., to play the .\ffn;h<fii(}il)ntHiI(in iiromlKnntl). Ex.:
hyj'ocritr. \(it/hft/i(tiKi/f/aii<(/an Kit/a (He is a

hypocrite).

To I'lay at liiiiMiiiir liouv^v^ (as chil- M<n/l,i{lifn/h<(fnn/nii (from bnhau).
<ben ). ( Alrea'ly nse<L )

'J'o play at bitm.: (iisdogs). M'i<;L(iija(Ln//al(iu {inmi Lnijot). (Al-

rca<iy used. )

To malinger; feign illness. Mai/s<tLit.«i/.ifait (from sahit). Kx,:

.\it<is(is<t/:i(s(il:i(<in h(t (you are ma-
lingering).

To tem]>t a little or to pretend to .\[fiiffii/:s<>fii/:snh(iii (from fukso).
tempt. ( I scd iM'fore. )

To sham insanity. Min/ii/nhi/nhn, (from nhil). Vmnlul,

to <lri\ e another crazv. Mnnhd. to
l»e« (»me insane. Anfi ikauhil, the
cause of in.'^anitv. KauItiUni, in-
sanity.

To feign <leafncss. yj > i uh'n njil >i iTijilinn {{vorn hbujl). Ex.:

llnuni/ hunrj nHyjhuTjiibirujihan
{ I)on't try to sham deafness).

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

193

To force, oblige, compel.

To exert one's self; to work effi-
ciently.

XXVII. Some urn verbs admit prefixed mn<j, the combination denoting
the action to be executed with earnet^tneHH, endeavor, enterprise, etc.
{h) Some roots with maka also take the prefix dkk/, witli the same signifi-
cation. The infinitive form of the root with utn or muka is always retained.

Ex. (a):

To make haste. Magdumali (from dumalt, to do

quickly). J/df/r///, quickly. }fag'
mmhili, to do something quickly.
(Idiom,) yfagdumal'mg arao, a
short while.

M'lgp'dit. In Manila, />w//</7<7. Mag-
pfuiiUit, to emieavor.

jfdgsnk'd. tSnmahtf to oblige another
to work; to use force toward an-
other. Mngsumakit^ to exert
greatly for the carrying out of an
object. Kx.: Aug tavoug nagsuffu-
vinkit matutii mnig jnnhuhuting
kaasalan, og igagiUmtg imug Inhat
(the man who exerts himself
greatly to learn good manners will
be respected by everyone). {Sn-
mnkit regarded sa* a new root. )

}fa gsn 111 n 110(1. ( A 1 read y e x ]d a i n ed . )

Mngmnk(i<m{\. ( Alrea<ly used. ) See

Magma kahigd (from makahigd, to
make ashamed). Kx.: Bdkd mo
ipinaginamakahigd ang maiTfjd ma-
gi'dangf (What is the rea.*«on you
cause so much shame to vour
])arents?) Walang kind, without
shame, shameless. (See Par. \'l,
under ma.)

Magmakaamoamo (from r/mo, idea of
placating). Ex.: Xagmamakaa-
moamd ang tanong iln fa ingo (This
man is supj>licatingyou). yl///o is
generally re<luplicated, and it will
be Si^en tiiat makaannKuuo is re-
garde* 1 as a new root, the nm of
maka being reduphcated for the
present tense.

XXVIII. 3/a,7also forms nouns indicating ])lurality, totality, an*! agency,
^hich have l>een u-sed many times heretofore. The article is usually pre-
lixed to the compound word. Mag is the antithesis (or o])posite in mean-
ing) of ita, which limits the idea to unity.

XXIX. Mag prefixed to noun roots which are generally used with tlie
dual sense denotes such duality without the use of maiTtja or other particles,
Anhich rather indicate plurality. Kx.:

To follow closely, etc.

To l>e able to move to compassion. (6)

To be able to shame greatly. (/>)

To he able to placate another; to
supplicate. (/> )

The married couple, the husband

and wife.
The brothers-in-law (two).
The two enemies.

The parents; ancestors.

Aug magasaiLa. Maga^ana, to marry.

(See also Par. XV, under man.)
Ang niagbagao.
Ang ntagan'dif. MngawagA*^ quarrel

with each other.
Ang nnigi'dang, from gi'dang. Kagn-

laiTf/an, ancestry, descent, (iurna-

lang, to grow old.

6855-05-

1.3

XXXI. If i>Iiirality is to be indicated with words poinetimes uj*ed in the
dual sense, ka is reihiphcated. Ex.:

The frientls (several). Ang ifuigkaknihlga)!.

The eompanions (several). Amj miUjkaknHnma.

XXXII. Correlative novms are expre.ssed with hukj prefixed to the root
of the prineii)al word. (See also Par. X VIII.) Ex.:

Father and chiM. Mdyoma.

Mother and ehil<l. Minjiiu'i.

Father (or inotht-r) -in-law an<l son M'Kjh'Knnin.

(or daiii:hter ) -in-law.
Master and man. MitiipdiTiinimm.

XXX III. If the .second correlative is cxpres.<ed, especially by a proper
nonn, jointly with the lirst. the particle is prefixed to the priQcijjal, the
snl)(»rdinate takinir the ijenitive case. Kx.:

John and his father. Mttiifirnn nl Jmnt.

Jose and his father-in-law. M<u/fii(tn''in ni Joav.

Lola and h<'r inollur. .^fur/iii'i in Lolmn.

XXXIW M'lff denotes totality with some roots of time. Ex.:

The whole niirht; al- night. MfujdniiKui. Kx. : Mihjthimag ahmg

ifitulo'j ( I slept all nijrht ). (iahi is
the nsual word for ni^ht.

TIu» wlmlf day; all day. Maghaimn. Jhi/K>)i alone means the

tinje from n(K)n until dark.

XXX \'. }f'!'/ prefixed to roots conjuj^ated with t(tn and mag forms verbal
nouFis siirnifyin;: the assent. The first syllable of the root is reduplic^ited
and tlie article irenerally used. Ex.:

The thief. Anij nutguoni'dao. (Already used.)

Tiie lalxirer. Aug niagsti.^tikd. Magmka, to work

in the lields.

XXW'l. }f<ig retains /></./ with the definite in certain ca.«e.s, I )ut with
tliex- exee|»ii<»ii-, u liieh ha\(' been pointed out from time to time, the
<leiiniteoi }ii'fg rni)[< follows the .^ame rule as the definite of 7<m. (See I*ar.
1 1, under jxtg. )

T\\\: OlMlMTi: ]».\HTK1.F^ 'TAC."

1. .\s true auxiliary vtMl)S are not found in Ta^'alojr, the participle as-
sumes as many f<irnis as there are tenses, the im[>erative exce|>ted. By
jtretixinu' the artieU' "f eoicuion nouiis, <///f/, "the," or a demonstrative
)»n»uouu tn tlie pr. .juT tense of a verb a particle is formed which may be
tran-latcd in seveial ways. e\eu by a clause in Kn^lish.

J'<'g aud jKigk'i aie eomuiouly nst-d in Tairaloo: where the idea would be
e.\j)res-ed in l-aiL'li-h by the indelinile particle, but the best way to obtain
a cleai' undeistaudim: of the variations to whi«'h Tairalo^ verbal nouns may
be snbjtM-ted is to make a close.' study of the examples following or referretl
to. Kx.:

To die. Miundtmi. Aug jKigkamatayj the SLci

TAOALOG LANGUAGE. 195

To fall. Mahulog. Ang pagkahidog^ the act

of falling.
To eat. Kumain. Ang pagkaiy}, the act of

eating.

II. Pag (definite) corresponds to mag (definite) in certain cases. As a
rule verbs with mag have the same definites as um, except as noted. When
pag is prefixed, in is inserted for the present and past tenses, forming
pinag. Pag only is prefixed for the imperative and future tenses, in being
puffixed at the same time. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated
for the present and future tenses. (See the tables. )

III. Pag sometimes expresses place in combination with suffixed an,
where an alone is used to expre.^^s the i>ersnn who may bt^ the object of the
action. {See hana pan und paghauapan, Par. V, the definite. )

(h) This rule also applies where the object takes tni instead of in.

To collect; to dun. Sunii^JJ/ll. Aug .niTj/ilan, the unpaid

debt. A iigjtagsiiT(/i/an, the place of
asking for a debt. SlaniiTljll^ to
collect or dun as an occuj>ation or
hal)itually.

IV. The particle pag is also used with the definite when place is directly
expressed in the sentence, but not when iinplie<l or nieta])horically (fig-
uratively). This use of pag, however, is only with those verbal roots which
admit an tor the person or object of tlie action of the verb, and with other
verbal roots pag is not used in this sense, even if place be expresse<l. Ex. :

To bury; inter. Magha'm. Aug j/aghaonan, the buri-

al place. Ex.: JtUmg /)inaghao)uin
)tau<) saiuJalo (This was the burial
I)lace of the soldier).

To endure hardships. Maghlrap. Attgpag}drapai),i\^^^^^^^-

shijts. Kx.: Aug baijang pinaghl-
rapdti iiil'i (The town in which
tliey endure<l the hardships).

To place. MagUtgaij. Ex.: higyan mo nang

ti'ihig lt())ig IxiiTgn (l*ut some water
in tliis vase). Wald aknng pagla-
lagifaii nltong t^idanuu (Tliere will
be no place for me to \)\\{ this mir-
ror).

To embark or travel. tStnnnLdi/. Aug sn kagan or .'tasahg an,

boat or vessel <if any kind, Ex.:
y^'/'// <ing buiiqlung jri nag, '<a.<a kg (in
nang nniranii (This is tiie canoe in
whieh many have embarked).

(/>) See also magpulong, "toassemble," and magtaga, "to elect, set u]*."
\. /''a^ is also combined with / detinite, forming >/>ag, ij/limg, as a ])re-

fix, when the ]»crson for wliom an act i.s jK-rformed is mentioned. (See

Par. VIII, the definite.)

VI. ^\ henever the sentence expresses plurality of acts or a^^ents, or of
feigning or reciprociil actions, pag (an<l ipag when re(|uired) nuL'^t be used
with the definite. The article ang In'ing generally used, gives the com-
pound the idea of a verbal noun in tlie majority of ca.'^es. For examj)les
see Par. IX under the definite.

VII. Pa^; is retained with the deliniie <>f the nnig form when njots
which differ in meaning with nni and nnig are used. See Par. X, the defi-
nite for examples.

VIII. The participle is formed fn»m nnt verbs or root,'^ l)y prelixing j^ag
to the root, the com])ound preceded by the article or its equivalent. The

To teach. Umnral. A)hj jyagaral, the teach-

ing.

To study. Mtujaral. Aug pngadral^ the study-

ing.

To deHcend; to fttsten upon. HxnnCibig. Ang paghulog^ the de-

scending; faj^tening upon.

To throw or da^li down. Mngltnlog. Aug jxighuhulogy the

dashing down or throwing down.

IX. Pag soinetinief^ in<licates the present tense. Ex.: PagsalA kn »n
kauiga (as soon ay 1 told liini).

X. There is occasionally a tone of menace in its use. Ex.: Pnghiudi
niya ptuiunito^y hiitdi ko .v///'/ Jxilnigaran (if he does not come here, I shall
not pay him). "If" is generally understood, the i<lea being a future
condition.

XI. P<ig^ with verl»al roots of some kinds, indicates action as transpiring.
Ex. :

J>ight; clearness. Liin'nKtg. Aug paglirn'magy ihe^row-

ing light (of the day, etc.). Avg
Ihranng iiang arao, the light of day
or of the sun.

XII. For V(?rl)al changes, see tables:

THE INDEFINITE I'AKTICLE ''mA."

I. The indefinite ver})alizing j>article imi is used with roots which do
not recjuire an (»bject when verbalized, or with those verbs expressing
involuntary a<'tion. }fn changes to na lor the past and present tenses.
The Jir.4 syllable of the r(>(>t is retluplicated for the i)resent an<l future
tenses. M(i gi-nerally exj>resses a state or condition of being, but there is
also a possessive idea of "to have,'' and hence many roots are nia<le
adjectiNes when pretixtMl l)y this j)artieU', as is already familiar to the
reader.

II. Such a<ljectives in in<i must exj)ress intrinsic states or conditions,
and states or conditions which mav or can be attained l)v the voluntarv
effort of an agent can lutt be exj^ressed with ind.

III. .\ctii»ii.s which re(|uire an object when conjugated with other parti-
cle>- may be conjugated with )ini if they take j)lace unconsciously or by
cliancM' on I lie part of the agent.

IV. The conjugation of roots with ma {na) has naka and mnka of the
jdnperlVct and future [)erfect resi)ectively replaced by na ami rnci. Xa is
alsn re]>eatcd after the verb in both these tenses. Some roots beginning
witli //soften it to /// after jna. (See tallies for examples.)

V. Aga added tn ma forms the particles nawja and maiajd used to
express plurality when })retixe<l to a verbal root. MaiTija, as ha^ been
seen, is the usual indi<"ation of j)lurality when used as a separate word
hefort; nouns, etc. V.\.'.

To be hungry. Magatmn. Ex.: MciTami iuja ang

iKuTi/agiUititi (many were hungry).
Mara in i wja ang namjag^igutum
(many an? Innigry). Marami iiija
ang maiH/agugnhim (many will ne
hungry). The root is gutuniy the
idea of l)eing hungry.

NT. }fa is used to exi)n»ss actions of an involuntary nature or beyond the
contml (»f the subject. A fi'W anoiualous wonls also take ma. Ex.:

To fall. Malti'ilog. Afig iiahuhgan, the per-

son or object on whom anything

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

197

To fall on the face.
To stumble.

Toslip; to slide (invol.); (adj.) slip-
pery; slimy.

To stick in the throat; to choke.

To lose one's way.
To go astray.

To loose; to miss; to lack.

To die.

To be proi>er or appropriate.

falls aciidentallv. Nahulog myOf
he fell. Ang kahulogan, the place
of falling. Ang kaJnUogilin, the
meaning (range of expression).
A7tg kinahnloaan, the place where
something fell or has lallen. Ang
kinnhuhulogan, the place where
something is falling. Angkahuhu-
logan, the place where something
will fall. (See index for hulog with
other particles. )

Madapd. (Already used.)

Matiatod. Ex.: Natisod ^iga'tnadapd
(he stumbled and fell on his face).
Stian nalisod (ny<yf (Where did
he stumble?) lyang haiong iydn
ang kinatiimr(i7i niyd (that stone
was where he stumbled, or over
which he stumbled.

MadulU; mandas. Ex.: Palakarin
)no »iydng marahan makd marulds
(tell him to go slowly lest he slip).

Mahirbi. Ex.: Nahirinan mjA nang
tinlky (she [he] wa-^ choked by a
fish bone).

Maligdo. Ang kaligaoan, the place
of being lost.

MaJiliis. Lumihisj to be away pur-
posely. Pall ft is daany to go out of
the road for any rea^son.

Manidd. Naindthi ako nang lakds ( I
lost [or lacked] the strength).
Nau'iddii siyd nang loob (he lost
h e^i r t [ o r t h e s p i ri t ] ) . Magwald ,
to get rid of; to flee; to put out of
siglit; to conceal anything.

Mamatay. Ang pngkainntayj the act
of dying. Ang mamataynnj the
mourner; the bereaved. (See Par.
XII, i/t.)

M(d)ngay, ( See index for examples. )
This verb is rather anomalous.

VII. (rt) I 'ncontrollable states are generally conjugated with ma. These
forms are also adjectives in tlie majority of cases. (//) Acts which are
more or leas controllable take the particle most suital)le to express the
degree. If uncontrollable, ma is used. Ex.:

To be anjjry. Magdld. (See index.)

To be cold; chilly. MaghiAo. Also adj. Maginauin^ a

chilly, cold j)ers()n.
To be terrified. Mag(da)tgtaug. Ang ikagaUmgtangy

the cause of being terrified.
To be afraid. Matdkat. Ex.: Natatdkot kaf (Are

vou afraid?) MataUikofm, a faint-

liearted i>erson. (See index.)
To be astonishec'. Magdhd. Ex.: Sagdlntsiydf (Was

he astonished?)
To be hungry. Magdtum. }f(i<pigutumin^ a very

hungry or starved j>erson. (See

198

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

To be ashamed.
To be pleased.
To be sad.
To be f^lad; amused.
To \)e asleep.

Mahbju. Mahihiyitij a bashful per-
son. (See Par. XV, ma.) For
hiyd with other particles, see index.

Malngod. Lumugod, to please; to
recreate. ATi/u^oranjfnend; com-
panion in recreation.

Malumbay, Ex.: Tila nalxdumhay
^'^.v<>t you seem to be sad. (See
index.)

Malud,, Ang katuaarij the person or
object over whom or which one is
pleased or amused. (See index.)

Matulog. Angtuhgan, sleeping place.
MatulogiUf a ffreat sleeper; also
mapaginlog. Tumulogy to go to
sleep; to sleep (little used), ^fag'
iulog, to sleep a great deal. (See
index. )

Mauhao. (Already used.)

Malangis; manangis. (Already used. )

Mataua. Tnmatia, to laugh. 3/ia^
tauaj to laugh (two or three).
MaiTgagtana, to laugh (many).
Magtandf to laugh much. Maka-
taxui or luagpataua, to cause to
laugh. McUauanitif a laughing,
smiling {person.

VIII. Unconscious or uncontrollable states of the mind are expressed
with ma. Conscious or controllable states are expressed with um or mag,
Ex.:

To be thirstv.

To cry; to weep (uncontrollably).

To giggle; to laugh uncontrollably.

To forget.

To forget to do.

Malimot. (Already used.)
Malisan. Lumimtif to omit to do (on
purpose).

IX. (a) Mn {na) is used to express accidental or internal acts of a de-
structive nature, or when reference is made to an actual state of destruc-
tion. l)elil)erate acts of destruction take um or ynag.

To break up; to split up. Mafhili. Ex. : NabaU ang tungkod

(the cane broke). Na&ilimi itiyd
nang pad (he dislocated his foot).
MagfHjllf to break up, to split, as
wood, cane, etc. Ex. : Batiin mo
iyang tnhb't akff y baliannang murUt
(break up that piece of sugar cane
and break me off a little).

To break up (from internal causes Mahamg. Ex.: Nab&9ag ang vom

or accidentally).

To spoil; to become putrid.

To break (int. or ace).

To part; to break in two.

(the glass was broken). MaghA-
sagj to shatter; break up, as glass,
crockery, etc. NagbdJiag siyd tiang
maramiiig vaso (he broke many
glasses [purposely]).

Miihnlik. Ex.: Bnlok na ang iitdd
(the fish is spoiled now). (See
magpa. )

Malagot. Ex.: Malalagoiitong sinu-
//(/(this thread will break). Sola-
got angsinulid (the thread broke).
Mn gin got, to break, as thread; to
tear up, as vegetables, etc.

yfnjxftU. ( A Iready used. )

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 199

To spoil; to be destroyed. Mafira. (Already Uf^ed.)

To burn up. Mammofj. (Already explained.)

To dry out. Matuyo. (See index.)

{h) Sa following the root with verKs of dej^truetion gives the adjectival
idea with "already" or "now." Other actual states are also exj>ressed
with the root and iui\l the contex clearly indicates an actual state ot being.
(See under bawg^ bulok, sira, jHitay^ injnia, tuifo, and i/(iri for examples.)

X. With verbs expressing situation of posture ma (no) indic^ites the
actual state of Ix'ing in such posture or j)()sition, or else the involuntary or
unconscious taking of such ]>osition. Ex. :

To be lying down; to be in Ijed. Mdh'^jd. (Already used; see index.)

To l>e on the knees; to kneel in- Malnfiod. (Already used; see in-
voluntarily, dex.)
To l>e lying on the back. }fat'i}i<itid. (Already used; see in-
dex, )
To Ih* on one's feet. Matiml'nj. (Already used; see in-
dex.)
T» > be seate<l . Maupo. ( A 1 read y use< I ; see i n d i- x . )

XI. Conditions or states reached bv slow transition in most cases or a
return thereto are exj^ressed by rn<i (na).

To l)e deaf. MdhiiTi/i. Kx. : Xnlnbimi'i aina he is

deaf). (See under 7/ia<///i. )

To l)e stuttering. Miujunl. Kx.: y<tfj(ttj(iril sii/a (he is

l>eginningto stutteragain). Mng-
<j(n-il, to stutter; to stannner. (th-
rilin^ stuttering; stammering.

To l>e insane; crazy. M<(nh(l. Ex.: N<iuht/ .vifa {\\ii went

crazy ). Xfi milnl sii/n ( lie is crazy ).
Mnimhd sii/d (he will go crazy).
Xntjiiluhdidiui Hnjd (he was sham-
ming insanity).
To lose the mind (lit., to become Ma/aho. Also adj. turbid; muddy;
turbid). blearetl (eyes); thick (speech).

Ex.: Nn/nlxxui sii/d nmvj jnujiisip
(his mind became clouded).

XII. The use of ma is sometimes governed by reiUJon of the rationality
or irrationality of the agent. Ex.:

Xo be upright. Mataiiu. (Already used; see index.)

XIII. Maka {naka) is sometimes u.^d in place of ma (nn), these parti-
cles having many analogies. (See maka, Par. XIX.)

XIV. Other uses of ma have been explained under the adjective, q. v.

XV. Ma prefixed and ia {Inn, inn) sntlixed to n>< ts signifying mental
amotions, passions, an<l involuntary actions form adjectival nouns, which
l^enerally require to be expressed in l-jiglir^h l)y an adjective and a noun.
ICx.:

A humane person. Maaiiahi {innu and), (See in<lex.)

An irascible person. Mai/a/itln (from f/d/ll, wrath; ire).

A loving person. Madtiqin (from il>i[i). (See index.)

An affectionate person. Mamxi'm (from iro'j, affection; ca-
ressing).

A loving person. M<i.^inla}iin (from amid, love).

An obedient person. Maannarin (Irom ffufiod).

A weeper; a weeping i^erson. MafaiTi/l.'^ln (from tatTj/is).

A smiling pers<.)n. Miilintnuin (from t<nai).

A sleepy person. Mfihi/ot/in (from (dlnrf).

An affectionate person. MatrUihin (from vdi, affection).

XVJ. It" the root admits of contraction, l>eginsi with /, or an inteneive
decree is expressed, the first syllable of the root may be reduplicated.
Ex.:

A V)ashfnl j)erson. Maliihiui (from hv/d). (Root con-

tracts. )

A feverish person. Mobihtgnatin (from lagnfit^ fever).

(L. root.)

A fortretful ])erson. MnUlimotm (from Ihnot^ forgetful-

ness). (L. root.)

A joyful person. }fa/uln(jdin (from lugod, joy; pleafi-

nre). (L. root.)

An intirni, sick person. M(i,s((sahthi (from snkit). (Con-

tracted root.)

A faint-hearted j»erson. Mahitakotifi {(romtakol). (Intensive

degree.)

THK DEFINITE PARTICLES "ma" AND "KA."

I. From the fact that mn verbs do n(»t generally require an object, there
is little use for some forms of the definite. Everv action, however, mav
have a reason, time, or place, and thus / definite and an definite are to l)e
found, ma being replaced by kn as a rule, and always with i definite.

Ka (tn, as has been seen, forms abstracts and |)laces, as well as Ftan<iing

for persons and objects of the action. Ex.:

To be glad; amused. Mdtm). Amj hatuaan, the person or

object over which one is glad, etc.
Any iLdtna, the (^u.^e of gla<lness
or amusement. Ex.: Katnaan mo
(tug ni(t,7f/(i hata (amuse yourself
with tlie children). Kin(Uitaan
ni'ji'i ang nidiTj/a btita (she amused
herself with the chihlren). Kina-
tfifnddn iii/a <wg mcoTlga hntd (they
are atmising themselves with the
cliiMren). Kahihiaan ko ang
nidiTgn f/dta (I will amuse myself
with the children).

To die. Mdnintmi. (See index.)

To be afraid. Mnh'iknt. (See index.)

To j-tiiinble. Mnt'tsod. (See index.)

To be deaf. Mtthiiug'i. Aug ik'ihitTigi, the cause of

deafness. KahitTi/ihan^ deafness.

Tn be l)lind. Mdhnhtg. Ex.: Xahdlagarnnigdnnug

gain (he was l)linded by wrath).
Kiiffiilagfiff, blindness.

To be p'.nr. Mdflnkfia. Aug ikdfhtkhd^ the cause

of po\erty. Kd(fdkhda}i, poverty.
I>>nniikhd, to become poor. Ang
flukhdin, the person becoming
]M»or tlius. (See index.)

To 1)<* niin<'<l (a- in luisinc^s). .\fdhigl, Aug ikalngi^ the cause of

Itfiiig ruined. Ijtnntyi, to decline
(as fi(»m a^e or natural causes).

Tn l)e lame. M(ti»ildi/. Ang ikapilay, the cause of

lauM'ness. Kapilagan, lameness.

T(j taint away; tn swnnii. Mahi/o. K\.: .V/r/i//() .^/i/'' ('''he fainted

a wa y ) . Xfih ih ilo siyd ( she is faint-
in;r away ). Ang kahiloan^ the place.

Tn drop off; tn drop sometliinir ac- Md/ag/dg. Ang kaldglngaUj the pl&ce
cidentally. of drop]>ing. Ang ikalaglag^ the

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

201

To Ixj drowned.

To \)e tired out.

cause. Mnglaglag^ to drop some-
thinjr ])urposel y. A ng ikigJng, what
drop|>ed. Aug laglagan, the place
or the person to whom dropped.
Lirnuiglag, to drop down pur-
posely. Aug laglagin^ the j^rson
thus droi>pinj; down.

Mahhiful. Anq knlmiorctii, the drown-
hip^ place; lience the west, '*the
drowning place of the sun."

M(ip<'igo(f. Ang ikapagody the cause.
Ex.: Aon ang ikinnjtajx'igod mof
(Why are you tired out? [Lit.,
*' What is the cause of your being
tired out?"]). Syn. pa'kmig. The
word ogod means great weakness,
and looks as if it were a variation.

Masalfno. Aug kaHaklauan^ the i)lace
w h e re con ta i n eil . Ex.: A ng ?« a ngd
ut(}» udvg }iokho\if khiasasnklnuan
iiitong ilhroitg ito (the orders [reg-
ulations] of the army are con-
tained in this book).

^f aulas. Var. hi tan. MagluUUy to
finish or conclude anything. Mag-
kalutaiihitas^ to finish completely.
Ang k(duta.san, the place.

II. A'rt is fimitted with an when the ]»ers<»n affected is meant, and not
the pla(!e or deliberate act. See mahirin, mama tag, and matmld for
examples.

III. Pagka is generally used to form verbal nouns for root.s conjugated
1)V ma, although }tag may be used with some root'^ and pagka ka is ru'casion-
afly found. Ex.: Ang pagkatalog or ang jtagtalog, the act of sleeping.
(See talog.)

To he included; to l)e contained.

To be finished; also conclude*! and
extinguished.

THE INDEFINITE VEKBAMZINC; I'ARTK I.E **MAN."

I. This particle, known a.s the third to Spanish writers on Tagalog, has
jKin for the definite and is one of tlie mf>st imp<^rt4iiit of the modifying
verbal particles. It admits in, i, and aii with the definite.

II. The great attention paid l)y Tagalng tc) euphony or smoothness in
Bounds is well illustrated by the changes demandi'd of the initial letter of
a root when vian (pati) is i»retixed. This granimatical peculiarity is found
most fully developed in western languages, in Irish an<l Scottish (yaelic, in
which it is known as "ellipsis." English has this tendency to a slight
degree, as shown V)y a, an, according to a following vowel or consonant
sound.

III. When preceded by man the following changes take ])lace in initial
latters of roots, the tinal n of the particle l)eing either droi>pe<l or modified.

B and P to 3/.

K (and hard Cor Q) to S\/.

S, T, and /) (generally) to" .V.

My Ny and Ng cause final n to drop out.

A, /, O, L^ modify n to )7g.

IV. Man has nan for the present and past tenses, the first syllable of the
root being reduplicated for the present and future tenser^. There is a I and
a II pluperfect tense, the former adding ))a to the past tense and the
latter prefixing rm^vf to the root. The future perfect has also two forms.
the first formed by adding na to the future tens<% and the second by i)refix-
ing maka to the root. The present participle (verbal infinitive) is formed

202

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

etc.

by prefixine pan to the root, the first syllable of which is reduplicated.
The use of the definite particles tn, t, and. an follows the general rule.

To ridicule; mock; scoff; hoax; abuse, Manlibak. Ana libakin^ what or

whom ridiculed, abused, etc. Ang
libakan; also ang mapaglibakf the
scoffer, hoaxer, mocker, etc. For
indef. with man see tables. Ex. :
Bdkit ka nanlilibak ta kaihigan mof
(Why are you ridiculing your
friend?) Syns. Uroy; uyam^ uyao,
and tiyno.

Mamiaaif (from bigay). For definite
with i see index, also the tables.

Mamili ( from hili). For definite with
in see tables.

Mandiri. For definite with han see
tables.

To give much ; to lavish.

To l)uv much.

To be nauseated or disgusted.

V. Man is uf»ed to express plurality of acts rather than of persons with
those root« which denote the simple action with um or ma^. With some
roots of colors man denotes intensity, and with some other roots indicates
continuousness. It is essential for these ideas that the meaning shall not
be changed by man from what it is with um or mag,

Ex. (B roots):

To divide up among others.

To habituate; to accustom.

To pull up continually or continu-
ou.sly.

Ex. (D root):
To pray constantly.

Ex. (G roots):
To imitate much or habitually.

To mix habitually (as a druggist).

To clear off (as land).

Mamahaffi (from bahagi). Ex. : Ano
kaya ang ipinamamaliagi mot
( VVhat are you dividing up?) Ang
xpinamamahagi ko^y naaalaman
nana mangd pinamama haginan ko
(What I am dividing up is known
to those for whom I am dividing).

Mamihasa (from bihasa). Ex.:
Hoxiag kang mamiMtang mnminta9
sa maiTgd kapidMhay mo ( Do not
accustom yourself to complaining
about your neighbors).

Mamnnol (from bunot), Bumunot, to
pull up. Magbunotj to pull up
much.

Manaldngin (from daidngin). See in-
dex.

Mangagad. Qumagad^ to imitate.
Maggagady to imitate (many).

Manyamao. Ang pangamauin, what
so mixed. Ang ipangamAo^ what
used to mix with thus. Ana pan-
gamavAn, the place of habitual
mixing. GumamdOy to mix. Ang
gamauin^ what mixeil. Ang ig-
amdOf what adde<l or the instru-
ment used to mix with. Ang
gamaudn^ the place; the mortar;
aish, etc. Maggam&o, to mix
much. Ang paggamauin^ what
mixed much. Ang ipaggamdo^ the
instrument thus. Ang paqga-
maudny the place of much mixing.

Gumamas, Ang gamasiUf what
cleared off. Ang gamoBont the

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

203

To reap; to cut rice.

To quarrel with; to reprimand
loudlv.

To cut <lo\vn underbrush; to clear
off land; also to .si)eak freely.

*ro thresh (by many).

Ex. (II roots):

To scout.

To sow nuich rice; or by many.
To wa.«h one's face (habitually).
To predict habitually.

Ex. (I root*^):

To like (many); also to tlirt.
To avoid entirely.

Ex. (K roots):

To devour; to eat continually.
To take habitual 1 v.
To cling to with hands and feet (a?
a monkev does).

To nibble much; to bite with the

front teeth.
To tremble much or frequently witli

cold or fear.
To break off (as flowers or fruit) as

an occupation.

Ex. (P roots):

To pluck or break off much; or by
many.

land cleared off. Maggamus^ to
clear off (by manv). MangamaHj
to clear off nmch. Ang panga-
vuts(ni, the land thus cleared.

Giunapas. Aug gnpaaiv ., what reaped.
Ang gapamHj the. field. Ang gin-
apasati, the stubble left. Magga-
pas^ to cut or reap much. Shw-
gaptfs, to cut or reap (many).
Ang jfatigopax^ the sickle. Aug
numgagapas^ the reaper, harvester
(person).

(Inmrisa. Ang gasnni}, the person so
quarreled with or reprimanded.
Maggasd, to quarrel with much, or
to reprimand much or many.
Mangtixii, to c|uarrel with or to
rejirimand habitually.

nviiuu^ak. Aug gasnkiti, what clear-
ed, i. e.. the underbrush. Ang
gdsnkxm, the place. Ang gasaklrt
is also tile person spoken to freely.
Mnngnsdk^ same actions as fore-
goin»r by manv.

Mang'iik. (See index: g'tlk.)

Manhannp. (See index: hanap.)
}f(nihti}fik. (See index: hasik.)
MnnhiUnnos. (See index: fiilmnos.)
Manlmia . A n g vi <i n h n hnh) , the
])rophet; soothsayer. Hxunvln^ to
predict; foretell. Ang fmlaln,
what foretold. Ang hulaan, the
person to whom told.

Mdioi'iltig. (See thlg.)
MdtTf/'/lag. (See tlag.)

yfniTijniu. (See hi'm.)

Mawjulid. (See kuhn.)

yhtiTgiiyapil (from kni/t'tpit). Aug
p(t)7(/ni/(tpita)), what clung to, i. e.,
tree, etc. Kinnnnaptt, to grasj)
thus. Ang ikngnpit, what with,
i. e., the hands, feet, etc. No old-
wc>rld monkeys have a tail which
can be used fnr graspinir, the I*hil-
ippine Islands spin'ies included.

M<iiTi/ihil (from kihit). Kmnihif. to
nii)l)le.

^f< itTj/ing ig ( fro n\ king Ig ) . See index.

MaiTgltH (fn)m kitil). Kntnifil, the
sinqile acti(»n. Mag/ritil, to break

off thus iinich.
see als<» jtntnl.

•vn.: put I; and

MtDiiiln.t (inun j>i(''is). Sec index.

204

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

To break off (by many); toother Mamuti (from piUi). Pumvii, to
habitually (as flowers or fruit). break off. Magputi, to break off

much. Mangagputi, to break off
(by many). 8yn.: KitU; and see
putol. Ang putihin, what broken
off. An^ pagputihanf the branch
from which much is broken off.

Mamuti (from put(). See index.

MamuUd (from puUd). See adjec-
tive. PumuUdf to grow pale.
PuUain, a person who is always
pale; pallia. Maputldf a person
who may become pale or pallid.
Kaputlaarif pallor. MakapuUd, to
cause pallor.

MamiUof ( already used. ) See index.
PatoL

To whiten intensely.
To grow very pale.

To cut up (as cloth).

Ex. (S roots):

To disperse; also to scatter much in

the air.
To bite much (as a mosquito).

To destroy completely.
To curse habitually.

Ex. (T roots) :

To peck much (as a bird).
To tempt habitually.

Manamhulat (from wmMJLat), See
index.

Manigid, Ang glgdirif the person,
etc., bitten. Ang paggigdan^ the
place. Sumigidt to bite (as one
mosquito). Magigidf to be bitten.
Ex.: Naninigid ang mangd lamoh
(the mosquitoes are biting hard [in
plenty]).

Manird (from sird). See index.

3fanu mpd ( from sumpd ) . See index.

Manukd (from tukd). See index.
Manuksd (from tuksd). See index.

VI. With roots which admit of the idea of making a living by exercis-
ing the acts denoted bv the roots, man expresses the idea of an occupation,
trade, or profession, fcx. :

To preach. Mangdral (from dral). Ang mang-

ang&raly the preacher, but ang
maiigadraly the master or teacher
(of a doctrine, etc. ). Ang ipangd-
ralf what preached. Ang ipi-
nangaural^ wnat is being preached;
the subject of the sermon. Ang
jdnangarTgarcddn, the persons being
preached to (the congregation) or
the pulpit. (See index for dra/.)

Mamahald ( from bahalA) . This word
is from Sansk. bhara, the root of
the English **to bear," Lat. /prrf.
Kay 6 bahald, p6 (you take care,
sir [i. e., pay what you like]).
Sino ang namamaJicUd sa bahayf
(Who is taking care of the house?)
Si Juan (Juan).

Mangamot ( from gamot). See index.

Ma ngatas ( from gatas) . Ang nanga-
galas, the milkman (or maid).
Gnmatan, to milk (occasionally).

To care for.

To practice me<licine.
To milk (as occupation).

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 205

To cook or do anything habitually. Magaird. (8ee index; r/awd.)
To live bv robbery. Mnnhnli (from halt). See index.

To sew nipa (for a living). Maiiaiiid {irom pi'tnid). Kx,: And

ang (jlnagawd n'uujo (Hyi'inf (What

are you doin<^ there?) Kivn't' ij na-

mamdnid (we are stitching nij)a

[thatch]).
To collect bills (as an occupation). M'tnhTliil (from nwjil). See in<lex.
To dive (as an occupation). Man'isid (from shid). See index.

To write (as an occupation). Manulat (from .si'dttt). See index.

To spin (as an occupation). Manulid (from si'did). Ang )n<tnn'

nulid, thespinner. >Sinulid, thread ;

anything sj>un. Sunintidy to spin

(simj)le act).
To sew (as a tailor). Mmmln' (from Udii). See index.

To go tirst; to guide. ^fa^?g^(n(t {(roiu una). See index.

VII. Some roots with man have the idea of running around doing the act
expressed bv the verbalized root; going about in a certain manner, etc.
Ex.:

To advance, clinging to something. MniTiiapil {irom h'l nit). This verb

would be used if baml)oorail, etc.,
wa.s chmg to crossing a bridge, etc.
Kntnapit, to cHng to; to support;
to hold u)> from falling.

To run around biting (an a vicious MatTgagat (from kagat). See index,
dog).

To go about sadly and mournfully. Ma/Tj/ullhi (from nlila, an orphan).

VIII. }fan^ with roots denoting animals or birds, expresses their chase;
with roots meaning fish, etc., their seeking, and with other animal or
vegetable names, the gathering of what is dcn<»tcd l)y the root. The idea
is generally that of an occupation or haV)itual engagement in such hunting,
lishing, gathering, etc. Ex.:

To gather the rattan called **ba- Mamaging. This is a species of ivy.

>»

gjng.
To hunt or catch birds. MatTj/if/on (from ifum). Ehon is

"egg" in l*amj)angan.
To catch fish; to fish for a living. MafTiji^iid. (S«e index isdd.)

To cut or gather wood. Maw/ahog (from ki'dmg). Kahdio-

gan, woodland, di'ihat is "forest;

timl>er, etc."
To gather tortoise shell. Mninjcdn {irom kahi). }fawj<uHf«da,

t(»rtoise-shell hunter. Maghaia, to

sell tortoise shell.
To gather na»'re or "kapis" (the Mmuiajtia (from /:n/,i.<<). MagkajuK,
shells used in windows). to si^ll nacre. Ang kufnttin, the

na<re. Aug knpisan, the place

used, i. e.. the window.
Toother rattans (.)ejuco). MniTgnng (from n-ng).

To hunt tortoises. Mnmngnng (from })ng<nig).

To gather " pajos" (a kind of Manntho. .l/'/7/>a//o, to deal in "pa-

» >

mango). jos.

To hunt frogs. Mantnlnkd (fn»m judakd, frog: syn:

K<tl>l:<tf>).
To gather the rattan called **pala- Manndm^nx. Kajtfilnannan, place

san." where the paliisan is found.

To gather palm leaves. }f(ini'd'isj,t'is (fr(.ni p(i/<i.<*j)i'is, "palm

i.>.,i " \ \r... /.......;.. ♦.. ...i-.i...

To titrh for eels. Matfiafos (frum palos^ eel).

To hunt sea turtles. Mammrikan (from pawikan, sea tur-

tle).

To gather or hunt for honey. Mauudot (from ]n(lof, honey). J/o«-

jnifof, to buy honey. Sfagynlot
(1) to make honey; (2) to deal in
honey. Ang puloiin, the honey
made. Phtiilotdn, what has been
made from honey (fn^ni pulittdriy
j^weets made of honey). Pulofin
iti also a term of endearment. Ex.
with <tn: J/niKt'/ mo ahoiif/ pulofan
( 1 )on' t Hatter (honey ) me ) . Pulot-
(j'ltd, honey and eoeoanut milk.

To gather oysters. MniKi/'ilni (from (ulabd). Katalal^i-

h(i)fy oyster bed.

To hunt <leer. MaiTtjuKu (from i(f<fi, deer).

IX. Similarly any instrument, weapon, utensil, or animal which can be
so used is verl»alize<l with the idea of huntin*^', fishing for, or eatehing by
)niin. Kx.:

To hunt with do^s or hounds. Mamjtiso (from ciso, dog). See

index.

To hunt with nr to use a gun. Mtuiuiril (from hariJ^ a shotgun).

Malay, IxuVil. Aufj VKiinamari/,
the hunter.

To lish with a hook. Maniiunit (from hiituit). See index.

T<» lish with a small li«>ok. J/fO/z/z/v/.s- (from hina.H). Thi.s means

to Use a rod and line. Jhtmiiva.t,
to lift the hook by the line. Mfn/-
huids, to do this much. Ako\tf
nKDiiiiiiiddfi (1 am going tishing
with a rod and line).

T<» lish or hunt with a light. M<iiT</l/<i<) (from l/ao, a light). Kx.:

M>iin/iin/i/(i<} ht Uun'i f (.Are you
^^oin«r lishing with a light?) (><)
(Yes). Altutj hi'iL'nl ang pinaiT^j-
i)7iiihin<\u uuif (Jn which tield
aie you going to lish with a light?)
lii'iU'j In'thi'l igung nmlago Sd iiuuoji'i
lfi'i/i<tg (In that field over there far
auay from the hou.'^es). VniiUt(>,
to light up. MttgUao^ to carry a
hght. Ang Unv.an, the lamp or
place of light.

To use or hunt with a spear called M'n?f/<i/ihrit.
" Ualiiwit."

To lish with the li<<ok. M<ni/<iml>niig (from hnnhang, a

hoi>k ).

To li<h with a >«inr. M<iii/<intl>nt. Si'e index: InnifKU.

To lish with anytlini;: that may In* M'tinf/nLiign (from p(dnkay<i). J\i-
ii'-ed to <atih lish. i/tdhihig'i, to lish occasionally.

f P

To <*-ine with the lai^<' net calleil MniH'tngd
" pantrt i. "

r<»s»'ine v\ ith lh<' n<-t called "" |>rikot." Mnnn'iini.

lo lish with rod, lint', and hook. Maii'tif (from .s'lit, a thorn or hook).

Mags'ni, to make anything out of
thorns or hooks; to make abbatis.
Svn., I'lnik. Tinik also means fish

K

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

207

X. With roots denoting arms, tools, or instruments nuni indicates the
habitual use or wearing of the arms and the constant use of tools or instru-
ments. Ex.:

To use a dagger.
To use a sickle.
To use an axe.

To use arms.

To use a syringe.
To use a knife.

To use a *'war bolo*' (tabak),

Mitfu/lira (from iwn). See index.
MarUUik (from lilik^ sickle).
Mamaldkol (from palakoly axe).

Ma<jpalah)l, to have an axe.
Miinaiulntu (from mutdata^ arm,

\vea|>on). Mdysandnta, to bear

arms. Aug sdinhitdhan, armed

forces; levy en masse.
MiiUHinjnt (from atunpit),
Manainlitiui (from HunddiKj^ knife).

M(uji<(indtni(iy to carry a knife.
Miundxih. MiKjiahdh, to Wear a war

l)olo. T(U/taba/:, to cut off with a

war bolo.

XI. With roots denoting certain places num indicates the living in such
places, earning the living from the products thereof, or traveling in such
localitv. Ex.:

To live (general idea).

To dwell in a house.

To live in town.

To live in the mountains; to wander
there; to gain a living from the
pro<lucts thereof.

To live in the open country.
To lead a seafaring life; to be a
deei)-sea fisher.

To live in the timber; to lay the
timber waste; to wander in the
woods; to live by wood cho])pin<;,
etc.

To travel or live on the bank of a
river or the seacoast.

Mami'ilniy (from hnh<ui). Idea is to
reside, etc. M(i<jl>u}t<ni, to live.
Buinuhdif, to give life to. Bulutij^
alive; living.

M(unalni}f (from ht'duty). See in-
dex. iCx.: S<i<in hnjo ittunantminnf
( Where do you live?) Amj ln'ilmy
/.<;, y>o, diln .sf{ hafiinuj i(n ( My house,
sir, is here in this town).

fellow-townsman, also country-
man. Mn<)l,ni!<in, ( i ) to look for
a town site; (1?) t<» lound or build a
town; (i>) t(» app«»rlion i>y towns
an<l not i)y inhabitants lUnian
also nuaiis s|>aee ))et\\('eri earth
and sky, day (rare), and weather
(rare).

Mitiiniiiddk (from Innidok). This
Word may also mean jotravel in the
mountains. Jnt/^i hnnditL, moun-
tainei'r; sometimes nse<l insnlt-
inglv, as "havsred," in l!nglisli.

yrainnkul {ivamh/ikid, "lield").

Miiii<h/<tt (irnin dayttl, "sea"). Man-
tiinhjiii, sailor or deep-si'a fislier.
Also l<iy>i r(i(jiit: t*iiiiniii (idtninjat.
M(tyd<'i</(if, to travel by sea. Dn-
mi'i'/iif, to tlood the land.

yhuKjidint {ivoin (jidfdf, "tnnber; for-
est"). Any ij>ftiiyid'"t, what car-
ried in the timber; or tiie cause of
wand<'rin;_'. I'tc. Any /irmynhdlan,
the i>lace nf workiiii:, devastating,
wan<lering, etr., in th<» torest.
( iii,iii'il>n( , to hecoiiic a fi rest.
(iidnttrin, timlxT land or forested
countrv.

ft

Miinliunlxiy (trom Inndmy). Mny-
Uuidniy, to carry anything to coast

208 TAGALOO LANGUAQE.

or bank. Lumanibay^ to ^ to or
along the bank or coast (eingle
act).

XIJ . With roots denoting certain articles of wearing apparel man indi-
cates their habitual use or wearing. Ex. :

To wear a shirt habitually. Mamaro (from bare). See index.

See also mmbcUilOf hat; Mrpin,
shoe; and tapig, apron.

XIII. With roots denoting vehicles, boats^ or other means of artificial
locomotion, man signifies to travel by what is denoted by the root. Ex. :

To travel by canoe. Mamangkd. Ex. ; Ilang Arao hana-

kain mula diio hangan MaynUaf
( How many davs bv banka [canoe]
from here to Manila?) Maghapon
kayang bangkain (Perhaps all of
one day by banka).

To travel on horseback. Mangahayo (from cabayo, ** horse").

To travel by **quilez." MangHts\iToin itt^, a vehicle named

from Guillermo Quilez, of Vi|?an,
Ilocos Sur, who suggested it to his
carriage maker, a native of Vigan).

XI V"^. Man also denotes self-supporting and slowly developing actions
from within such as the growth oi flowers, fruit, etc. Many roots com-
mencing with 6, which would otherwise be conjugated with urn, take man
for euphonic reasons. (See urn, Par. VII.) Ex.:

To sprout; to put forth shoots (as Manlabong (from labong). Also
the bamboo). lumahong. Maglabong^ to have

shoots.

To open (as a flower). Mamukadkcui (from hukadkad). Vis-

ay an, bukad.

To bloom; to blossom (as a flower). Mamidaklak (from bukMak, flower).

Visayan, burak; also applied to
the ilangilang. Ex. : Namumulak'
lak ang manga halaman (the plants
are blooming).

To bear fruit. Mamunga (from bunga; fruit). Ex.:

Namumunga na ang mangd kdhoy
(the trees are already bearing
fruit).

To bear fruit; to be full of fruit. Mamtufakmk (Irom bu^aksak). Ex.:

Namumusai:sak Uong punonglukban
(this lukban tree is full of fruit).

XV. Some roots have differing meaning with um^ mag' and man. In
some cases the variation is great, but in others little or none. Man^ how-
ever, looks to the effect or result more than to the simple action, which is
expressed by urn or mag. The examples will best show these ditferences
and resemblances. Ex.:

Wonis differing in each case:

To teach. Umdral. ifa^dra/, to study. Mangd-

raly to preach. (See index: Aral;
also talo and aalamin.)

Words agreeing with urn (if used) and man; but differing with mag:

To intrude or steal in. Dumikit; manikit, Magdikit, to fas-

ten; to paste together.

To throw a lasso or rope. Sumild, Afanildy to lasso; to rope;

to ensnare. MagtUdt to make a
lasso or snare.

TAOALOO LANGUAGE.

209

To tima along; to arrest.

To nhake (uh a tree to get the fruit).

Words agreeing with um and maw, jtiar^ being httle used:

To admire; to wonder at. Guiu'dalas; iwinyUalan. Ex.: Akiiuj

pinuiKjigilalunan antj karihitnn iiaruj
matTi/ii bituin sa la in/it (1 admire
[my admiration is] the beauty of
the stars in the sky).
II n m tin ; ukui h ila . ( See i ndex : h ild . )
Li(in(t(/l(K/; uidtiloylog. (See also in-
dex for llh(ik\ idea of ridieuUng,
etc. )

NVord.s <liffering with tim and man, mag being httle used:

To attiiet. Ihtmahj (from daig). Manaig, to

overeome; tosur])ass; t<»\an<|uish.

To kill. l^unataij. Mamataij, to die. (See

index: patatf.)

XVI. Some few wonls which <lo not admit <>f fretiueney have the simple
idea with man. Others are generally used with tlie particle in a seemingly
ar}>itrarv manner. Kx.:

To l)ear a child.
To die.

The following are arbitrary:

To allow light to pa.*is (a.s glass or

anything transparent).
To feel nauseatech
To ha\H'; to pos.sess.
To originate from; t<> 4'ome from; to

descend from : to arise.

To lot)k at wrath full V

To find fault with; to complain of.

MaiTijanak
Manmiaif.

yiaiTijau'inag. Maaiiirmg, transpar-
ent (from anhiag).

Man'in'i (from diri).

Mainlooft (from doon). (See index ).

yfangaling. Aug j>i)iau(/alii7gaji, the
j>lace or source of rising; origin;
ct<'. Ant; gating na aran^ the sun-
rise, (taling is the idea of doing
good. (Sei* in<lex. )

MauVixik. Kx.: Xaidd/yik ang mata
nang /mat n<irdat (fixing the eyes
\vi<le with anger).

Manii)ita.'<{iri)\u jtlntaf). Kx.: Hindi
ma haga alam na nadialag ang pam-
imiutai< .sa djaf (Don't you know
the disbonesty of complaining
about others?) Ang jjintoifin; ang
jdntasau; ang majHimintaA^ the
critic; the fault-finder; complainer.
Aug ptimintasan. whnorwhat found
fault with. Aug pagpinta.^an, wlio
nr what found much fault with.
(S«t' also index: t'dana, to confide
in.)

XVIT. Although ;^a?), the definite corresponding to man, generally has
a verbal meaning, there are several instanns in which pan, prefixed to a
root, signifies an instrument, utensil, <'r article. These roots then admit,
although they <lo not always rcipiire, the euj)honic changes, as have
already been explained in Par. III. Kx.:

The razor.
The auger.
The mop.

Ang paiTgahif{iroui maiTgaltd). (See

in<lex: aliH. )
Ang jmrnula.-* (from hufas). Maghi'i-

(as, to bore: to make a ln.le in.
Aug p(u7t/ns/, IIS ( \ri)]n knsLti.^). Ku-

i/m.^kus, to nn»j) uji.

685.>-0o-

U

The .sickle. Ainj panfjapajt (iro\n gapas). (See

index: (ffpffs.)
The .<j>iule. Aug jxnihuhn/ (irom hukng). (See

index.)
The brush, ruler, ete. Ang jningnliit (from guhit). Gumi'i-

hit, to line, mark, or paint.
The ]>ocket l»and kerchief, napkin, .I/j.v ;>(///////<iV/ (from />«)«('//*/</, to rub;

towel, etc. to clean).

The hammer. Aug jmmnkjmk (from pnmukpnf: «>r

iivigptikpiil:^ to strike) .
The pen, i)encil, etc. Ang paiu'tl<it{lvo\n //^(/?<///a/, to write,

[fora living;] ). (See index: mhii. )
The string, cord, r<»pe, etc. Aug prmdl'i (from t<il'i), Magtali, to

tie, fasten, bind.

XVIII. With names of the days and nouns like "aruo" (day) jmn
denotes somethiui; usimI dailv or on the dav named. Ex.:

Somethinj.;^ for daily u.«^e. Aug pangaraonrao. (Noun re<lupli-

cated. )
Something' for use on Mondays. Aug /KinluncK.

XIX. In like maimer, imm, with the reduplicated initial syllable of the
root. indicaU's the hal>itual agent with those roots cai)able of denotinjj
occupation, trade, or ]»rofe.<sion. It may also be used with some other
roots, in some cases the ])articli\s are repeated with occasional euphonic
chan^'es. Kx.:

Th(^ following' havi? a simj)le reduplicati(»n:

Barln-r. Manaah'it (from (W/>7), usually MoiTy-

(nn/tUiit in Manila.

Hunter (with gun). M<iin<n)ulrU (from hnn'l).

Sailor. Monmii'ignl (from dngnf).

Physician. M<tiH}<tgnnin( (from gatuof).

Keaix-r. Mdugngapns (from go/xrs).

Wea\er. Mnnhfihifhi (from Imhi). Ilnmnbl, to

wea\e.

Tinsmith, phmd)er, etc. Matilnhimmg iirouiliindug). Ilunu-

Hdihf, to solder.

Sawyer. Mmihilngan {innuhigari). (See in-

dex. )

Writer-; clerk. MitnnunliU (from stU<tt).

Spinner'. M<iiiniii'i/i<l (from siUid).

Tailor; s«-amsirer^s. M<uinu<i}ii {imin tahi).

Winner; eojKinernr. Mnuatinlo (from tnlo).

lieseiier: ndei'iiier*. MnmnnthnH (from fnhAa). 7 T<7« «///«.<,

to rescue, to redeem (simple act).

Tempt«-r. MifnintnsLsn (from tuksn).

In tlie lollowin'j exami'les the I'oot as e. )njnj:at«Ml with nidn has the ini-
tial syllai>lr of iJic iirw word in.^erted l»etwet*n tiie imt and the iTg of the
])arlicle. \\\.:

M'tin/diTi/t'iral (from inaiujartil, to
rreaclnr. ju'eacli).

Ilnntei' with do'_r> dP lionnds. MmTiimHid.^o (from inamjamj to hunt

with dogs).
l-'islnMinan. ytniTgimiisda {iroui niaiig'mMy to lish

for a liviuir).

XX. With weights, measures, and similar nouns, man prefixed signifies
"to ea<'h,'' <ir "apiece," amounts as may be denoted l>y the noun. (See
under the numerals. )

XXI. With many roots mdn siumilies a n'send)lance to what may l)e

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 211

Hurricane; typhoon. Bagi/6. Ex.: Maiifxiyt/ohagifo itong

haiTijln (This wind seems Hke a
typhoon ) . NnglaUiyag niltVy biiia-
gyo sild sa d/igat (They were coast-
ing and were caught at sea by a
typhoon).

Anger. (id I it. Ex.: MangdlUgdUl yaong

paiTfjuiujusap (Tliat way of talk-
ing resembles anger).

THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "MAKA."

I. This particle {uaka in the past and ])revsent) has two distinct mean-
ings, the first y)€ing that of cause and the second that of power, ability, etc.
For this reaiJon there are two definites, that corresi>unding to the idea of
cau.«e Ix'ing ka, and that to the idea of j»nwer being ma {im).

In lx)th cases the true pluperfect and future perfect tenses are formed by
na following the verbas existing in the past and future tenses, respectively.

The idea of cause is indicated l)y ntahi with roots denoting conditions,
torts (wrongs), and betterments, which have (»nly one delinite; that with
», which has in with the past and j>resent tenses, forming ilv/, iki)in. Ika
and ikina also indicate time (not tense) in certain cases. (8ee index.)

II. The difference in syntax Ixit ween these >//'//.a verbs in the sense of
cause and all others must be noted. In the definite tlicse verbs have the
agent in the nominative and the recii>icnt or o)>jcct of the action in the
genitive. In the indefinite the agent is in the usual nominative also, but the
reci[)ientor object takes the accusative, wliich is invariably preceded hy sa
(never by nung). This use of sd is also found with some other verbs.

III. yi<ig and man roots retain the delinite forms iKig and j)an when con-
jusrated with maka, as will be seen from examples.

Tol>e able to learn or study. Makapngural. Ex.: Xakapagaralako

(I was able to study), Nakapa-
yninil siya (He [siie] is able to
study). }f<ikapag'ii'tral .Hi/d (They
will be able to slu<ly). Jlindl ako
indka/fnt/ddnt/ (I shall not be able
to study). Ndpagdral ko atig idral
(1 was able to learn the lesson).
Aapa/jiv'iral niyd aitg idral (He
[she] is al)le to learn the lesson).
Mnpnt/ddral ni/d any idrnl (They
will be able to learn tlie lesson).

To l>e able to teach. }fak<idral. Ex.: Sakadral ako (I

was able to teach). The other
tenses, both of the indefinite an<l
the delinite are formed in the
same way.

To Ix^ able to preach. MakajfaiTijArnl. XakapaiTj/dnii ako

(1 was able to preach). Xaka-
patTl/din/dnil siyd (He is able to
prea(."h). yfaknpaiTlinmidrttl. siyd
(He will be able to i>reach). The
delinite is formed in the same way
as with paydraL

IV. Roots verbalized by maka reduplicate the first syllable of the root in
the present and future tenses. In some«listricts the secon<l syllable of the
particle is reduplicated, but this is a ])n>vincia]isni. I'x.:

To cause damage. MukopdiTiyatiyayd (from <(nyayd and

jxiit). See index.
To cause anguish. MukalntHsa.

212

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

To cau^e tiatiety.
To beautify or adorn.
To cause disguHt

To do good.

To hinder.

To adorn; to embellish.

To cause relief.

To cause sadness.

To hinder.

To cause another to tremble with

fear.
To cause to tremble with cold or

fear.
To cause ()r do evil.

To cause disj^t; weariness; annoy-
ance.

To dazzle (as the sun or lightning).

To cause anxiety.

To cause nausea.

To wound (lit., to cause to be
wounde<l).

To cause to Ikj set afire.

To cause loathing (as food).

To cause fear.

To cause laughter.

To cause pleasure.

Makahusog. BUsog is a bow
(weapon).

MakabiUi, BumtUif to erow hand-
some. (See btUi in index.)

Makadimarim or makarimdrim.
Mandimdrim, to disgust. Ex.:
Nnndimdrim ak6 9a pagkain niy&
(His manner of eatmg disgusted
me).

Makagcding, (See index: gcUing.)

Makagambald.

Makagandd, Ex.: Ang kahinhina^y
nakaaagandd 9a manga dcUaga
(Modesty is a beauty in girls).
(Def.): Ang kaJiinhitian ay giyaug
ikinagagandd nang maiigd daiaga.

Makaginhdua. Ex. : MakagirOi&ua 9a
inud ang gnmot ( Let the medicine
relieve you ) . Nakaginhdua 9a akin
ang pamoi (I was relieved by the
medicine). Nakagiginhdna 9a ka-
niyd ang gamot (He is being re-
lieved by the medicine). Mahagi-
ginhniui 9a inyd ang gamot (You
will be relieved by the medicine).
Ang pagkaginhdua, the relief (act).

Makahdpi9. (See index: Adi)i>.)

Makalihang, (See index: /toan^.)

MakapangUdbat (from kildbot and
pan), Kakilakildbotf horrible.

Maknpanginyxg. ( See index : kinyig),

Makasamd. Maka9a9amdy noxious;
malignant. Also future tense.
Ex.: Iloua^ mong kanin itong
hungdH mako9cu^amd 9a iyd (Don't
eat this fruit, because it will in-
jure you [be noxious to you, in-
def.]). Ang \kina9a9amd nang
dking loob ay ang kaniyang pay-
mumurang walang tigil ( What puts
me in bad humor is his everlasting
slanderinsr [^lit., The cause of my
l>ad humor is his slandering with-
out cessation, def. ] ) . Sumamd, to
become bad or evil. (See index 1
tamd.)

Makasnud.

Makasilao. ( Sy n : pulag. )

Makdstikal.

Makasnklain,

MakoAiigai. (See index: stigat.)

Makoifunog. (See index: 9unog.)
M(ika9uyd. (Syn. 9nnok.)
Makatdkot. {iiee index: tdkot.)
Makata t/a. ( See taua: i ndex . )
Makatud. (See index: tud,)

TAGALOO LANGUAGE.

213

V. The indefinite forms will be dearly seen by the conjugation of
viakaginhdua in the preceding paragraph, there being no irregularities
and there is but one definite with ka, forming ika as a prefix to the root
for the infinitive and future and ik'nui for the past and present tenses, in
being incorporated in the latter cases. For the conjugation of this definite
see hap'iH in index.

VI. Prefixed to roots denoting actions maka signifies power or ability to
perform what may be denoted by the root. Roots which are conjugated
in the simple idea by mag or man retain pag or pan before the root in all
tenses.

VII. Ma is the corresponding definite to maka potential, and when used
with the idea of attraction toward, etc., suppresses in completely. Ma
becomes na for the past, pluperfect, and present tenses. Pag and pan are
retained with those roots re<iuiring it to preserve the meaning, a^ explained
in the prece<ling paragraph. The definites with i and an also exist. The
particle % is inserted l)etween the particle uia {ua) and the root, contrary to
Its use with ka^ where it is prefixed to the latter particle. Ex.:

To l>e able to go away.
To I>e able to teach.

To be able to do or make.
To be able to tiike.

To be able to go c>r come out.
To V»e able to walk; march; et^'.

To l)e able to write.

Makaafis. MakapagaVa^y to be able
to take away.

Makaaral. Makapagdral, to be able
to learn or study. Ex.: Napagd-
ral ko aug idral ( 1 was al)le to learn
the lesson). Xapagdral na ko ang
idral ( 1 had l)een al)le to learn the
lesson). Napagadral ko ang idral
(I am able to learn the lesson).
Mapagadral ko artg idral (1 shall
be able to learn the lesson). (See
dral in irnlex.) To be able to
preach, makapaiTgdral.

Makagavd. (See index: gawd.)

Makakuha. With idea of attraction
toward, in is su])prt\ssed. Ex.:
Nakiiha ko iuang hutuja (1 was able
to take that Iruit). Nakukuha nigd
igang huiTija (He [she] is able to
take that fruit). Makufatha ko
igang huiTija ( I shall be able to take
thatfruitj. (SiH'alsoindex: knha.)

Makalahds. Makapaglabd^, to beable
to take out. (See index: lahds. )

Maka/dkad. (Sec index: /'Uv/(/. ) Ex.
with//<^/A</ (indef. ): Nakaldkadakd
( I was al>le to wal k ). Nakalaldkad
mid (He is able to walk). Maka-
lalakad slid (They will l)e able to
walk).

Mak<[»ulat. With ? inserted between
lua {na) and root with definite.
Ex.: Xaitd'dat ko itong patnUat (I
was able to write with this pen).
NaiMi.vilat ko itong pandlnt (lam
able to write [can w rite] witli this
pen). Mai^UHi'dat ko Hong pan dial
(I will be able to write with this
pen). Bakas ma'txiiHi'ilat ang salal
na i}tadadnld mo sa igong antd sa
Magndn (To-morrow 1 will beable
to write the letter which you will

214 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

have to send to your father in
Manila). Aalis ako nang maMlat
na niya ana iniutos ko sa kanivA
( I will go when he writes down the
orders 1 have given him). (See
index : sulat. )
To be able to ran away. Makatakbd. (See inden: takbo).

VIII. With negative particles the imperative is largely used instead of
the present tense, although the meaning is the same as that of the latter,
i. e., hindt ahmg makasulaty I can not write; I am not able to write; instead
of hindi ukong nakasumlaL The definite is sometimes used in the same
way with the negative, and even with the affirmative. Examples: Hindi
akong inakapagdral ( I can not [am not able to] study [or learn] ). Hindi mo
mad^mpotf ( Can' t you pick it up [grasp it] ?) Hinat ko maipahdyag ( from
hdyag, ma, t, and^) (I can not reveal it [make it public]). Hindi ak6
makaliias m Mavnild*t akd'y may sakit (I can not go down to Manila, because
I am ill). With um this may be expressed hinat akd mangyaring lumtuUm
MayniUVt ak6 may sakit, Hindi kayS makapangusapf (Can't you talk?)
Hindi ko mawikd, (I can not pronounce it). Hindi ko mamygay (I can not
explain it). Hindi ko mambx (J can not tell it).

IX. Maka (naka) with the indefinite and ma (na) with the definite sig-
nify to do what is denoted by the root mechanically, casually, involun-
tarily, or suddenly (occasionally), especially acts of the mind and physical
senses, Ex. :

To smell. Makaamoy, Nakaaamoy kayof (Do

you smell anything?) Naaamoy
ninyd bagd ang bangong isinaftatnbu-
lat nang manga bulaklakf (Do yoiE
smell the fragrance shed by the
flowers?)

To feel. Makaramdanit from damdam, Na—

ramdamAn mot (Did you feel it?^
0(5, nadaramdaman ko pa (Yes, I_
feel it yet).

To hear. Makariiujig (from dingig). See in —

dex: dingig.

To taste. Makalasap. (See index: ^osap.)

To see. Makakitci. Ex.: Akd^ynakaJatdnan^

isang tauong diydn ( I saw a person,
there). AaA*iYd bagd sildf (Di(B>
you see them? ) Hindi naunV t ma —
kikiid ko sana (No, but I may her-
able to see [them]).

Acts of the mind:

To know (something). MakaMam. Walang neUxutdlam (Nc^

one knows). Hindi ko naacdamarm^
(1 do not know it. )

To think. Makaisip. Hindi maitiip^ incompre —

hensible. Ex.: And ang isip mc^
or NaiUip mo or Naiisipan mo^
(What do you think about it?^
AVi/^tpan, opinion. Ang pagkaisip-^
the act of tninking.

To comprehend somewhat; to feel; Makamalay.
to understand.

To understand (naturally). Makatalaslds. Ex.: Natatalastd. '^

niny6 bagdf (Do you understan^il
it? ) Walang nakatataiaMds ( No oik^
understands). Tum^UaMs^ to ora-
derstand (by an act of volition).

TAOALOO LANGUAGE.

215

To remember (ca^^ually, etc.).
To forget.

Miscellaneous:

To like (naturally).

To ascend or go u]> (cas. ).

Muknalaahi. (8ee index: alaala.)
MnkaUmot. (See index: Ihiiot.)

To enter (casually).
To fall asleep.

Makfuhiij. (See index: '(Im[J.)
Mftkmmnluk. V.\.\ Nnpdnhikd)) ko
omj ln'(}t<ni i)(iti(j kuihitjan luithi (I
went n)» by chance into thi' house
of our frientl).
Mfika/n'mok. (See index: piUok.)
Mohiti'iUxj. \\\.'. Ihiinjmasd uk(7y
iiokntt'ilo*/ nko ( I wuH reading
and fell asleej»)- -1''.'/ ikahUog^
the cauye or tinie of sleeping.
Atit; i}>ni/ti'(I()ij, the cause or time
of sh-eping a great deal.

X. Ma (no) is used in connection with mi (snnictiniea in) to express
being overtaken by win<l, weather, night, etc., and als(> to express the
casual a<lvent of a season, date, etc.

Some phra.^es of this nature arc use<l witli /// only.

The definite onlv is found.

Maih'do. (See index: arao and init

for exs. )
Mtufuh'i. Ex.: (ra(/(thilnn kasa daiin

(Vou will be overtaken by night

on the road).
Mnn/ihi. (See index: ulan.)
Mtihuht'j. (See index: huUi(f.)
Mai nit. Kx.: yaiiiiitan ak>'t (1 am

warm). Vminit, to become hot.

M(i(/i)Hf, to heat. Mat/pa init, to

allow to become hot.
Maliitio. (."^ee index: labd.)
Mnjiilio. \\\.\ Kami' II najidiohan m

Tdtlnr (July found us in Tarlac)-

(Any month may be used in this

manner.)
Mnp'isnta; mapanko. Ex.: Xajtas-

knhan (iko sa MaifnHa (Easter

found nu' in Manila).

XI. Makd also signifies the ])ossible accom))lishment of a purpose with
the indefinite; //j/f being used with the delinite. {Xaka; 7)d.) Theaccom-
plishment of the en<l sought is always expre-se<l in the j)ast tense.

To V>e caught out in the sun.
To be overtaken by night.

To be caught in the rain.
To be blinded.
To be hot (warm).

To be clouded; turbid.
To >)e overtaken bv July.

To Ihj found at Easter.

To \ye able to lift.

To \ye able to overtake by running.

To ])e able to find.

To get by asking.

To l)e able to catch fish.

To be able to i)ass an I'xamination.

Mdkdfii'didt. M<fk(ifjnhn}idf, liftable.
Ex.: Ih(htihdtin ko itomj hoffonff
krnxi nnthn/dif (I will lift this sack
if it ))e liftable).
MifkdJn'ihol. IlnmdhoJ^ to run after
another in order to overtake him
(her), V.\.: lUndlntl ko i^iifd'if
liindi nalidltnl ( 1 ran after him [lier]
but could not overtake him [her]).
Mdkdhihid/f. [i^vv hdndp: index.)
MdkdhitH/l. {Sqv hiiTi/i: index.)
MukdpdtHjisild. lv\.: Ako If niinTJ/-
itd/isdd kfiHij nidk(tj>awiisdd { 1 am
going to lish if it is possible to
catch anv tish ).
Mdkd.^nlit. V.\.\ Sini'ilit sijfd nditfj
sujnrinte)identr ay [hindi] nakaSfUlt

lo give an juooiiiu or.
To 1)0 able to hit with arrows. Mnlutpdnit. 7^im«7id, to shoot at with

bow and arrow. Ex.: Pumjmatio
siifd fta mtnTj/a ihoHy iTr/nni^t hindl
n<tha/)(in() .sij/'i ( I le nhot at the birds
with bow and arrow, but wa.s n<»t
al)le to hit them).

XII. yfahn, correctly used, expre.«ses i)hy.«ical power or ability qj» a
general rule, i*)'il:<it and manfjt/ari being used to express moral power or
ability. By tlie uneducated, these words are used almost indi.«crirainately.
(See sHkd and ntdtif/i/arl: index.)

XIII. Main is also used to verbalize kmia; "perhaps, may be," etc.,
which is conjugated as in the following examples:

/>/// kit mfiL'u/dnnnf/ daUun (1 do not know it 1 will be able to carry it).
Dili (f/:o iit<ikt(h(tya ihiifdtj i(6 .v(/ kunif/d (1 do not know if 1 will Ik? able to
give this to him), Wa/d ahnnj ikahnfd (I have no way to do it). Maka-
kdjjd ka hnt/d btnni/lnifd.'' (Will you be able then to buy this?) J}i ko
iiifik'n/dnniKj l<rlHtii»ni kdt/d (I am not able to tight against you [plural]).
Jinnnnn ko, knti mnkdutnuin ko (I will rlrink it, it I can).

J^'".!"', "l>erhaps, by chance," etc., has a stronger meaning than Jcayd.

XIV. Mdkn {inn) is sometimes used in reluctantly admitting a fact or in
avoiding too dire<t an injury to the feelings of another. Ex.: (Indef.)
ydkdpaf/tHikno n'nid (he may have stolen); (Def. ) najyacjnakno niyd itd (he
may have stolen this).

XV. yfdkd is also used colhxiuially in conversation as follows: Makatn-
110))'/ kdfjd/ (Is there anything more to be asked about it?) Makakitd,
hd(fdf (Is there anything more to be seen?)

A more usual form is made with hiht, **more," and the root with ///.
viz: LniDdlo na ((nmidjuif ( Is tliere anything more to ask about it?) Lvmalo
sd kifdin/ (is there anything more tr) hv seen?)

X VL M'lkd forms certain adjectives in Tagalog, which have the inher-
ent iileaof }>otentiality. These adjectives, which in English are generally
formed by the suffixes nhle and ihft' or l>y/'//, have three distinct forms in
Tagalog.

XVII. (a) Hoots ex])re.«sing (jualities which maybe felt by the mind
are made adjcM-tives l)y ))re(ixing /.a, the casual <letinite of tnaka^ to the
root, which is reduplicated to the second syllable. Ex.: A'doynat/a (di/d)
*'<!elightt"ul "; kd<jinhd(/iii/idiid {(finJidnn), *' whf»lesome; salubrious;" kaihi-
(/Ihiy (if>i:/), "amiable;" kdkildkildhdf (kUdhnf), "horril)le;" katakottdkot
\tdknt) ''"fearful; drea<llul."

(A) Adjectives of sinular meaning are also formed by maka with the
fntnn^ indefinite. Ex. :

M'fkdliihii/d {hi;ni), "bashful;" indkrundnidtdj/ ()nd{dt/), "mortal" (death-
cansinL'); mttkd.'iistni (slri't), "destructive:" mnkdldtnud (tdud), "laugha-
ble;" iif'ikdhifiif) {Inn), " pleasant, agreeable."

('•) Wlien the re tots may express aptitude or inaptitude or facility or dif-
liciilty in <loing anythinL'; if allirinative the adjective is f()rmed with the
future <lrfinite of the potential particU' ///</, and if negative with the impera-
tive inn (without re<lnpliration of the first syllable of the root), which is
generally j^reccdrd by the negative ])article ^//, "not." Ex.:
Mnkdktni}, "edil'lr;" fli m>ikni)\, " une<lible, uneatal)le;" wagagaxiii^
"practicable;" '// mnijnnd, "impracticable;" ///(o'r/<»///j, "potable, drinka-
ble;" <li innnmiii, "uridrinkable;" makikitn, "visible;" di luakitd, "invisi-
1»lr;" iiiiisnsfihi^ "t<'ll:ible;" di )n<ts,ihi, "untellable, unspeakable;" man-
<ji/nyni'l, "possible;" '// }nniifji/nri, "impossible;" <f/ }iidhdtdy "intolerable;"
d'l )nnknld<], " indiss«»lul)lc;" '// iDd'jdinit, d! ri)(dn}>l(at)^ "inaccessible;" dt
vidfils, "insufferable;" (// mntbnjknln, "incomprehensible;" dt mamlang,

< I i. I. _ 1. I .. M

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 217

(rf) Adjectives of the classes above described take the "tie" iig when
united to a following noun or verb if ending in a vowel, but remain
unchanged if ending^ m a consonant. The following verbs take the defi-
nite imperative, which is best translated into £nglish by the infinitive
with **to.** Ex.: Kagalanggulang anid "respected father;*' kadumaldu'
mal tigndn, "disgusting to see;" kaayaayang pakingdn, " delightful to listen
to;" madaling gawin, "easy to do or make;" maUwag sabihint "difiScult to
sav;" mahirap kamtdn, "hard to accomplish."

iCVIII. Maka may be compounded with mag, resulting in magmaka.
denoting the idea of a great or excessive degree of what may be inaicated
by the root, which is generally reduplicated. (See par. 27, mag, )

Ex. : Magmakaauaaud {aud) " to be able to move to compassion; " magma-
iagaliigdlit (gdlit), "to be able to move to anger;" magmamakaaalitgdlit
akd iyang tauo, "that man will be able to anger me;" makagulitf "to
cause anger;" magmakahiyd^ "to be able to shame greatly" (see par. 27,
VMM)\magmakalumbaylumbay (lumbay)^ "to be able to move to grief ; " nag-
mcLkalumbaylumbay akd ang oalildj "the notice was enough to move me to
^ef;" makalumhayf "to cause sadness; to make melancholy;" bdkitmo
ikincUtdumbay ang mamsamang balitdf or AncVt nakalulumbay sa iyd ang
mascuamang oalitdf " Why does the bad news sadden you?"

XIX. Maka (naXra) is sometimes used in the place of ma (na) indefinite,
the two particles having many analogies. Ex.: Nakabukda ang pinto^
"the door is open;" nakallmot sU/dy "he forgot;" nakatayd siydj "he is,
standing up; " nakaupd siydf "he is sitting down."

XX. Makd and its synonym bakd express fear or apprehension of pos-
sible danger, hurt, or injury. They are written as separate words and not
as prefixes. BaJcd is more common. These two words may be best
rendered into English by "lest," "for fear that," etc. Ex.: Akd'y
vuigdalang t&kot, bakd maringig (I was afraid lest I should be heard.)
Souag mong gawln iydn^ makd mapahdmak ka (do not do that, because you
ixiay lose). Uouag kang magdaan sa btmdokj makd hararVfin ka narig matTgd
tulisdn (do not travel in the mountains, because you might be stopped by
tJie "ladrones"). Humarang^ to stop another on the highway. Mahi
^»\ay tduo diydn (lest there be people there).

(6) Makd also denotes partial resemblance, as in comparing speech,
£ruit, flowers, etc. Ex.: Makd Tagdlog ang capitdn nang paixgungusap
(the captain is like a Tagalog in his speech). Makd bulaklak sa America
itona bulaklak nanq amoy (this flower is like an American flower in odor).

XXI. In addition to the meanings of maka as a verl)al particle, it
indicates completed verbal action, best translated by the adverb "after"
^.nd a verb. Ex.: Makamisa nang pare (after he had said mass the

'priest ). Makayari nU6*y paroon ka sa (after vou do this go there

tio ).

It is also used idiomatically. Ex.: Makasakdling matj dungmaiing^
ttumUi ka nang kakanin (in case anyone should arrive, go buy something
[for him] to eat).

THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE " MAGPA."

I. This particle, signifying the ordering to do or make or permitting to be

cione what is denoted by the root, reduplicates the last syllable of the

f^article for the present and future indefinite tenses. The definite, pa,

VDeing a monosyllable, causes the first syllable of the root to l^e reduplicated

£or the same tenses. The definite has all three forms of in, i, and an.

Mag and man roots retain this between magpa and the root. Pag
Sometimes precedes magpa in the definite form {pagpa).

Sa is generally used before the person commanded. Ex. :

To order to teach. Magpadral. Magpadral ka kay Pe-

dro, order Pedro to teach. Mag-
papagdral, to order to study.
Magpapagdral ka kay Juan, order
Juan to study. Papagaralin mo

218

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

To order to read.

To order to do or make.

To order to come or go out; (2) to
order to take or bring out.

To order to ascend.

To order to go or come down; to
order to descend.

To order to g<»t into or enter.
To order to write.

ang iyong anak (onler your child
to study)- Pinapagdral pa ok6
nang a king ind (my motner or-
dereil me to keep on studying).

MagpniHvTgaral (1) to order to
preach; (2) to request to preach
(if not comj)etent to order).

M(ig])abasa. NagiHJjxtftn»a ang maen-
tro »a manga batd (the teacher is
ordering the children to read).

MagjHigaud. Na^pngavd akd (I or-
dered [something] done or made).
NagjHijmgawd siya ( he [she] is or-
dering [something] to be done or
ma<le). NakapagjHigawd aid (I
was able to order [something] to
be done or made). Maapapagav-d
ak6 ( I will order [something] to be
done or made). Makapaapag^wd
akd (I shall have ordere<i [some-
thing] to be done or made). The
definite with eis: Ipagavnl mo itd sa
kanlifd (order him to do [make]
this). Jpinagau^ ko «a igd it 6 (I
ordered you to do [make] this).
Ipinagagawd niyd sa iyd it 6 (he or-
ders you to do this). Jpagagawd
ko na iy6 itd (I shall order you to
do [make] this). (See index:
gawd. )

Magjyalabdi. Magpalalxis ka kay Juan
(order Juan to get out). MagjHtl-
abas ka kay Jxian nang damit (order
Juan to get the clothes out ) . Pal-
abantin mo itong aso ( have this dog
put out).

Magpapanhik. Papanhikin mo ang
matTgd batd (tell the muchachos to
come up). Makapagpapanhik, to
be able to order to ascend. Naka-
pagpapanhik akd (I was able to
order to ascend). Nakapagpapa-
panhik akd (I am able to order to
ascend ) . Makapa{fj»apapanh ik akd
( I will be able to order to ascend).
Magpapagpanliiky to order some-
thing Drought upstairs, hoisted,
etc. Papagpanhikin mo ang manga
baid nang tuhig (tell [order] the
muchachos to bring up some
water). (See index: pan/iii:.)

Magpapandog. A Iso means to spend ;
to use up. Magpapaqpandog^ to
order something to Ke brought
down. (See index: pandog.)

Magjyapdsok. ( For examples see in-
dex: pdsok.)

MagjHisnlat, Ang mangddral ay nag-
jmsufdt sa iyd ( indef. ) ; pinasdlat ka
nang mangddral (def. ) (the teacher
ordered you to write). The definite

I

TAGALOa LANGUAGE. 219

witli /» is: PasuhitimriO siifd nitonfj
snlnt (order him to write this let-
tei). The dual (two) is used in
tlie folio winj< examples, but they
aretranslated as usual into Mn<rlish.
PiiHfsnlnfLita iiitou(ji*uliit ( I ordered
you to writer this letter). Pinami-
{ti'ihit L'lla it'ihnifj Hi'ihtt (1 am order-
in*; you to write this letter). Pa-
yusiilntin httd niton'j xnhit (I will
order you to write this letter).
(See index: siUaf,)

To order ti> lock. M<i<j/nisiis). To lock; in'Kjsusi. Sn-

sidii mo ltd (lock this). JhnKtg wo
S'i.<i<in ltd (don't lock this). ltd
hl)un iitiL'isits) (this is not locked).
Alif<in mo oiifj pnhisn.sl nitd (un-
lock this [lit., "release this condi-
tion of l)einj4 locked"]). Snslfin
inomi'i pintd (lock the door). Aikj
/s'//.s/, the key. Aikj sds'nin., what
locked. Au</ pa«fi<ns), what locked
nuich, or the act of lockin;;. Atu;
ipdf/iiKsl; what used to lock much
with. Sfis), d(»riv»'(l from Chinese,
is distinct from sn.s), meanini; clear,
j)ure, (►r neat, which comes from
the Sanskrit, cnr/ii.

To order to sew. Mof/jiolohi lid (inij pittnlil nhid na

dk'ni (this is wiiat she tol<l me to
sew). (See index: Ichi.)

II. Magpa reverses the meaning in sentences where an inferior addresses
a suj)erior, or in which the subject has no power to command, the particle
then meaning "to retjuest, ask," etc. Kx.: Mnf/jKn/ond ho it'it't so huioiKj
Qmd "ask vour father to do this," not "order your father to do this."
jffagjHUiral k(ujd po f-o iit{/on(j unak .v( f.^nnJalmit (in<lef. ) or J'o/ior/oro/iii
^iimfd jxi ang onak nint/d >•(( esffo/ohan (def. ) (let your child study for a
W'hile yet at school).

III. The indefinite form will \)v seen by the conjugation of uuK/pogood
** to order to do or make;" there bein*; but one irregularity of note, viz:
In the pluperfect and future perfect tenses noko and moko, with }>ogpa pre-
fixed to the root and hh following, express these tenses, respectively. (See
tal>le8 for conjugation.)

IV. Pf7, the corresponding definite v«Tbal participle to ihogpo, and
formed by dropping the first syllable of the latter, forms the three deti-
Tiites regularly. Tlu; examples gi\ en in tlu^ tables are rmnfjHisnlot {sdhit)^
'* to order to write " (in)', nio</f>og(fnd {{lond)^ " to order to do or make "
(j); and magpolounn {ton'nn), "to order to sow " ('^"O-

\. Magpa may be })receded by inoko, forming mokopor/po, the com-
pound giving the idea " to be able to order to." (See under ina</popon-
hik in Par. I, niogjm.)

VI. Magpa also denotes what is suffen'd willingly or what is done with-
out restraint by others upon the subject; to allow or j)ermit, with those
roots which admit such idetis. The context serves generally as a guide to
distinguish the idea of " to order to" from " to permit to." lOx. :

To allow deception; cheating. }fa(/poroi/d ({nMu (hit/d). (See index:

doijd. )
To allow oneself to be crucilied. Mogporipd (from 'Iij>d). (See index:

<l{pd. )
To allow oneself to be whii>j)ed. Mo>ij)o}iampdii. (See index :/tr/;/j;>')N. )

220

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

Tn allow oneself to "Ik* flatly con-
tradicted.
To allow one's hair to V>e conil)ed.

To allow one}?elf to be jilapi>ed.

VII. }f(i(/p(i, with a root denoting
gradual intrin.sic action, iinlii-ate^itlie
erate or allow the transition.

To allow to become putrid.

To (;rder tu throw down; raze; (2)
to allow to fall into ruin.

To allow to l>econie hot.

To allow to become cool ; to cool any
thing.

Mofjpaitiiat.

M(uip<i}(ukl(ty. Also *'to order to
(!ond)." (See index: suklay.)

Ma(/pii((nnpnl. TniHompal^ to slap,
M(U!tainpnl^ to slap much.

a state or condition resulting from
I>ur]K)se (A the subject either to accel-

Mu'lpdhi'ih!:. Ilouag monrj kabulokin
ait(j nntiTiM shfiiiff (don't let the
l)ananas rot).

MiKjjxnjihn. damibd, to do away
with; to level; to throw one's self
down. Aiif/f/inihn, ( 1 )what thrown
down or leveled; (2) what done
away with. M<f(j(jih(i, to throw
down many things.

M(i(j}minit (from 'mil). MagpamKjinit,
to order something to i)e neated.
(Si-e index: ////7. )

MagjKihnn'nj. J^nhimUjin )tatin aiuj
f'mu) (K t us wait until the dav is
cooler). Mtt(/j>alamig ka uangtuhifj
(let some watxTcool [i. e., put some
water out to cool]). Jpd/ainig mo
tuH) ti'ibig (](ut the water some-
where to cool). BAkit hiiKii ku
migpupnlinnig uaiuj tub'ujf (Why
don't you C(»ol .«ome water?) Saan
(tko iiingpipuhumg nang tnbigf
(Where shall I j)ut the water to
• nol?) Jijftng baUtlang ii/nn oiig
j>agjKtpnbiiitlgi'tn mo nang tnbig (let
tiie water cool out there on that
porcl 1 ) . k'nhapou ag nng ibang silid
(UUf phtfigftahtinigan ko navg tubig
(vesterdav I let the water cool in
the ot her room ). M'lfjjnipaglanngy
to order something to l^e cooled).

Mngjuffuiio. Jlonag mong patuyoin
<i)ig iiHUn/t'i h'lbimnii (don't let the
plant.s dry uj^). Tt(g6 na pu (they
are dried up already, sir). Hindi
ko in/'i pinatfitiiifo (indeed, I am not
lettiu'j: them <lry up). Patuyoin mo
njnn, dry that or let it dry.

Vril. .\f(igpn is also used tn express a<'ts of the Creator; of nature, and
of p«'rs(»ns Ix'Vnnd llie control of the speaker, mainly with the idea of
cause. K\. :

To allow to dry up <»r out; to put out
t<» <irv.

To <'aust' waves.

To caus(» the flowers to bloom.

To cause it t«> tliun<ler.

To rear; bring up (as a child).

M(i(/p(i('i/<jii . A Ho ang nagpnpadlon sa
(bi'/a// (Wliat causes the waves
at sea?) Aug haiTgin (the wind).

M<ig/fit/>(i/iikbik.

M(igii<ikii/f)g.

Magpahiki. (See index: lakl.)

TAGALOO LANOUAOE.

221

IX. Maqpay used with reference to the effect of such actions as the fore-
j^ing, which are beyond tiie power of a human agent, signifies '' to ex-
pose to;'* '* to put in," etc. Ex.:

To ex|)08e to the sun; to sun one- Magjyaamo (accent on the hist syl la-
self, hie). (tSce index: arao.)
To ex|)08e to the wind or air. MagpaliaiTiim. (See index: haiujin,)
To expose to the rain. Mdtjjmvlan. (8ee index: vh'tn.)

X. Magpn coupled with nieteorological i)lionnnicna and astronomical
occurrences, connected with a human agency, denotes a waiting on the
l>art of such agent until the condition has changed or the event taken
place. The context generally serves to give the correct idea. Kx.:

To wait until the tyj)hoon ceases.

To wait for a change of wind.

To wait for the tlay to become cooler.

To wait until the sun (or moon)

rises.
To wait for a change (its in bad

MagpnlKKjfio.

MwipixJiniTijin,

Miujpalmnvi iHimj arao. (See Par.

VII.)
M(uj}m>iiJnii<i. (See index: sllang.)

weather).

Maypalild. Patlldin mo rnuva nng
uU'in (wait until the rain ceases).
The root is tU(l^ which alone means
** to seem." TiJil V'tno or auaki
tt'iun (it looks [seems] like a ])er-
son ) . Tih) Hfiptiroon sih't ( it seems
they went there). 7'/*/^/ iiapapnrilo
.s/A( (it seems they are coming
here).

}f(i</p((ul(hi.

Mtif/pfnimnf/if (from mndtjo, *' to
dawn;" rrn »t, ^f/rr).

XI. With roots exj)ressing the indefinite idea of what ma\ be given
magpd expresses acts which benelit anotlier than the agerit. Tliese roots
are generally those conjugated primarily with nm. Kx.:

To wait until the rain ceases.
To wait until davbreak.

To give fo(xl; to feed.
To send; to forward.

To clothe; to lurnisli clothing.

To give somethinjr to drink; to wa-
ter (as aniujal or luwl).
To put at interest; to invest.
To give hxlging.
To lend willingly.

M(ujp(il(iin. (See index: hiin.)

M(i(jpathili'i. Itn <nni p(idu!('t tili/a .stt
('ikn> (this is what he ordered me
to bring [carry] ). Ho if pathiln sa
nkiti ni im'i (this is what mv mother
sent [hrought] me). Aug ipifta-
ddh'i (what was ordered hrought
[i. e., what was si-nt] ). Mandnln^
to carry, bear, bring or take (over).
A)iij (JiiHila, what so brought, etc.
(See index: ddU't.)

M(n/p'(rainif (from dntnil). (See in-
dex : do in it. )

MtKlpubnnn, (See index: intim.)

M(n/putnhn.

M'i(fpafii/(^i/.

MnnpnutniK].

(See index: tnhn.)
(See index: ti'dni/.)
(See in<lex: utduij.)

There may be mentioned m<if/pnl:itt), t) restore tlie siijht.

XII. AVith roots expressinLr detiniti*s with mufj in tlie ]>rimar\ vcr})al
B^nse, infvjpd ex]>resses the idea of compulsion, exaction, or reipiest, as
Jihown by the intrinsic meaning or the context. Delinites exist with in, /,
and an. Kx. :

To collect taxes; to demand (or col- Md{ipdhn\s (from hnl^, "poll tax,"
lect) tribute. etc. ). IkdtnU ko ^/ Pedro lumg pim

222 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

{ I asked Pedro to pay one peeo in
taxes) . Imng piso ang ipinalmis ko
kay Pedro (one pe»o waa what I
asked Pedro to pay in taxes).
Itong bayan ay ang pbiagpabuisan
ko (this town was where I col-
lected taxes). MaghuUf to pay
taxes.

To beg; to ask for alms. Ma^palimos (from Span., Itmosna).

To ask for a ple<ige or pawn. Maapamnld. Sangpijios ang sanladn

ko nitong slugging {1 want to pledge
this ring for one j)eso).

XIII. Actions in which the agent has a pa.«sive part are also explained
by magjHi. Kx. :

To hear confession. Ma^pacumpisal (from Sp. confemr),

Saan naroon ang par^t ( Where ia
the ** padre?") NagpapacampigaZ
giya (He is hearing confessions).
Mogcumpisalf to confess.
To pardon. Magpatauad. (See index: ^aua</.)

To get shaved. Magpanhit. (See index: <i/ii^)

To have the hair cut. MagpagxipiL (See index: gupit.)

To have cleaned (as shoes). Magpolinis. (See index: /ini>.)

XIV. Magpa also expresses the idea of repeating something man^"
times, or reciting the same much, and sometimes by many. Pagpa 19

(I tilled him a devil many times). Ano ang ipinagpapadiablo niny6f
(Why do you say devil so much?) ITouag ninyong pagpapadiablohan ang
kapoua tano (Don't say devil so much to those around you).

XV. In some cases magpa signifies to do voluntarily what is denoted by
the root. Ex.:

To adorn one's self. Magpamuli (from buti). Nagpapa-

buti ynong dalaga (That girl is
adorning herself).

To praise one's self. Magixiinurl (from puri). At yaong

isa^y nagpapa muri (and that one
is [doing the same] for the praise).
Ang mahinhing dalaga^y pinumirl
nang lahat (A sensible girl is
praised by every one). Kapurihan,
praise; honor; fame. Syn. ibunyi

XVI. Magpa with some datives and all adverbs of place signifies "to go
or come intentionally," where denoted by the root, etc. Ex.:

To come to me. Magpasa akin.

To go to you. Mag}Msa iny6.

To go (come) to the person. Magjxisa tauo.

To go to Pedro. Magpakny Pedro.

To coin(» here (near by). Magpodiui.

To go there. Magjxidoon.
To go up the river, or up country. Magpa ilaya.

XVII. Mapa, formed by dropping the g of magpa, signifies ** to go in some
direction naturally or accidentally, and without intention on tne part of
the subject." /generally precedes the r(X)t. Kx. :

To run off or lower (as water). Mapailtabd. Napapaibabd ang tubij^

(The water is D€KX>minff low [or is
running off]). (Seeinaex: oabd.)

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 223

To a*-cend (as smoke). ^f<lpa^taas. Napapaiki(isanfjas6 (The

Hinoke i.s riKiii^). J)i vuni hiakitd
(intj 7itiTI/as^ asd amj iihkj papal layag
(Although the flame may not be
f^eeii, the tJiiioke will reveal it. —
T. P., oD).

To fly up in the air (as a bird). Mupailand'in<j. Ang hanoi/ ay napai-

landang sn impapauld (Tlie eagle
ascended into the ctlouds).

XVIII. It will be observed that the greater j»art of the rootH verbalized
by magpa require i in the deflnite to express *' what is ordered done, given,"
eU'., and in or an in the same form to express *' the person commanded,'*
etc. Ex.:

To give food to another. Magpakain. (See index: hi in.)

To allow to be punished; or to cause Magj^a rum (from dusa). Jlonagmong
or order to Ix? punished. pai-UHahan an<^ waiang kasalanan

(Do not permit tiie innocent [not
guilty] to be j)nnished).
To permit to pass. Magpadnan (from doan^ "road").

See index.
To give another something to drink; Mngpaimnn. (See index: \mui>.)

to water animals or fowls.
To cause to walk up. MagjudAhuL (See index: Itibid.)

To cause or order another to stand Mag})at'nidig. (See index: tindig.)
up.

XIX. A sense of ordering may be given to roots not having such an
idea by inserting a second p(t, although it is clearer to ust* mag with a fol-
lowing inflnitive. This second ;><r (which remains in all tenses) with roots
liaving the idea of ordering signifies to order a i)erson to order another,
although simpler forms are generally use<l. Kx.: Aug capdan ag nngpu-
painnm .va mamjd cahago (Tin; <"aptain orders the horses to be watered); or,
Ang capiUhi ag ua^jmUoH mninum sa ma)7f/d rabago [same meaning]. (2)
Mag])apa8iilat ka kag Juan kag J\'dro; or, M(tgiU(n< ka kng Jnan na magpa-
^ulat sign kag Pedro (Order Juan to order Tcjlro to write).

XX. The tendency of Tagalog, like all languages, to simplify itself, is
shown by the use of the root with //<i ])rcfixed, w ith the signiticance of a
verbal noun. The agent takes the genitive and the object nv person acte<l
upon the dative. Ex.: J'ahaiTffo, ''perfume;" pamutl (hnti), " lioliday
or parade ajjpearance; " pndala, "burden or what carried;" pahigaii
"jewel;" pamana, "inheritance;" jKttnga, " what hid<len."

lid ang patago nign na akin (This is what be ordered me to hide). Pan-
tang^ " credit."

TH E P A KTICL K " P A . "

I. This particle has many atlinities with inag/xt, as will be seen by the
examples. It re<luplicates the first syllal)le of the root for the })resent and
future tenses, except when sa if^ attached t<»and incorporated with it. With
roota of place, w hi<-h require pasa, the flrst syllable of the particle is redu-
plicated for these tenses. Xa is ]>relixcd to j)a in the indetinite |)ast and
present tenses with both j^a and jfasa. This latter particle should not be
confounded with roots })eginning with s(t conjugate<l withyy^^/. (See tal>les:
U'dong. )

II. One of the ]»rincipal signiflcati(ms nf pa is to ask or beg for in refer-
ence to the subje<"t, while jnagpa is generally ap})lied under like circum-
stances to the ol>ject. Ex. :

To ask for protection. Paani})<'>n.

To a**k for mercy or comj)assion. Piuitn). (See index: ana.)

To ask for shelter or support. Pakujdcup. Kinnnpktij), to press to

224 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

To ask for aid, succor, or a favor. Pamngalang. MagsangdUxng^ to aid,

favor, or succor.
To B»k for defense. Patangol. Tumanaoly to defend.

To a^k for help. Patulong. (See tables: tiilong.)

III. At times pa signifies ** to permit" the action indicated by the root
" upon one's selt," and sometimes ** to ask,'* as al)ove explained. It de-
notes greater willingness by the person affected than magpa does. £x. :

To consent to be deceived. Pnrayd, (from daydi). (See index:

dayd. )
To ask to be kissed. Pahalik. (See index: ha/ik.)

To consent to be whipped. Pahampat. (See index: hamp64t.)

To consent to be vanquished. Patah. (See index: to/o.)

To consent to be slapjied. Patmnpal. (See index: tampal.)

IV. (a) With the adverbs of place, and roota expressing place, pa sig-
nifies movement to or from what is denoted by the root, (i) Witn roots
of place m is added to the particle, forming jxi/fa, which bisy liable parti-
cle reduplicates the last syllable of the j>article for the present and future
tenses. The initial d of the adverbs changes to r after ;?«. Ex. (a): Pa-
riniy "come here;" jtarilOy **come here;" poriyAn^ **jgo there;" paroOn,
**go there." (See index: rfmi, dito^ rfiyan, do6n,) These four adverljs
admit the definites t and an. That m i is com^unded with ka^ forming
tA*o, ikimt. In may he used if compounde<l with magpa^ signifying **to
order to come or go." (See tables and index: diio. )

Some localities are to be found where the last syllable of the particle is
reduplicated with these adverbs of place for the present and future tenses,
but this is irregular and incorrect. The practice is unknown to the earlier
writers.

The four adverbs which have been considered are also further conjugated
with wm, making infinitives, etc. Ex.: Pumarinx^ pumarito, **to come
here;" pumariydn^ pumaroim^ **to go there."

(h) PasafpdfMy, ** to go to the house." (See tables: bdhay.) Pasabukid,
**to go to the country*' (fields); pa9addaat, **to go to sea;" pasaUog, **to
go to the river;" pasahundok^ **togo to the mountains;" pasa America, **to
go to America;" pa fa KoMiUi, *'togo to Spain." Xapa»€uin siyaf {Saan
ang tniTgo niyaf) (Where did he go?) Napatungo 8a J/ayni/d (He went
to Manila).

V. P(i also indicates to say what may be denoted by the root, but with-
out the plurality indicated by magpa. Ex.:

To say * * yes. ' ' Pado. Pado kaf ( Say * Wee ! " ) Xa-

paoo ka m kaniydf (Did you tell
him "yes?")

To say * * no. ' ' Pad ill Padlh ka! (Say * * no " )

Dill lin (No, indeed); var. din.
Ang piitadiri ian; person to whom
**no" is being said. Magpadiri;
to say **no" repeatedly. Avg
mringdirian; person to whom * * no "
nas been said often.

Tosav'^no." Pahindi. Pahindt ka (kayo) (Say

**no").

To say not to wish. Panyno. (See index: ayao.)

To say "devil." Padiablo. (See index: dia6/o.)

To call "chicky-chicky." Pakorukid.

VI. /'a, prefixed to roots denoting Ixxlily positions, forms words ex-
pressing the ixjsition taken. Ex.:

Lengthwise; lengthways. Pahafni. Putlin mo ii6 nang pahabd

(cut this lengthwise). Mahabd,
long.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 225

Crosswise; crossways. PahdUinfj.

Lying down; prone (position). Pahigu. (See index: hl(j<^.)

Lying on the side (|X)sition). Patug'dlfL

Lying on the face (position). Pataoh.

Lying on the back (position). Patihfu/<\. (See index: tihayd.)

On foot; afoot. Pat'nnli<i. (See index: timhg.)

Seated (position). Paup6. (See index: iipo.)

Vn. Pa J prefixed to roots denoting articles which may ))e bought, sent,
carried, sewn, left, lent, etc., forms nouns in<licating what affected by the
action. In c()mi>osition these nouns take the nominative, the agent the
genitive and the recipient the dative. Kx.:

What brought. Padnla. (See index: <l(tla.)

AVhat borrowed or lent (not money). Pahinun. Jfo >/ jmhinun m akin namj

I'liihif/an ninyn (this is what your
friend lent me).
What left as an inheritance. Pamann. (See index: inaiKt.)

What sewn. Patalil. (See index: UtJii.)

VIII. Some roots, such as kairiy eating; and /;h///j, drinking, are not clear
when used with pa alone in this sense, and arc conjugated witli both the
particle 7>a and the <lefinite of mmjpa (/></) forming papa. Ex.: Papakaln
ka kaif Juan (ask Juan to give you something to eat). Papa'niuin ka kay
Totuas (ask Tomas to give you sotnethiiig to drink).

IX. Formerly inapa^ with roots indicating relatives, signified to call
others bv such names. This custom exists to sonje <le;rree vet. Ex.:
Mnpaaliy to call "aunt." Mapamnio, to call "grandfather"' (or "grand-
mother").

THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "mAMPAKA."

I. This particle, which may be analyzed into paka with may prefixed,
generally signifies to do, suffer or voluntarily allow what may l>e denoted
by the root, and has two fonns for the detinite, jtay/Kika an<i )}aka. Mag-
paka and pagpaka form the present and future tenses in a i>eciiliar maimer.
The la.**t syllable, A«, a<lheres to the root in all tenses, ami pa is re<lupli-
cated for the present and future. The mag of magpaka changes to nag
for the i)ast and present tenses, Wlien paka is used with a root it is not
divided, the /7?-«^ sylla))leof the r(K)t being redui)licated for the ju'esent and
future tenses. Paka also retains pag with vc^rbs conjugated j>rimarily with
m«7, forming the j)retix pakapag. J'aka admits ht as well as / and an.

Roots conjugated with magpaka niay have either a reflexive or transi-
tive meaning, or both, according to the context.

II. Ff»r the conjugation of roots with magpaka, see the tables: matay, ladi,
J^Ui, and dral.

III. Some verbal r(»ots conjugated in tlie foregoing sense by magpaka are:

To allow one's self to be insulted; Magpakaaj/i.
patronized.

To humble; humiliate or lower one's Magpakahahd. (See index: baftd.)
self.

To satiate one's self. }fagpahibii.Hog.

T^o adorn (me' 8 self. Magpakahnli. Any kaJihihinan ay

nagpapakafnih .xm dalaga (mo<lesty
befits a girl). Aug ijtinagpapaka-
Imtl. liniig fla/ngang iydn ay iumg
siyi'ry luapnrl (the reason why that
girl is adorning herself is to be
a<lmire<l).

To im|)overish one's self voluntarily. Magpnkadaklid. Maj>akadukhd, to

couK* to ]»overty.

To improve or reform one's self. Magf>akagarnig. (See index: g'll'nig.)

226

TAOALOO LANOUAOE.

To diminish (voluntarilvj.
To esteem one*s self highly.
To allow one's self to be killed;
(2) to commit suicide.

To despise one's self.

To repent (deeply).

To exert one's self; to make efforts.

To enrich one's nelf.

Magpakaliit. McdiUf small; little.
MagpakamahcU. ( See index : mahal. )
Magpakamatay. Nagpakamatay aun
iaao kuM niyd (the man allowed
himnelf to be killed). Xagpaka-
maiay ang toga llapnn ml kaniyang
Barili (the Japanese voluntarily
killed himself [committed sui-
cide] ).
McLgpakammd, (See index: samd.)
Magpakasm. (See index: «/«.)
MagpukaiApang. TapatTgan {jjakcUa-
paugirC\ mo ang looh mo (exert
yourself; ** brace up"). (See in-
dex: iApang.)
Magpukaynman, (See index: ya-
man. )

IV. Ah uhuuI, 1 stands for cause, reason, or instrument of the action with
maifjHiht, ami an for the place or the object, according? as the verb for the
direct ol)je<*t admits it or not for the direct object. Ex. :

To take exact notice. Ma^pakaiandd. Pakatandaan mo ang

Kinasabi ko sa iyd (pay exact atten-
tion to what I am telline you).
(This word should not oe con-
founded with its homonym Uinddy
idea of age. )

V. The foregoing sense of magpaka generally applies to actions which do
not go beyond the subject or to verbs which do not require an object to
complete the meaning; but when used with verbs admitting a direct com-
plement other than the subject or capable of voluntariness, magpaka gives
greater force or intention to the root. In this signification the particle
admits in^ t, and an^ the reduplication being generall^r from the first
syllable of the root, as paka is the usual fonn of the definite in such cases.
Roots conjugated thus must be capable of expressing the idea of more or
less. Pag is retained in this sense with mag roots, forming pakapag or
pagjKikay as the (use may be, and in certain cases pagpakapag may be
lormed. Ex. :

To teach earnestly.

To have great prudence.
To go very slowly.

MagpakaA ral. Pakaaralan ninyd ang
maitgd batd (try to teach the chil-
dren earnest! y ). MagpakapagdraJ^
to study earnestly. Pagpakapa-
garalan ninyd ang wikang Tagdlag
(try earnestly to study the Tagalog
language). Magpakapangdralf to
preach earnestly.

Magpakabait.

Magpaknrdhan (from dahan), Mag-
pakarahan kang lumdkad (walk
very slowly). Pakarahanin mo
ang' paghila (throw it very delib-
eraU^ly). Dahanan mo iyanggawd
mo (do that work of yours slowly
[carefully]). Afapakarahan, to
slow down; to become quiet
Nnpakarahan na (it has b«x)me
quiet already; it has slowed down
now). Dumahan, to go away
plowlv. Magdahan, to go slowly.
(See index: dahan,)

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

227

To love greatly.

To guard one's self well.
To think earnestly, deeply

To arrange well.
To rectify well.
To tempt greatly.

Magpakagilio, Pinakagigilio hong
kapaiid na babaye (my dearly be-
loved sister).
MaijpakabVjat.

Mafmakaisip, Magpakaisipi»ipf to
tnmk very deeply. (See mdex:
iaip.)
Magpakdhumy. (See index: /iiwia!/.)
Magpakatuid. (See index: /utd.)
Magpakatuks6. (See index: iuksd.)

VI. By reduplicating the root, roots capable of expressing the idea of
more or less acquire stfll greater force or intensity with mappaka. The^
are generally used in the definite with this construction, and the redupli-
cation does not extend beyond the first two syllables of the root, acconling
to the general rule. PIx.: MagpakadalididM^ "to suffer intensely or to
endure creatly . ' ' Paka ittiprnpin mo, * * think intensely. ' ' Pakasipagsipagiriy
"take the greatest of care; care for it sedulously.*'

VII. Dropping the ka from paka^ there remains pa, which pronounced
long and almost as paa, has the same meaning as jxika, but should not be
confounded with pa (the definite of magpa), jxt (the particle), nor with
pa, **yet." It is generally used in the imperative. Ex.: Pabuksdn mo
(oi)en wider [or quicker]). Pap(dd mo (strike harder). Palaponan mo
(throw it with more force [or quicker]). (See index: Bukds; paid; and
tapon. )

VIII. A further use of magpaka with nouns or verbs expressing time is
to signify to persevere or remain until such time, doinjs^ what mavbe
denoted by the root used. This signification admits of in, i, and an. Ex. .

To
To
To

until morning,
until evening,
all night awake.

MagpakaArao. (See index: draoA
Ma^pakahapon. (See index: ftopon.)
Magpakapuyat. Ang ipinagpapaka^
puyat k6*y itong gawd (This work is
the cause of my having to remain
awake all night). Jtong silid it6*y
ang p'umgpakajmyalan ko (This
room is the place where I remained
awake [or watched] all night).

IX. When an accidental or fortuitous action is to be expressed with
'niagpaka the g is droppe<l, making mapaka, an analogous particle to ma.
^naka, formed from paka and in, should not be confounded with pinakA,
Used in a very different sense. (See index: pinakd.) Ex.:

To multiply.

To come to jwverty.

To grow greatly.

To be delayed more than usual.

Majmkarami (from dami). Applied
toanimals,et4\ (Seeindex: dami.^
Mapakadukhd. (Seeindex: dukhd.)
Mapakalaki. (See index: /a it?.)
Mapaka Idwig.

THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE **MAKI."

I. This particle, known as the sixth to Spanish grammarians, has
jMzHforthe definite, and reduplicates the second syllable (ki) of the par-
ticle for the present and future tenses. The pluperfect and future perfect
tenses are wanting, ^faki changes to naki for the past and present tenses,
and paki takes tn lor the same, forming pinaki.

II. The princijMil signification of inaki with roots capable of expressing
companionship, etc., is joining with, accompanying another, interference
or intermcKidling in what may be denoted by the root

III. 3faki may be combined with um, mar, man, magpapa., and iki, as well
as with itself {paki). There are some verbs which resemble maid in form.

228 TAG A LOG LANGUAGE.

claBsed as urn verbal forms,

such as pakin&bang. pakinig^ etc.^ which are
and should be carefully distinfl^uished. Ex.:

To join with or interfere in writing. Makisdlat (from sumiUcU), Ipinaki-

kisulai ho iid do6n (I am putting
this in 80 it may be w^ritten there).
lyang maiTgd tulat ay pakisulatan
mo nitd (Put this in to be written
with those letters). Makipagjni'
8(dat; to join (or interfere with) in
ordering to write (from magpasn-
IcU),

To join with in play or gaming. Makipaglard{tTX)Tnmaglar6; to play or

MLmme; see tables: lard). Also:
Fakipaglaroan mo si Pedro (Play
with Pedro). ( With oa) Papaki-
laroin mo si Pedro sa Kanitfd (Tell
[make] Pedro play with him ).

To join in fishing with a casting net Makipanaala (from mandala; to fish
called * ' dala. ** for a living thus) . Dumala; to fish

(occasionally) with a **dala."
Magdala, to use a "dala." Maka-
dala; to be able to catch anything
with a "dala.*'

To join with in saying "yer." Makipado {frompado; tosay "yes.")

To join in a conversation uninvited. Makipakiusap (from makiusap).

IV. See tables: uinArnl\ magdraL and sumakay.

V. Maki by itself admits only oi i and an in the definite, /represents
the reason, cause, or object of the action, and an the person interfered or
meddled with, or joined, accompanied, etc. For the conjugation with i
see the tables: sulat and humutid. For the definite with an see maglarh.

VI. Jn is only useti with maki in combination with magpa (pa). Ex.:
Papakigawin mo ang alila mo sa mangd tduo hfdn (Tell your servant to join
those men in their task). See also makipaglaro in Paragraph III, preced-
ing, and tables.

VII. Some roots conjugated with the principal signification of maki are:

To join or meddle with teachingj MakidraL (See tables.) Makipagd-

ralf to join or meddle with study-
ing. (See tables.) Makipangdral,
to join or meddle with preaching.
To pick a quarrel. Makipagduay. (See index: duay.)

To. claim a part in; to participate. Mahrdmay (from ddmay).
To carry along with; to join; to in- Makihatid. (See tables.)

terfere.
To embark with. Makisakay. (See tables.)

To thrust oneself into the com- Makisamd.

pany of another.
To thrust oneself into a dispute or Makitalo. (See index: tcUo.)

argument.
To join with in weeping. Makiiangis. (See index: tangis.)

To join (or meddle) in pleasure. Makitud. (See index: tud.)

VIII. An is sometimes suffixed to roots conjugated with maki to express
intensity of the idea denotes! by the root. Pag is generally retained in
expressions of this class. Ex. :

To mock greatly; to make fun of , Makipaghiroan. (See index: hirv.)

maliciously.

To join eagerly fn play or gambling. Makipaglaroan, (See index: lard.)

To thrust oneself into an alterca- Makipagsagutan. An6H nakikipagsa-

tion; to answer with vehemence. gvian sa kapidbdhay mot (Why

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

229

are you getting; into an altercation
with your neighbor?) SiimagiU;
to answer; to reply.

To thriL«t oneself into a con versa- MahipagmUtaan. ( 8ee index : «oZi/«.)
tion; to interrupt a report.

To hate intensely; to detest. Malijmylaniman {{voiwtamm). Not

to l)e confounded with its homo-
nym, tanimj "to sow." Kakikiia-
nlinan .si Jmni kay Pedro (Juan de-
tests [hates] Pedro intensely).
IIoiKKj kdttfj mafcipaf/taniinan ya ka-
pidUihay vio (Do not detest [hate]
your neighbor so).

IX. The asking for such articles of food, etc., as are generally exchanged
among neighbors for cooking and hou.<ehold work is expressed by mnklf
with the root denoting what may be a.sked for. A small quantity is always
understofKl. The cause is expresse<l with / and the person asked by an^
should the definite be used. Jn is used only in combination with ttukjihi
ip'i). Ex.:

To ask for a little wine.

To a.'^k for a few coals (fire).
To ask for a little salt.
To ask for a little rice.

Miik'n'ddk (from ahil). This word is
from the AraV)ic aruq^ from araqa^
*' to sweat; perspire." It is found
in Knglish as arrack.

Makiapinj.

Makia.vii. (See index: as'ni.)

Makihi(/af<. Xaklkihigds ako sana sa
inyoj ]>o (I would ask you for a
1 i tt 1 e r i ce, si r ) . S'nio a ng ijnna kiki-
hitjas mo/ ( \V ho are you asking it
for?) A king ipinakiklhlgas ang ina
ki'iig )nag xakif ( I am asking for the
rice for my mother, who is ill).
J'<i/a.' (Is'thatso:)

X. With roob* verbalized into actions, makl denotes asking that the
action expressed by the root be done for the subject. Kx.:

To ask another to reacli S(»mething. Makialmt. (S».'t' index: ahut.
To thank for. Makiftiinjl {intui hmniiTj/!; tore(|UeHt;

see index: hiiTi/l).

XI. With nouns denoting partition inaki signifies to a.^k for what may
be denoted ])y the root; and with ordinal numbers, in using which the
initial letter i is <lroj>j)ed, maki signifies to ask for tlie part designated by
the ordinal use<i. Kx. :

To ask for an inheritance.
To ask for a ])art or piece of any-
thing (as bread).

Makhmina (see index: inana).
Maki pi sang. }fa</f>isang; to break

Up and di\ idr a cracker or bread.

Mag}H.-<aiig ki/a (Irt us ])reak it up

and <livi<ie it).
To a*<k for a fifth, tenth, vie. Makikalinia; makikapno.

XIT. Witli roots <lenoting work which may be joine<l in by more than
one, maki sometimes expres.'^es the idra of asking to join in such work.
Ex.: N« Juan ag nakikafahig sa akin (Juan asked me t(>lielp him in getting
some water). The particle ka, expressing comjianionship. is prefixed to
the rof>t.

XI 11. Some roots commencing with /', /*, s, and / ciiangi' witli maki in a
similar manner as with man, when used in the signilivation of "to ask, re-
quest," etc. Ex.:

To ank for news. Mah'unaJUa (from balltd\ see iinlex:

I Kill 1(1).

To ask for a passage (an on a vessel). .Vokiiiahuf (from snkai/).

XIV. With ro(»ts sijinifying nationality, race, state, condition, occupa-
tion, profession, etc., nuiLi is sometimes nse«l to si*;nify that one acts like,
bears liimself like, or resembles what is <lenotefl by the root. This idea,
however, is generally otherwise expressed, as s(nne roots used thus are not
clear unless fiillv explained bv the context.

XV. With i/ni, )iiaki has a neuter meaning similar to that borne by ma
alone. Ex.:

To aj>j)ear like a nol>le (casually). \*ijHi/ynn(t}uil. XajKikihinnthnl dug

(ttijtin (Tiie slave looks like a noble
[has beconie so casually]).

To act like or resend)le an American. Mukiainer'K'ano.

To act liUe or resend)le a Spaniard. }ffiLica.sti/(i.

To act like or resend)le a Tagalnir. Mahitdijt'iJog. Xakikitngalog ilong

tan It s(t jHifH/in7gHS(ij) (This man
resend)les a Tagalog in his man-
ner of sj)eaking).

To act like or reseml)le a ])er>on. }fakif(hto. y<ikikit<'ino ang ainu {im-

gi>>/) (The monkey acts like a per-
son).

To act lik«' a w<»man. Mnkihnlnujr. yakibiih<nn' si Jium

(.Jnan acted like a woman)- This
also means l»j run after wonien.

To a<"t like a man; to run after men. Mtikihihtki. yoki/dUikl Hong Imhu-

ytitg iti'f (This woman acted like a
man).

To act like a Ix'a.-^t. Makihi'ii/o)). \<tkiJi<'ii/<>/i Ifong t'UKt lf,'t

(This man acted like a bea.'^t).

'J'o conform to in custom*^. Mdkingal;.

rni-: iNOKKiNnK caim mu; *' m vcka."

I. Mugl'i, tile ninth i>article<»f the Spanish writtTs u]M)n Tagalog, may
be anal\z«'d into ///'.'V :nid /'/, <»nc of (he <lelinites of }ui\. This particle
gencrallv expresses the ideaof ha\iiiLr (or heiiiir) what was nnt had or ]>os-
sess d ( <'i" c\i>tei| a> a state) lu'fore. Asa iiile, tiinghtt n-fers to condition
nr st;j!<\ u!iile//M//^ refers iintre tn tlu' aetinii by whii'h a state or cf^ndi-
tion is hroii-jlit about.

The stM'.Mid syllabli' of the })articK^ is reduplicated f<»r the v>resent iind
futurr t»n>es, while m clian'je^ to // foi* the past and j>resent, fnllowing the
u>ual inle. Tln'iv aie a few r\r<)>tioTis, the lirst syllable of the root being
reduplicated in snnie words. (S<c taMes: nt nig.)

I dcliiiite e\p?es>es the call^e or rcasnii of the acti<»n, while '//< stands for
eithei* place oi- pt-rsou, according to the nature of the action. (Sei' tiiblen:
iifiiii'i. )

Some Very correct and w idely ns<'d ex]»ressions are ma<le l)y using an
with in'if/hi. Vx. :

To lo<,lv much al tliinu-; i" inspect I Hi'iiiindn. Wain nhnng ^n'lkat pagka-
closely. k'Kiii'iiiititaii (There will be noj>lace

where I will be able to look at it
[insi>ect it; study it <»ut]).

T' . amuse one's self. M 'gLalihang. W'ald yilnng /tiitagka-

/i'xiiigtni ( riiere was no place where
they could ajnuse themselves).
Ma/ilif>aii(f, to b(> amused; diverted.

TAOALOO LANGUAOE.

231

Some roots conjugated in the foregoing Hignitieation witli iiuKjka are:

To have children.

To possess j)riidence.

T«» have crocodiles again (as a river).

To Ik? laden with fruit.

To have (tliere).
To have reii^on.

To 1h* lucky; to have luck.

To have rice again (also to havenuich

rice).
To err; to sin.
To forbid.

To have nionev again.
To be ill.

Mnghmnah.

Magk'dhnai/n. Xdghikahuaifn tm Uinnj
flog (This river is infested with
croco<liles again).

MaghibuiTijit. Xagkaf/tiiTf/a mi itong
h-nhoj/ ltd itof ( Has this tree borne
frnit already?) llludt y>a imgka-
hniujii (As vet it has not borne
fruit).

}I(t(]larooti. (St'e index: doon,)

Maf/hitxijt. X<(gl:ahal'<ip nn itong
hatiing ifo/ (Has this (;hil<l reason
yet? [i. e., has it yet arrived at the
agi* of reason]).

Mdgh'ttjxtJmJ.

yf(igk(ipi'il(tii.

Mugl.dfdld.
MdghikdHdld,
Mdgkdxdldfit.

Mdghdsdlii. Aug ipdgk'asdkit, the
canse of illness. Ano dug i/tindg-

T<> have enough.

To have gray hair.
To owe a deV)t.

kdsdkif mo/ (What niadeyou ill?)
Pd.^dkfdii, to be pained. Aug
]nti>dgk'dxdkt'n}, one ill from his own
fault, also a sick person.
Mdgkns'n/d. Wah'} jtn^ liind't udgkdJca-
fiiili'i sd kdtili/diig ]>dgkdln'i}nni (No,
sir; he does not get enough to live
on).

}ffigkdnhd)i.

Mdgkdi'ttdiig. (St'c tables: utdvg.)

n. The casual, accidental, or chance a-^>«MMblage of !nany pi'ople or
things, even though iinmaterial, i^ soinetimes expressed l»y indgkd. The
])article denotes a |>Uirality of snbji'cts in such «:isrs, as o|>posed to a plural-
ity of acts, as e.\j)ressed bv some other i)aiticles. J'x.:

■I'

To (juarrel (as two or more).
Tobee(pial; to coincide; to accord.
To meet casually; to <jatlier (as a

crow<l).
To assemble casually (as a cro\v«l}.
To meet casually (as a ci-owd ).

III. Mdgkd also indicates universality «tr j>luraliiy i>i' >nbjc«t> suffering
from or affected in som«' way l>y what is deuot«'«| liy the ro(»t. I!.\.:

}fdgkd(iudi(. (Sreiudex: duoy.)

M<ii/kddif>dt.

Mdgk'isdlnfuni'j. (See index: sd/i'i-

fmtig. )
.H'lgkdsmiid. (Scr index: snind.)
MngknfifKiii. (Sec index: tij»>i(.)

To suffer from a typhoon.

To suffer from an epidemic of small-
pox.

To suffer from a famine (:;l-o for
many to be hnngry ).

To suffer fnnn a conila*:ration.

To enjoy a holidjiy.

To have a ri<»t or tumuli.

To Ik* squeezed or pressed in a crow- 1.

Mdgkdiidij'/".
Mddk'ihii/i'ifiiii'/.

Mdgkdgntiiin.

Md'/l ii.^n in iij.

Mni/lnfiii).
^Iii<ll:(iiiiil.\
^Jii ■ ij iiiliiij, III

232 TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

IV. Another use of magka is to express an unintentional or casual error
in what may he noted by the root The imperative is made with maid
or bakd (q. v.). Kx.:

To say one thing accidentally for MagkaibA, Naakaibd tiyd (He acci-
another. dentally said one thing for an-

other).

To err in counting. Magkaiimang,

To ecjuivocate accidentally. Magkamalt Nagkavicdi akd (I

eouivocated accidentally).
Houag mong akalaing ako*y liat;-
kahnnaH ( Don't you think 1 made
any mistake).

V. Maqka is also used to express self-deception by the sifirht, hearing, etc.,
the definite fwist tense with an sufKxed heme taken an the root. For the
present tense the first syllable of the root is reduplicated and not the second
syllable of the particle. £x. :

To be deceived by the hearing. Magkaringan. Nagkariringan akd

(My hearing deceives me). (See
index: dingig.)

To l)e deceived by the sight MagkakiU\. (See index: hitd,.)

VI. A further use of magka is with the urn infinitive of some verbal
root8 and some adverbs of place, with which infinitives magka expresses
the 'idea, of making the said movement or going to or from the place indi-
cated by the adverb for some particular reason or cause. Ex. :

To follow (or obey) for a particular Magkammunod (from sunod). Also
cause or reason. to follow wherever another may

go. (See index: stwod.)

To l>e here for a particular cause or Magkadumlto. (See index: dito.)
reason.

VII. Doubling the root intensifies the meaning with ma^ka in some
cases. Ex.:

To be very late or tanly. MagkabdlambAlam. Nagkakabalam'

bdlwii ka (You are very late
[tanly]).
To r>e broken into very small pieces. Magkalausaglan»ng (from lansag).

Lumanmg^ to break anything into
small pieces.
To be finished or conclude<l com- MagkalutAsltUds (from lutds).

pletely.
To be completely broken up (as a Magkapatldpalid (from paiid; see

rope or cord ) . index ) .

To he completely destroyed. Magkasir^mrii (from Mrd; see index).

To he torn into tatters (as clothes, Magkauindangwindang (from wind-
etc.). aiig).

VIII. Sometimes ka, the definite of ma, combines with pag to denote
the source of something. (See index: nirn. )

THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE **MAGIN."

I. Magin, which Minguella thinks a **diFjruised passive'* in conception
reduplicatcH the gi of tlie last syllable of the particle for the present and
future tenses. It also changes m to n for the past and present indefinite.
It expresses the conversion or transformation, either gradual or sudden, of
one thing into another, as a general rule, the root beinfl: that into which
the other thing is converted or transformed. Magin is also used to express

TAGALOa LANGUAGE.

233

such ideas as **to beget," etc. Being a neuter particle generally there is
no imperative in such cases, as there can be no volition in the action ex-
cept with personal pronouns.

II. For slow, self-converting processes um is generally used, but in some
cases the use of magin is correct. Besides the indefinite the definites with
i and an exist. (See tables: dlak. )

As magin generally denotes a state or condition, it admits ika with some
roots, and in combination with ;>n, the definite of rnagpaj it also admits in
with others. (See tables: ddpat. )

III. As will Ik; noted, magin is commonly used to express such acts as
the turning of wine into water by miraculous agency, etc., as well as natural
processes. Some of the roots usually conjugated w ith magin are:

To be converted into wine.

To be converted into gall or bile.

Maginalak. (See tables: ahk.)
MacfinapdiK Nagiginapdo ang dking
bibig (my mouth tastes like gall).
To be turned into stone; to become Maginbatd. Ang asnna in Loth ay

f>etrifie(l.

To l>e converted into vinegar.
To be Vx^gotten.

To Ije ma<le man.

nnginbutong asin (the wife of Lot
became a rock of salt).

MaginmM. (See tables: »nk(i.)

Maginanak (from anakf ** child").
JS'aginannk ni Abraham H Isaac; at
iiaginanak ni Isaac «i Jacob; at na-
ginauak ni Jacob si Juda at kajii-
yang rnaiTgd kapatid (Abraham be-
gat Isaac; and Isaac begat Jacob;
and Jacob begat Judas and his
l>n;thren) — Matth. II, 2.

Maffintihio. Aug anak nang LHos ay
hagintt'mo (the son of God was
made man). (Rut if volition is in-
cluded other particles or expres-
sions nnist l>e used.) Aug anak
naiig Dios ay nagkatanang taiio (the
son of < iod assumed the form of
man).

Magifitagalog. Nagigintagalog ang
canih'in sd pa)7ga}Tijusap (the cap-
tain resembles (or seems to be) a
Tagalog by his speech).

IV. It should be noted that )iagin in the j)ast tenses is the only sense
'^vliioh can really he siii<l to denote complete conversion, ete. , the [)resent
^nd future tenses conveying the idea (»f "seems to he," "may be," and
** might be," respeclively.

V. Magin is also used in a neuter sense to express the assumption of
Office, states, con<liti(»ns of mind, morals, or l)ody, etc., if intention is not
^iieant, in which case other particles are use<l.

1*0 become a Tagalog.

^o become " j>resi<lente.

• >

T'o l>ecome just or virtuous.
T*o l>ecome a miser.

*X*o l)ecome worth v.

Mnginpresidcntc. Xagivpresidrnte si
(i(i( Sijueon a( sakn nagingobernador
(Don Simeon became presidente
an<l afterwards governor).

Magivbtiud}.

Magiiuntinhnof (I'roni luaraniot, mi-
ser; see dt'nnol).

Magiiidnpat (from dnpat; see tables:
dapnt). Mnrnpot, fair; just; de-
serving. Knntptan, merit; deserts.
Aug ikfipagindnpat, the reason or
cause of V)eing worthy.

234 TAOALOO LANOUAOE.

To be converteii into an aniraal. Magiuhuyop. Maghdyop, to eell, deal

in, or raine animals. Hayopan, cor-
ral for aniraaln; {K'n. Kahayoparij
bnitiiihnefis. Ang jKigkahayopf
brutality.

To become an habitual litigant (bar- Mfufni}HjlaAMp. Naginpalausap siifi'i
rator). (he has become an habitual liti-

gant).

To l^ecome <leaf. Maginbingi.

To become blind. Maginhulag,

To l>ec()n>e dumb. Maginpipi.

VI. With some roots magin may express the idea of **to be.*' Ex.:

To l)e the motive or cause. MamndahiUm. lio ang nngindahi-

Ian (this was the reason). Jto ang

nagig'mdah'dihn (this is the cause).
To l)efall. Maginj^lad. A n > kayd ang magitjin-

jMad kof (What will my luck l>e?

[What will l>efallme?])
To turn out to be true. MaginOttoo. Nagintot/K) ang ninafn mo

m Akin (what you told me tume<l

out to be true).
To l)e a servant. MaglnaVdfi. Itong tauoU6*y wagigin-

aldfl uinyo (this man will be your

servant).

VII. The idea of volition is sometime admissible with magin when used
with {>ersonal pronouns. P^x.:

To \wi thine. Maginiud,

To be mine. Maginakin. AWfy magiginiytVt ikao

ay magigin&kln (I will be yours
and you will be mine).

VIII. (a) Magin is also used in combination with the interrogative
adverbs ildnf (how many?) and magkamtf (how much?) and with the
answers thereto. ('0 With manin pretixcd to a numl)er and na following
it the completion of the period named is denotcH^l. Magin expre^^ses the
idea of ** about" in these cases. Ex.: {a) Magigini/dn sildf (about how
manv will there be?) Magiginildn aiig paroroonf (alK)ut how many will
go there?) Maatgindaiawang puo (about twenty). Magi gin magkano itot
(How much will this l)e worth?) (6) Knng maginisang Imdn na (After
about a month ). Nang magin Hang drao (after a few days). Kung magin-
9angta(jn na (after about a year).

IX. Magin may be used sometimes in the sense of *'beit" or

"either" **or." Ex.: Maginito; maginiydn (be it this or be it

that). Maginlalaki siyd; 7/jm/m6a6aye (l>e it man or be it woman). Ma-

S'nngaydn; maginbukas ay jHiroroon ako (either to-day or to-morrow I will
Eive to go there).

THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE ** MAOSI."

I. This particle, which changes initial m to n for the indefinite past and
present, reduplicates the last syllable of the particle for the present and
future tenses. It has all three definitcs, and may be combined with all
other particles, which are plactni between it and the root, except niaka and
ma definite in the sense of jKJwer, which precede it. (See tables: alts;
gawd; tapon, and kuha. ) It has no other signification than to denote a
plurality or universality of subjects in connection with the verbal action.
Naturally there is no singular numl)er. Xi/d may be inserted after the
first two letters of the particle to indicate an extreme degree of plurality.

See tables: ;>//f/^ira/. Ex.:

To U»ach (many). Maggidral. Magnpagdral, to study

(many). Ang mangd bijUd dUo 9a

TAGALOG LANOUAOK.

235

^'> oc>nft*is (many).
■*0|jr<, (>ut (many).

*o look; behold, etc. (many).

To writer; come in (many).

'^^^ Isiiigh (many).

Ixtynn My maggisipagdral na lahai
(ail the children herein this town
are studying). Ang marlgd bald,
nitong esi^elahan naiTgagsmpagdral
(all the children in this 8ch(X)l
are learning [or studying] ). Mag-
siparTgdraly to preach (many).
MaugdggipaiTg&ral, to preach ( by a
great numt)er).

Ma^si}Mgrnmpi»al. To hear confes-
sions (many prie8ts(; vutgMjHtgpa-
cumpiml. (See index: cumpiml.)

MagaiUibds. Magsilahas kagong hihal
na naririto sa looh (all oif you who
are inside go out).

MagsipoiuMxi. Bdkit ipinagnisipanood
nila wig dAgai igtwg inaiTgd Ithio
ii/dnf (Why are those men look-
ing at the sea for?)

Magsipdsok. Magmpdsok kagong lahai
ua iiaririyang vHilang gawd : ( Come
in all of you who are out there
doing nothing [or without work] ).

^fagsitaua.

THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE

" MAGPATI."

- I- This particle is little used, and besides the usual change of m to n for
tti^ |>ast and present indefinite reduplicates the second syllable (/w) of the
P^^^icle for the present and future tenses. It is used with roots express-
^^^ t,lie idea of motion or iKJsitions of the body, and signifies to perform
*^oli motions or take sucn positions voluntarily, and with briskness or
®^<icienly. If such sudden motion occur or position be assumed involun-
^•^ly, the p is dropi)ed, forming vxapati, equal in meaning to majxi. The
y^finites with i (ika) in the sense of cause, and an (han) for place exist.

CS^e tables: luhod.) Ex.:

^*^ prostrate one's self quickly. ^fagpatirapd (from dapd).

^^'^ lie down quickly; to throw one- Magjyaiihigd. Magpatihigd ka (lie

-. Self down.

^^ fall on one's knees.

^ "torn the back abruptly.

To

To

spring to the feet.

t down 8ud<lenly.

down quickly).
Mngpatiluhod. Ang ikapagpatiluhod:

the cause or reason for falhng on

the knees. Atig pagpatxiuhordn:

the place where or person knelt

to. (See tables.)
MagjtatUalihtd. To do the same

without intention, mapatitalikod.
Mngpatitindig. XagpajKititbidig xigd

(he is springing to his feet). Na-

papatltindig ako (I sprang to my

feet unconsciously).
Magpatiupo. To sit down suddenly

without meaning to: viapatiupo.

THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "MANHI."

• -^ - This particle beside the change from /» to ?i for tht* past and present
^J*^*^ finite, reduplicates t\w. second syllable (/</) of the particle for the present
r/^.^* future tenses. This jmrticle is used to express verlw of searching for
^**^Vitely, for those expressing the idea of removing dirt, etc., from the
tK^ orbo(ly, and for misi^ellaneous ideas which will be better seen from
^ ffxampfes. Certain letters beginning roots are modified l>y wanhij the
^e as they are by man. The definites with i and panhiy in the sense of

matay; maiaii; tiinju. )

II. A reciprocal form of many of the verbs conjuj^ated with mnnhi may
be formed with un sutfixed or witli magJd in place of manhiy retaining a?) as
a sufKx, however. ¥.x.:

To search for ciirefully; to ^lean. Mauhimalaij (from pdlay^ " un-

husked rice" ). Pannimalai/in {hi-
malnj/in) mo ana iyong kaknnni
(look for [glean J what you have
to eat). Amj ^iitutn ay any ipi-
imnliihiimUny niyd {hunger is the
cause of his gleaning). Aug bukld
mJnan ay any plnanhimalayan niyd
(he was gleaning [he gleaned] in
the field of Juan).

To peck licro and thcrr (as a bird in Manhbmkd (from tukd),
search (»1 ^rain).

To search fnr j^Muiiis of luteals nr Manhinu'ilos {irom pnlos^ "all of one
minerals. color"). JYUos also means the

jirains themselves.

To wash ones lace: lo rLMuovc stains, Manhl/ntnoi* (from IdmoSy **8tain,
snuidL'es, etc. smudge"). The root hildinos is

from this combination.

T(» comi) the mnstache. Mnulinn'tsmi (from itiijiay, ** nms-

tache"J."

To i)ick ibe teeth. Munli'nunya (from IhTya^ "what a<l-

heres to the teeth". See tiible**).

To clean the vi\y^. Mfuthumit (from tutul'i, "earwax").

To clean tlie eyes. Mnnhi tnntd (from inutd, "secretion

of the eye").

To treat swelled eyelids nr wash Mmth'tnntkto (from poktoj "swelling
them. or intlammation of the eyelids").

Vduioktohin, a person frecjuently
aCilicted thus.

To clean llie nails. MdtiJntn/oko (from kokd^ " nail,

claw'"').

To cleanse from head lice. Afnnhiinfntn (from kutu^ "head

louse"). MunliiiTyutuhan or wm/-
hii7ynfnh(i)i, to cleanse ea<.*h other
thus. Manfiinotnay to cleanse of
body lice. Toinahin, i)erson af-
flicted thus.

To fnllow by tiailiiiL'; to hol<l in .1/'/ //A ////a/.v'/.s' (from />aAv//?, "footprint,
miMuory (inet.j. sign, trail, etc."). Bakas^in mo at

Haiti) (iny y<'i/Hik (follow it, here is
the footi»rint). Afayhimakasariy to
follow each other on the trail, etc.

Torel»cl; re\olt. Manhi)n(iysik (from baysikj "cruel,

tyrannical").

Tn aveii;/e or take re\t'n;_'e. Mdnliiynnii (from gant'iy "reward,

premium"). Pinanhif/antl niid
siyd (they avenged hnn [her]).
*S'/7/f any panhiltiyantihan iiiyd (he
will take revenge on them).

To i»e«idle: to s«'ll bad iroo<ls. Mdnhil'iki) (from tako).

To act like a child. M<uiftiinu:<ino!< (from momtdf,

"child"). Moi^mds mo iidf (Is
this your child?)

To tell the fortune by the jialm. Mnnliimdhtd {Ivoxw pdlad^ "palm").

TAQALOG LANGTTAGE.

237

To pretend to work, or to work
without purpose.

To Ije unea«y on account of solitude.

To meddle; intrude.

To faint; t^woon.
To suspect evil.

To l>eat alxjut the bush.

To change color or the expression of

the face.
To feel badly fur lost work.
To embark in the V)oat of another.

To exert one's self.

Manhimnnthu/ (from panday^
"smith"). PfDuiaii wlka, great
talker, "wordsmith."

ManlinnaiTijIao (from pangldo.^ sad-
ness, fear, or uneasiness caused by
being alone) . }fapangldo im bdhay
(a lonely [solitary] house).

ManhiimUok (from pdsok), Houng
moiuj paiihiniaxuhni niig bithay
lumy ihanrj manlid tduo (don't med-
dle with what passes in the life of
other people).

Manliiindkty (from matay, "idea of
dying." See tables: mnlay.)

Mutiliimula (from pula^ "idea of not
believing and blaniing another").
Pf(/d is the idea of redness.

MtinJinttU'iny (from pi/iny, "bank,
shore"). If<tnay mo ahony pami-
/inyyintlltujan (Don't beat about
the bush with me; <lon't try any
red tape on me).

\f<inhim>iti{iron\])nti, "idea of white-
ness").

}f(nffiindyany (from sdyang).

Mai)h 1)1(1 ht >/ (iroin snlcay, "boat, ves-
sel").

}UnLlnrinp(t)iy (from tdpany).

THE INDEFINITE I*-\RTirLE

'mags.\."

I. As usual, this particle has the past and present indetinite take n in
p)lace of 111, while the .^erond syllable {>(<() of the ])ar(ir/e is rc«hiplicated for
the present and future tenses. All tliree <lctinites exist. See tables: Ivulk.
The signific^ition of this particle is imitation, adoption or following the
customs, drei^s, or language of another people. It is little used, inakl being
more customary. Kx. :

To follow American customs.
To follow Bicol customs.
To follow V'isayan customs.
To follow Spanish customs.
To follow llocano customs.
To follow Moro custr)ms.
To follow Tagalog customs.

}f« lysaa ni erinuif) .

^f^^ysahikol.

Maysahisoya.

Maysacad'da.

M<iymdoko.

Maynn ka morosa n .

Maymtaynloy. Any sinnsalaydlor;,
what followed or imitate<l, etc.;
Any ipaystttnynloy^ the reason or
cause of such adoi)tion. Pay is
droj>ped witli in.

II. Magm; uo; as in the ex|>ressions inaynddrm) k<i nany danid; put the
clothes in the sun: mihawjin mo itony bnro: hang this sliirt in the wind, etc.,
are not from this particle but from f^a, the j)reposition "in," conjugate<l
with mag and i respectively.

III. The signification of nmysa may be exi)ressed by other particles
than ma/i, among them being utnyht i\n<\ ma wilh ^n/ sutlixed. Ex.: .SV
Jnanay nagkakastdadn (Juan is very Spanish in his ways [speech, etc.]).
Naiatagalogan nyd ( He is very Tagalog in his ways). By doubling the root,
if a bisyllabic one, or the first two syllables thereof if longer, a diminu-
tive meaning is imparted. Kx.: yatatayataya/oyan >///fi ( He is somewhat
Tagalog in his ways).

238

TAGALOG LANGUAGE.

THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE **MAQKAPA.*'

This particle changes initial m to n for the past and present indefinite,
and reduplicates the icui syllable {/>a) of the particle for the present and
future tenses. The sole use of the particle is to express, prefixed to roots
denoting positions of the body or motions of the parts thereof, the invol-
untary remaining in such position, etc., as the result of fright, surprise, or
other violent emotion. The definites with t, toexprees the cause, and with
an, to express plat»e, exist. (See tables: miilat.) Ex.:

To remain with staring eyes. MagkapadUai. Dumilat, to open the

eyes. Madilat, to be open (as the
eyes) . Syn. , magkapamidat, to re-
main with the eyes open. Aug
tj[Mff7il'a;>amr2/c{/,thecauseof remain-
ing with staring eyes. Angpagka-
pamiildtanf the place of remaining
thus. ^

To be left with the mouth open; to Magkapangangd, from nganhd. ^gii-
stand with open mouth. mangA, to o|)en the mouth.

To stand showing the teeth (as an Magkapaiigm (from iTijUi),
animal, etc.

THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "mAGKAN."

I. This particle takes n in the past and present indefinite in place of m,
and has the peculiarity of reduplicating the initial syllable of all rooU con-
jugated by it. For the present and future tenses the second syllable {kfi)
of the particle is reduplicated in a similar manner to the reduplication of
the gi oi magin. (See tables: luhd.) Magkan signifies primarily the in-
voluntary flowing out of the secretions of the body, and nas the definites
of I for the cause and an for the place. In a metaphorical sense magkan is
also used to express involuntary emotions, actions, etc., as will be seen by
the examples:

To bleed.

To sweat from fear or illness.

To slaver; to drool.

To weep or shed tears unconsciously

(as from a wood fire).
To blush.

To undress or lose the clothes (in-
voluntarily).

To overflow; to exceed.

To drop off.

To burst into laughter.

To be stunned by a blow.

Magkandudug6{fromdtig6/ *h\ood** ).
MagkanpapAwis (irompduis).
MagkanUu&way (from Idway, "sa-
liva").
MagkafUiduhd (from ItJid^ "tear").

Magkanhihiyd (from hiyd). Kahi-
ydhiifd, a shameful thing.

Magkanhohobd. Nagkakanhohobd ii
Juan nang pagtaua (Juan is shak-
ing his clothes off with laughter).

Magkanlalabis, Linabisan mo ang
uto8 ko sa iyd (You exceed^ my
orders to you).

Magkanialaglag,

Magkantataua.

MagkantitUap,

COMBINATIONS OF PARTICLES.

The combining of various particles is called ** transcendency *' by the
writers upon Tagalog, and may be said to have the following characteris-
tics: With two exceptions, double or triple combinations of particles
prefixed to a root demand that the one immediately before the root take
the definite form. (See tables, dual; dlak.)

First exception. Some roots conjugated by mag and magka admit urn,
(See tables, pUit; dali; sunod.)

l8t.

Uni.

No def.

2ci.
3d.

Mag.
Man.

/Vii/.
Pan.

4th.

Maka.

Ma. . .

5th.
6th.

Magpa.
Maki.

Paf/pa.
Paki.

7th.

Pa.

Pa.

8th.

Ma.

Ka. . .

yth.

Magka.

Pagka.

TAGALOO LANGUAGE. 239

Second exception. The particle maka precedes other particles, a prop-
erty also possesi^ed by magsiy except when in combination with niaka^
which goes before rnagsi in such cases. (See tables, lard; gawd; halag;
dito; alts. It must further be Ix^rne in mind that roots which are primarily
conjugated by mag retain pag as a prefix invariably, as do also those roots
differing in meaning with um and mag.

THE DESKJXATION (>F PARTICLES.

For convenience of reference to the Spanish works and also to the work
of Humboldt, the numbers given by the early writers to the various
particles modifying roots are of use. They are:

10th. Magin. Pagin.

11th. MagM. Pagsi

12th. Magm. Pagm.

Ka. IHth. Manhi. Pan hi.

14th. Magpaka. Pagpaka.

15th. Mtigpali. Pagpati.

IHth. Magkapa. Pagkapa.

Ma. 17th. Magkan. Pagkan.

In, i and «« are the three particles always accompanying the definite.

THE PARTICLES "KAPA<i" AND "kaPAGKA."

These particles are much used in Tagalog to express the ideas given in
the following exami)les. The agent takes the genitive (or possessive) case
and the object or effect of the action the accusative. Kx. :

When my father left, I left also. K<fp(tgalifi iiang aking annV g ak6*y

ungma/is din.
After he finishe<l his work, he came Kapagkala pus niga nang kanigang
to where 1 was. gainVy j)inaritohan nigdako.

TFIE PARTICLES ** PACi " AND *'PA(;KA."

The same expressions as the above may also be rendered l)y pag and
pagka. Ex.:

When mv father had gone away, they Paga/'nf dito nnug Aking anuV y si gang

arrived. pagddtmg nild.

When it strikes twelve, we will rest. Paglngtng nang a Ins doce ag magpa-

])(diiiTg(i fa go.

After you pay your respect.s to him, J'aghafi mo m kaniyA'' g parini ka.

come here.

After I eat, I shall go for a walk. Pagkakain h/g ako'g magpapanal.

THE PARTICLE *'PINAKA,"

This particle, prefixed to root^, signilies to be held or reputed in what
raav l>e expressed bv the roots, it mav also mean " number of times
made" in some cases. Kx.:

Rice is consi<lered to be the bread of Ang kanin ag ^ign)ig pittakadndpay

the Tagalogs. iinng mainid tagdlog.

We regard you as a parent. Kagd jhV g ftinakomagdlang nainin.

He is regarded as their leader. K>igd ang jtinakapuno nild.

Nouns are formed in various manners in Ta«ral<>g from roots.

I. Some nountj are formed by prefixing inajnuj to the root. Ex.:

Mocker; scoffer. Mapaghin). Kespectful person. Mapagpitafian.

( ienerous [)erj?oii. Mapufjlnyoija. Destructive person. Mapagsird..

Scoffer; lioaxer. Mapnylihuk. |

Proud; arrogant Mnpagpaiald. I
jiernon. I

II. Pnla prefixed to roots forms otlier nouns. Ex.:

(.Quarrelsome person. JViIannai/. Blaspliemer. Pala^imjxi.

l>runkard. PtiUtlntun, I Barrator (litigant to Paltu'tsajf.

(rlutton. ]*<dak(\in, excess). ,,

Loving (ann)rous) I'alasintn. J^oaster; greaftalker. PnUurika.
j»erson.

S(»me of the above may ln' vi-rbalized by cliantring the initial » to n or///.
Ex.: yahilnin f<ii/a (he l)ecan)e a glutton). Xolalaiuuni ffltfu (he is Ik*-
coming a drunkard), Mdldhnrlka siua (he will become a boaster). This
is now provincial.

III. Some nouns of the classes undi-r consideration are formed bv pre-
fixing ni(t either to the imperative or future of the root, as combineil with
///. Ex.:

Eriendly person. Ma'ih'ujni.

Amorous jK'rson. Mairognt; Uiasiutalun.

l)iso))edient j)erson. Mimiuun (from sutui).

Obedient person. Mat^unorm (from sunod).

A jolly pei'son. M<itaininin (from tana).

\n affectionate person. }fav'Ui}irK.

A tiudd, basliful person. MidiUiiyhi (froni hiyd)'

A forgetful |)ersoii. M(ddhinit'ni (from I'nuoi).

A j)leasant pers«>n. M(dnlug<Vin (from hnjod).

A sorrowful j)ers<)n. Mtdulnnihin/hi (from lumhdy).

A delicate, sickly ]>erson. Mdsnsalt'm (from mkd).

A timid j>erson (cowardly). Mntatokut'm (from tdkot).

I\'. Other nnnns indicating occupations, professions, trades, etc., are
formed by iinni with tlie future ten.^e of the indetiuite. See list of such at
end of section three.

V. Nouns indicating a j)ersou suffering from a clironic disease or fault
an' to be found formed by sullixing in to the root denoting such <lisea.«e
«»r fault. (See Tar. XX III, in.) Tliese mums may be verbalized V)y
/'/'. I^x.: Sit/a 1/ III ulfi ltd (he suffe?*s from asthma). SiUVy tinatamad{they
are lazy).

\I. Some nouns with an idea of ]»lace inherent are formed with the
future tense of some roots with (di. Ex.: PayhnhnoiKut ^ vvnwtery; burying
]dace (from b(h'>ii). Payltihi h ynyn n, ] >i\\>\^\ry {iroiu hinyag). Pagpipat^yariy
abbatoir. IMace of execution, rdyhihitdi/nn (from hitny).

\'II. Some nouns indicating occu])ation are formed by ^/f/a combined
with y/^// ('"f/"/"'.'/) before a nn>t. Ex.: 'Jayo/KKfhdntnft, .'ientinel, watch-
man. Syn.: Taydpntitdnod, 7)i'/apiit/.<i('iiiiq, cook (from suing, "cooked
rice"). Sometimes //^/^a alone indicates this. lOx.: 7af/a/*/;ao, wanderer,
stroller.

MlSCKI.LANKorS WOKI>S.

The following words arran^red alphabetically by roots in Tagalog will

show the u.<r' of many idionmtic j>hrases, etc.:

< )ccuj)ation; iMnploymeiit. Ahnin (syn.: gaud).

To try; t<» inteuil. Mngnlnda (from akahi).

TAOALOG LANGUAGE.

241

Rancid.

To look after and follow a person.

To heed; to note.

The.

To reap or cut rice.
What?

Unaccounted for; without reason;
at random.

Rancid (uj4ual word).
To growl.

To sing.

New.

To arise; to get up.

Widower or widow.

To change the clothes.

To launch or put a vesj^cl into the

water; also to place a ladder.
To travel on horseback or bv means

of horses.

To palpitate.

To weigh anchor.

A kind of rice.

To clear off timl^er in order to culti-
vate the land.

Aid (rare). Aug p'maala, what is
rancid. Aivj jKujahiy the rancid-
ity. Umahty to Ijecome rancid.
Makaala, to make rancid. Meg-
papaa/aj to let everything become
rancid.

Magaliighaif (from alagbay). [Hare].

ViiHUnin, from (imin.

Aug. Sometimes used as ''be-
cause. ' ' Hindi (iko viakupogbaiTgtm^
ang aktVg may sakit (1 am not able
to get up, because I am ill).
Plural ang mawjd.

Magani (from (/»/, "harvest").

A }t of A no hagd f ( W hat th en? ) . 1 « o
;;(/.'' (What else?) An6f Pagkak-
aftfilaan k'ltaf (What? Must we
speak in Spanish?)

Anoan6. Walang anonno ang salajd
ito (this money is unaccounted
for). Tinapal sign nigd tvalang
anoano (he slappeil him without
reason).

Antd (same changes aa a fa).

UmatTgil, var. umifn/il (from aiTtjil;
iiTgil).

Maganit (from aiHl). SHang lahat
ai/ naganit (they all sang).

Bago, liaginigdino; bachelor. Ba-
gong (lomit, new clothes. Kaha-
gongtauohan, youth fulness; l)ache-
lorhood. Bagotig jKuTi/hioon, ha-
gong vgali, new lord, new cus-
toms. Maghago, to renovate.
yUunagity to wear for the first time;
also to renew. (See Ipngo^ ad-
verb. )

Magha)7gon (from haiTgon, a Java-
nese word; see tindig). Mag-
hairgon ka (get uj)). Also means
to lift. IJunli (iko ntnknbatlj/on
nang tdpngan {\ am unable to lift
the jar).

B'liio, var. Balo.

Magfiihis.

Mnhnngsnd. Bnngsoron mo oko nang
hagih'in (place the la(ld<-r tor me).

MaiTi/dhaifo (from cahago, "horse").
Derived from Sp. caballo, which in
turn is from L. Lat. caballus, "nag;
pack horse."

Kiunnhag ( f r< un kdhag), Xogkakdhag
ang dih'/ift ko (my heart [lit. chest]
is palpitating). Kakabagkdhag, to
palpitate greatly.

Knjnnhag (from kahag). Note the
difference in accent.

Knhng.

MogkaiiTgin (from kaitTl/in).

242

TAOALOO LANGUAGE.

To pick (as a guitar) ; to twang; to

pluck at.
To snatch; to take by force; to pull

up by the roota.
Iron or other chain or wire.

What's his name. What do you
call it.

To catch on the wing.

Bad or stagnant water along a shore.

To seal or close a letter.
To belong to.

To be restless.

To order to elect.
Girdle.

To recline; to lean against.
To dig a hole.

To cease; to end.

To wash the hands or feet.

To speak nasallv.

To unite or bind together.

To look blankly (as a blind person).

To sparkle (as the eyes in excite-
ment).

To roll up (as sleeves or trouser legs) ;
to lift the skirt.

To give alms.

To look first at one thing and then

another.
To avert the eyes.
To look here and there on account

of noise.

To look here and there hurriedly.
To glare in a wild manner.
To act foclishlv.

To relish.
To wish; to desire.
Wmg(of bird).
To pardon; forgive.

Without respect ; limit or considera-
tion.

Magkidahit (from kalabUj var, kalbil).
Kumamkam (from kamkam),

Kauad. Magkauadj to use a chain

or wire.
Si kiuin. Ang kudn. This word can

be verbalized by tiw, magj magpa^

maki, etc.
Dumdkii (from ddkit),
Dikyd. yfadikyd Hong dcdampasiy itd

(there is stagnant water along this

shore).
Magdiit. Pandiitt seal, wax, gum.
Gumnndn (from gandn). Gandn sa

dkin ito (This belongs to me).
Gu maw ( from gaso^ rare) . Ga^ian,

Serson disturbed. Manptiso, to
, isturb another. Gagiuohan, rest-
lessness. Gagamgam^ very rest-
less.

Magpiihalal (from halal),

IligpU. yfahigpit J tieht. Maghignil,
to tighten ; to cinch up (as a girale,
strap, etc.). WcUang higpUkigpitf
slovenly.

Humilig (from hilig).

Ilumiikay (from hiikay). Ang pan-
hukayy the s|)ade.

Humumpay (from humpny).

Maghugas ( from hugat ) . ( See lamos.
lipd).

Mahuhumalhumal (from humal).

Maglanykap (from langkap).

Maglilnng (from lilang),

Lumilap {irom. lilap) [rare].

MaglUis. Bdk'd ka naglililis nang m-

lawalf (Why are you rolling up

your trousers?)
Maglimon (from Si». limosna). Mag-

palimd^j to ask for alms.
Lumingap (from IhJgapf var. Hnga-

nap.
Lumingat (from lingai).
Lumingingig (from Unqingig^ rare).

Probably a combination of dingig,

idea of hearing.
lAirnvTijos (from lingos),
Lumiyap (from liyap).
MamaiTgal. Magmamangdmangahan^

to feiv:n stupidity.
Nnmamnam (from namnam).
Magnasa (see pita).
Pakpak. Lumipad^ to fly.
Maopatduad (irom patauad, syn.,

tavad). Magpalaua^^nf to forgive

each other.
WaJang paJLomangd,

TAOALOO LANOUAOE.

243

To choose; to select.

To pick up.

To become dull (aa a knife or i izor).

To boil rice.

Peat; epidemic; to suffer from.
To proiess; to vow; to believe in.

To pass between rocks, hills, etc.
To peep.

To care for most diligently.
To grasp; take hold of; pmch.

To put vinegar on anything.

Can be.

To run away from or hide froi i.
To betray.

To cut grass; to mow.

To patch.

To be gaping stupidly.

To look upward.

To stare at.
Friend.

Pleasure.

To do anything swiftly.
To look down.

To assign to; to turn over to.

To sprinkle.
Orphan.

I^imilt Ang pining what chosen or
selected out. Ang pinilian {sing,)
or Ang pinagpilian (plur.), what
selected or choeen from.

MagpuloL

Ihimorol ( from purol), Ang purolin^
Vi'hat dullea. Ttimomal (from
tomal)f to be dull (as business).
Katumalant dullness. Ang itomcU,
the cause of such dullness.

Sumding ( from sding ) . Sindingj boi 1-
ed rice.

Magkasdlot.

Sumampalataya. A-ng gumasampala"
iaya^ the creed, faith or believer.

Sumilang (from silang).

Sumilip (from sUip).

Magpakampaggipag (from tdpag),

Sumipit ( from tipity ' ' tongs " ) . Sinl-
pit, an anchor.

Magnikd. Ang sukaan, what dipped
in or flavor^ with vinegar.

Sukat. I)i sukai, can not be. Siikai
bagd siyang pagkcUiivalannf (Can
he be trusted?) Siikat [dt gukat]
myana panivalaan (He can [can
not] be trusted ).

Ttimakan (from takds).

Tumnksil (from taksil), Taksil na
Mt/o, a traitorous or treacherous
man. Kataksilan, treason, treach-
ery.

Tumagpaa (from tagpas),

Magtagpt.

TcUaiTgdtaiTgd. MagtangatangAhanf to
fei^n stupidity.

Tumingald (from tiiTpald). Ang
tingaUim, what seen thus.

Ttnmtig (from titig).

Katolo. Kaiotohin mo siyd (befriend
him).

Tud. Ang pagddiing nmt/<5'y naka-
tutnd sa akin (Your arrival causes
me pleasure). JkindtuUid ko ang
pagddting ninyo (Your arrival is a
source of pleasure to me).

Thimulin (from tulin). Magtuiin, to
go swiftly. Anq ipagtuliny the
cause of going swiftly.

Tumunj/o (from tungd). Also to bow
or incline the head. Angtunghdn,
what looked at thus or the person
bowed to.

Magakol. Si Pedro nagukol nang
kaniyang gagawin kay Juan (Pedro
turned over the work to be done
by him to Juan).

JSfngvnsik. Ang panimnk, the
sprinkler.

Ulila,

To })i('k (an a guitar); to twang; to

pluck at.
To snatch; to take by force; to pull

up by the roots.
Iron or other cliain or wire.

What's bis name. What <lo you
call it.

To catch on the wing.

Bad or stagnant water along a shore.

To seal (»r clo.ae a letter.
To l)elong Uk

To be restle.'^s.

To order to elect,
(iirdlc.

To recline; to k*an against.
To dig a bole.

To cease; to end.

To wash the; hands or feet.

To speak nasally.

To unite or bind together.

To look blankly (as a blinil person).

To sparkle (as the eyes in e.xcite-

nicnt).
To roll up (asslccvcsor trouser legs) ;

to lift the skirt.
T(» jxive ahns.

To look iirst at rme thing and then

another.
To avert the eyes.
To look here and there on account

of noise.

To look here and there liurriedlv.
To glare in a wil<l manner.
To act foclishly.

To relish.
To wish; to <l(>sire.
Wing (of binlj.
To pardon; forgive.

Witliout res[»ect; limit or considera-

Mnfjhilahit (from kalahit, var hilhit),
K'fi ma ui ka tn ( from hi mkn m ) .

Kaudfl. Maf/kaiuul, to use a chain
or wire.

Si kfhhi. Any kudu. This wonl can
be verV>alized by ion, ninfj, magim^
luaki, etc.

Ihiindk'd (from ddkit).

Dikifd. Mndihjn lUnuj dxilampiuiij U6
(there is stagnant water along this
shore).

Mat/ffiit. PamJiitj seal, wax, gum.

(himandn (from (jaiaiit). (iaifdn an
akin iti'f (This Ixdongs to me).

Ganiasn ( from ^rwo, rare). (t'a-Kohatiy
person disturbed. Maiaja»o^ to
» disturb another, (iarjasolian^ rest-
lessness. (fViyo-vof/a.xo, very rest-
less.

Mai/jtahalal (from halaJ).

Jlif/pit. JAf///v/><7, tight, Maghi(itnt,
to tighten; to cinch up (asagirale,
strap, etc.). WaUiag h'utpithujpit^
slovenly.

IfnmU'ui (""rom Jiilig).

llamakay (from hakay). Aug pan-
It a kaij^ the spade.

IhnnmnjKuj (fiom hympaij).

Mag/i ugiis ( f n >m hugas ) . ( See lamos^
Vigo).

M(thahnma/ht(nial (from hutnal).

Maglinigkaft (from hrngkap).

Maglihtag (from li/ang).

Lmni/ajt (from II lap) [rare].

Maglilis. lidkit ka iiagllliliit nang sa-

lairaf/ (Why are you rolling up

your trousers?)
Magliin'is (from Sp. llmoftiia). Mag-

jxtllnios. to ask for alms.
Lahi'riTijap (from liiTgap, var. liiTga-

nap.
f.uhiii7(/at (from limjat).
LvinhTfiuTgig (from IhTg'nTgig^ rare).

l*rol»ably a coiidjination of diiTgig^

idea of hearing.
LuHiiiTi/ifs (from i'nTifax).
Laiiiuiafi (from ligap).
MaiuaiTgal. MaginanuingdimuTgahan^

to feign stupidity.
Xmiianmaiii (from iKunnam).
Magaasii (see pita).
PakjKtk. Liniiipad, to flv.
Magpafdnad (from patauadj syn.,

tdnarl). .yfagpaOtuayati, to forgive

each other.
]\'a/<n)g patoiaangd.

TAGALOO LANOUAOK.

243

To choose; to select.

To pick up.

To t)econie dull (as a knife or i izor)

To boil rice.

Pest; epidemic; to suffer from.
To profess; to vow; to believe in.

To pass )x?tween rocks, hills, etc.
To peep.

To care for most diligently.
To grasp; take hold of; pinch.

To put vinegar on anything.

Can be.

To nm away from or hide froi i.
To betrav.

To cut grass; ti^ mow.

To patch.

To be gaping stupidly

To Iwjk upward.

To stare at.
Friend.

Pleasure.

To do anything swiftly

To look down.

To assign to; to turn over to.

To sprinkle.
Orphan.

Pnmill. Ang pilihiy what chosen or
selected out. Ang pi nil Ian (sing. )
or Aug pinagpUian (plur. ), what
selected or chosen from.

Magpulot.

Puinorol ( from purol). Aug purolin,
what ilulled. Tnmomal (from
toniul), to be dull (as business).
Kaiutudlartj dullness. Angitomal,
the cause of such dullness.

SunnMng (from ming). ASInding, boil-
ed rice.

MaghtHAlot.

Sumampalataya. Aug sximaminpala-
tagn, the creed, faith or believer.

Sumilang (from silang).

tSumlllj) (from sillp).

M(igp(ikn.<tipagi*l/Hig (from iflpag).
• Sumlpit ( from sipiiy ' ' tongs " ) . *SVn<-
plt, an anchor.

Magmth). Aug sukaan, what dipped
in or flavored with vinegar.

Sukai. I>L ftnkat, can not be. Sukal
hagd ^liianq piKjhitlvHikmnf (Can
he be trusted?) Sukal {di sukal]
slgtuig panhralaan (He can [can
not] be trusted).

Tnniak(ii< (from lakas).

Tumnksil (from lak.vl). Taksil ua
I'uio, a traitorous or treacherous
man. Katak»Uan, trea.*^on, treach-
ery.

Tniuagpas (from tagpas).

Maglngpi.

TalaiTgdlaiTtfd. MaglaiTgataiTgdhari, to
feign stupidity.

TuNthTijnhi (from tliTfjald). Aug
llngalain, what seen thus.

Tmnitlg (from llUg).

Kalolo. Kalotohhi mo i^lyd (befriend
him).

Tad. Aug pagddliug nlugo'y uaka-
Intud sa dklii (Your arrival causes
me i)U'asure). Itiudlultid ko aug
jHigddliug uiuyo (Your arrival is a
source of i)leasure to me).

Tvuin/in (from luHn). Magtulln, to
go swiftly. Aug ipaglullu, the
cause of ^oing swiftly,

Tu itiui7j/n {irtnn In iTIjo ) . A 1 so to V)o w
or incline the head. Aug luiTi/hdu,
wliat looked at thus or the person
bowed to.

Magnk<d. »SV Vrdra uagukoJ naug
kmiiyaug gagau'n) k*ig juau (Pedro
turned over the work \o he done
by him to Juan).

Mugu'islk. Aug jmuuisikj the
sprinkler.

niia.

iiv V vti.rit viid c:- vv ictt <

/. Singapore^ ika 12 {(htlam't) i7g {nung) Ahr'd {1905). Aug ])araan ni
Rodjeslvenaky ag mabirdthig sigd sa caho {/otTf/os) Padaran na nana hagbagm
i7g Tiido'ChUid, at 150 milla ung agwai r<i Snigon. Doon iTjja magpipisan nng
nagkah'nralrnj jia lu'iLhong-dognf iTg jtTgd (marTgd) ruso^ kun aakdling sild^ g
hhidt mnhdraitg knpuwd iTjj rngd japon.

Aug v<nng pangkdt iuj ln'iLhong-ddgat na p'nian<pu7guluhan nl RodjeAiveiiskg
ag iKisa Imghngin fTg Mtintok ngagdn na iUang indla ung agwat sa Sumatra.

Ang ilxfvg liTgd sa-sfikgdn ng nana pagitan pa i7g lUinka. Aug liigd sattak-
gang lt<y g aai^a raang thranag .vi pagitan ng Malaca.

Hindi sl/ii nahdrang, sapagkaH any rTigd japan mardhd ag nasa malapit sa
Formosa na doon nda ihig inakilahan.

Mardhd an g Bataria nng snaunod na daraungan iig mgd rnsOj sapagka't
doo'g mag cahleng dhnt hdngang Rima.

[Translation.]

Singapore, 12th of April. The plan of Kodjestvensky is to try to (arrive
at) make Cape Vadaran, on the coast of ludo-C'liina, and 150 miles distant
from 8iii«:on. There the separated fleets (sea armies) of the Russians will
unite, if the two are not encountered by tlie Ja]>anese.

One division of the fleet commanded by Kodjestvensky is now off the
coast of iMuntok a few miles from Sumatra.

Tlie otlier vessels are yet in the rejrion of Banka. The other vessels of
this (Hct't) are remaininir in the route (<>r neighborhood) of Malacca.

They weie not molested, because the Japanese continued to remain near
Formosa, where they wish to commence the struggle.

Russian vessels contimie to follow each other into Batavia, because there
is a cable conneetinjr with Russia there.

//. Xcirrhnaifg, ika 7 )Tj/ Ahril. Ang 500/jOO kataong humnhxio iTg hdkUt
ni Ogania ag .'<nin'is(dakag na inaigi .sa hnkho ni Lint'ritch na nakapagtihay sa
Kirin.

Maifnti nng pnrnan iTj/ pngkohddsnh inj nT/<i jnpnn at ang haltd tig kanilang
lupnjig uali'ihanagan ng nnig dpat na jfuo n limttng pnong milla. Inaakala
ni ()gnnin nn iinhng iintittnti ain/ )i77;d rnsi^ lidngang sa kanilang madaig na
lubti.'«in.

Ang hi'ikhong pimunamnhalnau )ii g* nend Lincritch ng hindi hihigit sa bUang
na J0(t,000y snpagkn't Imkod .sa nainntagnn aigd iTg marami sa labanaUy ag
niaranii pn nng wd/ding iTg mgn jnpon.

[Translation.]

_ X<\vchwang, 7th of Ay)ril. The 500,000 men composing the army of
Oyamji an^ advancing in good order upon the army of Linevitch now in-
trenched at Kirin.

The plan of advance «il the Japanese is g(»od (excellent) and the length
of their front (Lrround) is 40 (»r ">0 miles. Oyama is trying to push the
Unssians L'radually until lie caw vanquish them all (unitedly).

The army imder thi' ehaiL'eof (General Linevitch does not numlxr more
than 200,01)0, esjuM-ially bi'cause besides the many who have been killed in
battle there are many also who ha\e been captured l)y the Jaj)anese.

III. Snn J*rt( rshorgn, iln G wj ^ihril. Aug nTgd jnpon ag 7iakasusulong na
nnd-finti .v/ dnk(ntg kmnhdnggdn ni gi'nrrnl Linfitrh at iTij kaniyang hukho.
l.sang drn<> pnU nng llnrhin ag hindi nn. irnirnhd mntntahanan lUj vigd. ruso,
xajingknU pinngii.sipnng gibain iTij kadnrig. ILntdi na piiHtwjaiTgatawanan ng

TA«ALOa LANGUAGE. 245

liiyd ruso ang pagpapakat'Oxuf sa JlarbiHy sapagka't may riatikinikinlia gilang
malaklug panganib na sitaapilin lioon. Ang dakoug tun-uiTgaii luj ingd rum ay
ang Vladivos^tok na kanilang inasahang tnapagtiUba gang maigi hdngang sa
magkaroon iTg kapayapaan. Masamd ang tat/6 iTj/ riigd hukbong riwo, data-
puva^t hindi namdn nuipahusay^ U6 dahil sa gnloug nangyayari sa Ruitia.
Maraml aa Rusia ang yianhiiwald na madadaig ang hukbo ni general Llnevitch^
at hung magkagayOn ay magkakaroon iTg kapayapaan.

[Translation.]

St. Petersburg, 6th of April. The Japanese are advancing little by little
upon the position of General Linevitch and his anny. One day more, and
Harbin may possibly not be remaining to the Kiissians, l^ecanse they think
it may be destroyed by the enemy. The Russians are making no efforts
to strengthen themselves in Harbin, because they believe themselves to
b(» in great danger of capture there. The place of retreat for the Russians
is Vladivostok, \vhi<'h they ho[>e to fortify so well as to hold it until peace.
The situation of tlie Russian armies is bad, but it can not Ix; bettered on
account of tlie riots taking place in Russia. Many in Russia believe that
the armv of (ieneral Linevitch will be defeated, and that in that event
there will be f)eace.

/r. Manila ika I4 ng Abnl. Ibhiabafitil ?77/ Gobemador Dancd (Lalamigang
Rizfd) J na noong uniagd iTg ika o ng binrang lumaldkad ay may nadakip aa
Bagbngin na tat long tdunng labds at si yam na kalabao na niiuinakao na ^ova-
liches, dalaivang bard at dalawang revolver. Noong ika 11 ay may nadakip
na isaiig tduong lahds na may dalangf uang kalabao, at isatig riflmg inauacr,
dakuvang puong cartuchd't (ialanang puong ritivng vtnnington. Noong ika l(f
ay may na^ainpuiTgan ang jtrenidvnte sa Taytay na ii<ang rvmifigton na may
sampuong cartnrJio. Any nTj/d hdabao ay dinald fta tot«>reria municipal.
Noong ika J I ay nakadakip din namdn f<i (iobvrn<idor Dannd ng u^ang nag-
jTgaiTijalang Prdro Pio^ na dl tuna no' y yiyang nanybagabttg na maigi .sa
Baranka at Marikina noong viernes. Iby y ihinigay kay mayor Ha.<kell iTij
consiabulario. May inidakip pa ring dalawang tduong labds na may isang
rewlver colt at sampuong cartucfto.

[Translation.]

It is announced by Governor Dancel ( Rizal Province) that on the morn-
ing of the 5tii of the current month there were captured at Bagbagin three
outlaws an(l nine of the carabao stolen from Novaliches, two sliotguns, and
two revolvers. On the 11th there were captured one armed outlaw, one
carabao, and one Mauser rifle, twenty cartridges, and twenty Remington
rifles. On tlie lOth the ])residente (mayor) of 'i'aytay ^e('ured a Reming-
ton and ten cartridges. The cara))ao were sent to the numicipal treasury.
On the 11th (Governor Dancel was also able to capture one called I'cflro
Pio, said to be the person who made trouble at Baranka and Maricpiina
last Friday. This person was turned over to Major Haskell, of the con-
stabulary. There were also two outlaws captured who had a Colt revolver
and ten cartridges.

T'. Hindi malalaunan at magtatayo rito so Maynili) loy haginig honpittd.
ltd' y isangaifdtagannahiningi iuj Rt. Rev. Opiiipo Brvnt iTj/siyd'y nasa I'Jstados
Lnidos.

Ang salaping gugugulin ay kaloob iuj lintang nniversldad sa I larva rd, ]'<th\
PrincetoUy I*enn»ylvania at Colnmbia.

Ang maiujangas'nra nito ay ang Iglesia Kpii^<'opal, datafinud't tantangapin
ang sinomang naiikol (<a ihang religion.

[Translation.]

It will not be long until there will be erected here in Manila a new ho.*;-
pital. This will be from a subscription solicited by the Right Reverend
feishop Brent when he was in the United States.

The money to be offered is from tlie funds (interior) cf five universities:
Ilarvanl, Yale, Prin<'eton, Pennsylvania, and Colunil>ia.

The direction of this (hospital) will be under the Episcopal Church, but
anyone will be received belonging to another faith.

IT. AiKj (jobeniddor m BaUvm si G. Tomas del Rnmrio atj nag alny sa Bn-
lawja w) is(uuj lujfong vini/ h'> licctnrea at t*'4,000y ang hnlagn, upang innpag-
taiiuoii iTg ixmaj *^ smmdarif ftrhonf.'^ Atig ynong Inpang yaon ag magitgainU
m pagnand iTlj n grin din rii 6 wj mgi'i dt'niong tnngkol an parnnniukid^ at 7))agui'
gandmt dm tKunan iTg iiTija pagsasaiKig luj payigpalnki'is iTij kafnnnn.

tSa nhdd rin nantdn iTg (iohenntdorny midjiitiiig ntagkaroon i7g i^iang mmstrortg
ainericann .sa Ixiyan bayou upang madanyag ang iitgd paraan at ugafing aineri-
cano Ha iiTgdfitipino.

[Translation.]

The jrovernor of Bataan, Hon. Tonias del Rosario, has given a piece of
land coniprisinjr bi hectares a n<l worth P4,00(), in Balaii^a, in order that
there may be a site for the erection of a "secondary school." That land
may be used for teaching agriculture or for sciences or occupations jn^r-
taining to the land, and for instruction in the means of strengthening the
body (manual training school).

The endeavor of the governor will be to have one American teacher in
ea<h town in order to show the customs and habits <tf the Americans to
the Kilij)ini)s.

VII. 1)1 uinaui)' y hdiditTj/in i7j/ Comjian'ta iTij travna (i/drlco na inhUan )ki
ang sanakyang do y inara/tdting panttiiTj/in haiigan sa J'alanyag.

Iplnaghddgay alant din lanndn w/ayou S(t gohernador general iTg natTijaiajti'
sifva sa tranv'ia elicfriro )ui sa buic.^ ay pnnisinndang jtatakbulian ang daan sa
Santa ^{na.

[Translation.]

It is said that the electric street-car (;ompany will ask that the line Ik»
permitted to be extende<l to reach as far as Parana<jue.

Notice has al.«o been given to-day to the governor-general by the man-
agement of the electric railway that on ^b»nday it will commence the
<»peration of the road ti» Santa Ana.

VIJI. ]*annaira. — Ipijiatn'ndtik sa sinomang nakapulot iaj isang Asong
la/aki na nuiy bahdtihdug knbiy cufr at nnty pnti sa dibdib at sa duh) ng paang
knn'in sa tntnlnhi, nmy iiuilny )ni ,-t,U<irsn liig (disa)tg rha/ta na may nainerong
(bfhiitg) J*m;'>^ (ly iiKntgyaring ihn/ik o isan/i sa d^ntng Arratn/ne b'dang {big.)
l.'iS (it don't/ kokitndan. ang i>-ang jtabnya at dakibntg pasasaldtnat.

[Translalir)n.]

NoTicK. — It is re(iuest«'d that anyone who may ])ick up a male dog with
coffee-colored hair and with w hite on the })reast and the end of the right
front foot, bearing a collar on the neck and a tag with the numl)er 19t>o,
will ln' alile to return or lestore him to No. loS Arran<}ue street, where a
reward will be given, tog«^'ther with many thanks.

/A'. Xairobi. Sa bahai/ no h'lJnng 7 'f sa daang Ktnla, TondOy ay naicaM
ang Ismig maunk ua sasohniTI/lng bol<dul)ong lasoky ntaitint ang tahid^ inaputi
ong poo't holdoib) o)ig dofii so konait. Sinonnin ang makapagdaUi 6 maka-
pogfnro inj kmobdtigi/on iTij /lafurang mannk ay bdtigydn tojpabuyaiig halagang
nolo o so inpito/K/ jiiso.

[Translation.]

Lost. — Fnmi the hou-e No. 74 Rada stret^t, Ton<lo, there has been lost
a giimecock witli wliite and red (lasak) plumage, black spurs, and white
feet, with the middle claw of the right foot crippled. Anyone who may l^e
al)le to brinu: or point out the whereabouts of the said fowl will be given a

TAOALOa LANGUAGE. 249

II. For names of animals, birds, fishes, and invertebrates not given in
this work the student is referred to Jordana's Bonquejo Geogrdjict) S His-
i&rico Natural del Archipiilago Filipino, Madrid, 1885; to the work of Friar
Casto de Elera, Domimcan, entitled Catdhgo SiMemdtico de Toda la Fnuna
de MlipinaSf Manila, 1895; and to the book of Montero y Vidal, El Archi-
piPlaqo Filipino y las isUu Marianas, Carolinas y Palaos, Madrid, 1886. For
the fauna the great work of Friar Blanco, Aug^ustine, will be of great aid,
as well as the reports of the forestry and agricultural bureaus at Manila.
The work of Father Delgado, S. J., Manila, 1892, deserves attention as
revised and annotated.

In conclusion, it is hoped that a careful study of the language under dis-
cussion will lead the student to explore for himself, and note the localisms
and changes in each province. Any suggestions, corrections, or criticisms
will be welcomed hy the author.

Tj. ,. , 13 * Contraction, variation,

Kngnjsn. ' Koot. ', '

To bite Kdfjat Knfji'in.

To deny ; cloak k'aild Kaildn.

To eat Kain Kanin.

To untie ; loosen Kahnj Knh/hf; kalgdn.

Left KnHint Ktilin-'m; kalitrdn.

To ol>tain K(un it Kiuntdn.

To gn >pe for K'ijh'i K(iphr, kajuhi.

To gruHp; enil)ra(v Kdjtit Kajtthi; hiptdn.

To nibble KUtit Kihl'm; kibtdn.

To cut off KUd Kitlhr, kitldn.

To knt)w; be actjuaintid witli . Kihiln Ki/aulin.

To exceed Lahis lAihhdn.

To place La(/ai/ Ijvfiidn.

Strength L'ikds Laksdit.

To grow J.<iki ].akhh); Inkhdn.

Contents; ]>nli) ' Lmmht Lamndn.

To soften Lnld L(t('m; hitdn.

Far; distant La no J.ai/dn.

Five lAmd LunJidn.

To err; to make a niistakt^ MuH Mtdtn: indldn.

To observe; ex pcricnce Mnshl , Mitmldn.

To bej^in; commence Muld Muldn.

To settle; appease J'nlnt/ttf/ PalfKjijd)}. From Ingny.

To contain; in<lude, etc I'aUttndn rdhnnndn. Vvoxnlamdii.

To listen PffLinitj J\ikin(idit.

To dream Pmntijin'ip I\untifhnpdn.

Name Paiu/nhtu J*(nTi/ftnldn.

To break (as a rope, etc. ) Piifi(/ Pafddn.

T( ) 81 j iiee/e Pi'Jf f*iy'ni; jt'ujdn.

T< > w ri nji /'('.v/7 J'lsf'm.

To (lit J*i'if,,/ J'u(/iii: jnitJdn,

To embark; to mount Suktn/ Sakad,!.

To be i 1 1 Sdkit Suki'n, .• aakidn.

To err; sin Sn/n San/dh.

To tell; rej)ort S<(lild SafiCm.

Va'U Stn/id Sinn'fii; snmdn.

To come ))aek; to give l»a(k . . Sao/i -sV/r;//'/,; snoldn.

To burn rid))>ish Si</<} Sit/dn.

To <k'\ oui" eat Slid Si/ni; sildn.

To nut into Si/i'l Sidldn.

To follow ; obey Smiod Snnd'tn.

To w ( •!!< ler Mt Takd Takhdn.

To CONtT 'J a kip Idkpdtt.

To turn till" ba<'k Pa/iknd Tidikddn.

To sow 'I 'I mm '/anindn.

To grasp; to bold to * T'dTi/fni TmTipidii.

J'o stand T'tijd Toffd)i.

To taste; t ry Tiki in Tikmdv.

J'o lo< tk TiiT'i'tii TnTijiidn.

To redt'cm T>dtds Puhsin; tnhmn.

fo <1 ry riii/t'j TiUfin; (iiydn.

'J'o move I'/d I ifii^'

To return; repeat C/i 11/1): Vldn,

To sit down I'pd I'pdn.

To lack W'ald Wolin: tvaldn.

'I*

'I''

''p

TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 249

II. For names of animals, birds, fislies, and invertebrates not given in
this work the student is referre<l to Jordana's Bo.^/uejo Geo*/rajico i- Jlis-
torico Natural del Arrhipielago Filipino^ Madri<i, 1885; to the work of Friar
Casto de Elera, Dominican, entitled CataUnjo Sisteinatico de Toda la Ftnma
de FilipinaSj Manila, 1895; and to the book of Montero y Vidal, Kl Arrhi-
pit'laf/o Fdipino y las idas MarlanaSy Caroiinaa y FahwH^ Madrid, 1886. For
the fauna the great work of Friar Blanco, Augustine, will be of great aid,
as well as the reports of the forestry and agricultural bureaus at Manila.
The work of Father Delgado, S. J., Manila, 1892, deserves attention as
revised and annotated.

In conclusion, it is hoped that a careful }?tudy of the language under dis-
cussion will lead the stu<lent to explore for himself, and note the localisms
and changes in ea«h province. Any suggestions, corrections, or criticisms
Avill be welcomed b>' the author.

- ^ ® 5

< T >

'jz

1.

7.

»*

LC

^

c:

^

u

*'.

C3

T

•^

1

-<;

^

*"

:i:

c:

• —

«3

«^

U

_

x.

-^

^*

— *

^4

»•

7

'

•-•

V

r—

«-4

* ■»«.

—

J^

7.

S

/-•

X,

^

• —

I and II

|o na pi Maria. **1 ■
10 na si Maria. ** Yi
h yd nn si Maria. * * 1

itin nn si Maria. * * '

iin inna si M aria. * *

Hnvo fui si Maria. ^

ila nasi Maria. "1

:o si Maria.

10 si Maria.
|iiyd si Maria.

latin Hi Maria. > S

laiiiia si Maria,
hinvo Hi Maria,
nila si Maria.

p/HiilatiN mo na? "
hnamlsii mo'} **Wl

ihay ang f/agawiN n^
ihay ang m agaw A n i)

UasabiiiiN nio na?
wasabi mo? *'Whj

JhikuNix mny6 fu
will you have takei

/V»sulat mo na nil
It will you have writ

ko na itong piilaj
ill (will) have sown ^

Ulat niU WYi it^? or J
nrea<l this?"

I.

I

^

t

i

4

A si TomiU? nang limang
^ liiuang piso. "I will

>»>

r J/f/AYiaral siya. *' He

ior J/fiAY/Hi'ilat ako. "1

»r MakahWisko. "I wi
r»ia or MaktiPAohiM &k(

\

I

IP

i

I ami II future perf«

:• ..LvA aku. ''I shall ha^

I

* '*• 'L— I

niN. "Glean ou

iii^ /panhinhv^a mo
teeth with thin.'
///niriJjitAa/i ino
'* Clean yonr ted

e.' J/'fff/^f/insik ka.
like a Ohinamar

<;KA>IMATIL'Ai. Hi DUX.

Accent, change of, 18.

Chanjj;ea meaning, 19.

(Tt^noral nilen of, 18.
Accents, 18, 19.

Acute, 18.

Grave, 18.

Circumflex, 18, 19.
Active (voice), 20.
Adjectives, *20, 38, (full analysis of) 55, 5<), 57.

Prefixed to noun, 81.
Adjectives, comparison of, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76.

Eijuality, 72, 73.

Jnferioritv, 73.

Superiority, 73, 74.

Superlative, dej^ree of, 74, 75, *6.
Adjectives (regarded as to meaning):

Colors, 63.

Of condition, 61, ()2.

Of jilivsical conditions of IkxIv, 63, 64.

Of (lualitv, 58, 59, 60.

Of (luantity, 62.

Mental, moral, or j>ersonal attributes, 64-71.

Miscellaneous, 71, 72.
Adjectives, negative, 57.
Adjectives, plural of, 57.
Adjectives, position of, 57.
A<lji'ctive, predicate, 32.
A«lvt'rhial mnnerals, 79, 80.
Adverbs, 20, 38, (with adjective) 74, 75, (fully «lis<'ussed) s3-.s(;, (detinition

oi) .S3, (verbalizing) 83, 84.
Adverbs:

Allirmative, 99.

Negative, 99, 100.

Of «legree, 72, 75, 98.

Of measure, 72, 75, 98.

•'Flat," 83.

•'Flexional," i<:].

"Phrasal," 83.

Interrogative, 32, 33.

Of (loulit, 100.

Of manner, 93, 98.

Of (luality, 93, 9S.

Of motion, 84.

Of place, 34, 84, (list of many) 86, 87.

l)iale<"tH. .">'>.

Diinimitives, 110. IX. { mif) ISO, {nin<j) mi

Dim-t ol.j.'ct. lOi), V, VI.

OlH^ l(i!>, V.
iMr^t ril»iiti\(' iiiinu'rals, SO.
])(. iinak.-) to, lOS, I, II, 110, XI. XIII.

I).. IK. I, 100.

hiial iiuiiiImt, ."15, ;;>;, :;s.
IjkHiil:^, •>\.

( 'nn-onaiit, .'U.

In <liplitli(»ii<j, ."U.

In ''n." :;i.

In V'tWrl, ,')l.

I jiplmnic chan^^'s, '.V2, 'M, 81, (with )iffni a;

lOxiIaniatioris, 104. 1M">.

"' I''.\rlu>ive f e<litnrial ) wr," ;)-">, .'50, ;JS.

l-'ntnrc prriVct t('n>o, 100, X.

I'^iturc tt-n-c, 10(), X.

(j't ( interroLralive purtich''!, 74.

«r<«'l 1 iT^ 7 J

INDEXES. 253

Gender, lack of, 08.

(leneral ttrnis, lack of, 19.

(ienitivc!^, douhlc, of i)erf<oiial pronouns, 35, 36.

hau (suttix), IS, oG, 141, I, 11, (full discussion) 142-153.

hin (sutfix), 18, 5H, (with weights, measures, etc. ) 82.

H<jni«jnyin, detinition ot, 57.

i [i)articlc]. 108, IV, (cause, instrument or time) 109, V, (combined with
in) 110, XII, (fully discussed) 132-141.

Idioms, 20.

i/oi [compound i)article] (with adverbs) 84, H'S, (meaninjj: cause) 108,
IV, 13S, XVllI, 211, 1.

ikin'i [compound particle] (with adverbs), 84, 55, (meanim^ cause) 108,
IV, 138, XVI II. 211, I.

ikiun}>'i [compoun<l particle] (with adverbs), 85.

Imperative, H)5, II.

Intensity, (piicknesss, with, 105, III.

Imperfect tense, 10(), X.

i)i (sutlix) 18, 5(), (inserted) 57, (with weights, measures etc.) 82, (with
]>ti) 84, 85, (motion toward or control of) 108, IV, (combined with i)
no, XII, (discussion) 112, I, to 114, VI (idea of attraction toward)
114-115, (possession) 115, (verbs of calling, 115, (of reaching for) 116,
(verbs of carrying, cutting, measuring or weighing) llG-119, (ver])sof
destruction) 119, (verbs of receiving) 120, (of inviting) 120, (of eating,
drinking, etc.) 122, (acts of senses) 123, 124, (acts of will or mind) 124,
125, (verbs of making) 125, (of wearing) 125, (various) 126, (suffixed)
127-130.

Ill <tn, 130.

Inclusive '*we," 35, .38.

Indetinite, 20, 30, (discussed) 111, I, to 112, V
Principal particles of. 111, I.

Indicative, bHi, IX.

ln<lirect ol)ject, 109, VI.

Inlinitive, 10(), IX.

inl [compound i>article], 110, VIII.

Intransitive verbs, 107, XI.

(pfi [compound particle] (exi)lained), 109, VIII.

ipntj [(H)mpound jiarticle], 109, IV (explained), 109, VIII.

ipiKjkd [comi)ound ])article], 109, VIII.

ipnfjkabi [comjujund particle], 109, VIII.

ipiiKi [compound particle] (with adverbs), 85 (explained), 109, VIII.

ijfliKt'j [compound ])article] (explaine<l), 109, VIII (examj^le), 110, IX.

(p'nifKjlit [com[)oun<l particle], 109, VIII.

ipiumjkdhi [compound particle] (with adverb), 85 (explained), lOt), VIII.

bt (particle expressing likeness), 72.

I:nfiin[l (com])ound particle), 72.

kn (im[>arting idea of intensity, etc. ), 105, III.
(linking o|>[>osite ideas), 106, VI.

ka [juirticlrj, 211.

ka nn [comiK^und particle], 200, 201.

hipii'i [particle], 239.

kapni/ka [particle], 239.

kulang (adverb meaning "less"), 73.

ma (adjective forming particle), 00, (use) 111, I, (fullv discussed), 196-
201, (def. of mnka) 21 J.

)itn in {hin), 131, 132.

VKi'f (naq), 56, ( verbalizing adverb) 84, 85, (use) 110, X, 111, I, (fullv dis-
cussed") 180-194.

moffin []>article], 232-234.

mdrjhi [])article], .38. 85, (combinations) 109, VIII, (use) 110 X, (fullv
disen«^f'di '>:i0-'>:i->

magkapa [particle], 1^38.
iiuigkapantaij (coiiipound particle), 73.
ffiagkapara (compound particle), 73.
magkaparis (compound particle), 73.
niagkimng (compound particle), 73.
magma (compound particle), 56.

mugpa [particle], 109, VIII, (use) 110, X, (fully discussed) 217-223
mngpaka [particle], 225-227.
magpati [particle], 235.
magm [particle], 237.
magxl [parti(!le], 235, 23H.

maka [particle], 201, IV, (fully discussed) 211-217, (when nn
"cause") 5<), (peculiar construction with) 112, VIII, (indicatiuiJ
plete<l action) 93.
makl [particle], 227-230.
mala (forming adjective:^), 56.
maji [|)article], 37, (with weights, measures, monevs) HI, (with ad

85, (fullv discussed) 201-211.
maald [particle], 235-237.
ntapa (as adjective forming jmrticle), 56.
majtag (as adjective forming particle), 56.
mag (use) 110, XIII.
magrdon (use), 110, XIII.

mimt (mhiama) [particle expressing opinion], 56.
na (as adjective forming particle), 56, (use) 111, I, (fully discussed

201, (def. of maka) 211, (with irregular form of verb) 171-175.
nag [particle] (with adverl)), 85, (use) 111, I, (fully discussed) ISO-
nagai [particle], 233.
iiagka [])artic]e] (with adverb), 85.
nagkan [particle], 238.
nagkapa. [])article], 238.
nagpaka [particle], 225, 1.
nagpati [particle], 235.
tKtgsa [particle], 2'M.
nagsl [particle], 235.

,>aka [i)article], 201, IV, (fully discussed), 211-217.
iKiki [particle], 227, 1.
tain [particle], 201, IV.

iia/>a [compound i)article], 223, 1 (with adverbs), 85.
napas-a [particle], 223, 1.
Xt'^'ativt' adjectives, 57.
Nciialive adverbs, 99, 100.
N\v'ative verbs, 30.
Nniuinative <'Mse:

I'rereded by article an<l followed l)y genitive, 28.

With genitive inserted between nominative and arti<'le, 28.
N*»nri :

In genitive modifying nominative, 31.
Ndiins, 20. (eommon) 28, {exp. ),38.

Source, 2s, (from roots) 240.
Numerals, 7<i-S0.

Adverbials, 79. SO.

Cardinals, 7«), 77, 78.

nistribntives, 80.

Ordinals, 78, 79.
nccn]»ations (with man j^retixed), 205, 210.
<)r«linal numerals, 78. 79.
jia, tlie <)6 roots beginniuir with, 175-180.
y/'/ (with a< herbs ), 84.

jxi/Hi (do. ), 84.
pa (vet. still), 73.
pa [i\o\iu\te ni magpa], 100, VIII, 217. 1, (! fully discussed) 223-225.

INDEXES. 255

jKKj [particle], 110, VIII. IX, (retention) 110, X, 194.

payka [particle], 194, 201, III, 230.

pagpakn [particle], 225, I.

paka [particle], 225, I.

paki [particle], 227, I.

pala ( torn iing adjectives), 56.

pan [particle], 201, 209, XVII.

panhi [particle], 2:i5, 236.

para (particle of comparison), 72.

Participle, 106, X.

Particles, combinations of, 238, 239.

Designation of, 239.
Particles, verbal, 19, 20, (most important) 106, VIII.
Particularizing verbs, 19.
Passive, 20.
Past tense, 10(), X.
Phrases, ordinary, some, 20-27.
pliKtfj [compound particle], 110, IX, 195, II.

pinntj an [compound particle and suffix], 110, VIII.

piudf/hi [comixjund particle] (with adverbs), 85, (discu88e<l) 230.

pina'ht, 227, IX.

pinah'i [particle], 239.

pinaki []>article], 227, 1.

pinajfa [compound particle] (with a<l verbs), 84, 85.

Place (how expressed), 141, II.

Pluj>ertect tense, 106, X.

Plural (of a<ljectives), 57.

Plural (of nouns), 28, 38.

SjK'cial plural of */, 27.
Prefix, retention of, 106, VII.
Prepositions (fully <liscussed), 100-102.
Present tense, 106, X.

Pronouns, demonstrative, 33,34, (i«lioniatic use) 34.
Pronouns, indefinite, 37, (exp. ) 3s.
Pronouns, interrogative, 32.
Pronouns, personal, 35, 36.

dialects, 35.

idioms, 35.
Pronouns, i)Ossessive, 36, 37.

With (dii/ and anf/ 8a, 37.

Syntax and order, 37.
Pronouns, relative, 38.
Proper nouns (article of), 27.
pnnui [compound particle] (with adverbs), 85.
Keduplication of roots, 56.

\Vith ka an (ban), 75,76.

Of first syllable of numerals, 77.

To form diminutives, 110, IX.
Kespert, great, how indicated, 37.
Root words in Tagalog, number, 13.
Roots, reduplication of, 56.
Roots, differing with vm and mar/, 154.
Roots, the (My beginning with pa, 175-lSO.
Sanskrit words in Tagalog, 13, 38.
Sex, how indicateil, 31.
iSlng (particle meaning "as"), 72.
Spanish element in Tagalog, 14^ 38.

.^iitu'rlntivp'

Syiiunyiii, delinitioii of, 57.

SyiionyiiiH, IJ).

Tagaloj^ laujzna^'e, importance of, 18.

Dialects of, Jo, 35.

Relationshii> of, 13.

Prepervatiuii ^A verbal j^ystein oi, 13.

Niiniber «if root words in, 13.

Sanskrit element in, 38.

Chinese element in, 14, 3S.

Arabii* element in, 14, 38.

Spanish element in, 14, 38.

I'ji^lish element in, 14.

Lack of Japanese element in, 14.
Tajzalo^'i

Pronunciation of, 15.

Structure of, compared, 107, XIV, XV. *

Veri>. comj>ared, 107, XVI.
Tenses, U)(), X.

Lack of chaniie within, 107, XII.
•*Ties,'' euphonic, 31.
Transitive ver])S, 107, XI.
(\ when consi<lered Jis consonant, 31.
Cm (particle), ( with a<lverb), 84, (Use shown i, 110, X. Ill, 1, (Fu

cuss(mI), 153-170, (Diminutives), 180.
Verb (understood), 32.
Vcr))s, L>(>, 3.S, (discussion) 105-108.

("ompleteness of Tajialog verb, 107, XVI.

Dchnite, 1(»8, I. H, HI.

I >etiiiitinn of, 105, I.

Intransitive, 107, X I.

Modes, 100, IX.

Particularizing^, 10.

Superlative form, 7(\.

Tenses, 1()(>, X.

Transitive. 107, XI.
ITo/c/ (with adjective), 74, (use) 110, Xlll.
Words, nund)er of in Tatralo<:, p.».

KN(;i.i>n iNDKx:

Able to , tobe, LMl, 1II,1M3, VII.

Al)le to do, (o, 177.
Accept, to, IL'O.
.\cc«iinpan\'. to, 133, bi').

Act like a ' , to, ZXK

Acts of the s.-nses, 123, 124, 21-1.

Acts of will or ndnd, 124, 125.

Add, t<). i:;7.

Advise, to. 1!54.

Afraid, to be, 120.

Aid, to, 185.

Animals, domestic, 28, 21».

Approach, t<>, 18-1.

Arran^'e, to, 120.

Arrive, to, 140.

.\scend, to, 174.

.VshamtMl. to be, b>8.

Ask, to, 121.

Aslee]", to be, 108,

As-end>le, to, ls4.

Attraction toward, idea of, 114.

Be.1; l>o.Ulinn, L'M, 29.

HimI, to I.U ill, l!Kt.

Rt^l, loir., to, l.il.

lilt,-, to. la-J. 123.

Blow, to, 162.

Bt«lv, part!^of,^S^,. 10,51.

Bori^w, to, 114, 115. 137, Ift*.

Breaking, verbs of, 108.

bridge*, 43.

Brinit to, 4, IM.

Build a Koiise, to, i:i3.

Buililiiigf, kinds ui, -13.

rtiirv, to; inter, to, lSt5.

Buv, to, 114, 131, Ki:t, 164, 172, 182, (at retail) l:JW.

Cafculate, to, 124.

Call, to, 11.1, 173.

Callintt, vtrbsof, 11."..

t'aiitun-, to, 173.

Can- for, tii. Itiii. 2(U.

Carrv, to, im, 133, (.lifferent wavi') llli. IIT,

Caiifi , to. 211, IV. 212.

Cliaritalilc to bi-, 145.
I'hoos,-. to, 114.
Civic .lijrniti^. .13.
Clothiny, artii'lt« of, 52,

C(im]«iss, imintH of, 47.
CoiiijH'l, to. IIKI.
Coiii1>lain, to. 114.
Confonii, to, 140

(\.M.J111T, to, 17«.

Con.-i.lfr, *o, 124.
t'.irilin. Mil)., to, 172.
(.■..ji Jii.ljit. t.., 172.
Cook, 1-., i:«.
CookitifiriteiiMN, .-ti-., 40.
Cooking, Vfrlm of, 135.
Coiintrv, .-haractcr of, 44.

nirshiK, Tin,'aloj;, nil.

CtiMjair.lu,

im.

Dark, to U;

ira

Dinvn, to. H

Heifivi', to,

144.

r).'«,fii<i, to.

17H.

Dwireto, H^

ill, 171).

DcMire, to, 1

24.

Destroy, to,

11!),

138,

156.

Det-triictioii,

V,-rli:

-of,

IISI,

120.

Di.',to. Il't,

141.

258 INDEXES.

Dignitk«, civil ami military, 53.

Directions (of ii>mpa8«), 47.

DiKappear, to, ]Sii,

DimaivK, uamtM oi, 51.

Di!«iit&iiiile, to 1:.*0,

Disobev, to, 112.

Div.', to, 12».

Dniini to, ITU.

Drink, 1r., 122, 127, 159, 175,

Drinkiiin, 24, (driiikubles) L'8, 2«.

DroMiifd, to l>e, 2(il.

Dwfll, t... 175.

Eartliriuakf, 47.

Eutiu)!, 24, (iiiHterials) 28, 29, 3!>, {verl«of) 12:

■E(liflw!'(li>'ton,4.'l.

Kmlmrk, to, 140. IDS.

Emiitvoui, to, 141.

Endure, to. I«).

Eiittr, to, 173.

Envy, to, 17-5.

l-xiiializf, to, 141.

Erert, !■., 152.

Evil, to do or c-aiiw, 212.

Esdianat-, t... 120, im.

Es|>laiii. to, 125.

Extintrnish. to. IH<, I5ii.

Faint auav, !■!. IM".

Fall, to. 190.

Fall Iwck. to, 17.1.

F.t'1. to, 12:!.

Ftrrv, for.1, 44,

Ijoiiiir or I'Oiuing, 21, 22.

Good, lo-l... 212.

Oraap, to, 147.

(irai^)<; forage, 4:].

Graze, to. 127.

GrM^tiiiKs: t>itlutatLuiii, 20.

Grin, to. liiO,

Guawl, to, 144. 181,

GuitW, In, 208.

Have, (o, W, 85. m, {not to liave) :«

Hear, to, 12:1.

HearinK, verba of, 145. 140.

Heap u)>, to. i:)7.

Heat, 47.

Ileaveiilv bodies, 4i>,

Help. h,'. IH5,

Hor!H-R anil horse equipments, 42,

House. 40 (parts of) 40. 41.

Hou»>e)iolil lumiture, 28, 29. 41, 42.

Hiiii^-rv, tol>e, 128, 196, H'T.

Hiiiil, to, 121, 2CKi,

Jnm)\, to, 182.
Invitiiift, verlwot, 120.
Join witb, to, 165-

Join Hiili in , to, 228.

.luii.p, to. 18(1,

Liv.L.wn. to 1.51, |vi

l.o.,kiit. t.i, I2r!, 148. 172,
U«.k t»T. to, 1*1. ItW,
l/)okiri)!frjr, verli^ of. 11f>.
l»ok ..III of, to, 127.
biHc, to, 12!'.
l^.vf, t.i, 124, 125.
Make<<lol, to, 108, 1, 11.
Make htwxe, to, l!':i,
Makiii).'. verlts of, 12,"i.
Jtlaiintf^r, to; play airli. t<>, U>
Marcii, to, fi6.
Maritime leniiB, 45, 48.
Meal!<; fo<.cl, 39.
Measiir.', to, 118.
MensiireH, monevii. weijtiil", 8
Meet. tn. 184.
M('t;il>. minerals, 4!'.

i>«i, ;in.

Sot, 99.

Xuineral?', how exjue^^seil, 76-sO.
Obey, to, 139, 172.
Ocvupation.s, etc., o-4, •>'>.
Open, to, 142.

Order, to , to, LM7-219.

Overtake, to, i:n.

Pass, to, 1H2.

fay for, to, 147.

Perf-evere, to, 177.

Personal po.«^-ession, 115.

Plivsieal acts, 160, IMl.

IMerce, to, 147.

Place, how in(licate<l, HS-lol.

Place, to, l;i().

Plant, to, \:M).

Political divisions, 4S, 4v>.

I'oor, to he, 200.

Positions, to l)e in certain. 199.

Pour out, to, i:J7.

Practice nieilicine, to, 204.

Preach, to, 204.

Pr<»fessions, o.S, r)4.

Promise, to, 177.

Pronounce, to, 1S9.

Proi>er, to ])e, 1.S4, 197.

Provoke, to, 17r).

I'nsh, to, LSfi.

Put, tn, 13fi.

< Quarrel, to, 1S4.

liain, to, 1()2.

Kcacli. to, i:n.

l:ead, to, 179, 171. 17:1.

U'eap, t(», 203.

Ke.i'ivr, to, 120.

Ke<«'ivin^% verhs of. 120.

luMdinniend, to, 134.

Relatives, kin, 31, 1 i:;. \'.

Kenuiin hehind, t«>, 1:19.

Me men I her, to, 124.

Kcmit. to, 13:}.

Kep(>rt, to, 134.

Itoails. Iraili^, I'li-., -i:i.
Rub, to. I:!4.
RUH, to, las.
t^ail, tu he. V3», \m.
Salutations, gtvotiags, 20.
Scatt*T. to, l.'J?-
Scatlpriii);, verlw o(, 1S7.
Sen, -)■<), (plieuomeiia) 45.
SMirphiriK, verba of, llii.
See, to, 123.
fM'i/.e, to, ll-J.
SHI. lo. W2. (ftt retail) KW
Send, Icj, 114, V£t.
Servant, liiriag, iTi.
Sew, to, 127.
Sliukiti);, verbs of, 11(1.
Sliave. tr>, 1()8.
SliellHsh, kiiKi^, :i^.

S(irrv. tr. Ih'. 14:..
S.HV, |i>, i:!t>.
S|.eiik. t.i, 134.
S|«'akiin', verl*,
S|H>nci, 111, 17tl.
Sjiin, i„, L1).i.
Split, t... lis.

Slacker, t", ln;(.
StiHid up, til. 157,
StPiil. Ii., 14,1, !«.■>
Stir. III. l.S.'>.

StumLiie, t", 1117.
Suffer, t... i(v5.
S(ii,-kie. t.

(tint; and r

Tuhlewarc, 28, 2!l
Talk, til, l.'H.
Talk to, lo, 1(15.
Takf. ti., 114, Ki-J
Takfuiit, lo, Ul).
Tji.-.k-, to, 1L*'{.

TeiU'Ii, to,

, 145-

Tear, lo.

117.

Teiir.low.

ll!l.

Tell, to, 1.

;I4.

Tempt. 10

1 174,

Tliink.U.

liV

Tl.irslv. t

r.'N.

Threaleii,

to, 14:i.

Til row aw

■ay, t

0, i:ki.

Tlirow tlo

wn, 1

•A>, VM.

Tl.r,.Hi.,«

v^rl

Toilet, the; (dressing) 2
Tools, li8t of, 42.
Touch, to, 123, 124.
Trails, roads, et<'., 4.*).
Traiij^late, to, 141.
Translations, 244-24().
Transfer, to, 141 ,
Travel to, 140, 195, 208.
Traveling, 22.
Trees, plants, etc., 5:^.
Trench, to make a, 151.
Turn back, to, 175.
Uncover, to, 142.
Untie, to, 146.
Use, to, 114.
Utensils, cooking, 40.
Utensils, list of, 42.
Vegetables, kinds, 39, 4
Verifv, to, 125.
Wait'for, to, 120.
Walk, to, im.
Watch, to, 144.
Water, 29.

Water courses, 44, 45.
Wearing, verbs of, 125.
Weatlicr, conditions oli,
Wcci>, to, 139.
Weigh, to, 119.
Weight^<, measures, mo
Win, to, 176.
Wish, to, 169, (not to m
AVords, miscellaneous, :
Wound, to, 151.
Write, to, 171, 172.
Writing materials, 43, -J
Yes, 99.

Ahn/, i:;i.

Ah if, 16S.

Aln,,h, ILM.

Atn/(ii/a^ 120.

Ani','^ 1()2.

Asi'ii, 147.

A '!('(, 145.

AiKllJ, \{\{\.

A;iaif, 175.

Jidfu'i ( indl'fthii ), 5s.

Baro, 125.

Biuiiit, 121.

Bin'i, 1S5.

B"/nrj, 200.

JiUti [mdhiid), 5S.

V (onlv retidncd in \v<r

fhtan, 1.S3.

Dnfini) ( iiurral(<ni), 95.

Jhihl 114, 116.

D'fini {indnim'' ), 5S.

Dum'd, 144.

Iht'ia [magdaraiid), 69.

D'lwjiih 123, 146.